Microsmart GEODTU Eng 7

GEOCLIMA
CHILLER CONTROL WITH TURBOCOR COMPRESSORS

S10 BOARD
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SW: GEODTU16
Ref:SP820GEO.DOC
First Issue: 23.02.10 MB
Revision 19 of 18.10.13 MB
INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION 9
1.1 CHANGES FROM MICROSMART II 10
2. RELATED DOCUMENTS 10
3. HARDWARE 11

3.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE 11
3.2 BOARD DESCRIPTION 13
3.2.1 S10 BOARD 13
3.2.2 USER INTERFACE BOARDS 15
3.3 CONNECTION 16
3.3.1 I/O CHANNELS 16
3.3.1.1 DIGITAL INPUT 17
3.3.1.2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 19
3.3.1.3 ANALOG INPUT 22
3.3.1.4 ANALOG OUTPUT 26
3.3.2 BOARDS SUMMARY 28
3.3.2.1 S10 BOARD SUMMARY 28
3.3.2.1.1 S10 - DIGITAL INPUT 28
3.3.2.1.2 S10 - DIGITAL OUTPUT 29
3.3.2.1.3 S10 - ANALOG INPUT 30
3.3.2.1.4 S10 - ANALOG OUTPUT 31
3.3.2.1.5 S10 - LEDs DESCRIPTION 31
3.3.2.2 OB1ZAM BOARD SUMMARY 32
3.3.2.2.1 OB1ZAM - DIGITAL INPUT 32
3.3.2.2.2 OB1ZAM - DIGITAL OUTPUT 32
3.3.2.2.3 OB1ZAM - ANALOG INPUT 32
3.3.2.2.4 OB1ZAM - ANALOG OUTPUT 32
3.3.2.3 OB1KEN BOARD SUMMARY 33
1/334
Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.3.1 OB1KEN - DIGITAL INPUT 33

3.3.2.3.2 OB1KEN - DIGITAL OUTPUT 33
3.3.2.3.3 OB1KEN - ANALOG INPUT 33
3.3.2.3.4 OB1KEN - ANALOG OUTPUT 33
3.3.2.4 SB6 BOARD SUMMARY 34
3.3.2.4.1 SB6 - DIGITAL INPUT 34
3.3.2.4.2 SB6 - DIGITAL OUTPUT 35
3.3.2.4.3 SB6 - ANALOG INPUT 36
3.3.2.4.4 SB6 - ANALOG OUTPUT 36
4. INSTALLING SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 37

4.1 ADDRESS BOARD CONFIGURATION 37
4.2 ANALOG CHANNELS CONFIGURATION (S10) 38
4.3 USER INTERFACE SELECTION 39
4.4 EEV BOARD CONNECTION 40
4.4.1 EEV BOARD CONNECTION BY SERIAL LINE 40
4.4.2 EEV BOARD CONNECTION BY ANALOG LINE 41
4.5 TURBOCOR CONNECTION 42
4.6 MOUNTING INSTRUCTION 43
5. SOFTWARE 44

5.1 OPERATIONS 44
5.1.1 CONFIGURATION 44
5.1.2 MACHINE STARTUP 44
5.1.3 MACHINE STARTING 44
5.1.4 MACHINE SHUT-DOWN 44
5.1.5 ONLY PUMPS MODE 45
5.1.6 EXTERNAL ENABLE 45
5.1.7 EMERGENCY MODE 46
5.1.8 SOFTWARE FILTER ON ANALOG INPUT 46
5.1.9 TIME BLOCK SCHEDULING 46
5.2 MACHINE CONTROLS 47
5.2.1 UNIT CAPACITY CONTROL 47
5.2.1.1 CONTROLLER details 47
5.2.1.1.1 LOCAL TEMPERATURE Control 48
5.2.1.1.2 REMOTE CONTROL 54
5.2.1.1.3 OPEN LOOP CONTROL 55
5.2.1.2 ACTUATOR details 56
5.2.1.2.1 Standard Actuator 57
5.2.1.2.2 Parallel Actuator 60
5.2.1.2.3 True Parallel Actuator 63
5.2.1.2.4 Hybrid Actuator 65
5.2.1.3 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS FOR UNIT CAPACITY LIMITATION 69
5.2.1.3.1 Upper demand limit on temperature control 69
5.2.1.3.2 Forcing compressors OFF function 70
5.2.1.3.3 Forcing compressors OFF for Low RWT 70
5.2.1.3.4 Pull Down control 71
5.2.1.3.5 Antifreeze Limitation 72
5.2.1.3.6 High RWT Limitation 73
5.2.1.3.7 Low RWT Limitation – Cooling mode 73
5.2.1.3.8 Low RWT Limitation – Heating mode 74
5.2.2 HEATING MODE MANAGEMENT 75
5.2.2.1 Heat / Cool mode selection 75
5.2.2.2 Temperature Control in Heat mode 75
5.2.2.3 Heat Pump Mode 76
5.2.2.3.1 Fan control in Heat Pump mode 77
All information contained in this document is property of Project

Engineering S.r.l. and can't be disclosed without written authorization. 2/334
Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2.3.2 EEV control in Heat Pump mode 77

5.2.2.3.3 Defrosting procedure in Heat Pump mode 78
5.2.2.4 Heat Recovery Mode 78
5.2.2.4.1 Heat Recovery – Heating Priority 78
5.2.2.4.2 Heat Recovery – Cooling Priority 80
5.2.2.5 Manage an ST probe for each compressor 81
5.2.2.6 EEV Algorithm selection in Heating mode 82
5.2.3 SPLIT UNIT 83
5.2.3.1 Split – Cp Control by Analog Input 84
5.2.3.2 Split – Cp Control by Suction Pressure 85
5.2.3.3 Split – Cooling demand by Analog Input 86
5.2.3.4 Split – Cooling demand by Split Controlled Temperature (SCT) 86
5.2.4 FREE COOLING CONTROL 87
5.2.4.1 Free Cooling standard 87
5.2.4.1.1 Free Cooling activation 87
5.2.4.1.2 Free Cooling Valve management 88
5.2.4.1.3 Fans management in Free Cooling 89
5.2.4.1.4 Forcing Compressors OFF in Free Cooling 89
5.2.4.2 Free Cooling with Dry Cooler 90
5.2.4.2.1 Chiller mode 90
5.2.4.2.2 Free Cooling mode 91
5.2.4.3 Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps (LPA) 92
5.2.4.3.1 Free Cooling activaction/deactivaction (LPA) 94
5.2.4.3.2 LPA control logic 97
5.2.5 PUMPS MANAGEMENT 104
5.2.5.1 INTERNAL PUMPS 104
5.2.5.1.1 PUMPS control 104
5.2.5.1.2 Pumps Manual Control 105
5.2.5.1.3 Forcing Pumps On for Anti-freeze Limitation 105
5.2.5.1.4 Internal Pump Controlled By Inverter 107
5.2.5.2 EXTERNAL PUMPS 108
5.2.5.2.1 External Pump Controlled By Inverter 108
5.2.6 EVAPORATORS CONTROLS 109
5.2.6.1 TWO BARRELS management 109
5.2.6.2 EVAPORATORS monitoring 110
5.2.6.2.1 Evaporator Water Pressure 110
5.2.6.2.2 Evaporators Water Flow Rate 110
5.2.6.3 FLOODED EVAPORATOR management 111
5.2.7 CONDENSER CONTROLS 112
5.2.7.1 CONDENSER monitoring 112
5.2.7.1.1 Condenser Temperatures visualization 112
5.2.7.1.2 Condenser Water Pressures 112
5.2.7.1.3 Condenser Water Flow Rate 113
5.2.7.2 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER management 113
5.2.7.3 EVAP SYSTEM control 115
5.2.7.3.1 Evap System Sprayer control 116
5.2.7.3.2 Evap System Motor control 116
5.2.8 PULSED HOT GAS BYPASS SOLENOIDS 117
5.2.9 COOLER HEATER WRAPPED MANAGEMENT 117
5.2.10 UNITS LEAD LAG 118
5.2.10.1 Wiring diagram table 119
5.2.10.2 Schematic interconnection 120
5.2.10.3 Notes for the troubleshooting 120
5.2.11 POWER LINE ANALYZER MANAGEMENT 122
5.2.11.1 PLA setup procedure 124
5.2.12 UNIT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 125
5.2.12.1 COP evaluation 125

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.12.2 COOLING CAPACITY evaluation 126

5.2.12.3 UNIT POWER CONSUMPTION evaluation 127
5.2.13 PROBES REDUNDANCY MANAGEMENT 128
5.2.14 WARNINGS INDICATION BY DIGITAL OUTPUT 128
5.2.15 AUXILIARY TRANSDUCERS MANAGEMENT 129
5.2.15.1 Liquid Level Transducer 129
5.2.15.2 Auxiliary Pressure Transducer 129
5.2.16 UNIT CHECK 130
5.3 COMPRESSOR CONTROLS 131
5.3.1 FUNCTIONS FOR COMPRESSORS CONTROL 131
5.3.1.1 Compressor Switch on procedure 131
5.3.1.2 Compressor Switch off procedure 131
5.3.1.3 Compressor Pump Down procedure 131
5.3.1.3.1 Multiple pump downs 132
5.3.1.4 Compressor switch on and off limitation 132
5.3.1.5 Lock compressor by digital input or dip switch or setup parameter 134
5.3.1.6 Maximum compressor capacity limitation 135
5.3.2 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS FOR COMPRESSORS CAPACITY LIMITATION 136
5.3.2.1 Adaptive control on Discharge Pressure 136
5.3.2.2 Adaptive control on Discharge Temperature 137
5.3.2.3 Low pressure limitation 138
5.3.2.4 Motor current limitation 139
5.3.2.5 Unit voltage limitation 140
5.3.2.6 Compressor switch off for maximum time without capacity decrease 141
5.3.2.7 Surge Speed Limitation 142
5.3.3 ECONOMIZER AND LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL 143
5.3.3.1 Economizer logic 143
5.3.3.2 Liquid Injection logic 144
5.3.3.3 Liquid Injection with Discharge Temperature logic 145
5.3.4 SUCTION HEATER CONTROL 145
5.3.5 EQUALIZATION SOLENOIDS CONTROL 146
5.3.6 LOAD BALANCE CONTROL 147
5.3.7 TURBOCOR FAST START MODE 149
5.4 CIRCUIT CONTROLS 150
5.4.1 FLUID SOLENOID CONTROL 150
5.4.2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE CONTROL 150
5.4.2.1 Ventilating circuits management 153
5.4.2.2 Fan Speed Optimization 153
5.4.2.2.1 Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 1 154
5.4.2.2.2 Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 2 155
5.4.2.3 Fan Speed Limitation 157
5.4.2.3.1 Fan speed limitation by time periods 157
5.4.2.3.2 Fan speed limitation by time periods and noise level sensor 159
5.4.2.4 Dynamic setpoint on DP control 162
5.4.2.5 FANS manual control 163
5.4.3 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL 164
5.4.3.1 EEV Board selection 164
5.4.3.2 EEV management 165
5.4.3.3 EEV Algorithm selection 166
5.4.3.3.1 EEV “Like PID” based on Suction Superheat 167
5.4.3.3.2 EEV “Like PID” based on Evaporator Liquid Level 168
5.4.3.3.3 EEV “Like PID” based on Linear Control 168
5.4.3.3.4 EEV “Like PID” based on Discharge Superheat 169
5.4.3.3.5 EEV “Like PID” based on Condenser Liquid Level 170
5.4.3.4 MOP management 171
5.4.3.5 EEV minimum and maximum opening limitation 171
5.4.3.6 EEV manual control 172

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.7 EEV extra opening 172

5.4.3.8 EEV extra closing 173
5.4.3.9 Second EEV valve in Heat Pump mode 174
5.4.3.10 Second ELL probe in first circuit 174
5.4.4 PARALLEL COMPRESSORS MANAGEMENT 175
5.4.4.1 Compressors in parallel on 1 circuit 175
5.4.4.2 Compressors in parallel on 2 circuits 176
5.4.5 LPA CONTROL 176
5.4.6 EVAP SYSTEM SPRAYER CONTROL 176
5.4.7 SUBCOOLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE MONITORING 177
5.5 ALARMS 178
5.5.1 MACHINE ALARMS 178
5.5.1.1 Probes Alarm (System) 178
5.5.1.1.1 LWT Probe alarm 178
5.5.1.1.2 RWT Probe alarm 178
5.5.1.1.3 EV1T / EV2T Probes alarm 178
5.5.1.1.4 Remote Setpoint Probe alarm 179
5.5.1.1.5 TAE Probe alarm 179
5.5.1.1.6 TFC Probe alarm 179
5.5.1.1.7 IDT Probe alarm 179
5.5.1.1.8 ODT Probe alarm 179
5.5.1.1.9 OET Probe alarm 179
5.5.1.1.10 TA_COR Probe alarm 180
5.5.1.1.11 AI_COR Probe alarm 180
5.5.1.1.12 OCT / ICT Probes alarm 180
5.5.1.1.13 TA Probe alarm 180
5.5.1.1.14 ULIM Probe alarm 180
5.5.1.1.15 RH Probe alarm 180
5.5.1.1.16 EXTC Probe alarm 181
5.5.1.1.17 SCT Probe alarm 181
5.5.1.1.18 LWT2 Probe alarm 181
5.5.1.1.19 RWT2 Probe alarm 181
5.5.1.1.20 NL Probe alarm 181
5.5.1.1.21 LLT Probe alarm 182
5.5.1.1.22 APT Probe alarm 182
5.5.1.2 Anti-Freeze alarm 182
5.5.1.3 Temperature warning 182
5.5.1.4 High RWT alarm 182
5.5.1.5 SIM not ready alarm 183
5.5.1.6 GSM low signal level alarm 183
5.5.1.7 Machine Fatal Error alarm 183
5.5.1.8 Serial communication with Remote Controller 184
5.5.1.9 High RWT warning 184
5.5.1.10 PUMPS alarms 184
5.5.1.10.1 Pumps magneto-thermal breaker 184
5.5.1.11 EVAPORATOR alarms 185
5.5.1.11.1 Flow Switch Alarm 185
5.5.1.11.2 High Evaporators Drop alarm 185
5.5.1.11.3 Low Evaporators Drop alarm 185
5.5.1.11.4 High Evaporators Drop warning 186
5.5.1.11.5 Low Evaporators Drop warning 186
5.5.1.12 CONDENSER alarms 187
5.5.1.12.1 Water Level in Evap. Condenser 187
5.5.1.12.2 Adiabatic Pump breaker 187
5.5.1.12.3 Evap. Condenser Heaters protection 187
5.5.1.12.4 High Condenser Drop alarm 187
5.5.1.12.5 Low Condenser Drop alarm 188

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.12.6 High Condenser Drop warning 188

5.5.1.12.7 Low Condenser Drop warning 189
5.5.1.13 PLA alarms 189
5.5.1.13.1 Power Line Analyzer Serial communication alarm 189
5.5.1.13.2 Over voltage alarm 189
5.5.1.13.3 Under voltage alarm 190
5.5.1.13.4 Phase missing/wrong alarm 190
5.5.1.14 UNIT CHECK alarms 191
5.5.1.14.1 Commissioning need #1 warning 191
5.5.1.14.4 Checking need #1 warning 191
5.5.1.14.7 Maintenance need #1 warning 192
5.5.2 COMPRESSOR ALARMS 193
5.5.2.1 Compressor Magneto-Thermal Breaker 193
5.5.2.2 High Pressure alarm 193
5.5.2.3 Aux alarm 193
5.5.2.4 Suction Pressure alarm 193
5.5.2.5 Disharge Pressure alarm 194
5.5.2.6 High Motor Current alarm 194
5.5.2.7 Anti-Freeze Evaporator alarm 194
5.5.2.8 Compressor Pump Down alarm 194
5.5.2.9 Compressor Serial Communication alarm 194
5.5.2.10 Turbocor alarms 195
5.5.2.10.1 Turbocor Serial communication alarm 195
5.5.2.10.2 Turbocor Faults 195
5.5.2.10.3 Turbocor Warnings 196
5.5.2.10.4 Turbocor Fault Status alarm 196
5.5.2.10.5 Turbocor Bearing/Motor alarm 196
5.5.2.11 Expansion Boards Serial Communication alarm 197
5.5.2.12 Probes Alarm (Cp) 197
5.5.2.12.1 EXT_DEM Probe alarm 197
5.5.3 CIRCUIT ALARMS 197
5.5.3.1 Probes Alarm (Circuit) 197
5.5.3.1.1 ST Probe alarm 197
5.5.3.1.2 LPI Probe alarm 198
5.5.3.1.3 LPO Probe alarm 198
5.5.3.1.4 ST2 Probe alarm 198
5.5.3.1.5 SLT Probe alarm 198
5.5.3.2 Suction Temperature alarm 198
5.5.3.3 Fan Protection alarm 199
5.5.3.4 EEV alarms 199
5.5.3.4.1 EEV Board Serial communication alarm 199
5.5.3.4.2 EEV Winding alarm 199
5.5.3.4.3 EEV Board battery level 199
5.5.3.4.4 EEV Board battery to change 199
5.5.3.4.5 EEV In Oscillation Warning 200
5.5.3.4.6 High Superheat alarm 200
5.5.3.4.7 Low Superheat alarm 200
5.5.3.5 LPA alarms 200
5.5.3.5.1 Liquid Pump magneto-thermal breaker 200
5.5.3.6 EVAP SYSTEM alarms 201
5.5.3.6.1 Evap System Pump Fault 201

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.4 AUTO RESET OF SOME ALARMS 201

5.6 DATA DISPLAYED 202
5.6.1 STANDARD SCREENS 202
5.6.1.1 Data Transfer screen 202
5.6.1.2 Startup screen 202
5.6.1.3 Main screen 203
5.6.1.4 Second screen 204
5.6.1.5 Third screen 204
5.6.1.6 Units Lead Lag screen 205
5.6.1.7 Stepless Control Staging screen 205
5.6.1.8 Free Cooling screen 205
5.6.1.9 Pumps screen 206
5.6.1.10 Power Line Analyzer screen 206
5.6.1.11 Evaporators screens 207
5.6.1.12 Condenser screen 207
5.6.1.13 Evaporative Condenser screen 207
5.6.1.14 Evap System screen 208
5.6.1.15 Chiller Performance screen 208
5.6.1.16 Noise Performance screen 208
5.6.1.17 Fast Alarm History screen 209
5.6.1.18 First Compressors screens 210
5.6.1.18.1 Compressors status description table 211
5.6.1.19 Second Compressors screens 212
5.6.1.20 Third Compressors screens 212
5.6.1.21 Alarms screens 213
5.6.2 CUSTOM#1 SCREENS 216
5.6.2.1 Data Transfer screen – Custom#1 216
5.6.2.2 Startup screen – Custom#1 216
5.6.2.3 Main screen – Custom#1 216
5.6.2.4 First Compressors screens – Custom #1 217
5.6.2.5 Second Compressors screens – Custom#1 217
5.6.2.6 Fast Alarm History screen – Custom#1 217
5.6.2.7 Running times screen – Custom#1 217
5.6.2.8 Machine screen – Custom#1 218
5.6.2.9 Condenser screen – Custom#1 218
5.6.2.10 Evaporator screen – Custom#1 219
5.6.2.11 Alarms screens – Custom#1 219
5.7 SYSTEM SETUP 220
5.7.1 ENTERING THE MENU 220
5.7.1.1 Example of parameter change 221
5.7.1.2 Example of string parameter change 222
5.7.2 USER SETUP 224
5.7.3 MANUFACTURER SETUP 226
5.7.4 SERVICE SETUP 262
5.7.5 I/O SETUP 269
5.7.6 ALARM HISTORY 276
5.7.7 HW KEY MENU 277
5.7.8 TIMER SETUP 278
5.7.9 TIME AND DATE MENU 281
5.7.10 INTERFACE MENU 282
5.7.11 UNIT CHECK MENU 283
5.7.12 I/O CHANNELS MAPPING SETUP 286
5.7.13 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS ON THE SYSTEM SETUP 298
5.7.13.1 Hide not used setup parameters 298
5.8 MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY 300
5.8.1 USER INTERFACE 300
5.8.1.1 STANDARD screens 300

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.8.1.2 CUSTOM#1 screens 302

5.8.2 MENU DESCRIPTION 303
5.8.3 ALARMS 305
5.8.3.1 Alarm description 305
5.8.3.2 Alarm history code 307
5.8.4 USER SETUP 308
6. MONITORING SYSTEMS 310

6.1 LOCAL MONITORING 310
6.1.1 PEMS COMMUNICATION 310
6.1.1.1 ETH board connections 310
6.1.2 MODBUS COMMUNICATION 311
6.1.2.1 ModBus functions 311
6.1.2.2 ModBus error messages 312
6.1.2.2.1 Address field error message 312
6.1.2.2.2 Function field error message 312
6.1.2.2.3 Data field error message 312
6.1.2.2.4 Checksum field error message 312
6.1.2.3 Installing procedure 313
6.1.2.4 ModBus-Lon interfacing 314
6.1.2.5 ModBus-Profibus interfacing 314
6.2 REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM 315
6.2.1 MORE CHILLERS REMOTE MONITORING THROUGH GATEWAY 316
6.2.2 CHILLER DIRECT ERROR MESSAGES 316
6.2.3 MORE CHILLERS ERROR MESSAGES THROUGH GATEWAY 317
6.2.4 SMS PROTOCOL DETAILS 318
7. PROGRAMMING AND SOFTWARE UPDATE 319

7.1 PROGRAMMING BY HARDWARE KEY 319
7.1.1 PROGRAMMING MASTER BOARD BY HKEY 319
7.1.2 PROGRAMMING SLAVE BOARDS BY HKEY 323
7.2 PROGRAMMING BY PC 325
8. TESTING FEATURES 326

8.1 HARDWARE TEST MODE 326
8.2 SOFTWARE TEST MODE 327
9. DEBUGGING FEATURES 328

9.1 SMS PROTOCOL 328
10. REVISION HISTORY 329

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
1. INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document is to describe a custom designed of the Chiller control system based on
Turbocor compressors.
Following chiller configurations are managed:

 Kind of chiller configurations supported:
o Until 6 Turbocor compressors with the related refrigerating circuit
(i.e. cp not in parallel)
o Until 6 Turbocor compressors in parallel in 1 refrigerating circuit
o Until 6 Turbocor compressors in parallel in 2 refrigerating circuits
(Cp1,Cp3,Cp5 in first circuit and Cp2,Cp4,Cp6 in second circuit)
 Unit capacity controlled by remote (ZAMPMH) or local by LWT/RWT
 EEV control (OB1 driver connected via serial line)
 Condensing control (step control or stepless control by 0-10Vdc analog output)
 Evaporators flow rate control
 SMS protocol for remote assistance without Gateway
 PEMS protocol for OnBoard connection (local supervision) and external gateways
connection (available for remote monitoring, BACnet and MODBUS)
 COx / UG2 user interface
Notes
 TBD means To Be Determined and TBC means To Be Confirmed.
 Texts colors meaning:
Yellow highlighted To be defined /confirmed.

Grey highlighted Changes respect to the previous revision.
Red highlighted Not implemented in the sw.
Violet highlighted Parts present in this sw but not used.
Red colors characters Parts to be hide to the final custumer.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
1.1 CHANGES FROM MICROSMART II

This application software is based on a new hardware board, PE code S10 (instead of SB2) with
the following product enhancements:
1. full mechanical compatibility with MICROSMART II (same dimension, same mounting hole
distance and same connector position);
2. added 2 channels for compressor current measurement for standard XXX/5 TA current
transformers, with 0…5 A AC; an external current transformer not referred to Earth is
mandatory; this allows using more convenient standard current transformer instead of
expensive dedicated current transducers (4-20 mA or 0..5 VDC);
3. less heat production on DIGITAL INPUT circuit,
resistors for 230 Vac digital inputs have been redisigned and power dissipation is
approximately one half than previous on SB2;
4. serial interface to user board has been modified in order to reduce the possibility of damage
on varistors or driver due to wrong operation;
5. improuved serial communication architecture for IO expanding; COM 3 for EEV has been
separated by Modbus serial line that is now completely independent (HW and SW);
MODBUS serial was previously shared with EEV serial; MODBUS serial it is currently used
with Power analyzer, but it may be now also used to interface separate IO modules for IO
expanding;
6. added a IS port on MODBUS serial, to install an opto-isolated external adapter (IS-
ISOPRD);
7. new microprocessor, faster and with more memory than previous; internal flash memory for
program storage has been increased from 256 kBytes (on SB2) to 512 kBytes;
more space for programs, feature, and alarm messages;
8. enhanced power suppliers with one switching channel added on +24 Vdc and +5Vdc
(instead of linear technology); switching technology grants lower power consumption, heat
dissipation and minimized PCB space; moreover, power supply for +12 Vdc has been
removed for space reduction, and relays on S10 are supplied with 24 Vdc;
9. EEPROM for setup storage has been increased from 2 kBytes to 8 kBytes; more setup if
needed and more alarm history available (TBD);
10. internal flash available as option for software remote upgrading and/or data storage for
alarms and trends (TBD);
11. as an option microprocessor family has a compatible version that support CAN
communication (using an optionally electronic board);
12. compatibility with the new PING! gateway that allows OnBoard connection via Ethernet, for
INTRANET or ETHERNET connection (refer to PING! documentation for details).
2. RELATED DOCUMENTS
 SHS10 (S10 hardware manual)
 SHSB6 (SB6 harware manual)
 SP640PE (OB1 technical specification)
 SP719ZAM (ZAMPMH technical specification)
 SP831PE (SB6 I/O Expansion board technical specification)
 SP864PE (ETH technical specific)
 SP874GEO (PEMS protocol for Ethernet connections)
 SP877GEO (System architecture using ETH board)
 TB001GEO (GEODTU: protocols and datapoints details)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3. HARDWARE
The proposed solution uses a custom hardware development for Mother/Compressor boards.
The advantage of this solution is that each board will completely manage up to two compressors
resulting in money saving in the 2, 4 or 6 compressors architectures.
In the odd compressors configurations, instead, a small overhead must be sustained since the
board is fully equipped.
The hardware will have the following characteristic:

 components UL approved;
 the components legends, polarity and pin #1 of IC are identifiable on silk screen on
PCB;
 QC check will be marked on each tested PCB;
 for EMI interference the controller is compliant to EN 61000-4-4 class 4 for I/O and
power supply, EN 55011 for conducted emission on power supply cable limit class B,
EN 61000-3-2 with limit class A for harmonic current distortion, EN 61000-3-3 for supply
fluctuation and flickers;
 built using SMD (Surface Mount Device) technology, which will allow to reduce the
dimensions of the new board compared to the current board;
 16-bit Renesas microprocessor with a 512Kb “flash” eprom memory;
 Flash memory can be programmed “on board”, through PC or Hardware Key; i.e.
there’s no need to replace the component it to upgrade the software.
 Real Time Clock on board
 There are 2 more serial port on board which can be used for EEV board feedback
(receiving signals from EEV board for a better management of events and alarms) and
for Power Line Analyzer.
3.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The system architecture is as follows:
 user interface “CO3/CO4” with LCD display.
 one master controller board with an user interface “CO3/CO4” for the first 2 compressors
connected via serial bus (RS485);
 one compressor board (slave) for each additional circuit/compressor pair, serially
(RS485 same as master – user connection) connected to the others;
 one EEV-board (slave) for each additional circuit pair, serially connected (RS485) to the
each S10 board;
 each Turbocor compressors pair, serially connected (RS485) to the each S10 board;
 one optional Power Line Analyzer (PLA), serially connected (RS485) to Mother board;
 until nine I/O Expansion boards (SB6 or others boards) connected to each S10 board via
serial bus (RS485), used to increase the number of I/O channels;
 ETH board (optional) can be connected HWKEY strip interface of Mother board (please
refer to SP877GEO).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
To BMS To PE Remote
Monitoring
System
Modem /
GSM Modem
Remote BACnet Project

One of the 3 system Display Panel Engineering
Gateway
Gateway
IS485
User C COM2 E
O E EEV Board (OB1)
Interface M V (PemsAddr=1,2)
1 Main Board
CP1-2 I/O Exp.Board#1
HWKEY COM3 (PemsAddr=3..11)
ETH
BOARD
I/O Exp.Board#9
(PemsAddr=3..11)
Panel PC
or CP1-TURBOCOR BMCC
(ModbusAddr=1)
PEMS
master
CP2-TURBOCOR BMCC
(ModbusAddr=2)
Power Line Analyzer

(ModbusAddr=3)
C Slave E
O E EEV Board (OB1)
M Board V (PemsAddr=1,2)
1 CP5-6
I/O Exp.Board#1
COM3 (PemsAddr=3..11)
I/O Exp.Board#9
(PemsAddr=3..11)
CP1-TURBOCOR BMCC
(ModbusAddr=1)
CP2-TURBOCOR BMCC
(ModbusAddr=2)
Chiller Unit

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.2 BOARD DESCRIPTION

3.2.1 S10 Board
Master board and slave compressors board:
 code: S10;
 dimensions mm. 291x137;
 Power supply: 24 Vac ±10% 50/60Hz, 20 VA protected by 5x20mm fuse 1.6AT;
 Microprocessor Renesas R5F3650MNFB;
 Temperature range 0÷70°C
 Relative Humidity: 90%.
 10 bit A/D converter on-board;
 18 DIG-OUT relays;
 4 ANALOG-OUT
 20 DIG-IN alarms 24 VAC;
 14 ANALOG-IN
 serial interface for User board / Slave board connection (485)
 serial interface option for Remote Monitoring System / micro programming (With 485 / 232
adapter)
 serial interface for EEV board connection (485)
 serial interface for Turbocors and Power line analyzer (485)
 serial interface for Hardware Key (SPI)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.2.2 User Interface Boards

 Code: CO4
 dimensions mm. 220x111;
 Temperature range 0÷60°C (extended temperature range LCD);
 3 digits LED 7 segments display for temperature;
 20x4 characters LCD back illuminated display for status and alarms;
 on-board 6 buttons keyboard:
SET: to enter in set mode and change the setup parameters values
UP: to scroll up or increase values
DOWN: to scroll down or decrease values
ESC: alarm reset or menu quit key;
ON/OFF: to start/stop the controller;
MENU: to access on the menu;
 3 on-board LEDs:
LOO: On Off;
LM: Setup menu active;
LA: Alarm condition
On/Off
Set Menu
GEOCLIMA
Th 01/01/03 12:00
LWT 46.2 RWT 48.3 °F
Esc
SP:40.0°F COOL: 75%
 code: CO3;
 dimensions 200x70 , "no case";
 Temperature range 0÷60°C (extended temperature range LCD);
 20x4 characters LCD back illuminated display for status and alarms;
 on-board 6 buttons keyboard:
SET: to enter in set mode and change the setup parameters values
UP: to scroll up or increase values
DOWN: to scroll down or decrease values
ESC: alarm reset or menu quit key;
ON/OFF: to start/stop the controller;
MENU: to access on the menu;
On/Off Set
GEOCLIMA
Th 01/01/03 12:00
LWT 46.2 RWT 48.3 °F
SP:40.0°F COOL: 75%
Esc Menu

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3 CONNECTION
3.3.1 I/O CHANNELS
On the next paragraphs are reported all the I/O channels used by controller.
Each S10 board (Master or Slave) can control until 2 compressors/circuits:
 if a channel is refered to the first compressor in the board, then it is marked with (CP1);
 if a channel is refered to the first circuits in the board, then it is marked with (CIRC1)
 if a channel is refered to the second compressor in the board, then it is marked with (CP2);
 if a channel is refered to the second circuits in the board, then it is marked with (CIRC2).
Two type of I/O channels are available:
 I/O dynamic channels:
I/O “logic” channels can be dynamically mapped by related “Mapping parameters” in the I/O
“physical” channels of following boards:
o S10 boards (internal channels)
o OB1 boards (EEV board – EXP#10 board)
o I/O Expansion Boards (EXP#1..9 boards)
 I/O static channels:
the I/O “logic” channels are statically mapped (i.e. no mapping parameters are available) in
the I/O “physical” channels of following boards:
o S10 boards (internal channels)
o OB1 boards (EEV board – EXP#10 board)
o Turbocors BMCC (BMCC-DTU#1,2)
o Power Line Analizer (PLA).
The configuration of each I/O Expansion Boards (EXP#1..10 board) is made with the related setup
parameters described at par. 5.7.12.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.1.1 DIGITAL INPUT

Following table resume all the digital inputs used by controller.
The status of a digital input is described with following notation:
OFF= VAC input not-energized or free-contact input open;
ON= VAC input energized or free-contact input closed.
LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

MNEM Description Board Index Mapping Notes
default default parameter
TUR1_AL Turbocor Fault Status alarm (CP1) S10 Digin1 DI01
(this input must to be connected to digital output
“STATUS” in Turbocor I/O board, using an auxiliary
relay)
TUR2_AL Turbocor Fault Status alarm (CP2) S10 Digin6 DI02
(this input must to be connected to digital output
“STATUS” in Turbocor I/O board, using an auxiliary
relay)
CB1 MT Circuit Breaker (CP1) S10 Digin2 DI03
CB2 MT Circuit Breaker (CP1) S10 Digin7 DI04
LPU1_AL Liquid Pump Circuit breaker (CIRC1) S10 Digin2 DI05
(used if Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is enabled
[ML01=YES])
LPU2_AL Liquid Pump Circuit breaker (CIRC2) S10 Digin7 DI06
[ML01=YES])
SETP_DP_SEL Selection of the set point for Discharge S10 Digin3 DI22
Pressure control:
- Set#1=MD03 is used if ON
- Set#2=MD04 is used if OFF
(used only in mother board)
HP1 High Pressure Switch (CP1) S10 Digin4 DI07
HP2 High Pressure Switch (CP2) S10 Digin9 DI08
FP1 Fan Protection Warning (CIRC1) S10 Digin5 DI09
FP2 Fan Protection Warning (CIRC2) S10 Digin10 DI10
LWL_EC Low Water Level on Evap.Condenser S10 Digin8 DI25
(used only in master board when Evaporative
Condenser is used (MN01=1))
FL Flow Switch S10 Digin11 DI17
(used only in master board)
EXEN External Enable S10 Digin12 DI18
EMERGENCY Emergency Mode Enable: S10 Digin13 DI19
- Emergency mode enabled if ON
- Emergency mode disabled if OFF
(used only in master board when MT05<100)
HC_SEL Mode Selection in Heat Pump Management: S10 Digin13 DI20
- COOL if OFF
- HEAT if ON
(used only in master board when MH01>0)
SLAVE_UNIT_ Slave unit alarm status: S10 Digin13 DI21
STS - alarm active if OFF
(used only in master board of master unit (i.e.
MM14>0) when MM11=3).
CP1_LOCK External Lock CP1: S10 Digin14 DI11
- If MC22=1 then Cp locked if OFF;
- If MC22=2 then Cp locked if ON;
(used only when MC22>0)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

CP2_LOCK External Lock CP2: S10 Digin15 DI12
- If MC22=1 then Cp locked if OFF;
- If MC22=2 then Cp locked if ON;
SETP_SEL Setpoint selection for temp. control S10 Digin16 DI23
(used only in mother board when MT07=1,2,4,5; for
the logic see par.5.2.1.1.1.2)
FC_SEL Selection Chiller/Free Cooling mode in Dry S10 Digin16 DI24
Cooler:
- CHILLER mode if OFF,
- FREE COOL mode if ON
(used only in mother board if MF11>0 and MF01>0)
P1_CB Pump 1 Circuit breaker S10 Digin17 DI15
(used only in mother board when MP01>0)
P2_CB Pump 2 Circuit breaker S10 Digin18 DI16
(used only in mother board when MP01=2,3,5,6,7,8)
AUX1_AL Auxiliary alarm by digital input (CP1) S10 Digin19 DI13
(used only when MC37<>0)
AUX2_AL Auxiliary alarm by digital input (CP2) S10 Digin20 DI14
(used only when MC37<>0)
APU_CB Adiabatic Pump Circuit breaker S10 Digin19 DI26
HEA_PROT Heaters protection on Evap. Condenser S10 Digin20 DI27
ES_PU_FLT1 Evap. System Pump Fault (CIRC1) EXP#1 Digin1 DI28
(used only when Evap. System control is enabled with
MA01=1)
ES_PU_FLT2 Evap. System Pump Fault (CIRC2) EXP#1 Digin2 DI29
MA01=1)
ULIM_EN Upper Demand Limit Enable: S10 Digin13 DI30
- Enabled if ON
- Disabled if OFF
(used only in master board when MT38=2)
MAX2_FAN Second max fan speed enable - - DI31
- Enabled if ON
- Disabled if OFF
(used only in master board when MD66<101)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.1.2 DIGITAL OUTPUT

Following table resume all the digital outputs used by controller.

CP1 Power Supply Contactor (CP1) S10 Digout1 DO01
CP2 Power Supply Contactor (CP2) S10 Digout4 DO02
SOL1 Refrigerating fluid solenoid valve (CIRC1) S10 Digout2 DO03
(used when MR23=YES)
SOL2 Refrigerating fluid solenoid valve (CIRC2) S10 Digout5 DO04
(used when MR23=YES)
SUCT_HEA1 Suction Heater (CP1) S10 Digout2 DO05
(used when MC45>0)
SUCT_HEA2 Suction Heater (CP2) S10 Digout5 DO06
(used when MC45>0)
BPS1 Bypass Solenoid for Free Cooling (CIRC1) S10 Digout2 DO07
[ML01=YES])
BPS2 Bypass Solenoid for Free Cooling (CIRC2) S10 Digout5 DO08
[ML01=YES])
APU_EC Adiabatic Pump on Evap. Condenser S10 Digout3 DO09
HEA_EC Heaters on Evap. Condenser S10 Digout6 DO10
EQ_SOL1 Equalization Solenoid (CP1) S10 Digout3 DO11
(used when MC42>0)
EQ_SOL2 Equalization Solenoid (CP2) S10 Digout6 DO12
(used when MC42>0)
HGBS Pulsed Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid S10 Digout7 DO13
(used when MM11=1)
CHW Cooler Heater Wrapped S10 Digout7 DO14
(used only in Master Board when MM11=2)
SLAVE_UNIT_ Slave Unit enable S10 Digout7 DO15
EN (used only in mother board of master unit (i.e
MM14>0) when MM11=3)
SLAVE_UNIT_ Slave Unit in alarm S10 Digout7 DO16
AL (used only in mother board of slave unit (i.e MM14=0)
when MM11=3).
HP_REV Reversing solenoid for Heat Pump S10 Digout7 DO17
management
(used only in mother board when MH01=1,2);
ALL General Alarm Remote indication (repeater) S10 Digout8 DO18
FAN1_1 Fan # 1 (CIRC1) S10 Digout9 DO19
(used if MD01>=2)
(used if MD01>=3)
(used if MD01>=4)
(used if MD01>=2)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(used if MD01>=3)
(used if MD01>=4)
LPU1 Liquid Pump for Free Cooling (CIRC1) S10 Digout10 DO27
[ML01=YES])
LPU2 Liquid Pump for Free Cooling (CIRC2) S10 Digout14 DO28
[ML01=YES])
ECO1 Economizer port (CP1) S10 Digout12 DO29
(used only when MC31=1..9)
ECO2 Economizer port (CP2) S10 Digout16 DO30
(used only when MC31=1..9)
LIE1 Liquid injection ECO port (CP1) S10 Digout12 DO31
- ECO logic (if MC31=1,3)
- ECO+SUCTION logic (if MC31=4,8)
- Disch.Temp logic (if MC31=9,10)
(used if only when MC31=1,3,4,8,9,10)
LIE2 Liquid injection ECO port (CP2) S10 Digout16 DO32
- ECO logic (if MC31=1,3)
- ECO+SUCTION logic (if MC31=4,8)
- Disch.Temp logic (if MC31=9,10)
(used if only when MC31=1,3,4,8,9,10)
LIS1 Liquid injection SUCTION port (CP1) S10 Digout12 DO33
- SUCTION logic
(used if only when MC31=2,3)
LIS2 Liquid injection SUCTION port (CP2) S10 Digout16 DO34
- SUCTION logic
(used if only when MC31=2,3)
CP1_FAULT Compressor Fault indication (CP1) S10 Digout11 DO35
[active when cp is locked for cp/circ alarm]
(used if only when MC31=7)
CP2_FAULT Compressor Fault indication (CP2) S10 Digout15 DO36
[active when cp is locked for cp/circ alarm]
(used if only when MC31=7)
PUMP1 First pump port S10 Digout11 DO37
(used in Master Board when MP01>0)
PUMP2 Second pump port S10 Digout15 DO38
(used in Master Board when MP01=2,3,5,6,7,8)
CP1_ALARM Compressor alarm and warning indication S10 Digout17 DO39
(CP1)
CP2_ALARM Compressor alarm and warning indication S10 Digout18 DO40
(CP2)
ES_SPR1 Evap. System Sprayer (CIRC1) EXP#1 Digout1 DO41
MA01>0)
ES_SPR2 Evap. System Sprayer (CIRC2) EXP#1 Digout2 DO42
MA01>0)
ES_MOT Evap. System Motor for cardboard batteries EXP#1 Digout3 DO43
insertion
(used only in Master Board when Evap. System control
is enabled with MA01>0)
LBI1 Load Balance Injection Solenoid (CP1) S10 Digout3 DO44
(used only when Load Balance control is enabled
(MC48>0))

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

LBI2 Load Balance Injection Solenoid (CP2) S10 Digout6 DO45
(MC48>0))
FC_STS Free Cooling status - - DO46
(used only when Free Cooling control is enabled
(MF01>0))
WARN Warnings indication - - DO47
(used only in Master Board when Warnings indication
by digital output is enabled (MM26=YES))
HI_RWT_WAR High RWT warning indication - - DO48
N (used only in Master Board when High RWT Warning
is enabled [MT40>0])

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.1.3 ANALOG INPUT

Following table resume all the analog inputs used by controller.

RWT Returning Water Temp. (Inlet Temp.) S10 Anin7 AI01 Adim.
(used only in master board) (TIN) Channel
LWT Leaving Water Temp. (Outlet Temp.) S10 Anin8 AI02 Adim.
(used only in master board) (TOUT) Channel
ST1 Suction Temp. (CIRC1) S10 Anin10 AI03 Adim.
(ST1) Channel
Suction Temp. (CP1)
(used only when MH20=YES and MC02>10 and
machine working in HEATING mode (for more details
see par.5.2.2.5)
ST2 Suction Temp. (CIRC2) S10 Anin11 AI04 Adim.
(ST2) Channel
Suction Temp. (CP2)
(used only when MH20=YES and MC02>10 and
machine working in HEATING mode (for more details
see par.5.2.2.5)
Suction Temp. 2 (CIRC1) - Redundancy
Used when all the following conditions are satisfied
(AND logic):
- Probes redundancy is enabled [MM25=YES];
- only 1 circuit is used [MC01=1 or MC02=11,13,15,19])
IWP1 Inlet Water Press. in Evaporator 1 S10 Anin1 AI05 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MV03=YES and one or (S1) Channel
two barrels are used (MV01=0,1,2))
IWP2 Inlet Water Press. in Evaporator 2 OB1ZAM Anin3 AI06 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MV03=YES and two (V1) Channel
barrels are used [MV01=1,2])
OWP1 Outlet Water Press. in Evaporator 1 S10 Anin2 AI07 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MV03=YES and one or (S2) Channel
two barrels are used (MV01=0,1,2))
OWP2 Outlet Water Press. in Evaporator 2 OB1ZAM Anin4 AI08 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MV03=YES and two (V2) Channel
barrels are used [MV01=1,2])
EV1T Evaporator 1 Outlet Temp. OB1ZAM Anin1 AI09 Adim.
(used only in master board when two barrels system OB1KEN (T1) Channel
enabled [MV01=1,2])
EV2T Evaporator 2 Outlet Temp. OB1ZAM Anin2 AI10 Adim.
(used only in master board when two barrels system OB1KEN (T2) Channel
enabled [MV01=1,2])
LPO1 Liquid Pump Outlet Press. (CIRC1) S10 Anin3 AI11 Dim.
(used if Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is enabled (O1) Channel
[ML01=YES])
LPO2 Liquid Pump Outlet Press. (CIRC2) S10 Anin4 AI12 Dim.
(used if Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is enabled (O2) Channel
[ML01=YES])
LPI1 Liquid Pump Inlet Press. (CIRC1) S10 Anin5 AI13 Dim.
(used if Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is enabled (D1) Channel
[ML01=YES])
LPI2 Liquid Pump Inlet Press. (CIRC2) S10 Anin6 AI14 Dim.
(used if Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is enabled (D2) Channel
[ML01=YES])

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

TAE External Air Temp. S10 Anin9 AI15
(used in master board in one of following condition (OR (TAE)
logic):
- Free Cooling standard is enabled
[MF01>0 with ML01=NO and MF11=0];
- Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is enabled
[ML01=YES with MF01>0 and MF11=0];
- Evap System control is enabled [MA01>0]);
- Fan Speed Optimization is enabled [MD20>0]).
TFC Free Cooling Temp. S10 Aini12 AI16
(used in master board Free Cooling standard is (RH)
enabled [MF01>0 with ML01=NO and MF11=0])
IDT Inlet Dry Cooler Temp. S10 Anin9 AI17
(used only in master board when Dry Cooler is enabled (TAE)
(MF11>0))
ODT Outlet Dry Cooler Temp. S10 Aini12 AI18
(used only in master board when Dry Cooler is enabled (RH)
(MF11>0))
OET Outlet Evaporator Temp. S10 Anin9 AI19 Dim.
(used when Heat Pump management enabled on (TAE) Channel
water/water machine [MH01=2,3])
TA_COR Ambient Temp. for set point correction S10 Anin9 AI20 Dim.
function (TAE) Cahnnel
(used only in Master Board when MM10=2)
OCT Outlet Condenser Temp. S10 Anin9 AI21 Dim.
(used only in Master Board when MM10=4) (TAE) Channel
ICT Inlet Condenser Temp. S10 Aini12 AI22 Dim.
(used only in Master Board when MM10=4) (RH) Channel
TA Ambient Temperature used for: S10 Anin9 AI23 Dim.
- Evap.Condenser Heater control (TAE) Channel
- Forcing pumps on for antifreeze
limitation
(used only in Master Board when MM10=5,6)
REM_SP Remote set point S10 Aini12 AI24 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MT07>=3) (RH) Channel
AI_COR Analog Input for set point correction S10 Aini12 AI25 Adim.
(used only in Master Board when MM10=3) (RH) Channel
ULIM Upper demand limit value S10 Aini12 AI26 Adim.
(used only in Master Board when MT04=0) (RH) Channel
RH Relative Humidity EXP#1 Anin7 AI27 Adim.
(used only in Master Board when Evap. System control (P1) Channel
is enabled [MA01>0])
ELL1 Evaporator Liquid Level (CIRC1) OB1KEN Anin3 Fixed Dim.
(Used only when EEV is enabled through serial line EXP#10 (V1) Channel
[ME01=2] and Evaporator Liquid Level control is used
[ME02=3 or MH24=3])
Condenser Liquid Level (CIRC1)
(Used only when EEV is enabled through serial line
[ME01=2] and Condenser Liquid Level control is used
[ME02=6 or MH24=6])
ELL2 Evaporator Liquid Level (CIRC2) OB1KEN Anin4 Fixed Dim.
(Used only when EEV is enabled through serial line EXP#10 (V2) Channel
[ME01=2] and Evaporator Liquid Level control is used
[ME02=3 or MH24=3])
Condenser Liquid Level (CIRC2)
(Used only when EEV is enabled through serial line
[ME01=2] and Condenser Liquid Level control is used
[ME02=6 or MH24=6])

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Evaporator Liquid Level 2 (CIRC1) –
second sensor
(Used when all the following conditions are satisfied
(AND logic):
- Second Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level probe in
the first circuit [ME49=YES];
- only 1 circuit is used [MC01=1 or MC02=11,13,15,19];
- EEV is enabled through serial line [ME01=2];
- Evaporator Liquid Level control is used [ME02=3 or
MH24=3])
Condenser Liquid Level 2 (CIRC1) –
second sensor
(Used when all the following conditions are satisfied
(AND logic):
- Second Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level probe in
the first circuit [ME49=YES];
- only 1 circuit is used [MC01=1 or MC02=11,13,15,19];
- EEV is enabled through serial line [ME01=2];
- Condenser Liquid Level control is used [ME02=6 or
MH24=6])
EXT_DEM1 External Demand Capacity (CP1) S10 Anin3 AI28 Dim.
(Used only in Split Units with Cp control by Analog (O1) Channel
Input [MV01=4])
EXT_DEM2 External Demand Capacity (CP2) S10 Anin4 AI29 Dim.
(Used only in Split Units with Cp control by Analog (O2) Channel
Input [MV01=4])
EXTC External Cooling Demand S10 Anin3 AI30 Dim.
(Used only in Master Board for Split Units with Cooling (O1) Channel
demand by Analog Input [MV01=5])
SCT Split Controlled Temp. S10 Anin8 AI31 Dim.
(Used only in Master Board for Split Units with Cooling (TOUT) Channel
demand by Split Controlled Temp. [MV01=6])
RWT2 Returning Water Temp. 2 (Inlet Temp.) - S10 Aini12 AI32 Dim.
Redundancy (RH) Channel
(Used only in Master Board when all the following
conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
LWT2 Leaving Water Temp. 2 (Outlet Temp.) - S10 Anin9 AI33 Dim.
Redundancy (TAE) Channel
(Used only in Master Board when all the following
ICP Inlet Condenser Press. OB1ZAM Anin3 AI34 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MN06=YES) (V1) Channel
OCP Outlet Condenser Press. OB1ZAM Anin4 AI35 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MN06=YES) (V2) Channel
NL Noise Level - - AI36 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MD34=2) Channel
LLT Liquid Level Transducer - - AI37 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MM27=YES) Channel
SLT1 Subcooled Liquid Temp. (CIRC1) - - AI38 Dim.
(used only when Subcooled Liquid Temperature Channel
monitoring is enabled [MR24=YES])
SLT2 Subcooled Liquid Temp. (CIRC2) - - AI39 Dim.
(used only when Subcooled Liquid Temperature Channel
monitoring is enabled [MR24=YES])
APT Auxiliary Pressure Transducer - - AI40 Adim.
(used in Master Board when MM28=YES) Channel

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

SP1 Suction Press. (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
DP1 Discharge Press. (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
DT1 Discharge Temp. (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
SCR1 SCR Temp. (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
CAV1 Cavity Temp. (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
IVT1 Inverter Temp (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
CUR1 3 Phase Motor Current (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#1 channel
DEM_KW1 Actual Demand Power (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
[kW] DTU#1 channel
ACT_KW1 Actual Power (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
[kW] DTU#1 channel
SPD1 Actual Speed (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
[rpm] DTU#1 channel
MIN_SPD1 Estimated Minimum Speed (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(Surge speed) DTU#1 channel
MAX_SPD1 Estimated Maximum Speed (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(Choke speed) DTU#1 channel
IGV1 Inlet Guide Valve Opening (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(NOTE: this valve is controlled by Turbocor) DTU#1 channel
SP2 Suction Press. (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
DP2 Discharge Press. (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
DT2 Discharge Temp. (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
SCR2 SCR Temp. (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
CAV2 Cavity Temp. (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
IVT2 Inverter Temp (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
CUR2 3 Phase Motor Current (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
DTU#2 channel
DEM_KW2 Actual Demand Power (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
[kW] DTU#2 channel
ACT_KW2 Actual Power (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
[kW] DTU#2 channel
SPD2 Actual Speed (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
[rpm] DTU#2 channel
MIN_SPD2 Estimated Minimum Speed (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(Surge speed) DTU#2 channel
MAX_SPD2 Estimated Maximum Speed (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(Choke speed) DTU#2 channel
IGV2 Inlet Guide Valve Opening (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(NOTE: this valve is controlled by Turbocor) DTU#2 channel
V12 Unit Concatenate Voltage V12 (1) PLA Fixed Modbus
channel

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

V23 Unit Concatenate Voltage V23 PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
V31 Unit Concatenate Voltage V31 PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
Iun Unit Current PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
RST Line Sequence PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
HZ Line Frequency PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
FP Line Power Factor PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
PWR Unit Power Consumption PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
CONS Unit Energy Consumption PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
TL Locker Temperature PLA Fixed Modbus
(1) channel
Notes
1) This channels are available only when Power Line Analizer (PLA) is activated (see par. 5.2.11).
2) For more details on modbus channels of Turbocor compressor (DTU), see par.4.5
3.3.1.4 ANALOG OUTPUT

Following table resume all the analog outputs used by controller.

EXPV1 Electronic Expansion Valve control (CIRC1) OB1ZAM Anout1 AO01
(used if ME01>0) OB1KEN (Valve1)
EXPV2 Electronic Expansion Valve control (CIRC2) OB1ZAM Anout2 AO02
(used if ME01>0) OB1KEN (Valve2)
FSC1 Fan Speed Control (CIRC1) S10 Anout3 AO03
(used if MD02=YES)
FSC2 Fan Speed Control (CIRC2) S10 Anout4 AO04
(used if MD02=YES)
FCV Free Cooling Valve driver S10 Anout1 AO05
(used only in master board when Free Cooling is
enabled [MF01>0] and Free Cooling with Liquid
Pumps is disabled [ML01=NO]).
EPU External Pump controlled by Inverter S10 Anout2 AO06
(used in master board when MX01>0)
LBV1 Load Balance Valve (CP1) EXP#1 Anout1 AO07
[MC46>0])
LBV2 Load Balance Valve (CP2) EXP#1 Anout2 AO08
[MC46>0])
IPU Internal Pump controlled by Inverter S10 Anout2 AO09
(used in master board when MP07>0)
DEM1 Demand Capacity (CP1) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(2) DTU#1 channel
DEM2 Demand Capacity (CP2) BMCC- Fixed Modbus
(2) DTU#2 channel

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
1) For more S10 hardware details refer to the Hardware Specification document (SHS10).
2) For more details on modbus channels of Turbocor compressor (DTU), see par.4.5

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2 BOARDS SUMMARY

This paragraphs resume all the physical channels of the boards where some logical channels can
be dynamically mapped.
I/O logical channels can be dynamically mapped on the I/O physical channels of following boards:
- S10 boards (internal channels)
- OB1ZAM boards (EEV board)
- OB1KEN boards (EEV board)
- SB6 boards (generic I/O Expansion board)
3.3.2.1 S10 BOARD SUMMARY
3.3.2.1.1 S10 - DIGITAL INPUT

HW SW
Silk Logic Type Pin Channel Description
ID Index
A1 Din1 VAC X62-3 Digin1 Digital Input #1
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)
Input (1)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
HW SW
ID Index
AC Common X68-1
A1..A20
Notes
1) S10 digital inputs voltage range depending on the board and its functional revision. Please refer to the
Hardware Specification document (SHS10) of the used board for the correct voltage range.
3.3.2.1.2 S10 - DIGITAL OUTPUT

HW SW
ID (1)(2) Index
1O R1 NO X24-1 Digout1 Digital Output #1
1C Common X24-2
2C Common X25-2
3C Common X26-2
4C Common X27-2
5C Common X28-2
6C Common X29-2
7C Common X30-2
8NO R8 NO X23-1 Digout8 Digital Output #8
8C Common X23-2
8NC NC X23-4
C Common X31-1
R9..R12
C Common X33-1
R13..R16
17O 17C R17 NO X50-1 Digout17 Digital Output #17
Common X50-2
18O 18C R18 NO X51-1 Digout18 Digital Output #18
Common X51-2
Notes
1) NO = Normally Open.
2) NC = Normally Closed.
3) For more hardware details on S10 board please refer to the Hardware Specification document (SHS10).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.1.3 S10 - ANALOG INPUT
HW SW
ID (1)(2) Index
S1 ANI0 mA X49-1 (+) Anin1 Analog Input #1
X49-2 (-)
S2 ANI1 mA X44-1 (+) Anin2 Analog Input #2
X44-2 (-)
X44-3 (sh)
O1 ANI2 mA X45-1 (+) Anin3 Analog Input #3
X45-2 (-)
O2 ANI3 mA X40-1 (+) Anin4 Analog Input #4
X40-2 (-)
X40-3 (sh)
D1 ANI4 mA X47-1 (+) Anin5 Analog Input #5
X47-2 (-)
X47-3 (sh)
D2 ANI5 mA X42-1 (+) Anin6 Analog Input #6
X42-2 (-)
TIN ANI6 PTC X41-1 (+) Anin7 Analog Input #7
X41-2 (-)
X41-3 (sh)
TOUT ANI7 PTC X46-1 (+) Anin8 Analog Input #8
X46-2 (-)
X46-3 (sh)
TAE ANI8 PTC X69-1 (+) Anin9 Analog Input #9
X69-2 (-)
ST1 ANI9 PTC / X48-1 (+) Anin10 Analog Input #10
0-24Vdc X48-2 (-)
(1)
ST2 ANI10 PTC / X43-1 (+) Anin11 Analog Input #11
0-24Vdc X43-2 (-)
(1)
RH ANI11 PTC / X71-1 (+) Anin12 Analog Input #12
mA (2) X71-2 (-)
CP1 ANI12 0-5A X72-1 Anin13 Analog Input #13
X72-2
CP2 ANI13 0-5A X73-1 Anin14 Analog Input #14
X73-2
Notes
1) To configure this channel as PTC or 0-24Vdc see par.4.2.
2) To configure this channel as PTC or mA see par.4.2.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.1.4 S10 - ANALOG OUTPUT
HW SW
ID Index
AO1 + AO1 0-10Vdc X58-1 (+) Anout1 Analog Output #1
- X58-2 (-)
- X59-2 (-)
- X60-2 (-)
- X61-2 (-)
Notes
3.3.2.1.5 S10 - LEDs DESCRIPTION

Following table resume the control logic of LEDs on S10 board.
SW HW
MNEM Description Logic Silk
LED_RUN Running OFF: board not supplied or sw not running. H1
Led BLINK: sw running correctly
LED_COM1 COM1 communication OFF: no communication with COM1. H2
Led BLINK: communication with COM1 in act.
Notes
1) During HKEY programming (see par. 7.1) the leds blink is locked.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.2 OB1ZAM BOARD SUMMARY

Following board summary is referred to OB1ZAM board.
For more details see:
- Hardware specification: SHOB1
- Software specification: SP640PE
3.3.2.2.1 OB1ZAM - DIGITAL INPUT

HW SW
ID Index
AC AC Common X2A
A1 A1 Free- X2B Digin1 Digital Input #1

contact
A2 A2 Free- X2C Digin2 Digital Input #2
contact
Notes
1) OB1 digital inputs voltage range depending on the board and its functional revision. Please refer to the
Hardware Specification document (SHOB1) of the used board for the correct voltage range.
3.3.2.2.2 OB1ZAM - DIGITAL OUTPUT

Digital Outputs not available.
3.3.2.2.3 OB1ZAM - ANALOG INPUT

HW SW
ID Index
T1 T1 PTC X7-1 (A) Anin1 Analog Input #1
(1) X7-2 (B)
(1) X8-2 (B)
V1 V1 mA X5A (+18Vdc) Anin3 Analog Input #3
(1) X5B (Input)
X5C (Gnd)
V2 V2 mA X6A (+18Vdc) Anin4 Analog Input #4
(1) X6B (Input)
X6C (Gnd)
Notes
1) For more details please refer to the Hardware Specification document (SHOB1).
3.3.2.2.4 OB1ZAM - ANALOG OUTPUT

HW SW
ID Index
Anout1 Valve #1 control

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.3 OB1KEN BOARD SUMMARY

Following board summary is referred to OB1KEN board.
- Hardware specification: SHOB1
3.3.2.3.1 OB1KEN - DIGITAL INPUT

HW SW
ID Index
AC AC Common X2A
A1 A1 Free- X2B Digin1 Digital Input #1

contact
A2 A2 Free- X2C Digin2 Digital Input #2
contact
Notes
1) OB1 digital inputs voltage range depending on the board and its functional revision. Please refer to the
Hardware Specification document (SHOB1) of the used board for the correct voltage range.
3.3.2.3.2 OB1KEN - DIGITAL OUTPUT

Digital Outputs not available.
3.3.2.3.3 OB1KEN - ANALOG INPUT

HW SW
ID Index
(1) X7-2 (B)
(1) X8-2 (B)
V1 V1 0÷5 Vdc X5A (+5Vdc) Anin3 Analog Input #3
ratiometric X5B (Input)
(1) X5C (Gnd)
V2 V2 0÷5 Vdc X6A (+5Vdc) Anin4 Analog Input #4
ratiometric X6B (Input)
(1) X6C (Gnd)
Notes
2) For more details please refer to the Hardware Specification document (SHOB1).
3.3.2.3.4 OB1KEN - ANALOG OUTPUT

HW SW
ID Index

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.4 SB6 BOARD SUMMARY

Following board summary is referred to SB6 I/O Expansion Board.
SB6 PRD=6 (or later) with sw PE_1EX01.00 (or later) is required for the right communication in the
bus.
- Hardware specification: SHSB6
3.3.2.4.1 SB6 - DIGITAL INPUT
HW SW
ID Index
A1 Free- X8 pin 1 (+) Digin1 Digital Input #1
contact X8 pin 2 (-)
DI2
DI1
DI4
DI3
A9 VAC X9 pin 1 Digin9 Digital Input #9
Input (1) X9 pin 2
ACIN
A10 VAC X9 pin 3 Digin10 Digital Input #10
Input (1) X9 pin 4
DI6
DI5
T1 T1 Free- X4 pin 1 (+) Digin15 Digital Input #15
contact (2) X4 pin 2 (-) (Analog Input T1 configured as Free Contact)
Notes
1) SB6 digital inputs voltage range depending on the board and its functional revision. Please refer to the
Hardware Specification document (SHSB6) of the used board for the correct voltage range.
2) For more details as to configure this channel as Free-Contact, see SP831PE.doc.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.4.2 SB6 - DIGITAL OUTPUT
HW SW
ID Index
K1 NO (1) X32 pin 4 Digout1 Digital Output #1
DO1 Comm. X32 pin 2
K1-K2-K3
DO2 Comm. X26 pin 2
K4-K5-K6
DO3 Comm. X34 pin 2
K7-K8-K9
Comm. X35 pin 2
K10
DO4
Comm. X35 pin 4
K11
R12 NA K12 NO (1) X31 pin 2 Digout12 Digital Output #12
R12 C Comm. X31 pin 4
K12
K13
R14 NC NC (2) X30 pin 2
K14
K14
DO3 LO1 DC out X11 pin 1(+) Digout15 Digital Output #15
GND X11 pin 2 (-)
LO2 DC out X11 pin 3 (+) Digout16 Digital Output #16
GND X11 pin 4 (-)
Notes
1) NO = Normally Open
2) NC = Normally Close

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
3.3.2.4.3 SB6 - ANALOG INPUT
HW SW
ID Index
T1 T1 PTC / X4 pin 1 (+) Anin1 Analog Input #1
PT1000 X4 pin 2 (-)
(3)
PT1000 X4 pin 4 (-)
(3)
PT1000 (3) X4 pin 12 (-)
PT1000 (3) X4 pin 14 (-)
PT1000 (3) X4 pin 16 (-)
AN I/O2 T6 PTC / X17 pin 1 (+) Anin6 Analog Input #6
PT1000 X17 pin 3 (-)
(1) (3)
P5 mA X17 pin 1 (+) Anin11 Analog Input #11
(2) X17 pin 3 (-)
P1 P1 mA X4 pin 5 (+) Anin7 Analog Input #7
X4 pin 6 (-)
X4 pin 8 (-)
X4 pin 10 (-)
AN I/O1 P4 mA X13 pin 1 (+) Anin10 Analog Input #10
X13 pin 3 (-)
Notes
3) To use this channel as Temperature Sensor (PTC or PT1000), close jumpers X25, X27 in 1-2 position.
4) To use this channel as 4-20mA close jumpers X25, X27 in 2-3 position.
5) To configure this channel as PTC or PT1000 see SP831PE.doc..
6) To configure this channel as Free Contact see SP831PE.doc.
3.3.2.4.4 SB6 - ANALOG OUTPUT
HW SW
ID Index
AN I/O1 AO1 VDC X13 pin 2 (+) Anout1 Analog Output #1
X13 pin 4 (-)
AN I/O2 AO2 VDC X17 pin 2 (+) Anout2 Analog Output #2
X17 pin 4 (-)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
4. INSTALLING SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.1 Address Board configuration

Dip switches configuration
The different working mode of the board depends on the position of dip switches (Ref. S1):
Address Dip#1 Dip#2 Dip#3 Dip#4 Description

0 Off Off Off Off Software Test mode
(see par.8.2)
1 On Off Off Off Master Board
(Cp1&2 control)
2 Off On Off Off Slave#1 Board
(Cp3&4 control)
3 On On Off Off Slave#2 Board
(Cp5&6 control)
… - - - - Not used
14 On On On Off Hardware Test mode
(see par.8.1)
15 On On On On Software Test mode
(see par.8.2)
Jumpers setting
 User board CO4 should have line terminated (i.e. TU1 and TD1 jumpers closed, TL1 open);
 Last board (Master-Board in 2 compressor units, Slave#1-Board in 4 compressor units,
Slave#2-Board in 6 compressor units and Slave#3-Board in 8 compressor units) should
have line terminated (i.e. TU1 and TD1 jumpers closed);
 All other boards should have jumpers TU1, TD1 and TL1 open.
WARNING
The restart of the board is required to change effectively the working mode, after that dipswitch
configuration is changed.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
4.2 Analog Channels configuration (S10)

Following table resume the HW/SW settings required to configure some analog channels of S10 in
the different ways. Jumpers configuration is the same on Master and Slave boards.
Analog Channel HW settings SW settings

Channel Type (Master or Slave boards) BOARD#1 BOARD#2 BOARD#3
(Master) (Slave#1) (Slave#2)
4-20mA JU19: 1-2 position B101=0 B201=0 B301=0
S1
Free Contact JU19: 2-3 position B101=1 B201=1 B301=1
D1
O1
PTC JU11,JU13,JU15: 1-2 position B104=0 B204=0 B304=0
ST1
0-24Vdc JU11,JU13,JU15: 2-3 position B104=1 B204=1 B304=1
S2
D2
O2
PTC JU5,JU6,JU7,JU8: 1-2 position B108=0 B208=0 B308=0
ST2
0-24Vdc JU5,JU6,JU7,JU8: 2-3 position B108=1 B208=1 B308=1
PTC JU14,JU16,JU17: 1-2 position B109=0 B209=0 B309=0
RH
4-20mA JU14,JU16,JU17: 2-3 position B109=1 B209=1 B309=1
Notes
When a channel is configured as Free Contact then the probe alarm is always bypassed.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
4.3 User Interface Selection

Dip switches configuration
Dip switch #1 (ref. S2) must be configured in base to the model of User Interface installed:
User Dip switch #1 (ref. S2) position

Interface
CO1 Off
CO4
UG3
UG4
CO2 On
CO3
Jumpers setting
The right working of User Interface required the following settings on S10 boards:
Jumper Master Slave Description

Name board boards
JU1 Closed Open Activation of User Interface power supply
TU1, Closed if a Closed in the Serial Line termination
TD1 Slave Board is last board
present connected to
the bus
Open if a Open in all
Slave Board is others Slave
not present Board
TL1 Open Open

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
4.4 EEV Board connection

4.4.1 EEV Board connection by serial line
To connect EEV board by serial line following steps are needed:
 Connections:
o EEV (X54) connector of S10 board connect to X9 or X10 connector of EEV board by
telephone cable;
 EEV board (OB1) jumpers setting:
o TD1, TU1: close
o TL1. open
o JU1: open
 EEV board (OB1) setup setting:
o Valve#1 address= 1
o Valve#2 address= 2
 EEV board (OB1) dip switches setting (Ref. SW1):
o SW1= On-Off-On-Off
 S10 hardware setting:
o TD2, TU2: close
o TL2. open
 S10 setup settings:
o ME01=2 to enabled serial communication
o ME20...ME27 must be set according to the used valve:
Parameter Manufacturer nr. Step max speed Initializatio

value (step / sec.) n step
0 SPORLAN 1 6386 200 7500
(SEI50 / SEH100 / SEH175)
1 SPORLAN 2 3193 200 3750
(SDR-3)
2 SPORLAN 3 1596 200 1875
(SEI-6 / SEI-8,5 / SEI-11)
3 ALCO EX7 1600 330 1600
4 ALCO EX8 2600 500 2900
5 ALCO EX5/6 (1) 750 500 -
6 DANFOSS ETS25/50 (1) 2625 250 -
7 DANFOSS ETS 100 (1) 3530 250 -
8 CAREL ExV (5) 480 50 500
9 CAREL TBD (1) - - -
(for future applications)
10 DANFOSS TBD (2) - - -
11 DANFOSS ETS 250 (2) 3810 250 -
12 DANFOSS ETS 400 (2) 3810 250 -
13 CAREL TBD (2) - - -
14 SPORLAN SER K (4) 2500 200 3000
15 SPORLAN 1 with PWM (3) 6386 200 7500
(SEI50 / SEH100 / SEH175)
Note: this valve is managed as

SPORLAN 1 (=0) but with
opening < 10% or >90% it is
controlled in PWM mode.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Parameter Manufacturer nr. Step max speed Initializatio

value (step / sec.) n step
16 SPORLAN 1 (3) 6386 100 7500
(SEI50 / SEH100 / SEH175)
Note: this valve is managed as

SPORLAN 1 (=0) but with max
speed at 100 step/sec.
Notes
1) Implemented on OB1 board in preliminary version (contact PE before using)
2) Implemented on OB1 board with sw version PE_EEV05.00 or later
5) The right working is guaranteed on OB1 board with sw version PE_EEV13.00 or later
For the latest information on OB1 board see Project Engineering document Sp640pe.doc.
4.4.2 EEV Board connection by analog line

To connect EEV board by analog communication following steps are needed:
 Connections:
o AO1 connector of S10 board connect to V1 connector of EEV board;
o AO2 connector of S10 board connect to V2 connector of EEV board;
 EEV board jumpers setting:
o TD1, TU1: close
o TL1: open
o JU1: open
 EEV board Dip switches setting (Ref. SW1):
o dip switch #1 OFF and dip switch #2 OFF to enable analog communication
o dip switch #3 and dip switch #4 are set according to the used valve:
Sw position Manufacturer nr. Step max speed Initialization step

(step / sec.)
3 off e 4 off SPORLAN 1 6386 200 7500
(SEI50 / SEH100 /
SEH175)
3 off e 4 on ALCO EX7 1600 330 >1600
3 on e 4 off ALCO EX8 2600 500 > 2900
3 on e 4 on DANFOSS
(PWM)
 S10 Board jumpers setting:

o TD1, TU1: close
o TL1: open
 S10 Board setup setting:
o ME01=1 to enabled communication through Analog Output 0-10V
WARNING
EEV board connection by analog line is possible only when OB1ZAM board is used (i.e the
connection with OB1KEN is not possible!).
For the latest information on OB1 board see Project Engineering document Sp640pe.doc.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
4.5 Turbocor connection

In each S10 board (Master or Slave) can be connected until to 2 Turbocors.
To connect Turbocor compressor via serial line to S10, following steps are needed:
 Connect COM3 of S10 board to MODBUS connector of Turbocor:

o TX+ => NETA
o TX- => NETB
o GND => leave disconnected!!
 Turbocor must be configured to be working with Modbus protocol with:
o Address= 1 (first compressor in each S10 board),
2 (second compressor in each S10 board)
o Baud rate= 19200
o Parity= N
o Stop Bits: 1
 S10 Board jumpers setting:
o TU3, TD3: close
o TL3: open
 S10 Board setup setting:
o MC03=8 to enable the serial communication with Turbocor compressor
Following table resume all the parameters that are read/write in Turbocor using Modbus protocol.
Modbus Address MNEM Read/Write Description

access
40021 DEM_KW Read Actual demand power (KW)
40023 CUR Read 3 phase current (A)
40026 - Read Alarms Critical
40027 - Read Alarms Non-Critical
40028 DEM Write Demand Capacity (%)
40030 IGV Read IGV % Open
40031 SP Read Suction Press.
40033 DP Read Discharge Press.
40034 STtcor Read Suction Temp. (passed from Turbocor)
40035 SCR Read SCR Temp.
40036 DT Read Discharge Temp.
40037 CAV Read Cavity Temp.
40050 ACT Read Actual Capacity (%)
40055 SPD_MIN Read Estimated minimum speed (Surge)
40056 SPD_MAX Read Estimated maximum speed (Choke)
40098 BEA Read Bearing Fault code
40100 Spd Read Actual Speed (RPM)
40104 ACT_KW Read Actual power (KW)
40105 IVT Read Inverter Temp.
40106 MOT Read Motor Fault code
41813 FAST_START Write Fast Start mode activaction
41814

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
4.6 Mounting Instruction

To avoid Electro Magnetic Interference and to optimize the efficiency of the EMI filters please take
care of the following points:
 Be sure that the conducting area around boards support holes (on main, auxiliary and user
boards) are very well grounded to the mounting plates through conducting studs, screws
and spacers.
 Low voltage lines like transducers, serial lines, board power supply must be wired far from
high voltage lines like power and auxiliary;
 Connecting shield to ground minimize shield length (max 10/15 mm).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5. SOFTWARE
5.1 OPERATIONS
5.1.1 Configuration
The mother board, provided with the relevant user interface, can control up to two compressors. In
a 2+ compressors chiller, the mother board will be serially connected with the slave compressor
boards (one per two compressors).
All the interactions with the machine are made through the master board (M.B.) user interface
(U.I.).
5.1.2 Machine startup

Involved parameters:
MM06: Autorestart wait time
Following assumptions are made:

 Machine startup procedure starts when the master board is power up.
 Machine is activated in automatic mode after MM06 seconds and it is not possible to bypass
the countdown by pressing the <ON/OFF> key.
5.1.3 Machine starting

 The machine is started pushing the ON/OFF key;
 The “ON” LED is lit;
 On the main screen is showed the status “STARTING”;
 After MC59 seconds of delay the system will be running.
5.1.4 Machine shut-down

MP04: Switch off time of the pumps after the machine is switched off and all the compressors are
switched off.

 The machine is halted pushing again the ON/OFF key;
 The “ON” LED is switched off;
 On the main screen is showed the status “STOPPING”;
 All the compressors are halted;
 If the pumps are used then they are switched off after MP04 seconds that all compressors are
switched off;
 On the main screen is showed the status “SYSTEM OFF”.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.1.5 Only Pumps Mode

This option allows the machine working with the pumps only.
MP02: Only Pumps mode activaction (i.e. pumps manual control mode ).

 The function is enabled when setup parameter MP02=YES.
 Only Pump Mode mode is started when the machine is in logical state “OFF” and then
<On/Off> key is pressed:
o On the main screen is showed the status “ONLY PUMP MODE”;
o The pumps (if enabled) are forced on independently from the cp/machine status and the
logic is described in the par. 5.1.5;
o On the first 20 minutes after that procedure is started, following alarms related to “water”
are bypassed:
 Flow Switch Alarm;
 High Evaporators Drop alar;
 Low Evaporators Drop ;
o All the others devices (compressors, valves …) are switched off.
 Only Pump Mode mode is stopped when <On/Off> key is repressed:
o On the main screen is showed the status “SYSTEM OFF”;
o All pumps are switched off.
 Only Pump Mode is disabled when setup parameter MP02=NO.
WARNING
Before to enabled/disable Only Pumps Mode (i.e. modify MP02) is raccomanded that the logical
state of machine must be “SYSTEM OFF”.
5.1.6 External Enable

To make the unit start and stop from a remote switch an EXEN (External Enabling) digital input is
used:
 the unit must be set the first time in on status through the ON/OFF key (the green led on CO1
interface should therefore be ON, or “SYSTEM OFF” should be showed on LCD);
 if the EXEN digital input is ON the machine is stopped (using the pump down procedures but
without enabling the multiple pump downs) and the display shows “LOCK: REMOTE OFF”;
 if the EXEN digital input is OFF the units run normally starting with the normal staging;
 if the machine is stopped for External Enable, the alarms visualization is activated.
Notes
If the machine is put in OFF state by <On/Off> key then it’s showed “MACHINE OFF” also if locked
from Remote;
If the machine is put in ON state by <On/Off> key then:
- it’s showed “LOCK:REMOTE OFF” if locked from Remote;
- it’s showed “STARTING/COOLING..” if not locked from Remote.
To toggle the unit status from Off to On and from On to Off the ON/OFF key should be normally
used.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.1.7 Emergency Mode

Involved Parameters:
MT05: Maximum demand in emergency mode (101= Emergency mode disabled).

 Emergency mode is enabled when MT05<101.
 If EMERGENCY digital input is ON then:
o the maximum demand of unit is upper limited by user setup parameter MT05;
o On the main screen of LCD will be written “EMERG:XXX%” instead of “COOL:XXX%”.
5.1.8 Software filter on Analog Input

MM09: Software filter used on all analog channels (0= no filter).

 If MM09<>0 then a software filter is enabled on all analog channels.
 The value of MM09 setup parameter is the filter coefficient used to calculate the average of
measurement of each channel.
5.1.9 Time block scheduling

This function allows a day scheduling for the machine starting/stopping with 3 different time blocks.
MM16: Number of time blocks scheduling (0=time block scheduling disabled)
MM17: Time in hours/10 for starting machine in time block#1.
MM18: Time in hours/10 for stopping machine in time block#1.

 Time block scheduling function is enabled if MM16>0.
 The time to starting/stopping machine in each block is stored by setup parameters
MM17…MM22 in hours/10 (i.e. the minimum time resolution is 6 minutes); if we indicate the
value as XXY then:
o XX=hours
o Y=hours/10=Y*6minutes
Example: the value 127 corresponds to 12h and 42m (=7*6m)
 If MM16=1 then:
o the machine starting when the actual time corresponds to MM17 hours/10;
o the machine stopping when the actual time corresponds to MM18 hours/10;
 If MM16=2 then:
o the machine starting when the actual time corresponds to MM17 or MM19 hours/10;
o the machine stopping when the actual time corresponds to MM18 or MM20 hours/10;
 If MM16=3 then:
o the machine starting when the actual time corresponds to MM17 or MM19 or MM21
hours/10;
o the machine stopping when the actual time corresponds to MM18 or MM20 or MM22
hours/10.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2 MACHINE CONTROLS

5.2.1 UNIT CAPACITY CONTROL
This section explain as the unit capacity is controlled.
Our method divides the problem in two tasks:

- controller
- actuator.
The controller decides the percentage value of the total chiller power to be given to the plant.
The actuator must set the physical devices (compressors relay, compressor capacity solenoids..)
to best fit the amount of power required by the controller.
Hardware configuration
from setup
CONTROLLER ACTUATOR
(Local / Remote / (Step / Stepless Physical
Manual control) control) devices
-
Cooling Demand
(0÷100%)
Next paragraphs explain the CONTROLLER and ACTUATOR logic.
5.2.1.1 CONTROLLER details

The Controller can works in three different way:
 Local Temperature Control: Cooling demand is computed locally by a PID controlled in
base to the value of Controlled Temperature (Tcontr=LWT/RWT).
 Remote Control by serial line: Cooling demand is computed by a Remote Controller (ex.
ZAMPMH) and passed to the machine via serial line.
 Open Loop Control: the Cooling demand is set a prefixed value independently from the
value of Controlled Temperature (i.e. manual control mode).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.1 LOCAL TEMPERATURE Control

MT06: Temperature controlled (0=LWT; 1=RWT)
MT03: Demand percentage in Open Loop Control at startup (0 = open loop control disabled).
MT01: Remote Control:
0=NO;
1=YES;
2=YES with local control when communication error with Remote Controller.

 Local temperature control is enabled when all the following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
o Remote control is disabled (MT01=0) or
Remote control is enabled (MT01=2) and the communication with remote controller is
lost (i.e. Serial communication with Remote Controller alarm is active);
o Open Loop Control is disabled (i.e. MT03=0).
 Below is reported the controller structure.
error
Set point PID

given by Control algorithm Cooling
user Demand
Actual temperature
read by controller
 Setpoint is selected as described on par.5.2.1.1.1.2 and 5.2.1.1.1.3.

 Temperature Controlled (Tcontr) is selected by setup parameter MT06:
o If MT06=0 then Tcontr = LWT (Leaving Water Temp.)
o If MT06=1 then Tcontr = RWT (Returning water Temp.)
 PID control is described on par. 5.2.1.1.1.1.
 The Cooling demand (i.e. output of PID control) is showed on Main screen.
5.2.1.1.1.1 PID details

MT12: Proportional Band for Temperature Control
MT13: Integral Time for Temperature Control (integral effect disabled if = 0)
MT14: Derivative Time for Temperature Control (derivative effect disabled if = 0)
If Cooling mode is used then PID controller use following parameters:

 Set point is selected as described in par.5.2.1.1.1.2;
 MT12 is the Proportional Band;
 MT13 is the Integral Time;
 MT14 is the Derivative Time.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.1.2 Set point management

MT07: Set point manager for Temperature Control:
0= first set point is used (S1);
1= set point selected by digital input SETP_SEL:
 First set point (S1) when SETP_SEL is ON;
 Second set point (S2) when SETP_SEL is OFF;
 First set point (S1) when SETP_SEL is OFF;
 Second set point (S2) when SETP_SEL is ON;
3= Remote set point is used (RM);
 First set point (S1) when SETP_SEL is ON;
 Remote set point (RM) when SETP_SEL is OFF;
 First set point (S1) when SETP_SEL is OFF;
 Remote set point (RM) when SETP_SEL is ON.
MT10: Set point for Temperature Control
MT11: Second set point for Temperature Control
IM16: Remote Set Point (REM_SP) channel, min. value.
IM17: Remote Set Point (REM_SP) channel, max. value.

 If MT07=0 then the set point for Temperature Control is first set point (MT10).
 If MT07=1 then the value of set point for Temperature Control depend on the state of
SETP_SEL digital input:
o First set point (MT10) is selected when SETP_SEL is ON;
o Second set point (MT11) is selected when SETP_SEL is OFF.
o First set point (MT10) is selected when SETP_SEL is OFF;
o Second set point (MT11) is selected when SETP_SEL is ON.
 If MT07=3 then the value of set point for Temperature Control is reading by remote sensor.
o Set Point is read by REM_SP analog input;
o minimum value of REM_SP analog input is set by IM16 setup parameter;
o maximum value of REM_SP analog input is set by IM17 setup parameter.
o First set point (MT10) is selected when SETP_SEL is ON;
o Remote set point (see the case when MT07=3) is selected when SETP_SEL is OFF.
o First set point (MT10) is selected when SETP_SEL is OFF;
o Remote set point (see the case when MT07=3) is selected when SETP_SEL is ON.
Notes
a) If Remote set point is selected (see cases with MT07=3,4,5) and the remote sensor (REM_SP
probe) go in alarm (see par.5.5.1.1.4), then the set point for Temperature Control is set to the
value of first set point (MT10).
b) If Heating mode is selected then the set point parameters are different (see par. 5.2.2.2).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.1.3 Set point correction functions

Temperature setpoint can be modified by following functions.
5.2.1.1.1.3.1 Return Temperature Reset

Return Temperature Reset function increase the set point for temperature control in proportion to
effective load estimated by difference between Return Water Temperature (RWT) and Leaving
Water Temperature (LWT).
MT29: Reset ratio for Return Temperature Reset.
MT30: Reset limit for Return Temperature Reset.
MT26: Nominal Delta T of Unit or Chiller Range.
MM10: Set point correction manager:
0= no set point correction;
1= Return Temperature Reset (RTR).

 Return temperature reset function is enabled if MM10=1.
 Setup parameter MT29 is the Reset Ratio (RR) and it is used to set the rate at which the
leaving fluid temperature is reset.
 Setup parameter MT30 is the Reset Limit (RL) and this should be set at the maximum desired
amount of leaving fluid reset.
 Setup parameter MT26 is the nominal delta T of Unit or Chiller Range (CR).
 The current set point of temperature control (SPcorr) is computed with the following algorithm:
SPcorr = SP + min [RL, RR * (CR – (RWT -LWT))]
Notes:
RWT – LWT = 0 => Unit Load = 0% => SPcorr = SP + RL;
RWT – LWT  CR => Unit Load = 100% => SPcorr = SP.
 If LWT or RWT probes go in underflow/overflow then SPcorr = SP.

 Following examples will explain several reset profiles:
EXAMPLE 1: RR = 100%, RL = 10°F, CR = 10°F, SP = 44°F
SPcorr
(°F)
RWT
54
CR
LWT & Set point
44
100 Unit Load (%)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
SPcorr
(°F)
54
RWT
CR
LWT & Set point

44
100 Unit Load (%)
SPcorr
(°F)
RWT
54
CR
49
LWT & Set point
44
50 100 Unit Load (%)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.1.3.2 Ambient Temperature Set Point Correction

Ambient Temperature Set Point correction function increase the set point for temperature control in
proportion to the value of Ambient Temperature: set point is increased when the ambient
temperature decreases.
2= Ambient Temperature Set Point correction (ATC).
MT31: Maximum temperature correction for Ambient Temperature and Analog Input Set point
correction functions.
MT32: Ambient temperature value for zero correction in Ambient Temperature Set point correction
function.
MT33: Ambient temperature value for max correction in Ambient Temperature Set point correction
function.
Following assumption are made:

 Ambient temperature set point correction function is enabled when MM10=2.
 Update descAmbient Temperature for set point correction is read by TA_COR analog input and
its value is showed on the Second screen.
 Setup parameter MT31 is the maximum set point correction (CORRmax).
 Setup parameter MT32 is the ambient temperature (TAmax) where set point correction is zero.
 Setup parameter MT33 is the ambient temperature (TAmin) where set point correction is max.
 The current set point of temperature control (SPcorr) is computed with the following algorithm:
if TA_COR > TAmax => SPcorr = SP

if TA_COR < TAmin => SPcorr = SP + CORRmax
if TAmin < TA_COR < TAmax => SPcorr = SP + [(TAmax-TA_COR) / (TAmax-TAmin)] *
CORRmax
 If TA_COR probe go in underflow/overflow then SPcorr = SP.
EXAMPLE
SPcorr
(°F)
54 SP + CORRmax
CORRmax
44 SP
68 86
TA (°F)
(TAmin) (TAmax)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.1.3.3 Analog Input Set Point Correction

Analog Input set point correction function increase the set point for temperature control in
proportion to the value reading by an analog input: set point is increased when analog input signal
increases.
3= Analog Input Set Point correction (AIC).
MT31: Maximum temperature correction for Ambient Temperature and Analog Input Set point
correction functions.
IM13: Analog Input for Set Point Correction (AI_COR) channel, min. value.
IM14: Analog Input for Set Point Correction (AI_COR) channel, max. value.

 Analog Input set point correction function is enabled if MM10=3.
 Analog Input for set point correction is read by AI_COR analog input and its value is showed in
the Second screen.
 Setup parameter MT31 is the maximum set point correction.
 Setup parameter IM13 should be set to 0% and it is the value where set point correction is
zero.
 Setup parameter IM14 should be set to 100% and it is the value where set point correction is
max (=MT31).
 The current set point of temperature control (SPcorr) is computed with following algorithm:
if AI_COR <= IM13% => SPcorr = SP

if AI_COR >= IM14% => SPcorr = SP + MT31
if IM13% < AI_COR < IM14% => SPcorr = SP + [(AI_COR-IM13) / (IM14-IM13)] * MT31
 If AI_COR analog input go in underflow/overflow then SPcorr = SP.
EXAMPLE (SP=44°F, MT31=10°F, IM13=0%, IM14=100%)

SPcorr
(°F)
SP + MT31
54
44 SP
AI_COR (%)
0 100

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.2 REMOTE CONTROL
5.2.1.1.2.1 Remote Control by serial line

This modality allows to control the chiller by a Remote Controller connect via serial line.
MT01: Remote Control:
0=NO;
1=YES;
2=YES with local control when communication error with Remote Controller.
MT02: Cooling value when Remote Control enabled (-1=chiller locked).

 Remote Control is enabled when MT01>0.
 In this modality the chiller working as SLAVE where the cooling demand is passed by a
Remote Controller that is the MASTER.
 The Remote Controller is connected via RS485, by the IS485 adapter inserted on COM2/PRG
port of S10 (NOTE: only on the IS485 of the last board connected to the bus, the jumpers X5
and X6 must be closed).
 The communication is based on the PEMS protocol and the PEMS address is specified by
setup parameter MS01 (chiller #1 should be address=1…chiller #N should be address=N).
 When Remote Control is enabled then:
o The cooling demand percentage is specified by setup parameter MT02 and this value is
update by the Remote Controller;
o Following visualizations are showed:
 On the main screen is showed “REM-CTR” instead of setpoint;
 On the second screen is showed “CONTROL ON REM”.
o On the 7 segments display is showed “rCt” instead the value of controlled temperature;
o The temperature control based on LWT/RWT is disabled;
o The Forcing compressors OFF function is disabled.
 When MT02=-1 then the chiller is locked by remote:
o On the main screen is showed “LOCK: REMOTE OFF”;
o The compressors are switched off with pump down procedure (if enabled);
o The pumps (if enabled) are switched off after MP04 seconds that all compressors are
switched off.
 If the serial communication with Remote Controller is lost for more of 30 seconds then the
cooling will be set to 0% and the alarm Serial communication with Remote Controller will be
showed.
 If the serial communication with Remote Controller is lost for more of 30 seconds then:
o if MT01=1 then:
 the alarm Serial communication with Remote Controller will be showed;
 the cooling will be set to 0%;
o if MT01=2 then:
 the alarm Serial communication with Remote Controller will be showed;
 the cooling will be computed by local control until the communication error with
Remote Controller is present;
 On the main screen is showed the value of setpoint instead of “REM CTR”;
 On the 7 segments display is showed the value of controlled temperature
instead of “rct”.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.1.3 OPEN LOOP CONTROL


 If user setup parameter MT03 > 0 and the system is ON then:
o open loop control is enabled;
o demand percentage is set to MT03 value;
o On the main screen the display shows: OPEN LOOP CTR: value %.
 To modify the demand percentage:
o Press the <SET> key;
o On the main mask the display shows: OPEN LOOP SET: value %;
o Press <UP> to increase the value, <DOWN> to decrease;
o To switch to the normal use of <UP> and <DOWN> keys (to see the other masks) just
press the <SET> key.
REMARK
In the open loop mode control all the timing are used as the normal control.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.2 ACTUATOR details

It is designed for up to 6 compressors.
From the Output of the PI Control (cooling demand) we decide the Compressors status and their
capacity demand.

 MC01 is the total number of compressors;
 MC03 is the kind of stepless control:
8 = stepless via modbus serial line.
 MC08 is used to enable compressor hours equalization and for selecting the compressors
insertion method:
0= compressor hours equalization disabled and insertion sequence is 1,2,3,4,5,6;
1= compressor hours equalization enabled and insertion sequence depends on
compressors running time (i.e. less used cp is switched on and most used cp is swithed
off);
2= compressor hours equalization disabled and Two Barrels sequence is used with first half
of cp in barrel#1 and the second half of cp in barrel#2:
Nr of Cp Cp in Barrel#1 Cp in Barrel#2 Two Barrels sequence

1 1 - 1
2 1 2 1,2
3 1,2 3 1,3,2
4 1,2 3,4 1,3,2,4
5 1,2,3 4,5 1,4,2,5,3
6 1,2,3 4,5,6 1,4,2,5,3,6
3= compressor hours equalization enabled and Two Barrels sequence is used with first half
of cp in barrel#1 and the second half of cp in barrel#2 (i.e. the control try to equalize the
number of cp in the two barrels);
4= compressor hours equalization enabled and Two Barrels sequence is used with odd cp
(1,3,5) in barrel#1 and even cp (2,4,6) in barrel#2 (i.e. the control try to equalize the
number of cp in the two barrels);
Nr of Cp Cp in Barrel#1 Cp in Barrel#2
1 1 -
2 1 2
3 1,3 2
4 1,3 2,4
5 1,3,5 2,4
6 1,3,5 2,4,6
 According to all parameters the software will control the System using a PID like control
algorithm to maintain Tc to the desired Set Point. The algorithm also takes care of the running
hours of any compressor, the minimum interval between two insertions of the same
compressor, the minimum time between any compressor startup and the alarm status.
The Actuator can works with three different control logic:

o Standard actuator: control logic is optimized for Cp not in parallel;
o Parallel actuator: control logic is optimized for Cp in parallel;
o True parallel actuator: control logic is optimized for Cp in true parallel (circuit locked if a cp
of circuit is in alarm);
o Hybrid actuator: control logic is optimize to increase the machine efficiency.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.2.1 Standard Actuator

Standard actuator is used when MC02=10,11,12.
MC01: Number of compressors
MC07: Timeout before to switch on a new compressor (0=unlimited timeout)
MC08: Compressor hours equalization: 0=no; 1=yes; 2=no with 2 barrel sequence
MC09: Minimum capacity for compressor switch off (i.e Minimum nominal power).
MC10: Minimum capacity for compressor switch on.
MC11: Capacity for compressor startup.
MC12: Maximum available power for each compressor.
MC61: Capacity for compressor startup when “High RWT Limitation” is activated.
(0 = at compressor startup used always MC11)
Master side
The compressors demand capacity is changed with following logic:
 At the minimum capacity the compressor works at MC09%.
 At the maximum capacity the compressor works at MC12% (NOTE: this value is the effective
demand required to Turbocor when the control require 100%).
 Compressors demand capacity is increased with following logic:
o First compressor is switched on when Cooling Demand >= MC10/MC01 %.
o A new compressor is switched on when the cooling demand go over to a multiple of
MC10/MC01% (example: if MC10=30% and MC01=3 then the second cp is inserted when
Cooling >= 20% and the third cp is inserted when Cooling >= 30%).
Following steps are executed:
 The demand of each compressor switched on, is forced to the minimum capacity for cp
switch on (MC10%);
 The counting of timeout (MC07) is started;
 The new compressor is effectively switched in one following condition (OR logic):
- the actual capacity (ACTi) of all compressor switched go below MC10+5%;
- the timeout (MC07) is elapsed
(NOTE: When MC07=0 then the timeout to switch on a new compressor is illimited!)
o If a power increase is required then:
 it is increased the demand capacity of the less used compressor that not reaches the
maximum power (<100%);
 demand capacity is increased until is reached the maximum value (i.e. 100%).
 Compressors demand capacity is decreased with following logic:
o The demand capacity of each cp switched on (one at time) is decreased until is reached the
minumum capacity for cp switch on (MC10).
o When all cp switched on are at the minumum capacity for cp switch on (MC10), then is
decreased the capacity of the two more used cp (one at time) until is reached the minumum
capacity for cp switch off (MC09);
o When two cp switched on are at the minumum capacity for cp switch off (MC09) then it’s
switched off the more used one.
o The last compressor is switched off when the cooling demand reach the 0%.
 When a compressor starts, in slave side, is required a demand capacity of MC11% (MC61% if
“High RWT Limitation” is active with MC61>0). For more details see below the Slave side
description logic.
 If one compressor trips and another is needed, or during transition when direct jump to 100% of
compressor power is required, then direct jump to 100% is allowed (always after startup at
MC10 %).
 MT15 is the minimum time between the switch on of 2 compressors;
 MT16 is the minimum time between the switch off of 2 compressors;
 If hour equalization is request (MC08=1) we have to consider the following rules:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o When a CP have to be switched on we chose the less used.

o If we have 2 or more CP at 100% and we have to decrease one, we chose the most used.
 To equalize the compressors hours working, every 4 hours, the most used compressor that
working to the minimum capacity is switched off (only if a compressor in logical state off is
available).
 If Heat Recovery mode is activated (i.e MH01=3,4 and digital input A13 is ON) then:
o MH15 is the minimum capacity for compressor switch off (instead of MC09);
o MH16 is the minimum capacity for compressor switch on (instead of MC10);
o MH17 is the capacity for compressor startup (instead of MC11 / MC61).
o MH18 is the maximum available capacity for each compressor (instead of MC12);
The way to increase the demand capacity is resumed by following table

(example: 6 compressors with MC09=20%, MC10=40%):
Cp1 PW Cp2 PW Cp3 PW Cp4 Pw Cp5 PW Cp6 Pw Total Pw Configuration

(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
40 0 0 0 0 0 40 1 cp on
41..79 0 0 0 0 0 41..79 4079
79..40 0 0 0 0 0 79..40
40 40 0 0 0 0 80 2 cp on
41..79 40 0 0 0 0 81..119 80119
79..40 40 0 0 0 0 119..80
40 40 40 0 0 0 120 3 cp on
41..79 40 40 0 0 0 121..159 120159
79..40 40 40 0 0 0 159..120
40 40 40 40 0 0 160 4 cp on
41..79 40 40 40 0 0 161..199 160199
79..40 40 40 0 0 0 199..160
40 40 40 40 40 0 200 5 cp on
41..79 40 40 40 40 0 201..239 200239
79..40 40 40 40 40 0 239..200
40 40 40 40 40 40 240 6 cp on
41..100 40 40 40 40 40 241..300 240600
100 41..100 40 40 40 40 301..360
100 100 41..100 40 40 40 361..420
100 100 100 41..100 40 40 421..480
100 100 100 100 41..100 40 481..540
100 100 100 100 100 41..100 541..600
Notes
The yellow cells are some temporary transitions required to increase the capacity.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
The way to decrease the demand capacity is resumed by following table


(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
100 100 100 100 100 100 600 6 cp on
100 100 100 100 100 99..40 599..540 600200
100 100 100 100 99..40 40 539..480
100 100 100 99..40 40 40 479..420
100 100 99..40 40 40 40 419..360
100 99..40 40 40 40 40 359..300
99..40 40 40 40 40 40 299..240
40 40 40 40 40 39..20 239..220
40 40 40 40 39..20 20 219..200
40 40 40 40 39..20 0 199..180 5 cp on
40 40 40 39..20 20 0 179..160 199160
40 40 40 39..20 0 0 159..140 4 cp on
40 40 39..20 20 0 0 139..120 159120
40 40 39..20 0 0 0 119..100 3 cp on
40 39..20 20 0 0 0 99..80 11980
40 39..20 0 0 0 0 79..60 2 cp on
39..20 20 0 0 0 0 59..40 7940
39..20 0 0 0 0 0 39..20 1 cp on
3920
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
Slave side
The compressors capacity is effectively changed (in slave side) with following logic:
 The compressor status is controlled considering the functions described in par.5.3.1.
 When a compressor starts it is required the startup capacity (MC11% or MC61% if “High RWT
Limitation” is active with MC61>0) until the compressor is in “CM-ON” logical state. This state is
maintened until one of following conditions is satisfied (OR logic):
o Compressor minimum time on (MC05 seconds after cp startup) is not elapsed;
o Compressor speed is below the surge speed (value passed from Turbocor via serial line);
o Equalization Solenoid is activated. This condition is checked only when Equalization
Solonoid control is enabled (see par.5.3.4).
 To move from the minimum to the maximum capacity are needed MC17 seconds of actuation.
 To move from the maximum to the minimum capacity are needed MC21 seconds of actuation.
 When the compressor demand is increased then:
o The capacity can change with a minimum step of MC14 tenth of second of actuation;
o The capacity can change with a maximum step of MC15 tenth of second of actuation;
o After a step there is always a pause, TOFF (MC16 from setup).
 When the compressor demand is decreased then:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.2.2 Parallel Actuator

Parallel actuator is used when MC02=13,14,17 and it is optimized for the working of the
compressors in parallel on the same circuit.
MC57: Switch off all the cp when a new cp is inserted in parallel logic and switch on capacity is not
reached.
Master side
o If all compressors are switched off, then N compressors will be switched on in parallel
mode when demand capacity go over to a multiple (N) of MC10/MC01% (example: if
MC10=30% and MC01=3 then, if cooling demand = 22%[>30/3*2], then 2 cp will be
switched on).
o If at least one compressor is already switched on, then a new compressor will be switched
on when the cooling demand go over to a multiple of the maximum power (i.e. all the
compressors already switched on have demand =100%). Following procedure is executed:
 The demand of each compressor switched on, is forced to the minimum capacity for cp
switch on (MC10%);
 If the actual capacity of all compressor switched on go below MC10+5%, then the new
compressor is switched on;
 If the actual actual of all compressors switched on not go below MC10+5% and the
timeout (MC07) is elapsed then:
- If MC02=13 and ME39>0 then, to decrease the Pressure Ratio (PR=DPa/SPa), the
EEV opening is increased by EEV extra opening algorithm (see par.5.4.3.7):
 If the actual power of all compressor switched on go below MC10+5%, then
the new compressor is switched on;
 If the actual power of all compressors switched on not go below
MC10+5%and the the timeout (MC07) is elapsed then:
 If MC57=YES the all the compressors are switched off and then re-
switched on in parallel mode;
 If MC57=NO then the new compressor is however switched on;
- If MC02=14 or ME39=0 then:
 If MC57=YES the all the compressors are switched off and then re-
switched on in parallel mode;
 If MC57=NO then the new compressor is however switched on.
o If a power increase is required then:
 demand capacity is increased, in parallel mode, in all the compressors switched on;
 demand capacity is increased until is reached the maximum value (i.e. 100%).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o If a power decrease is required then:

 demand capacity is decreased, in parallel mode, in all the compressors switched on;
 demand capacity is decreased until is reached the minimum value MC09%.
o If more than 1 compressor are switched on then a compressor is switched off when
demand capacity goes below MC09%.
o The last compressor in on is switched off when the cooling demand reach the 0%.
description logic.
MC11% or MC61%).
 MT15 is the minimum time for the insertion of a new compressor;
 If hour equalization is request (MC08=1) then will be switched on the compressor less used
one;
available).
 If Heat Recovery mode is activated (i.e MH01=3,4 and digital input HC_SEL is ON) then:
o MH17 is the capacity for compressor startup (instead of MC11 or MC61).

(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
40 0 0 0 0 0 40 1 cp on
41..100 0 0 0 0 0 41..100 40100
100..40 0 0 0 0 0 100..40
40 40 0 0 0 0 80 2 cp on
41..100 41..100 0 0 0 0 81..200 80200
100..40 100..40 0 0 0 0 200..80
40 40 40 0 0 0 120 3 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 0 0 0 121..300 120159
100..40 100..40 100..40 0 0 0 300..120
40 40 40 40 0 0 160 4 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 0 0 161..400 160400
100..40 100..40 100..40 100..40 0 0 400..160
40 40 40 40 40 0 200 5 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 0 201..500 200500
100..40 100..40 100..40 100..40 100..40 0 500..200
40 40 40 40 40 40 240 6 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 241..600 250600
Notes
The yellow cells are some temporary transitions required to increase the capacity.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
100 100 100 100 100 100 600 6 cp on
99..20 99..20 99..20 99..20 99..20 99..20 599..120 600120
24. 24 24 24 24 0 119 5 cp on
23..20 23..20 23..20 23..20 23..20 0 118..100 119100
25 25 25 25 0 0 99 4 cp on
24..20 24..20 24..20 24..20 0 0 98..80 9980
26 26 26 0 0 0 79 3 cp on
25..20 25..20 25..20 0 0 0 78..60 7960
29 29 0 0 0 0 59 2 cp on
28..20 28..20 0 0 0 0 58..40 13940
39..20 0 0 0 0 0 39..20 1 cp on
3920
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
WARNING
If the compressors are in parallel on 2 circuits (MC02=14) then the parallel actuator logic should be
revised.
Slave side
Solonoid control is enabled (see par. 5.3.5).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.2.3 True Parallel Actuator

True Parallel actuator is used when MC02=15,16 and it allows to switched on/off together all the
compressors in parallel on the same circuit.
MC09: Minimum power for compressor switch off (i.e Minimum nominal power).
MC10: Minimum power for compressor switch on.
MC11: Power for compressor startup.
Master side
 The demand capacity is increased with following logic:
o All the compressors of first circuit (the less used if MC08=1) are switched on when:
 the cooling demand go above MC12 %, if only 1 circuit is used (MC02=15);
 the cooling demand go above (MC12 / 2) % if 2 circuits are used (MC02=16).
o Demand capacity is increased, in parallel mode, in all the compressors of the first circuit
until is reached 100%;
o If 2 circuits are managed (MC02=16) then all the compressors of second circuit are
switched on when cooling demand go above 50+(MC12 / 2)%;
o Demand capacity is increased, in parallel mode, in all the compressors of the second circuit
until is reached 100%.
 The demand capacity is decreased with following logic:
o If 2 circuits are managed (MC02=16) then demand capacity is decreased, in parallel mode,
in all the compressors of the second circuit until is reached the minimum value (MC09 %).
o All the compressors of second circuit (the more used if MC08=1) are switched off when the
cooling demand go below 50%;
o Demand capacity is decreased, in parallel mode, in all the compressors of the first circuit
until is reached the minimum value (MC09 %).
o All the compressors of first circuit (the more used if MC08=1) are switched off when the
cooling demand reaches 0%;
description logic.
 If a compressor of the circuit trips or is locked then all the others compressors of the circuit are
switched off.
 MT15 is the minimum time for the insertion of new circuit (all the compressors of the circuit);
 MT16 is the minimum time between the switch off of the compressors of 2 different circuits;
 If hour equalization is request (MC08=1) then will be switched on the compressors of the circuit
less used one (note: the less used circuit is selected regading the running time of first
compressor on the circuit);
 Two barrel sequence, selected when MC08=2, is not managed.
 If Heat Recovery mode is activated (i.e MH01=3 and digital input HC_SEL is ON) then:
o MH15 is the minimum power for compressor switch off (instead of MC09);
o MH16 is the minimum power for compressor switch on (instead of MC10);

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o MH17 is the power for compressor startup (instead of MC11 or MC61).


(example: 6 compressors on 2 circuits (MC02=16) with MC09=20% and MC10=40%)
(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
40 0 40 0 40 0 120 3 cp on
41..100 0 41..100 0 41..100 0 121..300 120419
100 40 100 40 100 40 420 6 cp on
100 41..100 100 41..100 100 41..100 421..600 420600

(example: 6 compressors on 2 circuits (MC02=16) with MC09=20% and MC10=40%)
(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
100 100 100 100 100 100 600 6 cp on
100 99..20 100 99..20 100 99..20 599..360 600301
100 0 100 0 100 0 300 3 cp on
99..20 0 99..20 0 99..20 0 299..60 30060
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
Slave side

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.2.4 Hybrid Actuator

Hybrid actuator is used when MC02=18,19,20.
MC54: Speed percentage used for compressor switch on, in hybrid control
MC55: Speed percentage used for compressor switch off, in hybrid control.
MC56: Minimum time between the exit of a cp from CM-ON status and the switch off of a cp, in
hybrid control.
MC58: Maximum time used for compressor switch on when demand at 100%, in hybrid control.
MT15: Minimum time for stages increase on the compressors control.
MT16: Minimum time for stages decrease on the compressors control.
Master side
 The control monitor in each compressor already switched on the actual speed percentage
(SPD_PERCi) to decide when switch on/off a new cp:
SPD_PERCi = (SPDi – SPD_MINi) / (SPD_MAXi - SPD_MINi) * 100
SPDi = actual speed of i-esimo cp
SPD_MINi = estimated minimum speed (surge speed) of i-esimo cp
SPD_MAXi = estimated maximum speed (choke speed) of i-esimo cp
o The first compressor is switched on when Cooling Demand >= MC10/MC01 %.
o A new compressor is switched on when all conditions are satisfied (OR logic):
- the actual speed percentage of a cp already switched on (SPD_PERCi) >= MC54;
- the compressors demand is at maximum value (i.e. 100%) for at least MC58 sec.
When this condition is satisfied, then following steps are executed:
 The demand of each compressor switched on, is forced to MC10%;
 If the actual capacity (ACTi) of all compressor switched on go below MC10+5%, then
 If the actual capacity (ACTi) of all compressors switched on not go below MC10+5%
and the timeout (MC07) is elapsed then:
- If ME39>0 and MC02=19 and then, to decrease the Pressure Ratio (PR=DPa/SPa),
the EEV opening is increased by EEV extra opening algorithm (see par.5.4.3.7):
the new compressor is switched on
 If the actual power of all compressor switched on go below MC10+5%, then
 If the actual power of all compressors switched on not go below MC10+5%
and the timeout (MC07) is elapsed then the new compressor is however
switched on.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
- If ME39=0 then the new compressor is however switched on.

o If a power increase is required then the demand of all cp switched on is increased in
parallel mode until is reached the maximum value (i.e. 100%).
o If a power decrease is required then the demand of all cp switched on is decreased in
parallel mode until is reached the minimum value MC09%.
o If more than 1 compressor is switched on then a compressor is switched off when all the
following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
- the demand of all cp switched on have reached the minimum value MC09%;
- the actual speed percentage of a cp already switched on (SPD_PERCi) < MC55.
o The last compressor is switched off when the cooling demand reach the 0%.
description logic.
MC11% or MC61%).
 MT15 is the minimum time between the switch on of 2 compressors;
 MC56 is the minimum time between the exit of a cp from CM-ON status and the switch off of a
cp.
 If hour equalization is request (MC08=1) we have to consider the following rules:
o When a CP have to be switched on we chose the less used.
o When a CP have to be switched off we chose the most used.
available).
 If Heat Recovery mode is activated (i.e MH01=3,4 and digital input A13 is ON) then:
o MH17 is the capacity for compressor startup (instead of MC11 / MC61).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(example: 6 compressors with MC09=20%, MC10=40%)
(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on
40 0 0 0 0 0 40 1 cp on
41..100 0 0 0 0 0 41..100 40100
100..40 0 0 0 0 0 100..40
40 40 0 0 0 0 80 2 cp on
41..100 41..100 0 0 0 0 81..200 80200
100..40 100..40 0 0 0 0 200..80
40 40 40 0 0 0 120 3 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 0 0 0 121..300 120159
100..40 100..40 100..40 0 0 0 300..120
40 40 40 40 0 0 160 4 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 0 0 161..400 160400
100..40 100..40 100..40 100..40 0 0 400..160
40 40 40 40 40 0 200 5 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 0 201..500 200500
100..40 100..40 100..40 100..40 100..40 0 500..200
40 40 40 40 40 40 240 6 cp on
41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 41..100 241..600 250600
Notes
1) The yellow cells are some temporary transitions required to increase the capacity.
2) In this example a new cp is always switched on when the cp already switched on have reached
100%. In the real case a new cp is switched on when the actual speed percentage of a cp already
switched on (SPD_PERCi) >= MC54 or the compressors demand is at 100% for at least MC58
seconds.

(example: 6 compressors with MC09=20%, MC10=40%)
(%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) range
100 100 100 100 100 100 600 6 cp on
99..20 99..20 99..20 99..20 99..20 99..20 599..120 600120
24. 24 24 24 24 0 119 5 cp on
23..20 23..20 23..20 23..20 23..20 0 118..100 119100
25 25 25 25 0 0 99 4 cp on
24..20 24..20 24..20 24..20 0 0 98..80 9980
26 26 26 0 0 0 79 3 cp on
25..20 25..20 25..20 0 0 0 78..60 7960
29 29 0 0 0 0 59 2 cp on
28..20 28..20 0 0 0 0 58..40 13940
39..20 0 0 0 0 0 39..20 1 cp on
3920
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cp on

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Slave side

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.3 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS FOR UNIT CAPACITY LIMITATION
5.2.1.3.1 Upper demand limit on temperature control

MT04: Upper demand limit of unit power (100 = no upper demand limit)
MT38: Upper Demand Limit mode:
0= disabled;
1= limit by setup parameter only;
2= limit by setup parameter and enable by digital input.
3= limit by analog input.

 The function is enabled when MT38>0 and Open Loop Control is disabled (MT03=0).
 The logic of control is selected by setup parameter MT38:
o If MT38=1 then unit demand is upper limited by the value of MT04;
o If MT38=2 then unit demand is upper limited by the value of MT04 but only when the digital
input ULIM_EN = ON;
o If MT38=3 then the unit demand is upper limited by the value read by analog input ULIM (4-
20mA channel).
 Following settings are required:
 minimum value of analog input (4mA), in %, is set by IM19 setup parameter
(typical value = 0%);
 maximum value of analog input (20mA), in %, is set by IM20 setup
parameter (typical value = 100%);
 The value of ULIM is showed on Second screen.
 If ULIM probe go to overflow or underflow, then the unit demand is not more limited
and the display will show the message (see par. 5.5.1.1.14):
"ALARM MASTER ULIM TR.OUT OF RANGE"

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.3.2 Forcing compressors OFF function

MT22: Temperature value for anti freeze alarm
MT23: Differential for forcing compressors OFF (0=disabled)

 Forcing compressors OFF function is enabled when MT23<>0 and all the following conditions
are satisfied (AND logic):
o cooling mode is selected or heating mode with heating recovery is selected (MH01=3);
o Split Unit is not used (MV01<3);
o Remote Control is disabled (MT01=0).
 If cooling mode is used and temperature controlled Tc < Setpoint - MT23 then:
o all compressors are switched off with pump down procedure;
o integral part of PI control is set to 0;
o the compressors are re-enabled to start when Tc > Setpoint.
 If heating mode is used and LWT < MT22+1.8°F then:
o integral part of PI control is set to 0;
o the compressors are re-enabled to start when LWT > MT22+1.8°F+MT23.
Notes
When MT23<0 (i.e. also Antifreeze Limitation is activated) then the differential value effectively
used is =-MT23 (i.e. a positive value is always used).
5.2.1.3.3 Forcing compressors OFF for Low RWT

This function allows to force the compressors in off when RWT go below a prefixed value.
MT27: Chiller range percentage used in Forcing Cp Off for Low RWT.
(0= Forcing Cp Off for Low RWT disabled)

 Forcing compressors OFF for Low RWT is enabled when MT27>0 and all the following
o cooling mode is selected (i.e Heating mode is NOT used);
o Split Unit is not used (MV01<3);
o Remote Control is disabled (MT01=0).
 Setup parameter MT26 is the Chiller Range.
 If [(RWT- Setpoint) / MT26 * 100] < MT27 then:
o the function is activated;
o all compressors are switched off with pump down procedure (if enabled);
o the compressors are disabled to restart;
o on the main screen the RWT value blinks every 1 second
 If [(RWT- Setpoint) / MT26 * 100] > MT27+10% then:
o The function is deactivated;
o the compressors are enabled to restart.
 The Setpoint value is selected with the logic described in par.5.2.1.1.1.2.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.3.4 Pull Down control

Pull down control allows minimizing the peak of current that occurs at start-up, when the fluid
temperature is high, but the load is small. If the Temperature Controlled (Tc) decreases too quickly
then the demand of temperature control is decreased.
MT17: Set point for Pull Down control (0 = pull down control disabled);
MT18: Differential for Pull Down control;
MT19: Demand correction for Pull Down control;

 Pull Down control is enabled when MT17<>0 and 1 minute after that Tc Control is enabled.
 Pull Down Rate (PDR) is the difference between the actual value of Tc and the value of Tc on
the precedent minute; PDR is update every 1 minute:
PDR = Tc-1 – Tc0;

Tc0 = actual Tc value;
Tc-1 = Tc value stored 1 minute before of Tc0.
 If PDR > MT17 then Pull Down control is activated and the ACTUAL power of unit is computed.
 If Pull Down control is activated then:
a) If PDR > MT17, then the Demand (U) is decreased every 1 minute with following algorithm:
U = ACTUAL – Ucorri
Ucorri = Ucorri-1 + MT19 (Ucorr0 = 0, Ucorr_max = 100%)
On the main screen the value of demand blinks.
b) If MT17-MT18 < PDR < MT17 then the demand is blocked at the last value of the point a).
On the main screen the value of demand blink.
c) If PDR < MT17-MT18 then the Pull Down control is deactivated and the demand used is the
one computed from Control Tc.
d) The Pull Down control is deactivated also when the demand computed from Tc Control go
below the value computed by Pull Down control.
e) If Pull Down control is enabled then the demand effectively required is the minimum value
between the value computed from Pull Down control and the value computed by
temperature control
PDR
Demand decrease (a)

MT17
Demand blocked (b)
MT17-MT18
Pull Down control exit (c)
Time

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.3.5 Antifreeze Limitation

MT23: Differential for forcing compressors OFF:
>0 = Forcing Cp Off enabled;
<0 = Forcing Cp Off and Antifreeze limitation enabled;
0=disabled.

 Antifreeze limitation function is enabled when MT23<0 and cooling mode is selected or heating
mode with heating recovery is selected (MH01=3) and Split Unit is not used (MV01<3).
 If cooling mode is used then the logic is as follow:
o When the controlled temperature (Tc) go below the set point (SetP) then the algorithm
computed a new cooling demand (Uafl) by a proportional control with prop. band = -MT23:
Uafl (%)
100
SetP-|MT23| SetP Tc
o The effective cooling demand is the minimum value between value computed by Tc control
(Utc) and the value computed by antifreeze limitation control (Uafl):
U = min [Utc, Uafl]
 If Heating mode is used then the logic is as follow:

o When the LWT go below MT22+1.8°F then the algorithm computed a new cooling demand
(Uafl) by a proportional control with prop. band = -MT23:
Uafl (%)
100
MT22+1.8° MT22+1.8°F+|MT23 LWT
o The effective cooling demand is the minimum value between value computed by Tc control
(Utc) and the value computed by antifreeze limitation control (Uafl):
U = min [Utc, Uafl]

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.1.3.6 High RWT Limitation

This function allows to forcing the compressors at minimum capacity when the machine working in
COOLING mode and the Returning Water Temperature (RWT) go over a prefixed value.
MT24: Temperature value for High RWT Alarm.
MT25: Differential temperature used for “High RWT Limitation” function (0=High RWT Limitation
disabled).

 The function is enabled when MT25>0 and cooling mode is selected (i.e Heating mode not
activated) and the SPLIT units are disabled (MV01<3).
 If RWT > MT24-MT25 then the function is activated and following actions are executed:
o all the compressors already switched on are forced to the minimum capacity (MC09);
o the new compressors that must be switched on are started at startup capacity:
 MC11% when MC61=0;
 MC61% when MC61>0.
 If RWT < MT24-MT25-18°F then the function is deactivated.
 When the function is activated, on the compressors screen, is showed the status “HW-LIM”.
5.2.1.3.7 Low RWT Limitation – Cooling mode

This function allows to limit the maximum number of compressors that can be switched on, when
the machine working in COOLING mode and the Returning Water Temperature (RWT) go below a
prefixed value.
MT28: Enable Low RWT Limitation in Cooling mode.

 The function is enabled when MT28=YES and following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
o Machine working in COOLING mode (i.e. Heating mode not selected);
o SPLIT units are disabled (MV01<3);
o The compressors are NOT in true parallel (MC02<>15,16).
 The maximum number of compressors that can be switched on is computed as follows:
NrCpMax = 1 + Integer_Part[NrCp * (RWT- Setpoint) / ChillerRange]
where
NrCp = MC01
Setpoint =see the logic described in par.5.2.1.1.1.2
ChillerRange = MT26
 The value of NrCpMax is showed on the second screen (see par. 5.6.1.4)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
EXAMPLE (Setpoint = 5.0°C, MC01=4, MT26=6.0°C)
NrCpMax
4
3
2
1
5.0°C 6.5°C 8.0°C 9.5°C 11.0°C

RWT
(Setpoint) (Setpoint+ChillerRange)
5.2.1.3.8 Low RWT Limitation – Heating mode

This function allows to limit the maximum number of cp switched on in each circuit, when the
machine working in HEATING mode and the Returning Water Temperature (RWT) go below a
prefixed value.
MH22: Temperature used for “Low RWT Limitation” function in Heating mode.
MH23: Differential temperature used for “Low RWT Limitation” function in Heating mode.
(0=Low RWT Limitation disabled).

 The function is enabled when MH23>0 and following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
o Heating mode is selected (see par.5.2.2.1);
o SPLIT units are disabled (MV01<3);
o The compressors are in parallel (not true) on 1 or 2 circuits (MC02=11,12,13,14,19,20).
 If RWT < MH22 then the function is activated and only one compressor for circuit can be
switched on: a compressor will be switched off every 5 seconds, if required.
 If RWT > MH22+MH23 then the function is deactivated.
 When the function is activated, on the compressors screen, is showed the status “LW-LIM”.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2 HEATING MODE management

In Heating Mode the machine can works in two different way:
 Heat Pump (when MH01=1,2)
 Heat Recovery (when MH01=3,4)
5.2.2.1 Heat / Cool mode selection

MH01: Heat mode management:
0 = no heat pump;
1 = heat pump – Air/Water (AW);
2 = heat pump – Water/Water (WW);
3 = heat recovery – Water/Water (HR).
4 = Heat Recovery-Cooling Priority (HC).
MH02: Delay time for cp restarting after Cooling or Heating selection.

 Heat / Cool mode selection is enabled when Heat Pump is enabled (MH01<>0).
 Heat / Cool mode is selected by HC_SEL digital input:
o if HC_SEL is ON then HEAT mode is selected;
o if HC_SEL is OFF then COOL mode is selected.
 Reversing valve is drive by digital output HP_REV (only in heat pump, i.e. MH01=1,2).
 All circuits reversing together (only in heat pump, i.e. MH01=1,2).
Cool to Heat procedure

 Switch Off all Compressors, Fan Motors and Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV).
 Wait 30 seconds after that all compressors are switched off, the Reversing Valve is switched
ON (only in heat pump, i.e. MH01=1,2).
 After MH02 seconds and when compressors counting minimum off is elapsed, Compressors,
Fan Motors and Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV) shall be switched on again
according to the staging table.
Heat to Cool procedure

 Switch Off all Compressors, Fan Motors and Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV).
 Wait 30 seconds after that all compressors are switched off, the Reversing Valve is switched
OFF (only in heat pump, i.e. MH01=1,2).
 After MH02 seconds and when compressors counting minimum off is elapsed, Compressors,
Fan Motors and Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV) shall be Switched On again
according to the staging table.
5.2.2.2 Temperature Control in Heat mode

When Heating mode is selected then a different Temperature Control is used, respect to Cooling
mode.
MH03: Set point for Temperature Control in Heat mode
MH04: Second set point for Temperature Control in Heat mode.
MH05: Proportional Band for Temperature Control in Heat mode
MH06: Integral Time for Temperature Control in Heat mode (0=integral effect disabled)

 The parameters used for PID Temperature control are:
o Set point is selected with the same logic of cooling mode (see par. 5.2.1.1.1.2) with the

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
difference that:
 first setpoint is MH03 (instead of MT10);
 second setpoint is MH04 (instead of MT11).
o MH05 is the proportional band;
o MH06 is the integral time.
o Derivative effect is disabled.
 The control logic is reversed, i.e. staging increased when the temperature decreases.
5.2.2.3 Heat Pump Mode

0 = no heat pump;
1 = heat pump – Air/Water (AW);
2 = heat pump – Water/Water (WW);

 Heat Pump is enabled when MH01=1,2.
 Following I/0 channels are used:
o HP_REV digital output is used to driving Reversing Valve (all circuits reversing together);
o HC_SEL digital input is used to select Heat/Cool mode;
o OET analog input is used to read Outlet Evaporator Temperature in Water/Water machine;
 If MH01=1 then the heat pump is enabled on Air/Water machine where:
o defrosting procedure is enabled;
o Emergency Mode is available but I/O mapping must be revised respected default.
o Hot Gas Bypass management is available but I/O mapping must be revised respected
default.
o FREE COOLING control available but I/O mapping must be revised respected default;
 If MH01=2 then the heat pump is enabled on Water/Water machine where:
o defrosting procedure is disabled;
o antifreeze alarm is managed on Outlet Evaporator Temperature read by OET analog input
and its value is showed on the Second screen.
o Emergency Mode is not available.
o Hot Gas Bypass management is not available.
o FREE COOLING control is not available;
o Ambient Temperature Set Point Correction is not available.
o Hydraulic circuit for Water/Water machine:
 When the machine working in heat mode (see par. 5.2.2) then the nominal flow rate of
evaporator is specified by setup parameter MH25 instead of MV07 (see par. 5.2.6.2.2).
EOT
Reversing
Valve
DP
Condenser
M
CP SP
Evaporator
TIN TOUT

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2.3.1 Fan control in Heat Pump mode

When Heating mode is selected and Heat Pump is used (MH01=1,2), then a different FAN control
is used.
MH07: Set point for FAN control in Heat mode.
MH08: Prop. Band for FAN control in Heat mode.
MH09: Integral Time for FAN control in Heat mode.

 The parameters used for PID FAN control are:
o MH07 is the set point;
o MH08 is the proportional band;
o MH09 is the integral time.
 FAN speed depend on the value reading by Suction Pressure transducer;
 FAN control logic is reversed, i.e. Fan speed increased when Suction Pressure decreases.
HEAT COOL
FAN speed FAN speed

(%) (%)
100 100
0 0
Set Point SP DP
Set Point
5.2.2.3.2 EEV control in Heat Pump mode

When Heating mode is selected then the EEV control is the same used in Cooling mode.
If the compressors are in parallel on 1 circuit (MC02=11,13,15,19) then it is possible to control a

second EEV valve when the heating mode is selected (see par. 5.4.3.9).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2.3.3 Defrosting procedure in Heat Pump mode

Defrost procedure is enabled when an Air/Water machine is used (MH01=1) and the Heat mode is
selected.
MH10: Suction Pressure value for to start defrosting in Heat mode.
(NOTE: defrosting managed only when MH01=1)
MH11: Discharge Pressure value for to stop defrosting in Heat mode.
(NOTE: defrosting managed only when MH01=1)
MH12: Delay time before start defrosting.
MH13: Timeout for stop defrosting.
MH14: Minimum time between 2 defrosting.

 The defrost action shall be started when the value of Suction Pressure (SP) of one or more
compressor is < MH10 PSI for at least MH12 seconds. If start defrost condition is happen then:
o switch off all Compressors, Fan Motors and Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV);
o 30 seconds after all compressors are switched off, the Reversing Valve is Switched Off;
o when compressors counting minimum off is elapsed, every MT15 seconds, one
Compressor shall be Switched On;
o a compressor will be switched off when the value of Discharge Pressure (DP) > MH11 or
the timeout for stop defrosting (MH13) is elapsed.
 The defrost action shall be stopped when the value of Discharge Pressure (DP) of all
compressors are switched off. If stop defrost condition is happen then:
o switch off all Compressors, Fan Motors and Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV);
o 30 seconds after all compressors are switched off, the Reversing Valve is Switched On;
o when the compressors counting minimum off is elapsed, Compressors, Fan Motors and
Refrigerating fluid solenoid valves (or EEV) shall be Switched On again according to the
staging table.
 FAN control is disabled when defrosting is active.
 Setup parameter MH14 is the minimum time, in minutes, between 2 defrosting.
5.2.2.4 Heat Recovery Mode

The machine can work in two different way:
 Heat Recovery – Heating Priority
 Heat Recovery – Cooling Priority
The control logic is described below.
5.2.2.4.1 Heat Recovery – Heating Priority

3= heat recovery – Water/Water (HR).
MH15: Minimum power for compressor switch off (i.e Minimum nominal power), used in heat
recovery mode
MH16: Minimum power for compressor switch on, used in heat recovery mode.
MH18: Maximum nominal power for each compressor, used in heat recovery mode.
MH17: Power for compressor startup, used in heat recovery mode.
MH19: EEV set point value for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected (i.e. ME02=3)
and in heat recovery mode activated.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

 Heat Recovery mode is enabled when MH01=3.
 Following I/O channels are used:
o HC_SEL digital input is used to select Heat-Recovery/Cool mode;
o OET analog input is used to read Outlet Water Temperature in Water/Water machine;
 If MH01=3 then heat recovery is enabled on Water/Water machine where:
o defrosting procedure is disabled;
o antifreeze alarm is managed on Outlet Condenser Temperature reading by OET analog
input and its value is showed on the Second screen.
o Temperature is controlled on OET probe.
o The compressors control actuator use the following parameters:
 MH15 is the minimum power for compressor switch off (instead of MC09)
 MH16 is the minimum power for compressor switch on (instead of MC10)
 MH17 is the power for compressor startup (instead of MC11 / MC61).
 MH18 is the maximum nominal power for each compressor (instead of MC12)
o If liquid level control on flooded evaporator is selected (i.e. ME02=3) then the used set point
is MH19 (instead of ME11).
o Reversing valve is not controlled (i.e. no circuits reversing is executed)
o Hot Gas Bypass management is available but I/O mapping must be revised respected
default.
o FREE COOLING control is available but I/O mapping must be revised respected default;
o Ambient Temperature Set Point Correction is available but I/O mapping must be revised
respected default.
o Forcing compressors OFF function is activated when MT23<>0.
o Antifreeze Limitation is activated when MT23<0.
o Hydraulic circuit of machine (note: reversing valve is not present):
 When the machine working in heat mode (see par. 5.2.2) then the nominal flow rate of
evaporator is specified by setup parameter MH25 instead of MV07 (see par. 5.2.6.2.2).
OET
DP
Condenser
M
CP SP
Evaporator
TIN TOUT

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2.4.2 Heat Recovery – Cooling Priority

4= Heat Recovery – Cooling Priority (HC).
MH15: Minimum power for compressor switch off (i.e Minimum nominal power), used in heat
recovery mode
MH16: Minimum power for compressor switch on, used in heat recovery mode.
MH18: Maximum nominal power for each compressor, used in heat recovery mode.
MH19: EEV set point value for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected (i.e. ME02=3)
and in heat recovery mode activated.
MH17: Power for compressor startup, used in heat recovery mode.

 Heat Recovery with Cooling Priority is enabled when MH01=4.
 Following I/O channels are used:
o HC_SEL digital input is used to select Heat-Recovery/Cool mode;
 If MH01=4 and HC_SEL digital input is ON then Heat Recovery with Cooling Priority is enabled
and the machine is controlled as in cooling mode with following differences:
o Temperature is controlled on LWT/RWT (as selected with MT06) with “cool” logic;
o On the main screen the cooling value is alternated with “REC ” every 2 seconds;
o The compressors control actuator use the following parameters:
 MH15 is the minimum power for compressor switch off (instead of MC09)
 MH16 is the minimum power for compressor switch on (instead of MC10)
 MH18 is the maximum nominal power for each compressor (instead of MC12)
 MH17 is the power for compressor startup (instead of MC11 / MC61)
o If liquid level control on flooded evaporator is selected (i.e. ME02=3) then the used set point
is MH19 (instead of ME11).
o Reversing valve is not controlled (i.e. no circuits reversing is executed)
o FREE COOLING control is available but I/O mapping must be revised respected default.
o Ambient Temperature Set Point Correction is available but I/O mapping must be revised
respected default.
o Forcing compressors OFF function is activated when MT23<>0.
o Antifreeze Limitation is activated when MT23<0.
 Follows the hydraulic circuit of machine (note: reversing valve is not present):
TAE
DP
Condenser
M
CP SP
Evaporator
TIN TOUT

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2.5 Manage an ST probe for each compressor

This option allows to manage an ST probe for each compressor (instead an ST probe for each
circuit) when the machine is in Heating mode and the cp are in parallel on one or two circuits.
The Suction Temp. value used in the circuit is the one of ST probe of the switched on compressor
in the circuit with lower index.
MC02: Compressor type:
10=Turbocor;
11=Turbocor with all cp in parallel on 1 circuit;
12=Turbocorwith all cp in parallel on 2 circuits (first half on 1st circuit, second half on 2nd
circuit).
13=Turbocor with all cp in parallel on 1 circuit and new algorithm;
14=Turbocor with all cp in parallel on 2 circuits (first half on 1st circuit, second half on 2nd
circuit) and new algorithm;
15=Turbocor with all cp in true parallel on 1 circuit;
16=Turbocor with all cp in true parallel on 2 circuits (first half on 1st circuit, second half on
2nd circuit).
MH20: Enable an ST probe for each cp when machine in heating mode and cp in parallel on 1 or 2
circuits.

 The function is enabled when MH20=YES and the compressors working in parallel mode
(MC02=11..16,18,19).
 The function is activated when the machine working in HEATING mode (see par.5.2.2.1) and in
this case an ST probe for each cp is managed.
 The value of Suction Temperature (ST) used in the circuit is selected with following logic:
o If the compressors are in parallel on 1 circuit (MC02=11,13,15,19) then:
CIRCUIT#1:
 ST1 = value of ST probe of the switched on cp in the circuit with lower index (CpN
with N=1,2,3,4,5,6);
 ST1 = ST probe related to Cp1, if no one cp is switched on in the circuit.
o If the compressors are in parallel on 2 circuits (MC02=12,14,16,20) then:
CIRCUIT#1:
with N=1,3,5);
CIRCUIT#2:
with N=2,4,6);
 The ST probe alarm is managed only for ST probe related to the first cp of each circuit.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.2.6 EEV Algorithm selection in Heating mode

This option allows to select a different EEV algorithm, respect to Cooling mode, when Hating mode
is activated.
MH24: EEV algorithm selection in heating mode:
-1= same control used in cooling mode
0 = old algorithm;
1 = new algorithm;
2 = new algorithm without “EEV in oscillation” warning;
3 = control on evaporator liquid level with new algorithm (i.e. flooded evaporator selected);
4 = control based on the linear relation with compressor capacity;
5 = new algorithm on discharge superheat without “EEV in oscillation” warning.
6 = control on condenser liquid level with new algorithm.
ME02: EEV algorithm selection:
0 = old algorithm;
1 = new algorithm;
5 = new algorithm on discharge superheat without “EEV in oscillation” warning;
6 = control on condenser liquid level with new algorithm.

 EEV algorithm used in heating mode, is selected with following logic:
o If MH24=-1 then it’s selected the same EEV algorithm used in Cooling mode (i.e. the
selection is made by setup parameter ME02); for more details see par. 5.4.3.3;
o If MH24=>=0 then the EEV algorithm is selected by setup parameter MH24 with the same
selection logic of ME02.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.3 SPLIT UNIT

MV01: Barrel type:
0= one barrel;
1= two barrels in parallel;
2= two barrels in series;
3= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cp control by Analog Input;
4= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cp control by Suction Pressure (SP);
5= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cooling demand by Analog Input;
6= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cooling demand by Split Controlled Temperature (SCT).
SPLIT units have the same characteristics of a normal chiller with the difference that Evaporator is
not present; therefore, the following devices are not present:
 Probe for Temperature Control (LWT, RWT)
 Antifreeze probes (LWT, RWT)
 EEV (EEV control should be disabled by setting ME01=0)
Following functions are disabled:

 LWT and RWT probes alarm;
 LWT and RWT visualization;
 Antifreeze;
 Antifreeze Limitation;
 Open Loop control;
 High RWT Limitation;
 Low RWT Limitation – Cooling/Heating mode.
 Temperature Control (only if MV01=3,4,5);
 Set Point visualizations: “----“ is showed (only if MV01=3,4,5);
 Pull down control (only if MV01=3,4,5);
 Forcing Compressor OFF (only if MV01=3,4,5);
 Upper demand limit (only if MV01=3,4);
 Emergency mode (only if MV01=3,4);
Following types of control are available:

o Split with Cp control by Analog Input;
o Split with Cp control by Suction Pressure (SP);
o Split with Cooling demand by Analog Input;
o Split with Cooling demand by Split Controlled Temperature (SCT).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.3.1 Split – Cp Control by Analog Input

The demand of each compressor depends on the value of an external analog signal.
MT37: Minimum demand used for compressors switch off in Split unit.

 This control mode is enabled when MV01=3 and the compressors are not in parallel mode (i.e.
MC02=10,17,18).
 On the second screen is showed “CONTROL ON AIN”.
 Compressor demand capacity (0..100% signal) is read by analog input EXT_DEM (one
transducer for each compressor).
 A compressor is switched on when demand is > to minimum demand for compressor switch on
(MC10/MC12*100%).
 A compressor can work until the minimum the minimum capacity MC09/MC12*100%.
 A compressor is switched off when demand is <= MT37%.
 If EXT_DEM probe go in overflow/underflow (see par. 5.5.2.12.1) then all related compressors
is switched off.
 Compressor demand is showed on Stepless Control Staging screen.
Cp Demand
Capacity (%)
100
0 MT37 Min Min On 100 EXT_DEM (%)

Capacity Capacity

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.3.2 Split – Cp Control by Suction Pressure

The demand of each compressor depends on the value of Suction Pressure (SP) transducer.
MT34: Set point for compressors control in Split Unit with control on Suction Pressure.
MT35: Prop. Band for compressors control in Split Unit with control on Suction Pressure.
MT36: Integral Time for compressors control in Split Unit with control on Suction Pressure.

 This control mode is enabled when MV01=4 and the compressors are not in parallel mode (i.e.
MC02=10,17,18).
 On the second screen is showed “CONTROL ON SP”.
 Compressors demand is computed by PI control based on the Suction Pressure (SP) value
and following parameters:
o MT34 is the set point;
o MT35 is the proportional band;
o MT36 is the integral time.
 Integral part of PI control is set to 0 when SP < MT34 – 7psi.
 A compressor is switched on when demand is > to minimum demand for compressor switch on
(MC10/MC12*100%).
 A compressor can work until the minimum the minimum capacity MC09/MC12*100%.
 A compressor is switched off when demand is <= MT37%.
 Compressor demand is showed on Stepless Control Staging screen.
Cp Demand
Capacity (%)
100
0 MT37 Min Min On 100 Demand (%)

Capacity Capacity
MT34 MT34 + MT35 SP

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.3.3 Split – Cooling demand by Analog Input

The cooling demand of machine depends on the value of an external analog signal.

 This control mode is enabled when MV01=5.
 On the second screen is showed “CONTROL ON EXT”.
 The cooling demand percentage (0..100%) is read by EXTC analog input.
 The compressors are controlled as in normal control mode (see par. 5.2.1.2) with the difference
that cooling demand is read by EXTC analog input.
 All the compressors are switched off when cooling demand <= MT37.
 If EXTC probe go in overflow/underflow (see par. 5.5.1.1.16) then all the compressors are
switched off.
Cooling
Demand
(%)
100
External Cooling (%)

0 MT37 100
5.2.3.4 Split – Cooling demand by Split Controlled Temperature (SCT)

The cooling demand of machine depends on the value of an external analog signal.

 This control mode is enabled when MV01=6.
 On the second screen is showed “CONTROL ON SCT”.
 Split Controlled Temperature is read by analog input SCT.
 The cooling demand is computed with a PID controller based on the value of SCT and
following parameters (the same of normal PID control):
o Set point is selected as described in par.5.2.1.1.1.2;
o MT12 is the Proportional Band;
o MT13 is the Integral Time;
o MT14 is the Derivative Time.
 All the compressors are switched off when cooling demand <= MT37.
 If SCT probe go in overflow/underflow (see par. 5.5.1.1.17) then all the compressors are
switched off.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4 FREE COOLING control

This section explain the logic of Free Cooling control.
Three different kind of controls are managed:
 Free Cooling standard
 Free Cooling with Dry Cooler
 Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps
5.2.4.1 Free Cooling standard

MF01: Free Cooling control:
0= disabled;
1= forced ON;
2= forced OFF;
3= enabled (normal control).
MF02: TFC–TAE required for Free Cooling control.
MF03: Differential for Free Cooling control.
MF04: Set point offset for Free Cooling valve.
MF05: Differential for Free Cooling valve.
MF06: Set point offset for FAN control when Free Cooling activated.
MF07: Differential for FAN control when Free Cooling activated.
MF08: Fan speed control cause when Free Cooling on and one or more compressors switched on
0=Fan speed control on discharge pressure of circuit (i.e. CP priority);
1=Fan speed control on regulation water temperature (i.e. FC priority).
MF09: Temperature used for free cooling valve control and fan control when free cooling active
(0 = RWT, 1 = temperature used for water temperature control (TC)).
MF10: External Air Temperature value for Forcing Cp OFF in Free Cooling.

 Free cooling control is enabled when MF01>0 and all the following conditions are satisfied
(AND logic):
o Dry Cooler is disabled (MF11=0);
o Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is disabled (ML01=NO).
 External Air Temperature is read by TAE analog input.
 Free Cooling Temperature is read by TFC analog input.
5.2.4.1.1 Free Cooling activation

 Free cooling is acivated when TFC-TAE  MF02.
 Free cooling is deactivated when TFC-TAE  MF02 -MF03.
 If the probes (used for Free Cooling activation) TFC go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow
condition (open circuit) or TAE go in overflow condition (open circuit) then:
o Free cooling control is deactivated ;
o Message: ” ALARM MASTER XXX TR. OUT OF RANGE”.
 If the RWT/LWT probe (used to read the temperature for Valve control and Fan control) go in
underflow or overflow condition then Free cooling control is deactivated.
 Free Cooling status is replicated on digital output FC_STS:
o FC_STS=ON when free cooling is activated;
o FC_STS=OFF when free cooling is deactivated.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Free Cooling
Status
ON
OFF
MF02-MF03 MF02 TFC - TAE
5.2.4.1.1.1 Free Cooling manual control

This option allows to forced on/off the status of free cooling by a setup parameter.
MF01: Free Cooling manual control:
0= manual control disabled ;
1= forced ON;
2= forced OFF.

 Free Cooling manual control is enabled when MF01>0.
 If MF01=1 then:
o Free cooling is forced ON independently from the value of TAE and TFC;
o On the Free Cooling screen is showed the status “F-ON”
 If MF01=2 then:
o Free cooling is forced OFF independently from the value of TAE and TFC;
o On the Free Cooling screen is showed the status “F-OFF”.
Notes
In the normal conditions this function must be disabled (i.e. MF01=0).
5.2.4.1.2 Free Cooling Valve management

 Free cooling valve is driven with 0-10Vdc signal by FCV analog output.
 When free cooling control is activated then the Free Cooling Valve is controlled by Proportional
Control:
o To control free cooling valve the temperature used is:
 Return Water Temperature (RWT) if MF09=0;
 Temperature Control (TC) for water temperature if MF09=1.
o If SP is reference temperature for Free Cooling control, then minimum opening of valve at
the temperature SP-MF04.
o if SP is reference temperature for Free Cooling control, then maximum opening of valve at
the temperature SP-(MF04-MF05).
Free cooling
valve opening
100%
0%
SP-MF04 (SP-MF04) + MF05 SP T controlled

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4.1.3 Fans management in Free Cooling

 The fans used on the temperature control are used also on free cooling control.
 When free cooling control is activated then the fans of the single circuits is controlled by
discrete or continuous Proportional Control.
 To control fan speed in Free Cooling the temperature used is:
o Return Water Temperature (RWT) if MF09=0;
o Temperature Control (TC) for water temperature if MF09=1.
 If SP is reference temperature for Free Cooling control, then minimum speed of fans at the
temperature SP-MF06.
 If SP is reference temperature for Free Cooling control, then maximum speed of fan at the
temperature SP -(MF06-MF07).
 If the one or more compressors are switched on and free cooling activated, then the fans
speed is controlled:
o on the discharge pressure of its refrigerating circuit if MC21=0 (i.e. Compressors
priority);
o on the regulation water temperature if MC21=1 (i.e. Free Cooling priority).
 If free cooling activated with Compressors priority (MC21=0) and one compressor must be
switched on, then the fans of the circuit are not switched on until the discharge pressure not
reach the set point MD03 for fans control (i.e. the fans are not switched on MC60 seconds
before the compressor switch on).
FAN speed
100%
50%
0%
SP-MF06 (SP-MF06) + MF07 SP T controlled
5.2.4.1.4 Forcing Compressors OFF in Free Cooling

MF10: External Air Temperature value for Forcing Cp OFF in Free Cooling.

 If free cooling control is activated and External Air Temperature (TAE) < MF10 then:
o on the main screen cooling value is set to 0%;
o on the Free Cooling screen TAE value blink.
 Forcing Compressors OFF function is deactivated when TAE > MF10+3°F.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4.2 Free Cooling with Dry Cooler

This option allows to control the free cooling with a Dry Cooler.
0= disabled;
1= forced ON;
2= forced OFF;
MF11: Dry Cooler manager:
0 = no dry cooler;
1 = dry cooler enabled with FAN control on Outlet Dry Cooler temperature in chiller mode;
2 = dry cooler enabled with FAN control on Discharge Pressure in chiller mode.
MF12: Set Dry Cooler temperature in chiller mode (i.e. digital input SETP_SEL is OFF).
MF13: Differential Dry Cooler temperature in chiller mode (i.e. digital input SETP_SEL is OFF).
MF06: Set point offset for FAN control when Free Cooling activated.
MF07: Differential for FAN control when Free Cooling activated.

 Dry Cooler management is enabled when MF11>0 and all the following conditions are satisfied
(AND logic):
o Free Cooling enabled (MF01>0);
o Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is disabled (ML01=NO).
 Inlet Dry Cooler Temperature (i.e. Outlet Condenser Temp.) is read by IDT analog input.
 Outlet Dry Cooler Temperature (i.e. Inlet Condenser Temp.) is read by ODT analog input.
 IDT and ODT values are showed in the Free Cooling screen.
 The selection of Chiller/Free cooling mode is made by FC_SEL digital input:
o If FC_SEL is OFF then Chiller mode is selected;
o If FC_SEL is ON then Free Cooling mode is selected.
5.2.4.2.1 Chiller mode

If Chiller mode is selected then following assumptions are made:
 If MF11=1 the FANS speed of all compressors is controlled by Outlet Dry Cooler Temperature
(ODT):
o The fans go to minimum speed when ODT = MF12-MF13;
o The fans go to maximum speed when ODT = MF12;
o Fan speed value is showed on the Free Cooling screen.
FAN speed
100%
50%
0%
MF12-MF13 MF12 Outlet Dry Cooler Temp.
 If MF11=2 then the FANS speed is controlled in standard mode by means of Discharge
Pressure (DP) of each compressor.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4.2.2 Free Cooling mode

If Free Cooling mode is selected then following assumptions are made:
 All the compressors are switched off with pump down procedure.
 Free Cooling valve (if used) is controlled like in standard Free Cooling control (see Cap.
5.2.4.1.2).
 FANS speed control is made like in standard Free Cooling control (see Cap. 5.2.4.1.3) with the
difference that the control is made on the Outlet Dry Cooler temperature (ODT) instead of the
temperature controlled (TC):
o If SP is reference temperature for Free Cooling control, then minimum speed of fans
at the temperature SP-MF06.
o If SP is reference temperature for Free Cooling control, then maximum speed of fan
at the temperature SP -(MF06-MF07);
o Fan speed value is showed on the Free Cooling screen.
FAN speed
100%
50%
0%
SP-MF06 (SP-MF06) + MF07 SP Outlet Dry Cooler Temp.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4.3 Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps (LPA)

This option allows to control the Free Cooling with the Liquid Pumps.
0= disabled;
1= forced ON;
2= forced OFF;
ML01: Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps enable.
ML02: Ambient Temperature (TAE) for Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps activaction.
ML03: TAE differential for Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps deactivaction.
ML04: Cooling percentage for Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps activaction.
ML05: Cooling differential for Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps deactivaction.
ML06: Delay time used for Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps control.
ML07: Cooling percentage for Liquid Pumps restart when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is
activated.
ML08: Compressor capacity for Liquid Pumps restart when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is
deactivated (i.e. cooling mode).
ML09: EEV opening when for Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps activated.
ML10: Delay time after Bypass Solenoid (BPS) activaction/deactivaction in Free Cooling with
Liquid Pumps.
ML11: EEV increasing opening in LPU starting procedure when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps
activated.
ML12: Wait time in LPU starting procedure when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps activated.
ML13: Number of LPU on/off executed in the LPU starting cycle when Free Cooling with Liquid
Pumps activated.
ML14: LPU On time used in the LPU starting cycle when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps
activated.
ML15: LPU Off time used in the LPU starting cycle when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps
activated.
ML16: Maximum number of LPU starting cycle when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps activated.
ML17: Liquid Pump Differential Pressure (LPD) used to enter in LPU fixed ON state.
ML18: Liquid Pump Differential Pressure (LPD) used to exit from LPU fixed ON state.
ML19: EEV start increase opening when LPU is fixed on and Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is
activated.
ML20: EEV maximum opening when LPU is fixed on and Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is
activated.
ML21: FAN speed when LPU is fixed on and Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is activated
(0= FAN control with linear interpolation).
ML22: EEV proportional band used when LPU is fixed on and Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is
activated.

 Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps (LPA) is enabled when ML01=YES. For the right working all
the following condition must be satisfied (AND logic):
o Dry Cooler is disabled (MF11=0).
 External Air Temperature is read by probe TAE analog input.
 Liquid Pumps are related to each circuit and controlled by:
o LPU1 digital output for first circuit;
o LPU2 digital output for second circuit.
o LPU status is showed on the fourth row of First Compressors screens (0=OFF,
1=ON).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 Bypass Solenoids are related to each circuit and controlled by:

o BPS1 digital output for first circuit;
o BPS2 digital output for second circuit.
o BPS status is showed on the fourth row of First Compressors screens (0=OFF,
1=ON).
 Liquid Pump Inlet Pressure (LPI) is related to each circuit and read by:
o LPI1 analog input for first circuit;
o LPI2 analog input for second circuit;
o LPI value is showed on First Compressors screens;
 Liquid Pump Outlet Pressure (LPO) is related to each circuit and read by:
o LPO1 analog input, configure as 4-20mA, for first circuit;
o LPO2 analog input, configure as 4-20mA, for second circuit;
o LPO value is showed on First Compressors screens;
 Liquid Pump Differential Pressure (LPD) is related to each circuit and calculated as:
o LPD1= LPO1-LPI1, for first circuit;
o LPD2= LPO2-LPI2, for second circuit;
 General informations about Free Cooling control are showed on Free Cooling screen.
 The status of different circuit devices (LPA, BPS, EEV, FAN) is showed on First Compressors
screens.
The control logic details is described on next paragraphs.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4.3.1 Free Cooling activaction/deactivaction (LPA)

 The system can work in three different way:
o FC_OFF= Free Cooling deactivated:
machine capacity is controlled with compressors only (CPs).
o FC_ON= Free Cooling activated with liquid pumps (LPAs) only:
machine capacity is controlled with LPAs only.
o FC_HYBRID= Free Cooling activated in hybrid control mode:
machine capacity is controlled with CPs and LPAs.
 The control works with a state logic machine based on:
o External Air Temperature (TAE) value;
o COOLING machine value (COOL).
 Free Cooling status (FC_STATUS) is controlled with following logic:
o FC_OFF
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs Temp. Control
BPS ON In all circuits
LPU ON If in the circuit is present at least one compressor with
actual capacity > ML08%.
OFF If in the circuit all the compressors are switched off.
EEV Liquid level / See par. 5.4.3
supH control
FAN Discharge See par. 5.4.2
Press. control
 Status change conditions:

 IF
[TAE<ML02 AND COOL<ML04+ML05-5] for at least ML06 sec
THEN
the system go to FC_HYBDRID status.
o FC_HYBRID
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs Temp. Control
BPS ON If atleast a cp switched on in the circuit
OFF If all CPs off in the circuit
LPU ON If atleast a cp switched on in the circuit
LPA control If all CPs off in the circuit
logic (see par. 5.2.4.3.2)
EEV Liquid level / If atleast a cp switched on in the circuit
supH control (see par. 5.4.3)
FAN Discharge If atleast a cp switched on in the circuit
Press. control (see par. 5.4.2)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

 IF
[TAE>ML02+ML03 OR COOL>=ML04+ML05] for at least ML06 sec
THEN
the system go to FC_OFF status
 IF
[TAE<ML02 AND COL<ML04] for at least ML06 seconds
THEN
the system go to FC_ON status.
o FC_ON
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs OFF In all circuits
BPS OFF In all circuits
LPU LPA control In all circuits
EEV LPA control In all circuits
FAN LPA control In all circuits

 IF
[TAE>ML02+ML03 OR COOL>=ML04+ML05] for at least ML06 sec
THEN
the system go to FC_OFF status.
 IF
[TAE<ML02 AND COOL>=ML04+5] for at least ML06 seconds
THEN
the system go to FC_ON status.
 If TAE probe go in overflow condition (open circuit) then:

o Free cooling control is deactivated (i.e. the system go to FC_OFF status);
o Message: ” ALARM MASTER TAE TR. OUT OF RANGE”.
Following graph resumed the logic of control when TAE<ML02 (i.e TAE condition always satisfied).
System
Status
FC_OFF
(CP)
FC_HYBRID
(CP + LPA)
FC_ON
(LPA)
ML04 ML04+5 ML04+ML05-5 ML04+ML05 100 Cooling (%)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Below is reported the flowchart that resume the logic of control.
FC_OFF
(i.e. Cooling mode)
CP= temp. control
BPS= ON (in all circuits)
LPU= ON if at least a cp on in circ
OFF (if all cp off in circuit)
EEV= Liquid level / supH control
FAN= Discharge Press. control
TAE<ML02 TAE>ML02+ML03
AND OR
COOL<ML04+ML05-5 COOL>=ML04+ML05
for ML06 sec for ML06 sec
FC_HYBRID
CP= temp. control
If at least a cp on in circuit: TAE>ML02+ML03

BPS= ON OR
COOL>=ML04+ML05
LPU= ON for ML06 sec
EEV= Liquid level / supH control
If all cp off in circuit:

BPS= OFF
LPU= LPA control
EEV= LPA control
FAN= LPA control
TAE<ML02 TAE<ML02
AND AND
COOL<ML04 COOL>=ML04+5
for ML06 sec for ML06 sec
FC_ON
CP= OFF
BPS=OFF (in all circuits)
LPU= special control (see below)
EEV= special control (see below)
FAN= special control (see below)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.4.3.2 LPA control logic

 LPA control logic is replicated in each circuit.
 LPA control works with a state logic machine based on:
o Free Cooling status (FC_STATUS, see par. 5.2.4.3.1)
o Circuit status: the control checks if a cp switched on is present.
 LPA control status (LPA_STATUS) is controlled with following logic:
o LPA_OFF
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs Temp. Control
BPS ON
LPU ON If in the circuit is present at least one compressor with
actual capacity > ML08%.
OFF If in the circuit all the compressors are switched off.
supH control
FAN Discharge See par. 5.4.2
Press. control

 IF
FC_STATUS<>FC_OFF
AND
in the circuit all compressors are switched off
(i.e. CP_STATUS<> START, CM-ON, ON)
THEN
the control go to LPA_START status.
o LPA_START
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs OFF
BPS OFF
LPU OFF
EEV ML09%
FAN 0%

 IF
ML10 seconds are elapsed after that BPS is switched OFF
(for Bypass Solenoid actuaction),
THEN
the control go to LPA_CTR status.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o LPA_CTR
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs OFF
BPS OFF
LPU LPA-ON control See below fro more details.
logic On the Free Cooling screen is showed the status
“RDY”.
EEV LPA-ON control See below fro more details.
logic
FAN LPA-ON control See below fro more details.
logic

 IF
FC_STATUS = FC_OFF
OR
in the circuit is present at least a compressor switched on
(i.e. CP_STATUS = START, CM-ON, ON)
THEN
the control go to LPA_STOP status.
o LPA_STOP
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
CPs OFF
BPS ON
LPU OFF
supH control
FAN 0%

 IF
ML10 seconds are elapsed after that BPS is switched ON
(for Bypass Solenoid actuaction)
THEN
the system go to LPA_OFF status.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 When LPA_STATUS=LPA_CTR (see above) the LPU, EEV and FAN are controlled with a
special logic manged with a state logic machine.
 LPU control status (LPU_STATUS) is controlled with following logic:
o LPU_OFF
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
LPU OFF
EEV ML09%
FAN 0%

 IF
COOL>ML07%
AND
LPI, LPO probes are NOT in alarm condition
AND
LPU magneto-thermal breaker alarm is NOT activated
THEN
the control go to LPU_STARTING status.
o LPU_STARTING
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
LPU OFF
EEV ML09+ML11%
FAN 100%

 Wait ML12 seconds;
 IF
COOL>ML07%
OR
LPI, LPO probes are in alarm condition
OR
LPU magneto-thermal breaker alarm is activated
THEN
the control go to LPU_STARTING status
ELSE
the control go to LPU_ON_OFF_CYCLE status

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o LPU_ON_OFF_CYCLE
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
LPU OFF/ON cycle LPU is controlled executing until a maximum of ML16
LPU starting cycle where every starting cycle have
ML13 on/off:
- ML14 is the time that LPU is ON;
- ML15 is the time that LPU is OFF;
- LPU starting cycle starts always from OFF status;
- LPU starting cycle finish always with ON status.
EEV ML09%
FAN 100%
Starting Cycle #1 Starting Cycle #2

ML15 ML14
LPD check LPD check

 IF
COOL>ML07%
OR
OR
THEN
the control go to LPU_OFF status.
ELSE
at the end of each starting cycle the LPD is checked in each circuit:
- If LPD >= ML17 then the control go to LPU_ON status;
- If LPD < ML17 then:
 If less then ML16 LPU starting cycle are executed then a
new LPU starting cycle is executed;
 If ML16 LPU starting cycle are already executed then the
control go to LPU_STARTING status.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o LPU_ON
 Devices status:
Device Status Notes
LPU ON
EEV Special control EEV is controlled in each circuit with following logic:
 If LPD<=ML17 then EEV=ML09+ML19%;
 If LPD>=ML17+ML22 then EEV=ML20%;
 If ML17<LPD<ML17+ML22 then EEV is computed
using linear interpolation.
(see graphs below)
FAN Special control FANs are controlled in each circuit with following logic:
 If ML21>0 then:
o If COOLING=0% then FAN speed = 0%;
o If COOLING>0% then FAN speed =
ML21%;
 If ML21=0 then:
o If COOLING=0% then FAN speed is 0%;
o If COOLING>=ML04+ML05% then FAN
speed = 100%;
o If 0<COOLING<ML04+ML05% then FAN
speed is computed using linear
interpolation.
(see graphs below)
FAN
Speed
100
ML04+ML05 100 Cooling Demand (%)

EEV
(%)
ML20
ML09+ML19
ML17 ML17+ML22 LPD

 IF
COOL>ML07%
OR
OR
THEN
the control go to LPU_OFF status.
ELSE IF
LPD < ML18 then then the control go to LPU_STARTING status.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Below are reported the flowcharts that resume the logic of control.
LPA_OFF
CP= temp. control

BPS= ON
LPU= ON
(If in the circuit is present at least
one CP with actual capacity >
ML08%)
OFF
FC_STATUS<>FC_OFF (If in the circuit all the CPs are
AND switched off)
ALL CP OFF IN CIRCUIT EEV= liquid level / supH control Wait ML10 sec
LPA_START LPA_STOP
CP= OFF CP= OFF

BPS=OFF BPS=ON
LPU= OFF LPU= OFF
EEV= ML09% EEV= Liquid level / supH control
FAN= 0% FAN= 0%
FC_STATUS=FC_OFF
Wait ML10 sec OR
AT LEAST A CP ON IN CIRCUIT
LPA_CTR
CP= OFF
BPS=OFF
LPU= special control (see below)
EEV= special control (see below)
FAN= special control (see below)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
LPA_CTR
NO
LPU_OFF COOL > ML07%

COOL= 0% AND
OR Probe LPI/LPO ok
Probe LPI/LPO ko LPU= OFF AND
OR EEV= ML09% No LPU-MT alarm
LPU-MT alarm
FAN= 0%
YES
LPU_STARTING
LPU= OFF
EEV= ML09+ML11%
FAN= 100%
ML12 sec elapsed
YES
LPU_ONOFF_CYCLE
LPU= ON/OFF
(Nr_OnOff = ML13 LPD > ML17 NrLpuStarting
ON_Time = ML14 < ML16
NO NO
OFF_Time = ML15)
EEV= ML09%
FAN= 100%
YES
YES
LPU_ON
LPD < ML18
NO LPU= ON (fixed)
EEV= Linear control
(Eev_Min = ML09+ML19
Eev_Max = ML20
LPD_Band = ML22)
FAN= ML21% (or lin-ctr)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.5 PUMPS management

This section explain the control logic of Pumps.
Two different kind of pumps are managed:
 Internal Pumps
 External Pumps
5.2.5.1 INTERNAL PUMPS
5.2.5.1.1 PUMPS control

MP01: Pumps management:
0= no pump;
1= pump#1 only;
2= pump#1 + pump#2;
3= pump#1 + pump#2 with rotation;
4= pump#1 OFF if all Cp Off;
5= pump#1 + pump#2 OFF if all Cp Off;
6= pump#1 + pump#2 OFF with rotation if all Cp Off;
7= pump#1 + pump#2 with rotation – new logic (same logic used when MP01=3 but with
one try rotation before The evaporator water pressures are read by the channels IWPn
and OWPn (x=1,2): if a probe go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop alarm is
automatically activated.
Low Evaporators Drop or Flow Switch Alarm);
8= pump#1 + pump#2 OFF if all Cp Off with rotation – new logic (same logic used when
MP01=6 but with one try rotation before The evaporator water pressures are read by
the channels IWPn and OWPn (x=1,2): if a probe go to alarm condition then Evaporators
Drop alarm is automatically activated.
Low Evaporators Drop or Flow Switch Alarm).
MP03: Rotation time of the pumps in hours (used when MP01=3,6,7,8).
MP04: Switch off time of the pumps after the machine is switched off.

 Pumps management is enabled when MP01>0.
 If in the Pumps screen is showed “PUMPS AVAILABLE: 0” then pumps management is
enabled but digital outputs FAN#3 are already used for other functions.
 First pump is connected to PUMP1 digital output;
 Second pump (if enabled) is connected to PUMP2 digital output.
 If MP01=1,2,3 then the logic of pumps depends from the status of the machine and the
compressors:
o If MP01=1 then only pump#1 is used.
o If MP01=2 then pump#1 and pump#2 are used.
o If MP01=3 then pump#1 and pump#2 are used with rotation every MP03 hours.
o When the system is switched on (pressing ON/OFF key) then the enabled pumps are
switched on.
o If pumps rotation is not used (MP01=1,2) and one or more pumps go to alarm then the
system is halted.
o If pumps rotation is used (MP01=3) following assumption are made:
 if the pump switched on go to alarm then the other pump is switched on;
 if both pumps are in alarm condition then the system is halted;
o If pumps management is enabled (MP01<>0) and the “anti-freeze alarm” condition occur,
then the used pumps are not switched off.
o If the machine is switched off then the pumps are switched off after MP04 seconds that all

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
the compressors are switched off.

 If MP01=4,5,6 then the logic of pumps depends from the status of the compressors only:
o If MP01=4 then only pump#1 is used.
o If MP01=5 then pump#1 and pump#2 are used.
o If MP01=6 then pump#1 and pump#2 are used with rotation every MP03 hours.
o When at least one compressor is switched on then the pumps used are switched on with
the Fans (i.e. MC60 seconds before that the first compressor is switched on).
o If pumps rotation is not used (MP01=4,5) and one or more pumps go to alarm then the
system is halted.
o If pumps rotation is used (MP01=6) following assumption are made:
 if the switch on pump go to alarm then the other pump is switched on;
 if both pumps are in alarm condition then the system is halted;
o If all the compressors are switched off then the pumps are switched off after MP04
seconds.
 If MP01=7,8 then pumps rotation with new logic is used and respect to the standard pumps
rotation (MP01=3,6) is executed also the following special function:
o in the Flow Switch Alarm OR The evaporator water pressures are read by the channels
IWPn and OWPn (x=1,2): if a probe go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop alarm is
automatically activated.
o Low Evaporators Drop are activated, then the delay time is twice respect to normal logic
(2*YY seconds with MV02=XXYY);
o after the first YY seconds that alarm condition is in act, the pumps rotation is executed;
o after 2*YY seconds that alarm condition is in act, then the relative alarm is activated (i.e.
pumps and compressors are switched off).
5.2.5.1.2 Pumps Manual Control

The logic of Pumps Manual Control is described on the par.5.1.5.
5.2.5.1.3 Forcing Pumps On for Anti-freeze Limitation

This function allows to forcing on all the enabled pumps when the Ambient Temperature (TAE) go
below a prefixed value. The function is used for Antifreeze Limitation.
MM10: TAE/RH probes manager for auxiliary functions:
6 = Ambient Temperature (TA) and Forcing Pumps On for Antifreeze Limitation.
MP05: TAE value for Anti-freeze limitation activation.
MP06: Differential temp. for Anti-freeze limitation deactivation.

 The function is enabled when MM10=6 and the pumps are enabled (MP01>0).
 Ambient Temperature is read by TA analog input and its value is showed in Second screen.
 The function working with following logic:
o The function is activated when TA < MP05 and the pumps are switched off (i.e. machine off
when MP01=1,2,3,7 or compressors off when MP01=4,5,6,8).
o The function is deactivated when TA > MP05+MP06 or the pumps are switched on for the
normal control (i.e. machine on when MP01=1,2,3,7 or compressors on when
MP01=4,5,6,8).
 If the function is activated then:
o All the used pumps are forced on;
o On the main screen of LCD user, the machine status (“MACHINE OFF”, “COOLING”…) is
alternated with “PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM” string.
 If the function is deactivated then:
o Wait MP04 seconds;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o All the used pumps are switched off;

 If TA probe go in underflow or overflow condition then the function is disabled.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.5.1.4 Internal Pump Controlled By Inverter

This option allows to control the internal pumps by inverter using an analog output (ex. 0-10Vdc
signal).
MP07: Internal Pump controlled with inverter:
0= disabled;
1= enabled with control on Evap. Flow;
2= enabled with control on RWT.
MP08: Internal Pump minimum voltage for inverter demand = 0%.
MP09: Internal Pump maximum voltage for inverter demand = 100%.
MP10: Setpoint used for Inverter Pump control by Evap. Flow Rate.
MP11: Proportional Band used Inverter Pump control by Evap. Flow Rate.
MP12: Integral Time used for Inverter Pump control by Evap. Flow Rate.
MP13: Setpoint used for Inverter Pump control by RWT.
MP14: Proportional Band used Inverter Pump control by RWT.
MP15: Integral Time used for Inverter Pump control by RWT.

 The function is enabled when MP07>0 with Pumps enabled (MP01>0).
 The internal pump is controlled by inverter using IPU analog output (ex. 0-10Vdc signal).
o The minimum voltage for 0% of speed is set by setup parameter MP08;
o The maximum voltage for 100% of speed is set by setup parameter MP09.
 The inverter demand percentage can be controlled in two different way:
o If MP07=1 and the Evaporators Flow Rate (FLOW) is available (MV03=YES, see
par.5.2.6.2.2) then the inverter demand is computed using a PI control based on FLOW
(logic: demand increase when FLOW decrease) and following parameters:
 MP10 is the Setpoint;
 MP11 is the Proportional Band;
 MP12 is the Integral Time.
o If MP07=2 and SPLIT Unit is disabled (MV01<3) then the inverter demand is computed
using a PI control based on RWT (logic: demand increase when RWT increase) and
following parameters:
 MP13 is the Setpoint;
 MP14 is the Proportional Band;
 MP15 is the Integral Time.
If RWT probe goes in alarm condition (underflow or overflow) then the inverter demand is
set to 0%.
 The control is activated when at least one pump is switched on (see par. 5.2.5.1.1).
 The inverter demand is set to 0% in one of following condition (OR logic):
o It is present a General alarm that lock the internal pumps (see par. 5.5.1);
o All the enabled internal pumps are in alarm or switched off.
 The Internal Pumps demand for Inverter control (IPU) is showed in the Pumps screen.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.5.2 EXTERNAL PUMPS
5.2.5.2.1 External Pump Controlled By Inverter

This option allows to control an external pump by inverter using an analog output (ex. 0-10Vdc
signal).
MX01: External Pump controlled with inverter:
0= disabled;
1= enabled with control on Cooling;
MX02: External Pump minimum voltage for inverter demand = 0%.
MX03: External Pump maximum voltage for inverter demand = 100%
MX04: Setpoint used for External Pump controlled by inverter.
MX05: Proportional Band used for External Pump controlled by inverter.
MX06: Integral Time used for External Pump controlled by inverter.

 The function is enabled when MX01>0.
 The external pump is controlled by inverter using a 0-10Vdc available on EPU analog output:
o The minimum voltage for 0% of speed is set by setup parameter MX02;
o The maximum voltage for 100% of speed is set by setup parameter MX03.
 The demand percentage can be controlled in two different way:
o If MX01=1 then the inverter demand correspond to cooling machine value (see par.
5.2.1.1.1.1).
If probe used for temperature control (LWT if MT06=0, RWT if MT06=1) goes in alarm
condition (underflow or overflow) then the inverter demand is set to 0%.
o If MX01=2 then the inverter demand is computed using a PI control based on RWT (logic:
demand increase when RWT increase) and following parameters:
 MX04 is the Setpoint;
 MX05 is the Proportional Band;
 MX06 is the Integral Time.
If RWT probe goes in alarm condition (underflow or overflow) then the inverter demand is
set to 0%.
 The control is activated after that starting machine procedure is terminated (i.e when
Temperature Control is activated).
 The inverter demand is set to 0% in one of following condition (OR logic):
o When the machine working in Heating mode (see par. 5.2.2);
o When is present a General alarm that lock the internal pumps (see par.5.5.1)
 The External Pumps demand (EPU) is showed in the Second screen in alternation with HGBS
status.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.6 EVAPORATORS CONTROLS
5.2.6.1 TWO BARRELS management

MV01: Barrel type:
0= one barrel;
2= two barrels in series.

 Two barrels (i.e. two evaporators) management is enabled when MV01=1,2.
 Evaporation Temperature on the first barrel is read by EV1T analog input.
 Evaporation Temperature on the second barrel is read by EV2T analog input.
 If Two Barrels is enabled and more than two compressors are used (MC01>2) then:
o Antifreeze alarm is managed with following logic:
 if min(LWT, RWT, EV1T, EV2T) < MT22 then all compressors are switched off (see
par.5.5.1.2).
 If Two Barrels is enabled and two compressors are used (MC01=2) then:
o Antifreeze alarm is managed with following logic:
 if min(LWT, RWT) < MT22 then all compressors are switched off (see par. 5.5.1.2);
 if EV1T < MT22 then compressor#1 is switched off (see par. 5.5.2.7);
 if EV2T < MT22 then compressor#2 is switched off (see par. 5.5.2.7).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.6.2 EVAPORATORS monitoring
5.2.6.2.1 Evaporator Water Pressure

MV03: Evaporator Water Pressure option enabled.
MV01: Barrel type:
0= one barrel;

 Evaporator Water Pressure option is enabled when MV03=YES.
 Following pressures are read;
o Inlet Water Pressure of first Evaporator is read by IWP1 analog input.
Following settings are required:
 minimum value of IWP1 is set by IM22 setup parameter;
 maximum value of IWP1 is set by IM23 setup parameter.
o Outlet Water Pressure of first Evaporator is read by OWP1 analog input.
 minimum value of OWP1 is set by IM25 setup parameter;
 maximum value of OWP1 is set by IM26 setup parameter.
 If two barrels option is ued (MV01=1,2) then:
o Inlet Water Pressure of second Evaporator is read by IWP2 analog input.
 minimum value of IWP2 is set by IM31 setup parameter
 maximum value of IWP2 is set by IM32 setup parameter.
o Outlet Water Pressure of second Evaporator is read by OWP2 analog input.
 minimum value of OWP1 is set by IM34 setup parameter;
 maximum value of OWP1 is set by IM35 setup parameter.
 The values of IWP, OWP and IWP-OWP are showed on the Evaporators screens.
 Following alarms are controlled:
o High Evaporators Drop alarm;
o Low Evaporators Drop ;
o High Evaporators Drop warning;
o Low Evaporators Drop warning.
5.2.6.2.2 Evaporators Water Flow Rate

This option allows the computation of water flow rate in each evaporator.
MV06: Nominal Pressure Drop of Evaporators.
MV07: Nominal Flow Rate of Evaporators.
MH25: Nominal Flow Rate of Evaporators in heating mode.

 Evaporators Water Flow Rate visualization is enabled when the Evaporator Water Pressure is
enabled (MV03=YES).
 The actual flow rate (Qa) is computed as function of nominal flow rate (Qn=MV07) and nominal
pressure drop (PDn=MV06) and actual pressure drop (PDa=IWP-OWP - for details see
cap.5.2.6.2.1), by the following formula:
Qa = square root [ Qn2 * (PDa / PDn) ]

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 When the machine working in heat mode (see par. 5.2.2) then the nominal flow rate is specified
by setup parameter MH25 instead of MV07.
 The value of actual flow rate in each evaporator is showed on the Evaporators screens.
5.2.6.3 FLOODED EVAPORATOR management

ME01: Electronic Expansion Valve and Free Cooling management:
1 = EEV enabled through Anout, no FC;
2 = EEV enabled through serial, no FC;
ME02: EEV mode selection:
MH24: EEV mode selection in heating mode:

 Flooded Evaporator management is enabled when ME02=3 or MH24=3 and the EEV board is
connected via serial line (ME01=2).
 Liquid level on evaporator is read by a ratiometric transducer (0-5V) connected to ELLx (x=1,2)
analog input.
 Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL) is showed on the First Compressors screens.
 Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL) is controlled by means an EEV with like a PID controller (see
par. 5.4.3.3.2).
 If Heat Recovery mode is activated (see par. 5.2.2.4) then the used set point is MH19 instead
of ME11.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.7 CONDENSER CONTROLS
5.2.7.1 CONDENSER monitoring
5.2.7.1.1 Condenser Temperatures visualization

This option allows to show the inlet/outlet temperatures of condenser.
0 = no set point correction;
1 = Return Temperature Reset (RR);
2 = Ambient Temperature Set Point correction (AT);
3 = Analog Input Set Point correction (AI);
4 = Inlet/Outlet Condenser Temperatures visualization (CT).
B109: Board 1, configuration for probe RH (0=PTC, 1=4÷20mA)

 Inlet/Outlet Condenser visualization is enabled when MM10=4 and all the following conditions
are satisfied (AND logic):
o Remote setpoint disabled (MT07<3);
o Free Cooling disabled (MF01=0);
o Heating mode in Water/Water machine disabled (MH01<>2,3).
 Outlet Condenser Temperature is read by OCT analog input;
 Inlet Condenser Temperature is read by ICT analog input.
 The values of OCT and ICT are showed in the Second screen.
5.2.7.1.2 Condenser Water Pressures

MN06: Condenser Water Pressure option enabled
IM45: Inlet Condenser Press. (ICP) channel, min. value.
IM46: Inlet Condenser Press. (ICP) channel, max. value.
IM48: Outlet Condenser Press. (OCP) channel, min. value.
IM49: Outlet Condenser Press. (OCP) channel, max. value.

 Condenser Water Pressure option is enabled when MN06=YES.
 Following pressures are read;
o Inlet Water Pressure of Condenser is read by ICP analog input.
 minimum value of ICP is set by IM45 setup parameter;
 maximum value of ICP is set by IM46 setup parameter.
o Outlet Water Pressure of Condenser is read by OCP analog input.
 minimum value of OCP is set by IM48 setup parameter;
 maximum value of OCP is set by IM49 setup parameter.
 The values of ICP, OCP and ICP-OCP are showed on the Condenser screen.
 Following alarms are controlled:
o High Condenser Drop alarm;
o Low Condenser Drop alarm.
o High Condenser Drop warning;
o Low Condenser Drop warning.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.7.1.3 Condenser Water Flow Rate

This option allows the computation of water flow rate in each evaporator.
MN06: Condenser Water Pressure option enabled
MN09: Nominal Pressure Drop of Condenser
MN10: Nominal Flow Rate of Condenser
MH26: Nominal Flow Rate of Condenser in heating mode.

 Condenser Water Flow Rate visualization is enabled when the Condenser Water Pressure is
enabled (MN06=YES).
 The actual flow rate (Qa) is computed as function of nominal flow rate (Qn=MN10) and nominal
pressure drop (PDn=MN09) and actual pressure drop (PDa=ICP-OCP - for details see par.
5.2.7.1.2), by the following formula:
Qa = square root [ Qn2 * (PDa / PDn) ]
 When the machine working in heat mode (see par. 5.2.2) then the nominal flow rate is specified
by setup parameter MH26 instead of MN10.
 The value of actual flow rate in the condenser is showed on the Condenser screen.
5.2.7.2 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER management

This option allows to control an Evaporative Condenser.
MN01: Evaporative Condenser control:
0=disabled;
1=enabled.
MN02: Offset pressure for Adiabatic Pump activaction.
MN03: Differential pressure for Adiabatic Pump deactivaction.
MN04: Setpoint for Evap.Condenser Heaters activaction.
MN05: Differential for Evap.Condenser Heaters deactivaction.
MD03: Set point for Discharge Pressure control.
(NOTE: used when SETP_DP_SEL digital input is ON)
MD04: Second Set point for Discharge Pressure control.
(NOTE: used when SETP_DP_SEL digital input is OFF)

 Evaporative Condenser control is enabled when MN01=1 and one of following conditions is
satisfied (OR logic):
o Free Cooling disabled (MF01=0) and TA probe used to control the Heaters on
Evap.Condenser (MM10=5).
 Following digital output are used:
o APU_EC to control Adiabatic Pump;
o HEA_EC to control Evaporative Condenser;
 Following digital input are used:
o LWL_EC for Water Level in Evap. Condenser alarm;
o APU_CB for Adiabatic Pump breaker alarm;
o HEA_PROT for Evap. Condenser Heaters protection.
 Following analog input are used:
o Ambient Temperature (Tamb), used to control the Heaters, is read by:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 TAE probe when Free Cooling is enabled (MF01>0);

 TA probe when Free Cooling is disabled (MF01=0) and TA probe used to
control the Heaters on Evap.Condenser (MM10=5).
 Adiabatic Pump (APU) is controlled according to the maximum value of Discharge Press.
(DPmax) among the DP values of switched on compressors:
o APU is switched on when DPmax > DPset+MN02 and at least 1 cp is switched on;
o APU is switched off when DPmax < DPset+MN02-MN03 or all the cp are switched off or
the system is halted for alarm conditions;
o DPset is the setpoint used in Discharge Pressure control and it is selected with
following logic (for more details see see par.5.4.2):
 DPset=MD03 if SETP_DP_SEL digital input is ON;
 DPset=MD04 if SETP_DP_SEL digital input is OFF.
 Evaporative Condenser Heaters (HEA) are controlled according to the value of Ambient Temp.
(TA) and the status of Adiabatic Pump (APU):
o HEA is switched on when Tamb < MN04;
o HEA is switched off when Tamb > MN04+MN05;
o HEA is forced off in one of following conditions (OR logic):
 Machine is OFF;
 APU is switched on;
 Water Level in Evap. Condenser alarm is activate;
o HEA is forced on when Tamb probe alarm is active, but only if HEA is not forced off.
 Condensing Fans are controlled in standard mode (see par.5.4.2).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.7.3 EVAP SYSTEM control

This option allows to manage an Adiabatic Condenser where the efficiency is increased spraied a
nebulized water in the condenser exchanger.
MA01: Evap System management:
0= Evap System disabled;
1= Evap System with pump;
2= Evap System without pump.
MA02: Ambient Temperature (TAE) value for Evap System activaction.
MA03: TAE differential for Evap System deactivaction.
MA04: Delay time for Evap System activaction/deactivaction
MA05: Discharge Press (DP) value for Evap System Sprayer activaction.
MA06: DP differential for Evap System Sprayer deactivaction.
MA07: Evap System Sprayer ON time.
MA08: Evap System Sprayer OFF time (0= Sprayer always ON).
MA09: Relative Humidity (RH) value for Evap System activaction (0= RH sensor disabled)
MA10: RH differential for Evap System deactivaction
Following assumtions are made:

 Evap System control is enabled when MA01>0.
 Evap System can works in two different ways:
o If MA01=1 then the Evap System working with a pump that pressuring the water in the
sprayers;
o If MA01=2 then the Evap System working without a pump that pressuring the water in
the sprayers (i.e. the pressure is the some of water).
 Following analog inputs are used:
o TAE to read the External Air Temperature;
o RH to read External Air Relative Humidity (only if MA09>0). Following settings are
required:
 minimum value of analog input (4mA) is set by IM40 setup parameter;
 maximum value of analog input (20mA) is set by IM41 setup parameter.
 Following digital outputs are used:
o ES_SPRn (n=1,2) to control the Evap System Sprayer present in each circuit;
o ES_MOT is used to control the Evap System Motor for the insertion of cardboard
batteries in evaporator exchangers.
 Following digital inputs are used:
o ES_PU_FLTn (n=1,2) to read fault status of Evap System Pump present in each circuit
(used only when MA01=1).
 Evap System is controlled with following logic:
o Evap System control is activated when all the following conditions (AND logic) are
satisfied for at least MA04 seconds:
 TAE > MA02
 RH < MA09 (only if RH probe is enabled [i.e. MA09>0])
o Evap System control is deactivated when one of following conditions (OR logic) is
satisfied for at least MA04 seconds:
 TAE < MA02-MA03
 RH > MA09+MA10
o Evap System control is constantly deactivated (locked off) in one of following
conditions:
 TAE Probe alarm is active;
 RH Probe alarm is active.
o Evap System status is showed on Evap System screen.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.7.3.1 Evap System Sprayer control

Evap System Sprayer (ES_SPR) is controlled in each circuit with following logic:
 ES_SPR control is activated when all the following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
o Evap System control is activated (see condition above);
o Discharge Pressure (DP) > MA05 for more 10 seconds
(NOTE: DP = DPmax between the cp switched on in the circuit).
 ES_SPR control is deactivated in one of following conditions (OR logic):
o Evap System control is deactivated (see condition above);
o Discharge Pressure (DP) < MA05-MA06 for more 10 seconds
(NOTE: DP = DPmax between the cp switched on in the circuit).
 ES_SPR control is constantly deactivated (locked off) in one of following conditions (OR logic):
o All the cp in the circuit are switched off;
o Evap System Pump Fault alarm is active;
 When ES_SPR control is activated then the digital output ES_SPRn (n=1,2) are controlled with
ON/OFF logic:
o MA07 is the Sprayer ON time;
o MA08 is the Sprayer OFF time.
 When ES_SPR control is deactivated then the digital output ES_SPRn (n=1,2) is always OFF.
 The status of digital output ES_SPRn (n=1..6) is showed on Evap System screen.
5.2.7.3.2 Evap System Motor control

Evap System Motor (ES_MOT) is controlled with following logic:
 ES_MOT is switched on when Evap System control is activated (see conditions above);
 ES_MOT is switched off when Evap System control is deactivated (see conditions above);
 The status of digital output ES_MOT is showed on Evap System screen.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.8 PULSED HOT GAS BYPASS SOLENOIDS

MM11: HGBS digital output manager for auxiliary functions:
1 = Pulsed HGBS (period = 2*MM12);
MM12: Switching time of HGBS valve in pulsed mode

 HGBS digital output will be managed in pulsed mode when MM11=1.
 Setup parameter MM12 is the switching time, in seconds, of HGBS digital output.
 In every board (Master or Slave) the HGBS valve will work in pulsed mode, if at least one
compressor is switched on.
 When the pulsed mode is enabled, in the first MM12 seconds, the HGBS will be switched off.
 If both compressors of the single boards are switched off, the HGBS will be switched off.
5.2.9 COOLER HEATER WRAPPED management

2 = Cooler Heater Wrapped (CHW);
MM13: Set point for Cooler Heater Wrapped control.

 Cooler Heater Wrapped control is enabled when MM11=2 and Unit is switched OFF and Heat
Pump is disabled (MH01=0).
 Cooler Heater Wrapped is connected to CHW digital output;
 If the lowest temperature between LWT and RWT < MM13 then CHW is switched ON;
 If the lowest temperature between LWT and RWT > MM13 + 3°F then CHW is switched OFF;
 The status of CHW digital output is showed on the Second screen (see HGBS status).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.10 UNITS LEAD LAG

This function allows the lead lag between two units, a master and a slave.
0 = auxiliary functions disabled;
3 = Units Lead Lag (ULL).
MM14: Rotation time for the Units Lead Lag:
=0 then Slave Unit;
>0 then Master Unit.

 Units Lead Lag function is enabled when MM11=3.
 To select the Master Unit set MM14>0.
 To select the Slave Unit set MM14=0.
 MM14 act as the unit lead lag delay in hours, i.e. every MM14 hours operation is switched
between master and slave unit.
 SLAVE_UNIT_EN digital output (relay R7) in the master board of the master unit is used as the
slave unit enable with negative logic (i.e. relay energized means slave disabled); this output is
connected to EXEN digital input (A12) of slave unit.
 SLAVE_UNIT_STS digital input (A13) in the master board of master unit is used as the slave
feedback: slave unit is in alarm if no voltage is applied to input; this input is connected to
SLAVE_UNIT_AL digital output (relay R7) in the master board of slave unit.
 The status of SLAVE_UNIT_AL digital output in the slave unit, is energized in normal
operation, de-energized in alarm condition.
 The units states are: OFF, ON, STANDBY, ALARM.
 In ALARM state all the compressors are switched off for a compressor/circuit alarm
(Compressor Magneto-Thermal Breaker, High Pressure alarm…) or a general alarm (Anti-
Freeze alarm, Flow Switch Alarm….).
 If the master unit is OFF then the slave unit is constantly switched ON.
 The rotation of the units is normally managed if the units are in STANDBY or ON states.
 If the master unit is in STANDBY and the slave unit goes to alarm (slave relay alarm de-
energized) then the master is switch ON, the slave is switch in STANDBY and the rotation
hours timer is reset; this situation is maintained until the rotation hours (MM14) are elapsed.
 If the master unit is ON and goes to ALARM state, then the slave is switch ON, the master is
switched in STANDBY and the rotation hours timer is reset; this situation is maintained until the
rotation hours (MM14) are elapsed.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 Information of lead lag status is available in another LCD screen
Master Unit version

UNIT LEAD LAG STATUS
MASTER UNIT: XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX= OFF / ON /
STANDBY / ALARM
SLAVE UNIT: XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX= OFF / ON /
STANDBY / ALARM
H TO NEXT SWT: xxx
Slave Unit version

SLAVE UNIT: XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX= OFF / ON /
STANDBY / ALARM
5.2.10.1 Wiring diagram table

This table resune the wiring connection using the default I/O mapping.
MASTER UNIT SLAVE UNIT
L1 of master power supply 7C relay of master board

A13 master board digital input 7O relay of master board
L2 of master power supply is connected to AC
master board common of digital input
7C relay of master board L1 of slave power supply

7O relay of master board A12 master board digital input
L2 of slave power supply is connected to AC
master board common of digital input

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.10.2 Schematic interconnection

This schematic interconnection is made considering the default I/O mapping.
L1
L2
7C 7O A12 AC
MASTER UNIT SLAVE UNIT

(Master Board) (Master Board)
AC A13 7O 7C
L1
L2
5.2.10.3 Notes for the troubleshooting

1. At startup of two Units, if anyone alarm is present in Unit#1 (Master Unit) and the
interconnection between Units is corrected, then:
 Master Unit is on (relay R7 of Master Board is not energized);
 Master Unit lead lag status:

MASTER UNIT: ON
SLAVE UNIT: STANDBY
H TO NEXT SWT: 1H
 Slave Unit is in standby (relay R7, 7O-7C, of Master Board is not energized);
 Slave Unit lead lag status:
SLAVE UNIT: STANDBY
 On the first screen on Slave Unit is showed the status “LOCK: REMOTE OFF”.
2. If Master Unit is on and Slave Unit in standby and the connector R7 of Master Board – Master

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Unit is disconnected then digital input A12 of Master Board – Slave Unit is not energized and so
Slave Unit is forced to On status.
SLAVE UNIT: ON
This operation allows to check if some alarms is present in the Slave Unit.
When the connector R7 of Master Board – Master Unit is re-connected then digital input A12 of
Master Board – Slave Unit is energized and so Slave Unit is forced to standby status.
3. If Master Unit is on and Slave Unit in standby and an ALARM is present in Master Unit (i.e. FL
digital input not energized for at least MV02 seconds) then the Slave Unit should be switched on.
 Master Unit lead lag status:

MASTER UNIT: ALARM
SLAVE UNIT: ON
H TO NEXT SWT: 1H
SLAVE UNIT: ON

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.11 POWER LINE ANALYZER management

MK01: Power Line Analyzer manager:
0 = disabled;
1 = enabled with phase missing/wrong alarm;
2 = enabled with phase missing alarm;
3 = enabled without phase missing/wrong alarm;
MK14: Threshold for Under voltage alarm (0=under voltage alarm disabled)
NOTE: under voltage alarm managed only if MK01>0.
MK15: Threshold for Over voltage alarm (0=over voltage alarm disabled)
NOTE: over voltage alarm managed only if MK01>0.

 Power Line Analyzer (PLA) is connected, via serial communication, to COM3 of Master board
of the unit.
 The communication with Power Line Analyzer is enabled when MK01>0.
 For the right workin is required to configure the PLA as described on par.5.2.11.1.
 PLA reads the following data:
o unit concatenate voltages (V12, V23, V31);
o unit current (Iun);
o unit power consumption (PWR);
o unit energy consumption (CONS);
o line Frequency (HZ);
o line Sequence (RST);
o electrical locker Temperature (TL).
o Power factor (PF);
 The unit energy consumption is showed on T20 counter in Timer Setup.
 All the others data are showed on Power Line Analyzer screen.
 If the communication with PLA is lost then is showed the warning (see par.5.5.1.13.1):
“ALARM MASTER PWR LINE ANALYZ. COM”
 If Power Line Analyzer is enabled (MK01>0) and the communication with PLA working
correctly (i.e. Power Line Analyzer Serial communication alarm is not present) then following
function are managed:
o Over voltage alarm;
o Under voltage alarm;
o Phase missing/wrong alarm;
o Unit voltage limitation.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 Power Line Analyzer is connected to COM3 port of S10-Master board.

 Electrical connections boards:
Power Line Analyzer S10-Master
EEV
Gnd
COM3
-
+
COM1
Note:
o connector 1-2 = Unit current – phase 1;
o connector 19 (A) = RS485 Tx/Rx+;
o connector 20 (B) = RS485 Tx/Rx-.
 Power Line Analyzer dimensions:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.11.1 PLA setup procedure

For the right working of PLA is required the following setup procedure.
Requirements:
o USB/RS485 converter (ex. ICPCON 7561) or RS232/RS485 converter connected to PC;
o ESAManager.exe sw installed to PC (Project Engineering can supply this sw).
Configuration procedure:
1. Connect the PLA to USB(RS232)/RS485 converter:
o Pin 19 (A) of PLA to “Data+” of RS-485 ports of USB(RS232)/RS485 converter;
o Pin 20 (B) of PLA to “Data-” of RS-485 ports of USB(RS232)/RS485 converter.
2. Connect the USB(RS232)/RS485 converter to PC.
3. Power-up the PLA.
4. Lunch the ESAManager.exe sw on the PC and execute the following settings:
o Select the PLA model “E2002”.
o Communication settings -> Serial Port configuration:
 Porta = select the one associated to USB(RS232)/RS485 converter (ex. COM2);
 Data Bits = 8;
 Parity = None;
 Stop Bits = 1;
 Flow Control = None.
o Communication settings -> Baud rate and Terminal NR configuration:
 Terminal number = 1 (try 2..32 if the communication not works);
 Baud rate = 19200 (try 9600 if the communication not works).
o Communication settings -> Baud rate and Terminal NR settings:
 Terminal number = 3;
 Baud rate = 19200;
o Wattmetro settings -> T/A and T/V settings:
 Primary Current T/A = according to used TA (ex. For TA 100 / 5, set =100);
 Secondary Current T/A = according to used TA (ex. For TA 100 / 5, set =5);
 Primary Voltage T/V = leave the default value (= 300);
 Secondary Voltage T/V = leave the default value (= 300).
5. Disconnect the PLA to USB(RS232)/RS485 converter.
6. Connect PLA to S10 board.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.12 UNIT PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
5.2.12.1 COP evaluation

This option allows to show the actual COP of the machine.
MM23: Glycol percentage used for COP computation:
0= no glycol (i.e. pure water);
101= no COP visualization.
MM24: Glycol type:
0= Ethylene glycol;
1= Propylene glycol.
MV01: Barrel type:
0= one barrel;

 COP evaluation is enabled when MM23<101 and Evaporator Water Pressure is enabled
(MV03=YES) and SPLIT Units are disabled (MV01<=2).
 COP is computed using the following formula:
COP = CoolingCacity / UnitPowerCons
CoolingCapacity: Cooling Capacity value computed as described in par. 5.2.12.2.
UnitPwrCons: Unit Power Consumption computed as described in par. 5.2.12.3.
 The values of COP, CoolingCapacity and UnitPower are showed on Chiller Performance
screen.
WARNING
The COP value is an estimation only and its value is influenced from:
o The right reading of Water Flow (see par. 5.2.6.2.2);
o The tolerance of temperature and pressure probes;
o The right setting of glycol percentage (MM23);
o The right setting of glycol type (MM24).
o The right setting for Unit Power Consumption evaluation (see par. 5.2.12.3).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.12.2 COOLING CAPACITY evaluation

This section explain as the Cooling Capacity is computed.
MM23: Glycol percentage used for COP computation:
MM24: Glycol type:
0= Ethylene glycol;
MV01: Barrel type:
0= one barrel;
Cooling capacity is computed using the following formula:
CoolingCapacity = WaterFlow * Density[RWT] * SpecificHeat[RWT] * (RWT-LWT)
o WaterFlow: computed with following logic:

 If MV01=0 (1 barrel) then:
WaterFlow = WaterFlowEvap#1
 If MV01=1 (2 barrels in parallel) then:
WaterFlow = WaterFlowEvap#1 + WaterFlowEvap#2
 If MV01=2 (2 barrels in series) then:
WaterFlow = (WaterFlowEvap#1 + WaterFlowEvap#2) / 2
For details as Water Flow is computed in each evaporator, see par.5.2.6.2.2.
o Density[RWT]: is computed using a polynomial based on RWT, MM23 and MM24
o SpecificHeat [RWT]: is computed using a polynomial based on RWT, MM23 and MM24
Note
The value of CoolingCapacity is set to 0kW when LWT<Tfreezing where Tfreezing is computed
using a polynomial based on MM23.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.12.3 UNIT POWER CONSUMPTION evaluation

This section explain as the Unit Power Consumption is computed.
MD27: Number of fans installed in each circuit
MD28: Fan nominal power, referred to each fan
MD29: Fan type: 0= EC (i.e. Fan with Electronic Control); 1= AC (i.e. Fans with Triac Control).
MK01: Power Line Analyzer manager:
0= disabled;
1= enabled with phase missing/wrong alarm;
2= enabled with phase missing alarm;
3= enabled without phase missing/wrong alarm.
Unit Power Consumption (UnitPwrCons) is computed with following logic:

 If MK01>0 (i.e. Power Line Analyzer enabled) then:
UnitPwrCons = unit power consumption read by Power Line Analyzer (see par.5.2.11)
 If MK01=0 (i.e. Power Line Analyzer disabled) then:
UnitPwrCons = ∑ (PWR_CIRCi) (i= index of i-esimo circuit)
o Power consumption of i-esimo circuit:

PWR_CIRCi = PWR_CP_CIRCi + PWR_FAN_CIRCi (i= index of i-esimo circuit)
o Power consumption of Compressors in i-esimo circuit:

PWR_CP_CIRCi = ∑ (PWR_CPj) (j= index of cp in the circuit)
o Power consumption of j-esimo compressor:

PWR_CPj = power consumption value read in Turbocor via serial line
o Power consumption of Fans in i-esimo circuit:

 If AC Fan are used (MD29=1) then:
PWR_FAN_CIRCi = MD27 * MD28 * (FAN_SPEEDi / 100)
where:
FAN_SPEEDi = Fan speed of i-esimo circuit in % [0..100]
 If EC Fan are used (MD29=0) then:
PWR_FAN_CIRCi = MD27 * MD28 * (FAN_SPEED_ECi / 100)3
where:
FAN_SPEED_ECi = (FAN_SPEEDi / 85) * 100 when: FAN_SPEEDi <85
= 100 when: FAN_SPEEDi ≥85
FAN_SPEEDi = Fan speed of i-esimo circuit in % [0..100]
WARNING
The Power Consumption of Fans is an estimation only and its value is influenced from:
o The right setting of the number of installed Fans (MD27);
o The right setting of the nominal power of each Fan (MD28);
o The right setting of Fan type (MD29).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.13 PROBES REDUNDANCY management

This option allows to manage the redundancy of some probes (LWT / RWT / ST).
MM25: Enable the probes redundancy:
0 = disabled;
1 = enabled on proble LWT, RWT, ST;
2 = enabled on proble LWT, RWT.

 Probes redundancy option is enabled when MM25>0 and all the following conditions are
satisfied (AND logic):
o only 1 refrigerating circuit is used (i.e. 1 cp (MC01=1) or all the cp are in parallel on 1
circuit (MC02=11,13,15,19)).
 When the function is enabled with MM25=1,2:
o Leaving Water Temperature:
 It’s read by LWT probe if this probe is not in alarm;
 It’s read by LWT2 probe if LWT probe is in alarm;
 If the probes LWT and LWT2 are in alarm then the system is halted (see par.
5.5.1.1.1 and 5.5.1.1.19).
o Returning Water Temperature:
 It’s read by RWT probe if this probe is not in alarm;
 It’s read by RWT2 probe if RWT probe is in alarm;
 If the probes RWT and RWT2 are in alarm then the system is halted (see par.
5.5.1.1.2 and 5.5.1.1.19).
 When the function is enabled with MM25=1:
o Suction Temperature of circuit#1:
 It’s read by ST1 probe if this probe is not in alarm;
 It’s read by ST2 probe if ST1 probe is in alarm.
 If the probes ST1 and ST2 are in alarm then the circuit#1 is halted (see par.
5.5.3.1.1 and 5.5.3.1.4).
5.2.14 WARNINGS INDICATION BY DIGITAL OUTPUT

This option allows to activate a digital output when a warning condition is activated.
MM26: Enable the warnings indication by digital output.

 The function is enabled when MM26=YES.
 When the function is enabled then the digital output WARN will be activated in one of following
conditions (OR logic):
o Temperature warning is active (see par. 5.5.1.3);
o Forcing compressors OFF function is active (see par. 5.2.1.3.2);
o Adaptive control on Discharge Pressure is active (see par. 5.3.2.1);
o Low pressure limitation is active (see par. 5.3.2.3);
o In a Turbocor compressor the Winding Temperature Fault is active (see par.
5.5.2.10.2);
o High Evaporators Drop warning is active (see par. 5.5.1.11.4);
o Low Evaporators Drop warning is active (see par. 5.5.1.11.5);
o High Condenser Drop warning is active (see par. 5.5.1.12.6);
o Low Condenser Drop warning is active (see par. 5.5.1.12.7).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.15 AUXILIARY TRANSDUCERS management
5.2.15.1 Liquid Level Transducer

This option allows to show the liquid level on a tank using a 4-20mA transducer.
MM27: Enabled the Liquid Level Transducer.
IM54: Liquid Level Transducer (LLT) channel, min. value.
IM55: Liquid Level Transducer (LLT) channel, max. value.

 When the function is enabled:
o The liquid level on a tank is read by LLT analog input.
 minimum value of LLT is set by IM54 setup parameter;
 maximum value of LLT is set by IM55 setup parameter.
o Following alarms are controlled:
 LLT Probe alarm
o The value of LLT is showed on the Third screen.
5.2.15.2 Auxiliary Pressure Transducer

This option allows to read a pressure using a 4-20mA transducer.
MM28: Enabled the Auxiliary Pressure Transducer.
IM57: Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (APT) channel, min. value.
IM58: Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (APT) channel, max. value.

 When the function is enabled:
o The pressure is read by APT analog input.
 minimum value of APT is set by IM57 setup parameter;
 maximum value of APT is set by IM58 setup parameter.
o Following alarms are controlled:
 APT Probe alarm
o The value of APT is showed on the Third screen.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.2.16 UNIT CHECK

This option allows to manage a checklist for a scheduled unit checks. The actions associated to
every check are defined by the manufacturer (they depends on the kind of unit).
MM29: Unit check enable
MM30: Number of commissioning checks (0 = no checks required in commissioning phase)
MM31: Number of checking checks (0 = no checks required in checking phase)
MM32: Number of days (after commissioning phase) for checking checks
MM33: Number of maintenance checks (0 = no checks required in maintenance phase)
MM34: Number of days (after checking phase) for maintenance checks
UC01..UC20: Unit check #01..20 (commissioning phase)
UC21..UC40: Unit check #21..40 (checking phase)
UC41..UC60: Unit check #41..60 (maintenance phase)

 Three different phases are managed:
o Commissioning phase (the first one)
o Checking phase (the second one)
o Maintenance phase (the third one)
 Commissioning phase is managed with following logic:
o This phase is enabled only when MM30>0;
o “COMMISSIONING NEED#1” warning (see par. 5.5.1.14.1) is activated 1 minute after
that Unit check is enabled (MM29=YES);
o “COMMISSIONING NEED#2” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.2) is activated 7 days after
the activation of “COMMISSIONING NEED#1” warning;
o “COMMISSIONING NEED#3” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.3) is activated 30 days after
the activation of “COMMISSIONING NEED#1” warning;
o Previous warnings are reset when the first MM30 checks of UC01..UC20 are set = YES.
 Checking phase is managed with following logic:
o “CHECKING NEED#1” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.4) is activated after MM32 days that
Commissioning phase was completed;
o “CHECKING NEED#2” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.5) is activated 7 days after the
activation of “CHECKING NEED#1” warning;
o “CHECKING NEED#3” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.6) is activated 30 days after the
activation of “CHECKING NEED#1” warning;
 Maintenance phase is managed with following logic:
o “MAINTENANCE NEED#1” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.7) is activated after MM32 days
that Checking phase was completed;
o “MAINTENANCE NEED#2” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.8) is activated 7 days after the
activation of “MAINTENANCE NEED#1” warning;
o “MAINTENANCE NEED#3” warning ”(see par. 5.5.1.14.9) is activated 30 days after the
activation of “MAINTENANCE NEED#1” warning;
REMARKS
A) The computation of days is made considering the date and time of real time clock
integrated on S10 board.
B) To restart the function is required to disable the function (MM29=NO) and then re-enable it
(MM29=YES).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3 COMPRESSOR CONTROLS

The number of used compressors is selected by setup parameter MC01.
Following controls are replicated in each compressor.
5.3.1 FUNCTIONS FOR COMPRESSORS CONTROL
5.3.1.1 Compressor Switch on procedure

A compressor is switched on with following procedure:
 Check the minimum time before different compressor insertion (MT15) is elapsed;
 Switch on circuit less used fan or first fan depending on setup parameter MD07;
 On the compressor screens is showed the status: “START”;
 Wait MC60 seconds AND that LPA control is in LPA_OFF status (only if ML01=YES, see par.
5.2.4.3.2).
 Switch on compressor:
o Compressor contactor is switched on when machine is on (IGV reset starts);
o Compressor interlock relays should be closed;
o Set compressor demand to 0KW;
o Set compressor demand to the starting value (MC11% or MC61% if “High RWT Limitation”
is active with MC61>0);
 Switch on liquid solenoid (if present);
 Enable PI control of discharge pressure.
5.3.1.2 Compressor Switch off procedure

A compressor is switched on with following procedure:
 Switch off liquid solenoid;
 When the Suction Pressure (SP) goes below the limit value (MR20) or after the maximum
pump down time (MR21) the compressor is switched off:
o Compressor contactor is switched on when machine is on (IGV reset starts);
o Compressor interlock relays should be closed;
o Set compressor demand to 0% (IGV reset starts);
o Wait 60 seconds (to be included on the minimum time off);
o The PI discharge pressure control remains enabled until the Cp counting minimum off is
elapsed (MC04 seconds after cp switch off) or when the discharge pressure reach the set
point.
5.3.1.3 Compressor Pump Down procedure

MR20: Pump down pressure
MR21: Maximum pump down time (0= pump down disabled)

 Compressor pump down procedure is enabled when MR21>0 and it is executed every time that
compressor is switched off by means of temperature control and not for alarm condition.
 Pump down begin when compressor stopping procedure is exetued and if the Suction Pressure
(SP) > MR20 + 40 PSI:
o On the compressor screen is showed the status “PD-OUT ”;
o The liquid solenoid valve (SOL) is switched off;
o EEV (if enabled) is fully closed (0%).
 The compressor is stopped when the Suction Pressure (SP) < MR20 or after the maximum
pump down time (MR21 seconds).
 The PI discharge pressure control remains enabled until the Cp counting minimum off is
elapsed (MC04 seconds after cp switch off) or when the discharge pressure reach the set

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
point.
NOTES
1. When Turbocor compressor is used then is recommended to disable the pump down
procedure (MR21=0).
5.3.1.3.1 Multiple pump downs

Multiple pump down function allows to execute further pump downs after that the compressor is
switched off by temperature control.
MR20: Pump down pressure
MR21: Maximum pump down time (0= pump down disabled)
MR22: Number of multiple pump down allowed within 1 hour (0= no multiple pump down allowed)

 Multiple pump downs are enabled when MR22>0.
 A multiple pump down begin when compressor is in logical state “OFF” and if Suction Pressure
(SP) > MR20 + 40 PSI:
o On the compressor screen is showed the status “PD-MUL”;
o The compressor is switched on whith the Liquid Solenoid valve off;
o The compressor is stopped when Suction Pressure (SP) < MR20 or after the maximum
pump down time (MR21 seconds);
o Minimum time between 2 pump downs is:
MC04 (minimum compressor off time) + 45sec * CpIndex (CpIndex=1..8)
o Compressor Pump Down alarm is active.
NOTES
1. Multiple pump downs are executed only if machine is switched on.
2. Multiple pump downs are not executed after that the compressor is switched off for an
alarm condition.
3. When Turbocor compressor is used then is recommended to disable the multiple pump
down (MR22=0).
5.3.1.4 Compressor switch on and off limitation

The table explains the system limitation to change status of compressors.
Those changes are required by the control algorithm, and are obtained through software
procedures; but compressors are not always available for these changes.
A cause of compressor not availability is an alarm situation or the minimum time on or off that not
elapsed.
In other situations the control algorithm needs to switch off a compressor and the compressor is
blocked on: there is a minimum time between two start parameter in set up; this time should be
elapsed before stopping the compressor.
Initial End Procedure to be Min time before enabling procedure

compressor compress used to change
status or status status
OFF ON Switch on Minimum time off (MC04) from last stop (is the
minimum time the compressor should stay off
before being started again) and minimum time
between two start (MC06).
ON OFF Pump down Minimum time on (MC05) from last start. Is the
(if enabled, minimum time the compressor should stay on
i.e. MR21<>0) before being stopped.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.1.5 Lock compressor by digital input or dip switch or setup parameter

MC22: Lock compressors manager:
0 = lock compressors disabled;
1 = lock compressor when Dipswitch OFF or digital inputis is OFF or lock compressor setup
parameter enabled;
2 = lock compressor when Dipswitch OFF or digital input is ON or lock compressor setup
parameter enabled.
MC23: Maximum capacity for compressor 1 (0=cp1 locked by setup parameter).
If MC22<>0 then its possible to lock a compressor by a digital input or a dip switch (Ref. S2) or a
lock compressor setup parameters (MC23..MC30).

 CP1 is locked when at least one of these conditions is verified:
o MC22=1 and digital input CP1_LOCK (master board) is OFF;
o MC22=2 and digital input CP1_LOCK (master board) is ON;
o dip switch #4 OFF (master board);
o lock compressor setup parameter MC23= 0;
 CP2 is blocked when at least one of these conditions is verified:
o MC22=1 and digital input CP2_LOCK (master board) is OFF;
o MC22=2 and digital input CP2_LOCK (master board) is ON;
o dip switch #3 OFF (master board);
o MC22=1 and digital input CP1_LOCK (slave#1 board) is OFF;
o MC22=2 and digital input CP1_LOCK (slave#1 board) is ON;
o dip switch #4 OFF (slave#1 board);
If a compressor is locked then in his screen is showed the status:“LOCKED”

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.1.6 Maximum compressor capacity limitation


 Compressors capacity limitation is activated in stepless control only (MC03>=4);
 To limit the maximum compressor capacity of each compressor set its relative setup parameter
(MC23..MC30) to the required maximum value;
 If the maximum compressor capacity is limited (i.e. (MC23..MC30 < 100%) then the maximum
value is toggled every 2 seconds with compressor demand on the “DEMAND ..ACTUAL”
screen.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.2 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS FOR COMPRESSORS CAPACITY LIMITATION

Following special functions limit the compressors capacity to avoid an alarm condition.
5.3.2.1 Adaptive control on Discharge Pressure

Adaptive control algorithm decrease the compressor capacity when Discharge Pressure (DP) go
over the a prefixed value.
MR12: Adaptive Control – If DP > this parameter (0 = disabled) then the compressor capacity is
decreased until the lower value MR15 (i.e. capacity will be >= MR15).
MR13: Differential used for Adaptive Control on DP.
MR14: Minimum time used in Adaptive Control, Low Pressure limitation and Motor Current
limitation and unit voltage limitation functions.
MR15: Min Cp power when the adaptive control mode is active.
MR16: Power compressor correction when adaptive control mode is active.

a) Adaptive Control is enabled if MR12>0.
b) If DP increases and DP >= MR12, then compressor capacity is decreased of the MR16% every
MR14 seconds. The compressor capacity is decreased until the minimum percentage value
MR15 is reached.
On the screen of compressor is showed: “ADPT-C”
c) If DP decreases and MR12-MR13 < DP < MR12 then the compressor capacity is blocked at
the last value of the point b).
On the screen of compressor is showed: “ADPT-C”.
d) If DP decreases and DP <= MR12-MR13 and MR14 seconds are elapsed from the last
capacity decrease of the point b) then the adaptive control is disabled and the compressor
capacity is controlled in normal mode.
e) If Adaptive Control on stepless control and Low Pressure Limitation and Motor Current
Limitation and Unit Voltage Limitation are activated, then the following algorithm is used:
U = max (U-Ucorr, MR15)
Ucorr = max (Ucorr_AdaptCrt, Ucorr_LPLim, Ucorr_MCLim, Ucorr_UVLim)
Ucorr_AdaptCrt: power correction computed in Adaptive Control
Ucorr_LPLim: power correction computed in Low Pressure Limitation
Ucorr_MCLim: power correction computed in Motor Current Limitation
Ucorr_UVLim: power correction computed in Unit Voltage Limitation
On the screen of compressor is showed: “ADPT-C” or “LP-LIM or “MC-LIM” or “UV-LIM”
f) If Adaptive Control on DT is activated and Adaptive Control or Low Pressure Limitation or Motor
Current Limitation or Unit Voltage Limitation are activated, then the compressor capacity is
blocked.
On the screen of compressor is showed: “PW-LCK”.
g) If Adaptive Control is enabled then the compressor capacity effectively required is the minimum
value between the capacity computed from Adaptive Control and the capacity computed from
temperature control.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
DP
High Discharge Pressure alarm

MR06
Cp capacity decreased (b)
MR12
Cp capacity blocked (c)
MR12-MR13
Adaptive Control disabled (d)
Time
5.3.2.2 Adaptive control on Discharge Temperature

Adaptive Control on Discharge Temperature algorithm allows to increase the compressor capacity
when the Discharge Temperature (DT) go over a prefixed value.
10=Turbocor;
circuit).
circuit) and new algorithm
MR16: Power compressor correction when adaptive control mode is active.
MR18: Value of the Discharge Temperature for Adaptive Control on DT.
MR19: Differential of the Discharge Temperature for Adaptive Control on DT
(0 = Adaptive Control on DT disabled).

a) Adaptive Control on DT is enabled when MR19>0;
b) If DT increases and DT >= MR18, then compressor capacity is increased of the MR16% every
MR14 seconds. The compressor capacity is increased until the capacity reach 100%.
On the screen of compressor is showed: “DT-LIM”.
c) If DT decreases and MR18-MR19 < DP < MR18 then the compressor capacity is blocked at the
last value of the point b).
On the screen of compressor is showed: “DT-LIM”.
d) If DT decreases and DT <= MR18-MR19 and MR14 seconds are elapsed from the last capacity
increase of the point b) then the Adaptive Control on DT is disabled and the compressor
capacity is controlled in normal mode.
e) If Adaptive Control on DT is activated and Adaptive Control or Low Pressure Limitation or
Motor Current Limitation or Unit Voltage Limitation are activated, then the compressor capacity
is blocked.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

f) If Adaptive Control is enabled then the compressor capacity effectively required is the minimum
value between the capacity computed from Adaptive Control and the capacity computed from
temperature control.
DT
High Discharge Temperature alarm

MR08
Cp capacity increased (b)
MR18
MR18-MR19
Adaptive Control on DT disabled (d)
Time
5.3.2.3 Low pressure limitation

Low pressure limitation algorithm allows to decrease the compressor capacity when Suction
Pressure (SP) go below to the prefixed value.
MR04: Value of suction pressure for low suction pressure alarm.
MR10: Power compressor correction when low pressure limitation is active (0 = low pressure
limitation disabled).
MR11: Differential pressure for low pressure limitation.

a) Low pressure limitation is enabled if MR10 > 0.
b) If SP decreases and SP <= MR04 + MR11, then compressor capacity is decreased of the
MR10% every MR14 seconds. The compressor capacity is decreased until the minimum
percentage value is reached (MC09/MC12*100%).
On the screen of compressor is showed: "LP-LIM".
c) If SP increases and MR04 < SP < MR04 + 2*MR11 then the compressor capacity is blocked at
the last value of the point b).
On the screen of compressor is showed: "LP-LIM".
d) If SP increases and SP >= MR04 + 2*MR11 and MR14 seconds are elapsed from the last
capacity decrease of the point b) then the Low Pressure Limitation is disabled and the
compressor capacity is controlled in normal mode.
e) If Adaptive Control on stepless control and Low Pressure Limitation and Motor Current

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
On the screen of compressor is showed: “ADPT-C” or “LP-LIM or “MC-LIM” or “UV-LIM”.

f) If Adaptive Control on DT is activated and Adaptive Control or Low Pressure Limitation or
is blocked.
g) If Adaptive Control on DT is enabled then the compressor capacity effectively required is the
maximum value between the capacity computed from Adaptive Control on DT and the capacity
computed from temperature control.
SP
Low Pressure Limitation disabled (d)

MR04+2*MR11

MR04+MR11
Cp capacity decreased (b)
MR04
Low Suction Pressure alarm
Time
5.3.2.4 Motor current limitation

Motor current limitation algorithm allows to decrease the compressor capacity when the
compressor current percentage (Icp / Inom) go over to the prefixed value.
MK10: Threshold for motor current limitation.
MK11: Power compressor correction when motor current limitation is active
(0 = motor current limitation disabled).

a) Motor current limitation is enabled if MK11> 0.
b) Motor current percentage Iperc = (Icp / Inom) * 100 where:
Icp = compressor current passed by Turbocor;
Inom = nominal current of compressor specify by setup parameters MK02…MK09.
c) If Iperc increases and Iperc > MK10, then the compressor capacity is decreased of the MK11%
every MR14 seconds, until the minimum percentage value is reached (MC09/MC12*100%).
On the screen of compressor is showed: “MC-LIM”
d) If Iperc decreases and 100 <= Iperc <= MK10 then the compressor capacity is blocked at the
last value of the point c).
On the screen of compressor is showed: “MC-LIM”.
e) If Iperc decreases and Iperc < 100 and MR14 seconds are elapsed from the last capacity
decrease of the point c) then Motor Current Limitation is disabled and the compressor capacity
is controlled in normal mode.
f) If Adaptive Control on stepless control and Low Pressure Limitation and Motor Current

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

On the screen of compressor is showed: “ADPT-C” or “LP-LIM or “MC-LIM” or “UV-LIM”.
h) If Adaptive Control on DT is activated and Adaptive Control or Low Pressure Limitation or
is blocked.
i) If Motor Current Limitation is enabled then the compressor capacity effectively required is the
minimum value between the capacity computed from Motor Current Limitation and the capacity
Iperc
(%)
High Motor Current alarm

MK12
Cp Capacity decrease(c)
MK10
Cp Capacity blocked (d)
100
Motor Current Limitation disabled (e)
Time
5.3.2.5 Unit voltage limitation

Unit voltage limitation algorithm is managed only if Power Line Analyzer is enabled (MK01>0) and
any serial error with him is present; its function is decrease the compressor capacity when a unit
concatenate voltage (Vuxy=Vu12, Vu23, Vu31) go below to the prefixed value.
MR14: Minimum time used in adaptive control, low pressure limitation, motor current limitation and
unit voltage limitation functions.
MK14: Threshold for Under voltage alarm.
MK16: Differential Voltage for Unit Voltage limitation function (0 = unit voltage limitation disabled).
MK17: Power compressor correction when Unit Voltage limitation is active..

 Unit voltage limitation is enabled if MK16<>0.
 If Vuxy < MK14+MK16, then the compressor capacity is decreased of the MK17% every MR14
seconds. On the screen of compressor is showed: “UV-LIM”
 If Vuxy > MK14+MK16 and MR14 seconds are elapsed from the last capacity decrease of the
point b), then Unit Voltage Limitation is disabled and the compressor capacity is controlled in
normal mode.
 If Adaptive Control on stepless control and Low Pressure Limitation and Motor Current

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

On the screen of compressor is showed: “ADPT-C” or “LP-LIM or “MC-LIM” or “UV-LIM”
 If Adaptive Control on DT is activated and Adaptive Control or Low Pressure Limitation or
is blocked.
 If Unit Voltage Limitation is enabled then the compressor capacity effectively required is the
minimum value between the capacity computed from Unit Voltage Limitation and the capacity
Vuxy
(V)
Unit Voltage Limitation disabled (c)
MK14+MK16
Cp Capacity decrease(b)
MK14
Under Voltage alarm
Time
5.3.2.6 Compressor switch off for maximum time without capacity decrease
This function allows to switch off a cp when is active Adaptive Control on DP or Low Pressure
Limitation and the cp have not decreased its capacity after a prefixed time.
MR17: Maximum time for Adaptive Control or Low Pressure Limitation without cp capity
decreasing: after this time a cp in the circuit is switched off (0=function disabled);

 The function is enabled when MR17>0 and following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
o the compressors are in parallel on 1 or 2 circuits (MC02=11..16,19,20);
o SPLIT units are disabled (MV01<3).
 If the function is enabled then the cp is switched off when Adaptive control on Discharge
Pressure or Low pressure limitation functions are active for more MR17 seconds and the
compressor capacity is not decreased for atleast 5% from the value before the activaction of
Adaptive control on Discharge Pressure or Low pressure limitation.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.2.7 Surge Speed Limitation

This function allows to increase the compressor demand (%) when the compressor speed (rpm) go
below a prefixed value near the surge speed. The function is replicated in each compressor.
MC40: Speed range percentage used for Surge Speed Limitation function.
(0=Surge Speed Limitation disabled)
MC41: Power compressor correction used in Surge Speed Limitation function.

 Surge Speed Limitation function is enabled when MC40>0.
 Actual Speed (SPD), Surge Speed (SPDsurge) and Chocke Speed (SPDchoke) are read in
each Turbocor via serial line.
 Following speeds threshold are computed and used in the function:
o SPDmin = SPDsurge + [(MC40/100)*(SPDchoke - SPDsurge)];
o SPDout = SPDsurge + [((MC40+5)/100)*(SPDchoke - SPDsurge)] (Note: 5% of hysteresis)
 The function working with following logic:
1) If SPD <= SPDmin then:
 The function is activated;
 Compressor capacity is increased of the MC41% every MR14 seconds, until 100%
is reached;
 On the screens of compressor is showed: “SG-LIM”;
 On the second compressor screen the value of actual speed (Spd) blinks every 1
second.
2) If SPDmin < SPD < SPDout then:
 Compressor capacity is blocked at the last value of the point a).
 On the screens of compressor is showed: “SG-LIM”.
 On the second compressor screen the value of actual speed (Spd) blinks every 1
second.
3) If SPD >= SPDout and MR14 seconds are elapsed from the last capacity increase of the
point a) then:
 The function is disabled;
 Compressor capacity is controlled in normal mode.
 When the function is enabled it have priority respect all the others capacity limitation functions.
Notes
The function is activated after compressor startup when “CM-ON” status is not more present.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.3 ECONOMIZER AND LIQUID INJECTION Control

The control is replicated in each compressor.
MC02: Compressor type
MD01: Number of fans per circuit
MC31: Economizer and Liquid Injection logic manager
MC32: Economizer and Liquid Injection port minimum time on and off

 Economizer and Liquid Injection is managed if Turbocor compressor is used (MC02 >= 10).
 The ports logic is configured by setup parameters MC31. Following table resume the logic.
MC31 MNEM. Function enabled

0 All functions disabled
1 ECO Economizer
LIE Liquid Injection with ECO logic
2 ECO Economizer
LIS Liquid Injection with SUCTION LINE logic
3 ECO Economizer
LIS Liquid Injection with SUCTION LINE logic
LIE Liquid Injection with ECO logic
4 ECO Economizer
LIS or LIE Liquid Injection with OR of SUCTION LINE and ECO logic
5 ECO Economizer
6 ECO Economizer
(Note: this configuration is leaved for compatibility with old sw version)
7 ECO Economizer
CP_FAULT Cp fault indication
8 ECO Economizer
LIS or LIE Liquid Injection with OR of SUCTION LINE and ECO logic
(Note: this configuration is leaved for compatibility with old sw version)
9 ECO Economizer
LID Liquid Injection with DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE logic
10 LID Liquid Injection with DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE logic
 Each transition of the economizer (ECO port) and liquid injection solenoids (Liq. Inj. on ECO or
Liq. Inj. on Suction port or Liq. Inj. On Discharge Temperature) will have a minimum delay from
the previous one, given by the MC32 parameter in seconds.
5.3.3.1 Economizer logic

MC32: Economizer and Liquid Injection port minimum time on and off
MC33: Compressor capacity (demand) for Economizer switch on.
MC34: Differential compressor capacity (demand) for Economizer switch off.

 Economizer control is enabled when MC31=1..9.
 Economizer is controlled with following logic:
o Economizer is switched on when the compressor demand (computed by slave control)
>= MC33;
o Economizer is switched off when the compressor demand (computed by slave control)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
< MC33-MC34;
o Each transition (OFF to ON or viceversa) will have a minimum delay from the previous
one, given by the MC32 parameter in seconds.
Notes
If the Economizer must be activated when the compressor is switched on, then connect it to liquid
solenoid digital output (SOL1 or SOL2) and set MC31<>1,2,3,4,5 (liquid solenoid enabled).
5.3.3.2 Liquid Injection logic

 Liquid Injection with Economizer port logic is enabled when MC31=1,3.
 Liquid Injection with Suction Line port logic is enabled when MC31=2,3.
 Liquid Injection with OR of Economizer and Suction Line logic is enabled when MC31=4,8.
 This table resumes control logic of liquid injection (either on Economizer port logic either on
Suction Line port logic) for R22, R407c, R404a, R1270 and R1234ze.
Discharge L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on

ECO Suction ECO Suction ECO Suction ECO Suction
Pressure for R22,
R407c, R404a,
R1270, R1234ze
> 333 PSI Off On Off On Off On On Off
(> 59 °C)
300 <..< 333 PSI Off On Off On Off On On Off
(55 <..< 59 °C)
255 <..< 300 PSI Off On Off On On Off Off Off
(48 <..< 55 °C)
< 255 PSI ( < 48°C) Off On On Off On Off Off Off
% of circuit power
2÷49 50÷74 75÷99 100
->
 This table resumes control logic of economizer and liquid injection, (either on Economizer port
either on Suction port) for R134a
Discharge L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj on L Inj L Inj on

ECO Suction ECO Suction ECO Suction on Suction
Pressure for ECO
R134a
> 295 PSI Off On Off On Off On On Off
(> 70 °C)
265 <..< 295 PSI Off On Off On Off On Off Off
(66 <..<70 °C)
230<..< 265PSI Off On Off On Off Off Off Off
(60 <..< 66 °C)
< 230 PSI ( < 60°C) Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off
% of circuit power
2÷49 50÷74 75÷99 100
->
Remark:
 when Cp is Off, ECO and all Liquid Injection solenoids are Off;
 For R134a, the grey area can be not allowed by the settings of Adaptive Control parameters,
MR12, MR15, or, if DP > 295 PSI by the High Pressure Alarms settings of MR06 setup
parameter.
WARNING
The tables for the gas R407c, R404a, R1270 and R1234ze should be reviewed!

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.3.3 Liquid Injection with Discharge Temperature logic

MC35: Value of the Discharge Temperature for liquid injection activation.
MC36: Differential of the Discharge Temperature for liquid injection deactivation.

 Liquid injection with Discharge Temperature (DT) logic is enabled when MC31=9,10.
 Liquid injection is controlled with following logic:
o if DT > MC35 then the valve is activated;
o if DT < MC35-MC36 then the valve is deactivated.
5.3.4 SUCTION HEATER control

This option allows the to control a suction heater positioned in the liquid separator of each
compressor.
MC45: Suction Heater manager:
0= disabled (NO);
1= ON when Cp ON (CPON);
2= ON when Cp OFF (CPOFF);
3= always ON (ALW).

 Suction Heater control is enabled when MC45>0.
 Suction Heaters are controlled with following digital output:
o SUCT_HEA1 for the first compressor in each board;
o SUCT_HEA2 for the second compressor in each board;
 The logic of Sution Heaters is selected by setup parameter MC45:
o If MC45=1 then:
 Suction Heater is activated when the related cp is ON;
 Suction Heater is deactivated when the related cp is OFF;
o If MC45=2 then:
 Suction Heater is activated when the related cp is OFF;
 Suction Heater is deactivated when the related cp is ON;
o If MC45=3 then Suction Heaters are always switched on (also if machine is OFF).
 The solenoid status is showed on the fourth row in the first compressor screen.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.5 EQUALIZATION SOLENOIDS control

This option allows the activaction of an equalization solenoid when each compressor starts.
MC42: Equalization Solenoids manager:
0= disabled (NO);
1= only in Cooling (CO), controlled by Cp Speed;
2= only in Heating (HE), controlled by Cp Speed;
3= always (ALW), controlled by Cp Speed;
4= only in Cooling (CO), controlled by IGV opening;
5= only in Heating (HE), controlled by IGV opening;
6= always (ALW), controlled by IGV opening.
MC43: Turbocor speed (rpm x 100) used for Equalization-Solenoid / Load Balance Valve
deactivaction.
MC44: IGV opening used for Equalization-Solenoid / Load Balance Valve deactivaction.

 Equalization solenoids control is enabled when MC42>0.
 Equalization solenoids are controlled with following digital output:
o EQ_SOL1 for the first compressor in each board;
o EQ_SOL2 for the second compressor in each board;
 The control logic is selected by setup parameter MC42:
o If MC42=1,4 then the solenoids are controlled in Cooling mode only;
o If MC42=2,5 then the solenoids are controlled in Heating mode only;
o If MC42=3,6 then the solenoids are always controlled (i.e. Cooling and Heating).
 The solenoids are controlled with following logic:
o If MC42=1,2,3 then:
 Equalization solenoid is activated every time that the related compressor starts;
 Equalization solenoid is deactivated when the compressor Speed >= MC43x100.
o If MC42=4,5,6 then:
 Equalization solenoid is activated every time that the related compressor starts;
 Equalization solenoid is deactivated when the compressor IGV >= MC44.
 Solenoid status is showed on the first compressor screen (see par.5.6.1.18).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.6 LOAD BALANCE control

This option allows the load balance in each compressor.
MC43: Turbocor speed (rpm x 100) used for Equalization-Solenoid / Load Balance Valve
deactivaction.
MC44: IGV opening used for Equalization-Solenoid / Load Balance Valve deactivaction.
MC46: Load Balance control:
0= disabled (NO);
1= only in Cooling (CO), controlled by Cp Speed at cp startup;
2= only in Heating (HE), controlled by Cp Speed at cp startup;
3= always (ALW), controlled by Cp Speed at cp startup;
4= only in Cooling (CO), controlled by IGV opening at cp startup;
5= only in Heating (HE), controlled by IGV opening at cp startup;
6= always (ALW), controlled by IGV opening at cp startup.
MC47: Load Balance Valve opening during compressor startup.
MC48: Suction Pressure (SP) setpoint used for Load Balance Valve control
MC49: Proportiona Band used for Load Balance Valve control
MC50: Cp demand capacity used for Load Balance Valve control when cp is in “ON” logical state.
(0= LBV not controlled in “ON” cp state; 90= LBV always controlled in “ON” cp state)
MC51: Load Balance Superheat value used to control Load Balance Injection Solenoid
(0= Load Balance Injection Solenoid disabled)
MC52: Delay time used to control Load Balance Injection Solenoid

 Load Balance control is enabled when MC46>0, using the following logic:
o If MC46=1,4 then the control is enabled in Cooling mode only;
o If MC46=2,5 then the control is enabled in Heating mode only;
o If MC46=3,6 then the control is always enabled (i.e. Cooling and Heating).
 Following devices are controlled:
o Load Balance Valve (LBV) is controlled by analog output:
 LBV1 for the first compressor in each board;
 LBV2 for the second compressor in each board;
o Load Balance Injection Solenoid (LBI) by digital output:
 LBI1 for the first compressor in each board;
 LBI2 for the second compressor in each board;
 Load Balance Valve (LBV) is controlled with following logic:
o If compressor startup procedure is executed (“CM-ON” logical state) then:
 If MC42=1,2,3 then:
- LBV is open to preset value (MC47) every time that the related compressor starts;
- LBV is fully closed (0%) when the compressor Speed >= MC43x100.
 If MC42=4,5,6 then:
- LBV is open to preset value (MC47) every time that the related compressor starts;
- LBV is fully closed (0%) when the compressor IGV >= MC44.
o If compressor normal control is executed (“ON” logical state) then the LBV opening is
controlled in base to the value of Cp Demand Capacity (CP_DEM) and the value of Suction
Pressure (SP) with following logic:
 If CP_DEM <= MC50% then the LBV control is activated and LBV opening is controlled
with following logic:
- If SP >= MC48 then LBV=0%;
- If SP <= MC48-MC49 then LBV=100%;
- If MC48< SP <MC48-MC49 then LBV opening is computed with linear interpolation.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
LBV (%)
100
MC48-MC49 MC48 SP
 If CP_DEM > MC50+10% the LBV control is deactivated and then LBV=0%.
 If MC50=90% then LBV control is always activated.
 If MC50=0% then LBV control is always dectivated.
 Load Balance Injection Solenoid (LBI) is controlled with following logic:
o LBI control is enabled when MC51>0 and it is activated every time that compressor is
switched on (“ON” or CM-ON” logical state);
o LBI is controlled in base to the value of Load Balance Superheat (LBSH) with following
logic:
 LBI is activated when LBSH > MC51 for at least MC52 seconds;
 LBI is deactivated when LBSH < MC51-2.0°C for at least MC52 seconds;
 Load Balance Superheat (LBSH) is computed as the differences between Suction
Temperature passed from Turbocor (STtcor) and Evaporating Temperature (calculated from
Suction Pressure (SP), prefixed the gas type):
LBSH = STtcor – Teq(SP)
 Following informations are showed on Third Compressors screens:
 LBV opening value;
 LBI status;
 LBSH value.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.3.7 TURBOCOR FAST START mode

This option allows to set “Fast Start” mode in each Turbocor compressor.
MC53: Turbocor “Fast Start” mode manager:
0= disabled (i.e. registers are not write);
1= Fast Start mode activated (i.e. registers 48813, 41814 set = 1);
2= Fast Start mode deactivated (i.e. registers 48813, 41814 set = 0).

 The function is enabled when MC53>0.
 In each Turbocor “Fast Start” mode can be enabled/disabled writing via modbus the registers
41813, 41814.
 The function is managed with following logic:
o If MC53=0 then the function is disabled (i.e. registers are not write);
If MC53=1 then Fast Start mode activated (i.e. registers 48813, 41814 set = 1);
o If MC53=2 then Fast Start mode deactivated (i.e. registers 48813, 41814 set = 0).
 When the function is enabled (MC53>0) the following alarms:
o Turbocor Faults
o Turbocor Fault Status alarm
are bypassed on the first 10 seconds after that the compressor is started but only the first time
after the machine power up.
WARNING
When MC53 is changed then it is required to restart the machine (cicle of power) for the correct
setting in the Turbocor!!

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4 CIRCUIT CONTROLS

The number of used refrigerating circuits (NrCIRC) is selected with following logic:
 If MC02=10,17,18 then NrCIRC=MC01 (i.e. a Cp in each Circuit);
 If MC02=11,13,15,19 then NrCIRC=1 (i.e. all the Cp in parallel in 1 Circuit);
 If MC02=12,14,16,20 then NrCIRC=2 (i.e. Cp in parallel in 2 Circuits: odd Cp [1,3,5] in the first
circuit, even Cp [2,4,6] in the second circuit)
Following functions are replicated in each refrigerating circuit.
5.4.1 FLUID SOLENOID control

MR23: Fluid Solenoid control.

 Fluid solenoid control is enabled when MR23=YES.
 Fluid solenoid is driven by SOLn (n=1,2) digital output.
 SOL is activated (i.e. ON) when the first compressor in the circuit is switched on (see
par.5.3.1.1);
 SOL is deactivated (i.e. OFF) in one of following conditions (OR logic):
o the last compressor in the circuit is switched off (see par.5.3.1.2);
o an alarm that lock the circuit is active.
5.4.2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE control

This procedure is repeated for each circuit controlling locally the Discharge Pressure (DP).
MD01: Number of fan per circuit
MD02: Enable Proportional Fan Speed Control
(NOTE: used when digital input SETP_DP_SEL is ON)
(NOTE: used when digital input SETP_DP_SEL is OFF)
MD05: Prop. Band for Discharge Pressure Control.
(NOTE: if the value is <0 then the fans are controlled with negative logic, i.e. fans speed
increase when DP decrease and vice versa).
MD06: Integral Time for Discharge Pressure Control
MD07: Enable Fan hours equalization
MD08: Max voltage for 100% fan speed. (i.e. if fan 100% output will be equal to MD08)
MD10: Enable PI control on Discharge Pressure only when Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL) is below
the setpoint (ME11%) used in flooded evaporator control (used only when ME02=3).
MD09: Forcing fans to max speed during compressors CM-ON.
MD65: Min voltage for 0% fan speed (i.e. if fan 0% output will be equal to MD65).
MD66: Second max voltage for 100% fan speed (101= second max voltage disabled).

 Discharge Pressure is controlled by means of Fans.
 The maximum number of fans for each circuit is selected by setup parameter MD01.
 Fans are controlled with a Proportional Integral (PI) like algorithm, which also takes care to
equalize the running time of each fan (equalizing or not is determined by setup parameter
MD07).
 If Proportional Fan Speed Control is enabled (MD02=YES) then:
o Fans speed is controlled using an analog output 0÷10 Vdc;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o The min voltage for 0% fan speed is setting by setup parameter MD65 (i.e. if fan 0% output
will be equal to MD65);
o The max voltage for 100% fan speed is selected with following logic:
 if MD66=101 then the value is setting by:
- setup parameter MD08 (i.e. if fan 100% then output will be equal to MD08);
 if MD66<101 then the value is setting by:
- setup parameter MD08 (i.e. if fan 100% then output will be equal to MD08) if
digitainput MAX2_FAN=OFF;
- setup parameter MD66 (i.e. if fan 100% then output will be equal to MD66) if
digitainput MAX2_FAN=ON;
o A fixed hysteresis of 5% near the 0% is used.
 The Fans control is managed with following logic:
o Fans always starts MC60 seconds before compressor (see par.5.3.1.1) and the required
speed is fixed to 100/MD01%;
o After 20 seconds the PI control is activated (together the compressor);
o If MD09=YES then the fans are forced to the maximum speed when a new cp of the circuit
is switched on. Maximum speed is maintened until the cp is in CM-ON state (i.e. wait that
cp minimum time on (MC05 seconds) is elapsed and the compressor reaches the minimum
speed (surge).
o Fans control is switched off (i.e. all fans are switched off) when the output of controller
reaches zero or after the compressor minimum OFF time (MC04).
 If MD10=YES and the Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL) control is enabled (ME02=3), then the PI
control is enabled only when ELL< setpoint (ME11 or MH19, see par. 5.2.6.3).
 PI control uses the following parameters:
o Set point is selected by digital input SETP_DP_SEL:
 If SETP_DP_SEL is ON then the first set point (MD03) is used;
 If SETP_DP_SEL is OFF then the second set point (MD04) is used.
NOTE: the effective setpoint can be changed from “Dynamic setpoint on DP control”
function (see par. 5.4.2.4).
o Proportional band is specified by setup parameter MD05:
 If MD05>=0 then the fans are controlled with positive logic (i.e. fans speed increase
when DP increase and vice versa).
 if MD05<0 then the fans are controlled with negative logic (i.e. fans speed increase
when DP decrease and vice versa).
o Integral time is specified by setup parameter MD06.
Without Proportional Speed

Fans ON
4
Step4
3
Step3
2
OUT at the Step2
start of the PI 1
control Step1
25% 50% 75% 100% output of PI controller
With Proportional Speed

% Fans ON
100
75
50
Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.1 Ventilating circuits management

This is function allow to specify the max number of ventilating circuit in the unit and the number of
the ventilating circuit associated at each compressor.
MD11: Number of ventilating circuits in the unit.
(NOTE: ventilating circuit management is disabled when MD11 >= MC01)
MD12: Ventilating circuits associated to compressor#1.

 Ventilating circuits management is enabled when the number of ventilating circuits in the unit
(MD11) is < to number of compressors (MC01).
 Setup parameter MD11 is the number of ventilating circuit in the unit.
 The bits of setup parameters MD12…MD19 (m) specify which ventilating circuits (VC) are
associated to each compressor (CP):
o if bit0 = 1 (m=1) then the CP is associated to VC#1;
o if bitx = 1and bity = 1 (m=2^x + 2^y) then the CP is associated to VC#(x+1) and VC#(y+1).
(Example: if MD12 = 7 then CP#1 is associated to VC#1 and VC#2 and VC#3)
 The fan speed of each ventilating circuit is the maximum value between the fan speeds
computed by the compressors associated to the ventilating circuit.
 The fan speed of each ventilating circuit is available on the fan analog/digital output of all
compressors associated to the ventilating circuit.
5.4.2.2 Fan Speed Optimization

Following functions allows to increase the machine efficiency by reducing the fans speed in some
particular operative conditions.
Two different algorithms are available:
 Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 1
 Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 2

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.2.1 Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 1

This function allows the obtain a power saving by reducing the maximum fan speed when the
ambient temperature and the cooling machine are below a prefixed values. Fan speed is changed
proportionally to the circuit demand capacity.
MD20: Fan Speed Optimization management:
0= disabled;
1= enabled – mode 1.
MD21: Delay Time used for Fan Speed Optimization
MD22: Ambient Temp. value used for the Fan Speed Optimization activation.
MD23: Circuit demand capacity used for the Fan Speed Optimization activation.
MD24: Circuit demand capacity used for the Max Fan Speed Optimization.
MD25: Max Fan Demand at Start Optimisation.
MD26: Max Fan Demand at End Optimisation.

 The function is enabled when MD20=1.
 Circuit demand capacity (CIRC_DEM) is the demand capacity percentage request in a
circuit (i.e. sum of the actual demand capacity of the cp in the circuit, expressed in
percentage).
 The function is controlled in each circuit with following logic:
o The function is activated when TAE<MD22 and CIRC_DEM <=MD23 for at least
MD21 seconds;
o The function is immediately deactivated in one of following condition (OR logic):
 TAE > MD22+1°C;
 CIRC_DEM >= MD23+5%;
 TAE probe go in alarm condition.
 When the function is activated and all the cp switched on in the circuit are in “ON” state (i.e.
not more in “CM-ON” state) then the output of PID used to control Fan Speed (i.e.
Discharge Press.) is upper limited by the value MAX_FAN_SPEED computed with following
logic:
o When CIRC_DEM>=MD23% then MAX_FAN_SPEED=MD25%;
o When CIRC_DEM<=MD24% then MAX_FAN_SPEED=MD26%;
o When MD23%< CIRC_DEM <MD24% then MAX_FAN_SPEED is computed by
linear interpolation; following graph resume the logic.
Max Fan
Speed (%)
100
MD23
MD24
MD24 MD23 MD23+5 100 CIRC_DEM (%)
 When the out of PID to control Fan Speed is = MAX_FAN_SPEED then the value of Fan
speed showed on first compressors screen start to blink every 1 seconds (see par.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.18).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.2.2 Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 2

This function allows the obtain a power saving by reducing the maximum fan speed when the
ambient temperature and the cooling machine are below a prefixed values. Fan speed is changed
monitoring in each circuit the changes of COP rate.
MD20: Fan Speed Optimization management:
0= disabled;
MD21: Delay Time used for Fan Speed Optimization
MD22: Ambient Temp. value used for the Fan Speed Optimization activation.
MD23: Circuit demand capacity used for the Fan Speed Optimization activation.
MD25: Max Fan Demand at Start Optimisation.
MD26: Max Fan Demand at End Optimisation.
MD27: Number of fans installed in each circuit
MD28: Fan nominal power, referred to each fan
MD29: Fan type: 0= EC (i.e. Fan with Electronic Control); 1= AC (i.e. Fans with Triac Control).
MD30: Wait time for fan speed optimization (mode 2) activaction after that the last cp in the circuit
was exit from “CM-ON state.
MD31: Fan speed increse/decrease used in fan speed optimization (mode 2).
MD32: Fan speed optimization check time.
MD33: Fan speed optimization logic selection:
0= based on COP;
1= based on Circuit Power Consumption.

 The function is enabled when MD20=2 and following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
o COP evaluation is enabled (see par. 5.2.12.1).
 Circuit demand capacity (CIRC_DEM) is the demand capacity percentage request in a
circuit (i.e. sum of the actual demand capacity of the cp in the circuit, expressed in
percentage).
 The function is controlled in each circuit with following logic:
o The function is activated when all the following conditions are satisfied (AND logic):
 TAE<MD22 and CIRC_DEM <=MD23 for at least MD21 seconds;
 At least MD30 minutes are elapsed since the last cp switched on in the
circuit was exit from “CM-ON” logical state;
o The function is immediately deactivated in one of following condition (OR logic):
 TAE > MD22+1°C;
 CIRC_DEM >= MD23+5%;
 TAE probe go in alarm condition;
 In the circuit is present at least a cp in “START” or “CM-ON” logical state;
 Fan Protection alarm is active (see par. 5.5.3.3)
(NOTE: in this case, some fans may be switched off and so the estimated
fan power consumption may be wrong);
 In the circuit is present at least a cp where Adaptive Control on Discharge
Pressure is activated (see par.5.3.2.1).
 When the function is activated then the fan speed of i-esimo circuit (FAN_SPEEDi_t) can be
controlled with two different logics:
o If MD33=0 then the fan speed control is based on the circuit effect on COP
(EFF_COPi – see below for more details): every MD32 seconds is computed the
circuit effect on COP (EFF_COPi_t) that is compared with the value computed
previously (EFF_COPi_t-1):
 If EFF_COPi_t > EFF_COPi_t-1 (i.e. circuit effect on COP is increased) then

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
the fan speed is decreased of MD31% respect the previous value:

FAN_SPEEDi_t = FAN_SPEEDi_t-1 - MD31
Fan speed can be decreased until is reached the minimum value MD26%.
 If EFF_COPi_t < EFF_COPi_t-1 (i.e. circuit effect on COP is decreased) then
the fan speed is increased of MD31% respect the previous value;
FAN_SPEEDi_t = FAN_SPEEDi_t-1 + MD31
Fan speed can be increased until is reached the maximum value MD25%.
 If EFF_COPi_t = EFF_COPi_t-1 (i.e. circuit effect on COP not changed) then
tha fan speed is not changed.
FAN_SPEEDi_t = FAN_SPEEDi_t-1
o If MD33=1 then the fan speed control is based on the Power consumption of circuit
(PWR_CIRCi – see below for more details): every MD32 seconds is computed the
Power consumption of circuit (PWR_CIRCi_t) that is compared with the value
computed previously (PWR_CIRCi_t-1):
 If PWR_CIRCi_t > PWR_CIRCi _t-1 (i.e. power consumption is increased) then
the fan speed is increased of MD31% respect the previous value;
FAN_SPEEDi_t = FAN_SPEEDi_t-1 + MD31
Fan speed can be decreased until is reached the minimum value MD26%.
 If PWR_CIRCi_t < PWR_CIRCi_t-1 (i.e. power consumption is decreased) then
the fan speed is decreased of MD31% respect the previous value:
FAN_SPEEDi_t = FAN_SPEEDi_t-1 - MD31
Fan speed can be decreased until is reached the maximum value MD25%.
 If PWR_CIRCi_t = PWR_CIRCi_t-1 (i.e. power consumption not changed) then
the fan speed is not changed:
FAN_SPEEDi_t = FAN_SPEEDi_t-1
 When the function is activated then the value of Fan speed showed on first compressors
screen start to blink every 1 seconds (see par. 5.6.1.18).
 The circuit effect on COP (EFF_COPi) is computed as:
EFF_COPi = COP * (PWR_CIRCi / UnitPwrCons) i=index of circuit
o COP: COP value computed as reported in par. 5.2.12.1.

o UnitPwrCons: Unit Power Consumption computed as reported in par. 5.2.12.3.
o PWR_CIRCi: Power consumption of i-esimo circuit computed as reported in par.
5.2.12.3.
 Power consumption of circuit (PWR_CIRCi) is computed as reported in par. 5.2.12.3
REMARK
 Circuit effect on COP (EFF_COPi) has no physical meaning and it is only used internally in
the controller to control the fans speed.
 Fan speed optimization based on COP (MD33=0) can be used only when only 1
compressor is used or when the compressors are in parallel in one circuit.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.3 Fan Speed Limitation
5.4.2.3.1 Fan speed limitation by time periods

This option allows to limit the fans speed in prefixed time periods of the day.
MD34: Fan speed limitation:
0= disabled;
1= enabled by time period;
2= enabled by time period and noise level sensor.
MD35: Number of time periods used for Fan speed limitation.
MD36: Start hour of time period #1 for fan speed limitation.
MD37: Start minutes of time period #1 for fan speed limitation.
MD38: End hour of time period #1 for fan speed limitation.
MD39: End minutes of time period #1 for fan speed limitation.
MD40: Maximum fan speed in time period #1.

 The number of of time periods is configurable by setup parameter MD35:
o if MD35=1 then the maximum fan speed is limited to:
 MD40% when the actual time (hh:mm) is in time period #1
(i.e. MD36h:MD37m <= hh:mm <= MD38h:MD39m)
 MD46% when the actual time is in time period #2
(i.e. MD48h:MD49m <= hh:mm <= MD50h: MD51m)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

 When the actul time is out of a configured time period, the fan speed is not limited (i.e.
100% is the maximum fan speed).
 When the value of maximum fan speed is changed (i.e. a transition from a time period to
another is executed) then:
o the increase/decrease of max value is make using a fixed rate of 0.2% / sec;
o if the new value is lower of the previous one then, on the transition period, the
decrease of max value is locked when the Adaptive Control on Discharge Pressure
is activated (see par. 5.3.2.1).
Max Fan Speed

(%)
100
0.2% / sec
50
Adaptive control on DP is active,

max fan speed decrease is locked
Time (sec)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.3.2 Fan speed limitation by time periods and noise level sensor
This option allows to limit the fans speed in prefixed time periods of the day, considering the noise
level of machine read by a phonometer.
MD34: Fan speed limitation:
0= disabled;
2= enabled by time period and noise level sensor.
MD35: Number of time periods used for Fan speed limitation.
MD41: Maximum noise level in time period #1.
MD60: Maximum noise level to limit the fan speed in fan speed limitation by Noise Level sensor
MD61: Noise level band for fan speed limitation by Noise Level sensor
MD62: Max speed increse/decrease used in fan speed limitation by Noise Level sensor
MD63: Check time for fan speed limitation by Noise Level sensor
MD64: Minimum value of max speed used in fan speed limitation by Noise Level sensor
IM51: Noise Level (NL) channel, min. value.
IM52: Noise Level (NL) channel, max. value.

 The Noise Level of machine is read by analog input NL. Following settings are required:
o minimum value of analog input (4mA) is set by IM40 setup parameter;
o maximum value of analog input (20mA) is set by IM41 setup parameter.
 The fan speed is limited considering the maximum noise level (MAX_NL) specified in the
each time period. The number of of time periods is configurable by setup parameter MD35:
o if MD35=1 then the maximum fan speed is limited considering following values of
MAX_NL:
 MD41dB when the actual time (hh:mm) is in time period #1
MAX_NL:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MAX_NL:
 MD47dB when the actual time is in time period #2
MAX_NL:
 If the actul time is out of a configured time period then the fan speed is not limited (i.e.
100% is the maximum fan speed).
 If the actual time is into a prefixed time period then the max fan speed (MAX_FAN_SPEED)
is controlled with following logic:
o every MD63 seconds:
 it is computed the average of Noise Level (AVG_NL) in the last MD63
seconds (note: 1 value at second is acquired);
 it is stored the peak of Noise Level (PEAK_NL) in the last MD63 seconds;
 following control is executed:
- If (AVG_NL >= MAX_NL) and (AVG_NL < MD60) then the function is
enabled and MAX_FAN_SPEED is decreased of MD62%; the
decrease is executed until is reached the minimum value of MD64%;
- If [(AVG_NL >= MAX_NL-MD61) and (AVG_NL < MAX_NL)] or
[(PEAK_NL >= MD60)] then the value of MAX_FAN_SPEED is
locked;
- If (AVG_NL < MAX_NL-MD61) and (AVG_NL < MD60) then the
MAX_FAN_SPEED is increased of MD62%; the increase is executed
until is reached the maximum value of 100%.
Noise Level
(dB)
MAX_FAN_SPEED decrease (MD62% every MD63 sec)
MAX_NL
MAX_FAN_SPEED locked
MAX_NL-MD61
MAX_FAN_SPEED increase (MD62% every MD63 sec)
Time
o The value of NL is the average value computed in the interval of MD63 seconds.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o The function is disabled when the probe NL goes in alarm (see par. 5.5.1.1.20).
 When the value of maximum fan speed is changed (i.e. a transition from a time period to
another is executed) then:
o the increase/decrease of max value is make using a fixed rate of 0.2% / sec;
o if the new value is lower of the previous one then, on the transition period, the
decrease of max value is locked when the Adaptive Control on Discharge Pressure
is activated (see par. 5.3.2.1).
MAX_FAN_SPEED
(%)
100
0.2% / sec
50
Adaptive control on DP is active,

max fan speed decrease is locked
Time (sec)
 Following values are showed on Noise Performance screen:
o Noise Level (NL);
o Actual maximum Noise Level (Max);
o Noise Average Level (Avg);
o Noise Peak Level (Peak);
o Max Fan Speed.
REMARK
 To avoid an high Noise Level when the first compressor of a circuit is started, it’s
recommended to disabled the pre-ventilation (i.e. MC60=0).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.4 Dynamic setpoint on DP control

This option allows to change dynamically the setpoint used on Discarge Pressure control,
considering the actual Suction Pressure in the circuit.
MC62: Minimum value of Pressure Ratio
(1.0 = disable the dynamic setpoint on Discharge Pressure Control)
MR12: Adaptive Control – If DP > this parameter (0 = disabled) then the compressor capacity is
decreased until the lower value MR15 (i.e. capacity will be >= MR15).
(NOTE: used when digital input SETP_DP_SEL is ON)
(NOTE: used when digital input SETP_DP_SEL is OFF)

 The function is enabled when MD34 > 1.0.
 The standard setpoint (SET) used in Discharge Pressure control is selected with following
logic:
o SET = MD03 when digital input SETP_DP_SEL is ON;
o SET = MD04 when digital input SETP_DP_SEL is OFF.
 The dynamic setpoint (DSET) effectively used in Discharge Pressure control is computed
DSET = (SPa * MC62) – 1.0bar

if DSET < SET then DSET = SET
if DSET > MR12-1.0bar then DSET = MR12-1.0bar (only if MR12>SET+1.0bar)
 In each circuit the value of absolute Suction Pressure (SPa) is computed with following
logic:
o if the first compressor in a circuit must be started then is considered the value of
absolute Suction Pressure (SPa) of the compressor that starts:
SPa = SP + 1.0bar
o if the others compressor in a circuit must be started then is considered the

maximum values of absolute Suction Pressure (SPa) of the compressors already
started in the circuit in logical state “ON” (i.e. not more in “CM-ON” state):
SPa = max[SPi] + 1.0bar (i = index of compressors in “ON” state)
NOTES
This function working correctly only with sw version GEODTU13.01 (or later).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.2.5 FANS manual control

This function allows to control the all enabled fans in manual mode.
MD67: Fans speed in manual control mode (101 = Fans manual control disabled)

 FANS manual control, in each circuit, is enabled if the setup parameter MD67 < 101 and the
circuit is in OFF logical state (i.e. all the compressors of circuit are in OFF).
 If FANS manual control is enabled then:
o the fans speed percentage, for all the circuit, is set by setup parameters MD67;
o the FANS value showed on the compressors screen (see par. 5.6.1.18) is alternated with
“MAN “ string.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE control

This procedure is replicated for each circuit controlling locally the Suction Superheat (TSUP) or the
Discharge Superheat (DSUP) or the Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL); it is enabled by ME01:
 if ME01=0 then EEV is disabled;
 if ME01=1 then EEV is enabled through analog output;
 if ME01=2 then EEV is enabled through serial.
The superheating value (TSUP) is the difference between Suction Temperature (ST) and
Evaporating Temperature (calculated from Suction Pressure).
The parameters of the PID control are stored in EEPROM:
 ME02: EEV algorithm selection:
0 = old algorithm;
1 = new algorithm;
3 = control on evaporator liquid level with new algorithm (i.e. flooded evaporator
selected);
5 = new algorithm on discharge superheat without “EEV in oscillation” warning;
6= control on condenser liquid level with new algorithm.
 ME04: Set Point for superheating control
 ME05: Proportional Band for EEV control
 ME06: Integral time for EEV control
 ME07: EEV Derivative Time (0= derivative effect disabled)
 ME08: MOP - Maximum Operating Pressure (Maximum value of Suction Pressure allowed)
 ME14: EEV preset value when compressor starts.
 ME15: EEV preset value when compressor is at max power.
 ME16: EEV preset time after compressor switch on.
5.4.3.1 EEV Board selection

The EEV should be controlled with different PE boards (NG5, NG5DIS, OB1) selected by setup
parameter ME03.
Every EEV board can be used enabling some extra options available on the different boards:
- Battery management: this option allows to manage the alarms EEV Board battery level
and EEV Board battery to change related to EEV board battery;
- Winding alarms: this option allows managing EEV Winding alarm that halt the compressor
when the winding is open or shorted;
- T1/T2 probes: this option allows to use two PTC analog inputs available in some EEV
boards.
Following table resume all the possible options.
ME03 EEV board Battery Winding Alarm (1) T1/T2 probes (1)
0 NG5 No No No
1 NG5DIS No No Yes
2 OB1 No Yes Yes
3 OB1 Yes Yes Yes
Notes
1) This option is available only if the selected board is connected to S10 by serial line (ME01=2)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.2 EEV management

When the first compressor in a circuit is switched on, then EEV is controlled with following logic:
 If ME17=0 then:
o Fans control is activated and EEV is open to the preset value (ME14%);
o After MC60 seconds the compressor is switched on at minimum switch on capacity
(MC10/MC12*100%) and this capacity demand is locked for alteast MC05 seconds;
o After ME16 seconds that compressor is switched on, EEV PID control is enabled and
the EEV preset memorized in RAM is update with a better value;
o When the circuit capacity changes the EEV value is computed by PID control.
 If ME17>0 then:
o Fans control is activated and EEV is leaved closed (EEV=0%);
o After MC60 seconds the compressor is switched on at minimum switch on capacity
(MC10/MC12*100%) and this demand capacity is locked for atleast MC05 seconds;
o When the compressor have reached the minimum speed for EEV activation
(ME17x1000rpm) then EEV is opening to the preset value (ME14%);
o After ME16 seconds that EEV control is activated, EEV “Like PID” control is enabled
and the EEV preset memorized in RAM is update with a better value;
o When EEV preset timer is elapsed, EEV PID control is enabled and EEV preset
memorized in RAM is update with a better value;
o When the circuit capacity changes the EEV value is computed by “Like PID” control.
 If 0  ME14  100 then the EEV preset value is dynamically updated:
o for the first compressor startup after Microsmart power up the algorithm uses the setup
stored values (ME14) to preset the EEV position;
o then, dynamically, the software will use the last used value when compressor capacity
is at minimum switch capacity for each compressor startup.
 If 100 < ME14  200 then the EEV starting value is NOT dynamically updated:
o the algorithm uses at each startup the setup stored value (ME14-100) to preset the EEV
position.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.3 EEV Algorithm selection

The kind of algorithm used for the EEV control depends from the value of setup parameter ME02:
 If ME02=0 then the standard EEV algorithm is used (for details see par. 5.4.3.3.1).
o If parallel compressors are enabled (MC02=11..16,19,20) then the suction superheat
(TSUP) used for EEV control is the minimum value between the TSUP values of
compressors switched on in the circuit;
o MOP control is based on the maximum value of suction pressure (SP) between the
 If ME02=1 then the new EEV algorithm is used (for details see par. 5.4.3.3.1).
 If ME02=2 then the new EEV algorithm is used but EEV In Oscillation Warning is disabled
(for details see par. 5.4.3.3.1). Following assumptions are made:
 If ME02=3 then control on evaporator liquid level in the circuit (for details see par. 5.4.3.3.2).
 If ME02=4 then control based on the linear relation with compressor capacity (for details see
par. 5.4.3.3.3).
 If ME02=5 then the new algorithm on Discharge Superheat is used, without EEV In Oscillation
Warning (for details see par. 5.4.3.3.4). Following assumptions are made:
o If parallel compressors are enabled (MC02=11..16,19,20) then the discharge superheat
(DSH) used for EEV control is the minimum value between the DSH values of
o MOP control is disabled.
 If ME02=6 then control on condenser liquid level in the circuit (for details see par. 5.4.3.3.5).
 If Hating mode is activated (see par. 5.2.2.1) and MH24>=0 then the kind of algorithm is
selected by setup parameter MH24 with the same selection logic of ME02 (see par. 5.2.2.6).
Below is reported the control details of the different algorithms.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.3.1 EEV “Like PID” based on Suction Superheat

0 = old algorithm;
1 = new algorithm;
2 = new algorithm without “EEV in oscillation” warning.
ME04: EEV Super Heat set point value.
ME05: EEV Proportional Band.
ME06: EEV Integral Time (0= integral effect disabled).
ME07: EEV Derivative Time (0= derivative effect disabled).
ME09: Max error for EEV enhanced control.
ME10: Min error for EEV rough control.

 EEV opening is controlled by “Like PID” control based on the differences between a
prefixed set point and Suction Superheat (TSUP) value, using the following parameters:
o Set point: ME04
o Proportional Band: ME05
o Integral Time: ME06
o Derivative Time: ME07
 Suction Superheat (TSUP) value is the difference between Suction Temperature (ST) and
Evaporating Temperature (calculated from Suction Pressure (SP), prefixed the gas type):
TSUP = ST – Teq[SP]
 The EEV control can works with 2 different algorithm:

o The “old” when ME02=0;
o The “new” when ME02=1,2.
Both algorithms working with different speeds in base to the zone where Suction Superheat
working, delimited by setup parameters ME09, ME10:
o If ME09 < |TSUP - ME04| < ME10 => Normal zone => Normal speed
o If |TSUP - ME04| > ME10 => Rough zone High speed
o If |TSUP - ME04| < ME09 => Enhanced zone: Low speed
TSUP
Rough Zone (High)
ME04+ME10
Normal Zone (High)
ME04+ME09
Enhanced Zone (High)
ME04
Enhanced Zone (Low)
ME04-ME09
Normal Zone (Low)
ME04-ME10
Rough Zone (Low)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.3.2 EEV “Like PID” based on Evaporator Liquid Level

ME11: EEV set point value for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected.
ME12: EEV Proportional Band used for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected.
ME13: EEV Integral Time used for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected.

 This algorithm is selected when ME02=3.
prefixed set point and Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL) value, using the following parameters:
o Set point: ME11
 Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL) is read by a ratiometric transducer (see par. 5.2.6.3).
 If only one circuit is used (1 cp only or more cp in parallel on 1 circuit) then Evaporator
Liquid Level (ELL) can be read using two probes (see par. 5.4.3.10).
5.4.3.3.3 EEV “Like PID” based on Linear Control

ME18: EEV minimum opening.
ME19: EEV maximum opening.

 This algorithm is selected when ME02=3 and the compressors are not in parallel (i.e.
MC02=10,17,18).
 EEV opening is controlled by “Like PID” control based on linear relation with cp capacity:
o When the actual compressor capacity is at the minimum value (MC09) then EEV is
open to the minimum value (ME18%);
o When the actual compressor capacity is at the maximum value (100%) then EEV is
open to the maximum value (ME19%);
o When the actual compressor capacity is included between the minimum value
(MC09) and the maximum value (100%) then EEV opening is computed using linear
interpolation.
EEV
Opening
(%)
ME19
ME18
MC09 100 Actual Capacity

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.3.4 EEV “Like PID” based on Discharge Superheat

0 = old algorithm;
1 = new algorithm;
2 = new algorithm without “EEV in oscillation” warning.
ME04: EEV Super Heat set point value.
ME05: EEV Proportional Band.
ME06: EEV Integral Time (0= integral effect disabled).
ME07: EEV Derivative Time (0= derivative effect disabled).
ME09: Max error for EEV enhanced control.
ME10: Min error for EEV rough control.

prefixed set point and Discharge Superheat (DSUP) value, using the following parameters:
o Set point: ME04
o Derivative Time: ME07
 Discharge Superheat (DSUP) value is the difference between Discharge Temperature (DT)
and Condensing Temperature (calculated from Discharge Pressure (DP), prefixed the gas):
DSUP = DT – Teq[DP]
EEV control works with different speeds in base to the zone where Discharge Superheat
working, delimited by setup parameters ME09, ME10:
o If ME09 < |TSUP - ME04| < ME10 => Normal zone => Normal speed
o If |TSUP - ME04| > ME10 => Rough zone High speed
o If |TSUP - ME04| < ME09 => Enhanced zone: Low speed
DSUP
Rough Zone (High)
ME04+ME10
Normal Zone (High)
ME04+ME09
Enhanced Zone (High)
ME04
Enhanced Zone (Low)
ME04-ME09
Normal Zone (Low)
ME04-ME10
Rough Zone (Low)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.3.5 EEV “Like PID” based on Condenser Liquid Level

6 = control on condenser liquid level with new algorithm;
ME11: EEV set point value for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected.
ME12: EEV Proportional Band used for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected.
ME13: EEV Integral Time used for liquid level control if flooded evaporator is selected.

 This algorithm is selected when ME02=6.
prefixed set point and Condenser Liquid Level (ELL) value, using the following parameters:
o Setpoint: ME11
 EEV opening control logic is the follow:
o EEV opening is increased when ELL > setpoint;
o EEV opening is decreased when ELL < setpoint.
 Condenser Liquid Level of first circuit is read by the ratiometric transducer ELL1.
 Condenser Liquid Level of second circuit is read by the ratiometric transducer ELL2.
 If only one circuit is used (1 cp only or more cp in parallel on 1 circuit) then Evaporator
Liquid Level (ELL) can be read using two probes (see par. 5.4.3.10).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.4 MOP management

ME08: Max operative Suction Pressure used in EEV control.

 MOP is the maximum allowed value of Suction Pressure (SP).
 If SP > ME08 the control algorithm is bypassed and the EEV opening should be closed to
reach the MOP value:
o SP < MOP: PI control is enabled
o MOP< SP < MOP + 5psi: the control output is locked
o SP > MOP + 5psi: the control output decrease of 0.5% every seconds.
5.4.3.5 EEV minimum and maximum opening limitation

ME19: EEV maximum opening

 The minimum opening of EEV is lower limited to ME18%; to bypass the EEV lower limitation
set ME18=0.
 The maximum opening of EEV is higher limited to ME19%; to bypass the EEV higher limitation
set ME19=100.
 If EEV extra closing function is activated (see par.5.4.3.8) and ME47>0 then the effective EEV
minimum opening (EEVmin) is computed as:
EEVmin= EEVmin= ME18 – (ME47 / N)
N= nr. of Cp on in the circuit
 If EEV extra closing function is activated (see par.5.4.3.8) and ME48>0 then the effective EEV
maximum opening (EEVmax) is computed as:
EEVmax= ME19 – (ME48 / N)
N= nr. of Cp on in the circuit
 If EEV extra closing function is activated then the effective EEV minimum and maximum
opening are computed as described in par.5.4.3.8.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.6 EEV manual control

This function allows to setting the opening of each EEV valves in manual mode.

 EEV manual control, for each valve, is enabled if the setup parameters ME28...ME35 < 101
and the circuit is in OFF logical state (i.e. all the compressors of circuit are OFF).
 If EEV manual control is enabled then:
o the EEV valve opening percentage, for each valve, is set by setup parameters
ME28...ME35;
o the EEV value showed on the compressors screen is alternated with “MAN “ string
every 2 seconds.
5.4.3.7 EEV extra opening

This function is used in Parallel Actuator (see par.5.2.1.2.2) to decrease the Pressure Ratio
(PR=DPa/SPa) when a new compressor must be switched on.
10=Turbocor;
12=Turbocorwith all cp in parallel on 2;
14=Turbocor with all cp in parallel on 2 circuits and new algorithm.
ME39: Percentage value used for EEV extra opening (0=EEV extra opening disabled)
ME50: Enable EEV extra opening when a new compressor starts

 The funcion is enabled when MC02=13,19 and ME39>0.
 The function is activated from Parallel Actuator or Hybrid Actuator before the startup of a
new compressor and in this case the EEV is extra opening by changing the setpoint of EEV
control:
o If ME02=0,1,2,5 then the EEV setpoint (ME04) is decreased with the value
ME04*(ME39/100);
o If ME02=3 then the EEV setpoint (ME11) is increased of the value ME39%;
o If ME02=4 then the EEV opening is increased of the value ME39%.
 The function is deactivated when one of following conditions are satisfied:
o Parallel Actuator call the deactivation;
o the minimum value of discharge superheat (DSH) between all the compressors switched on
go below 0°F(=0°C) for more than 10 seconds.
 If ME50=YES then the function is activated also during the startup of the new compressor (only
if at least a cp was already switched on) and it’s maintened activated during the counting
minimum on (MC05).
 When the function is activated then, on the first compressor screen, the EEV value is
alternated with “INCR” string every 2 sec (INCR = EEV increasing).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.8 EEV extra closing

This function allows to decrease the EEV opening when SCR Temp. or Inverter Temp. or Cavity
Temp. of compressors on in the circuit go over a prefixed values.
The function is replicated for each circuit.
ME40: Setpoint percentage used for EEV extra closing (0=EEV extra opening disabled)
ME41: Maxium setpoint percentage used for EEV extra closing.
ME42: Delay Time used for EEV extra closing
ME43: SCR Temp. used for EEV extra closing activaction.
ME44: Cavity Temp. used for EEV extra closing activaction.
ME45: Inverter Temp. used for EEV extra closing activaction.
ME46: Differential Temp. used for EEV extra closing deactivaction.
ME19: EEV maximum opening
ME47: EEV minimum opening decrease when “EEV extra closing” is activated
(0= EEV min open decrease disabled)
ME48: EEV maximum opening decrease when “EEV extra closing” is activated
(0= EEV max open decrease disabled)

 The funcion is enabled when ME40>0.
 The function is activated when EEV extra opening is disabled (see par. 5.4.3.7) and one of
following condition are satisfied (OR logic):
o SCR Temp. > ME43;
o Cavity Temp. > ME44;
o Inverter Temp. > ME45.
 The function is deactivated when all of following condition are satisfied (AND logic):
o SCR Temp. < ME43 – ME46;
o Cavity Temp. < ME44 – ME46;
o Inverter Temp. < ME45 – ME46;
 SCR Temp. is maximum value among those of the cp switched on in the circuit.
 Cavity Temp. is maximum value among those of the cp switched on in the circuit.
 Inverter Temp. is maximum value among those of the cp switched on in the circuit.
 When the function is activated then:
o EEV control setpoint is changed with following logic:
 If ME02=0,1,2,5 then EEV control setpoint (ME04) is increased of ME40% every
ME42 sec, until that maximum increase percentage (ME41%) is reached;
 If ME02=3 then the EEV control setpoint (ME11) is decreased of ME40% every
ME42 sec, until that maximum decrease percentage (ME41%) is reached;
 If ME02=4 then the EEV opening is decreased of ME40% every ME42 sec, until that
maximum decrease percentage (ME41%) is reached.
 If ME47>0 then the effective EEV minimum opening (EEVmin) is decreased using following
formula:
EEVmin= ME18 – (ME47 / N) (N= nr. of Cp switched on in the circuit)
 If ME48>0 then the effective EEV maximum opening (EEVmax) is computed as:
EEVmax= ME19 – (ME48 / N) (N= nr. of Cp switched on in the circuit)
 When the function is activated then, on the first compressor screen, the EEV value is
alternated with “DECR” string every 2 sec (DECR = EEV decreasing).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.3.9 Second EEV valve in Heat Pump mode

This option allows to control a second EEV valve when the machine working in heat pump mode.
MH21: Second EEV valve in heat mode.

 The function is enabled when MH21=YES and Heat Pump is enabled (MH01=1,2) and the
compressors are in parallel on 1 circuit (MC02=11,13,15,19).
 When the function is enabled then:
o If machine working in cooling mode (see par.5.2.2.1) then first valve (EEV1) will be
controlled while the second one (EEV2) will be constantly closed (0%);
o If machine working in heating mode (see par.5.2.2.1) then second valve (EEV2) will be
controlled while the first one (EEV1) will be constantly closed (0%).
 The valve type used in EEV1 is selected by setup parameter ME20.
 The valve type used in EEV2 is selected by setup parameter ME21.
5.4.3.10 Second ELL probe in first circuit

This option allows to manage a second Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level probe when only first
circuit is used.
ME49: Second Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level probe in the first circuit

 This option is enabled when ME49=YES and all the following conditions are satisfied (AND
logic):
o EEV control is based on Evaporator Liquid Level (ME02=3) or EEV control is based on
Condenser Liquid Level (ME02=6);
o only 1 refrigerating circuit is used (i.e. 1 cp [MC01=1] or all the cp are in parallel on 1
circuit [MC02=11,13,15,19]).
 If the function is enabled with ME02=3 then Evaporator Liquid Level of circuit#1 is computed as
the maximum value between the values of ELL1 probe and ELL2 probe.
 If the function is enabled with ME02=6 then Condenser Liquid Level of circuit#1 is computed as
the maximum value between the values of ELL1 probe and ELL2 probe.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.4 PARALLEL COMPRESSORS Management

This option allows the management of more compressors in parallel on one or two refrigerating
circuits.
10=Turbocor;
circuit).
circuit) and new algorithm
5.4.4.1 Compressors in parallel on 1 circuit

If setup parameter MC02=11,13,15,19 then all the compressors working in parallel on one
refrigerating circuit.

 All the analog/digital input/output related to the circuit (ST, Liquid Solenoid, EEV,FAN) should
be connected on the resources of compressor#1 in the master board.
 The compressors are controlled by Parallel Actuator (see chapt. 5.2.1.2.2 or 5.2.1.2.3).
 The FANs are controlled by a PI with following logic:
o In cooling mode (MH01=0) with MD05>0 (positive logic), the out of PI is computed in
base to the maximum value of Discharge Pressure between the compressors switched
on in the circuit;
o In cooling mode (MH01=0) with MD05<0 (negative logic), the out of PI is computed in
base to the minimum value of Discharge Pressure between the compressors switched
on in the circuit;
o In heating mode (MH01>0 and digital input HC_SEL=ON), the out of PI is computed in
base to the minimum value of Suction Pressure between the compressors switched on
in the circuit;
 The EEV is controlled as in stepless mode:
o When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the EEV is open to the preset
value (ME14) for the preset time (ME16);
o After that the preset time is elapsed then the EEV is controlled by PI control;
o If a changes of circuit capacity occurs (compressor switch on/off or compressor
unloading) then the EEV is controlled by PI control;
o The PI control working with following logic:
 when is used an EEV algoritm based on suction superheat (ME02=0,1,2) then
the out of PI is computed in base to the minimum value of Suction Superheat
(TSUP) between the compressors switched on in the circuit (note: for MOP
control is used the maximum value of Suction Pressure between the
compressors switched on in the circuit);
 when is used an EEV algoritm based on discharge superheat (ME02=5) then
the out of PI is computed in base to the minimum value of Discharge Superheat
(DSH) between the compressors switched on in the circuit;
 when is used an EEV algoritm based on evaporator liquid level (ME02=3) then
the out of PI is computed in base to the value of Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL)
of circuit.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.4.2 Compressors in parallel on 2 circuits

If setup parameter MC02=12,14,16,20 then the compressors working in parallel on two
refrigerating circuit.

 The compressors of the circuit#1 should be connected on the compressor#1 of each board
used.
 The compressors of the circuit#2 should be connected on the compressor#2 of each board
used.
 All the analog/digital input/output related to the circuit#1 (ST#1, Liquid solenoid#1,
EEV#1,FAN#1) should be connected on the resources of compressor#1 in the master board.
 All the analog/digital input/output related to the circuit#2 (ST#2, Liquid solenoid#2,
EEV#2,FAN#2) should be connected on the resources of compressor#2 in the master board.
 The compressors are controlled by Parallel Actuator (see chapt. 5.2.1.2.2 or 5.2.1.2.3).
 The FANs are controlled by a PI with following logic:
o In cooling mode (MH01=0) with MD05>0 (positive logic), the out of PI is computed in
base to the maximum value of Discharge Pressure between the compressors switched
on in the circuit;
o In cooling mode (MH01=0) with MD05<0 (negative logic), the out of PI is computed in
base to the minimum value of Discharge Pressure between the compressors switched
on in the circuit;
o In heating mode (MH01>0 and digital input HC_SEL=ON), the out of PI is computed in
base to the minimum value of Suction Pressure between the compressors switched on
in the circuit;
 The EEV is controlled as in stepless mode:
o When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the EEV is open to the preset
value (ME14) for the preset time (ME16);
o After that the preset time is elapsed then the EEV is controlled by PI control;
o If a changes of circuit capacity occurs (compressor switch on/off or compressor
unloading) then the EEV is controlled by PI control;
o The PI control working with following logic:
 when is used an EEV algoritm based on suction superheat (ME02=0,1,2) then
the out of PI is computed in base to the minimum value of Suction Superheat
(TSUP) between the compressors switched on in the circuit (note: for MOP
control is used the maximum value of Suction Pressure between the
compressors switched on in the circuit);
 when is used an EEV algoritm based on discharge superheat (ME02=5) then
the out of PI is computed in base to the minimum value of Discharge Superheat
(DSH) between the compressors switched on in the circuit;
 when is used an EEV algoritm based on evaporator liquid level (ME02=3) then
the out of PI is computed in base to the value of Evaporator Liquid Level (ELL)
of circuit.
5.4.5 LPA control

See par. 5.2.4.3.2.
5.4.6 EVAP SYSTEM SPRAYER control

See par. 5.2.7.3.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.4.7 SUBCOOLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE monitoring

This option allows the monitoring of Subcooled Liquid Temperature in each circuit.
MR24: Enable the subcooled liquid temperature monitoring.
 Subcooled Liquid Temperature monitoring is enabled when MR24=YES.

 Subcooled Liquid Temperature (SLT) is related to each circuit and it is read by:
o SLT1 analog input for first circuit;
o SLT2 analog input for second circuit.
 The value of Subcooled Liquid Temperature is showed on Third Compressors screens.
 If Subcooled Liquid Temperature monitoring is enabled then following alarms are managed:
o SLT Probe alarm.
NOTE
Subcooled Liquid Temperature probe must be installed in the liquid line before the EEV valve.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5 ALARMS
Alarms are handled only if the controller is in ‘on’ status. In case of system failure, the controller
displays on the U.I. LCD the relevant error messages complete with the faulty circuit number. Once
the alarm condition has been reset, the error message disappears automatically or, in some
particular cases, remains until the ESC key is pressed (as shown in the display).
When an alarm is present the General Alarm Indication relay (ALL) is activated.
If manufacturer setup MC31=7 and fans number MD012 then, when a compressor alarm is
present, the related ALL_CPx (x=1,2) digital output is activated.
If a compressor alarm (warning) or a circuit alarm (warning) is present then the related single
compressor alarm CPx_ALARM (x=1,2) digital output is activated.
A list of the possible error conditions follows.
5.5.1 MACHINE alarms
5.5.1.1 Probes Alarm (System)
5.5.1.1.1 LWT Probe alarm

If LWT probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER LWT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Switch on the general alarm indication relay;
 Compressors are halted without pump down procedure
 Automatic reset 10 seconds after the end of the alarm condition;
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed in Split Unit (MV01>=3).
2) If Probes redundancy is enabled (see par.5.2.13) then the compressors are halted only when
LWT and LWT2 probes are together in alarm.
5.5.1.1.2 RWT Probe alarm

If RWT probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER RWT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Compressors are halted without pump down procedure, only if the control is on RWT
(MT06=1);
 Inverter Pumps demand (IPU) is set to 0%
(only if the Pumps are controlled with Inverter on RWT (MP07=2), see par. 5.2.5.1.4)
 Automatic reset 10 seconds after the end of the alarm condition.
Notes
2) If Probes redundancy is enabled (see par.5.2.13) then the compressors are halted only when
RWT and RWT2 probes are together in alarm.
5.5.1.1.3 EV1T / EV2T Probes alarm

If two barrels are used (MV01=1,2) and the probe EVxT (x=1,2) go in underflow (short circuit) or
overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER EVxT TR. OUT OF RANGE";

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.1.4 Remote Setpoint Probe alarm

If Remote Setpoint is enabled (MT07>=3) and the probes REM_SP go in underflow (short circuit)
or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER REMOTE SP CONNECTION";
 Warning only (for the action on the control, see par.5.2.1.1.1.2);
5.5.1.1.5 TAE Probe alarm

If one of following conditions are satisfied (OR logic):
Free Cooling control is enabled without Dry Cooler (MF01>0 and MF11=0);
Evap System control is enabled (MA01>0);
Fan Speed Optimization is enabled (MD20>0);
and TAE probe go in overflow (open circuit) (NOTE: underflow condition (short circuit) is not
checked) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER TAE TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Free Cooling is switched off;
 Evap System control is deactivated (see par.5.2.7.3);
5.5.1.1.6 TFC Probe alarm

If Free Cooling Standard is enabled (MF01>0) and TFC probe go in underflow (short circuit) or
 Message: "ALARM MASTER TFC TR. OUT OF RANGE";
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed in one of following condition (OR logic):
- Free Cooling is disabled (MF01=0);
- Free Cooling with Dry Cooler is enabled (MF11>0);
- Free Cooling with Liquid Pump is enabled (ML01=YES).
5.5.1.1.7 IDT Probe alarm

If Dry Cooler control is enabled (MF11>0) and IDT probe go in overflow (open circuit) (NOTE:
underflow condition (short circuit) is not checked) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER IDT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.8 ODT Probe alarm

If Dry Cooler control is enabled (MF11>0) and ODT probe go in underflow (short circuit) or
 Message: "ALARM MASTER ODT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.9 OET Probe alarm

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
If Heat Pump in water/water machine is enabled (MH01=2,3) and OET probe go in underflow
(short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER OET TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Compressors are halted without pump down procedure;
5.5.1.1.10 TA_COR Probe alarm

If Ambient Temperature for Setpoint correction is enabled (MM10=2) and TA_COR probe go in
underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER TA_COR OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.11 AI_COR Probe alarm

If Analog Input for Setpoint correction is enabled (MM10=3) and AI_COR probe go in underflow
(short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER AI_COR OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.12 OCT / ICT Probes alarm

If Inlet/Outlet Condenser Temperatures visualization is enabled (MM10=4) and XXX=OCT / ICT
probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER XXX TR. OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.13 TA Probe alarm

If Ambient temperature reading is enabled (MM10=5,6) and TA probe go in underflow (short circuit)
or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER TA TR. OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.14 ULIM Probe alarm

If Upper Demand Limit by analog input is enabled (MT04=0 with MT07<3 and MF01=0 and
MF11=0 and MM10<>3,4) and ULIM probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition
(open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER ULIM TR.OUT OF RANGE ";
 Upper Demand Limit function is disabled (see par. 5.2.1.3.1);
 Automatic reset after the end of the alarm condition.
5.5.1.1.15 RH Probe alarm

If Evap System control is enabled (MA01>0) and RH probe is enabled (MA09>0) and RH probe go
in underflow (open circuit) (NOTE: overflow condition [short circuit] is not checked) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER RH TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Evap System control is deactivated (see par.5.2.7.3);

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.1.16 EXTC Probe alarm

If Split with Cooling Demand by Analog Input is enabled (MV01=5) and EXTC probe go in
underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: " ALARM MASTER EXTC TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 General alarm indication relay is activated;
5.5.1.1.17 SCT Probe alarm

If Split with Cooling Demand by Split Controlled Temperature is enabled (MV01=6) and SCT probe
go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: " ALARM MASTER SCT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
5.5.1.1.18 LWT2 Probe alarm

If LWT2 probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) and Probes
redundancy is enabled (see par.5.2.13) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER LWT2 TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Compressors are halted without pump down procedure (only when also LWT probe is in
alarm)
Notes
5.5.1.1.19 RWT2 Probe alarm

If RWT probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER RWT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Compressors are halted without pump down procedure (only if the control is on RWT
[MT06=1] and also RWT probe is in alarm);
 Inverter Pumps demand (IPU) is set to 0%
(only if the Pumps are controlled with Inverter on RWT (MP07=2), see par. 5.2.5.1.4)
Notes
5.5.1.1.20 NL Probe alarm

If NL probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER NL TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Fan Speed Limitation by Noise Level sensor is deactivated (see par. 5.4.2.3.2);
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the Fan Speed Limitation by Noise Level sensor is disabled
(MD34<>2).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.1.21 LLT Probe alarm

If LLT probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER LLT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the Liquid Level Transducer is disabled (MM27=NO).
5.5.1.1.22 APT Probe alarm

If APT probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER APT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the Auxiliary Pressure Transducer is disabled (MM27=NO).
5.5.1.2 Anti-Freeze alarm

For single barrel systems (MV01=0):
if the lowest temperature between LWT and RWT is below (<) MT22 for more than 1 second
OR
For multi barrels systems (MV01=1,2) with more than two compressors (MC01>2):
if the lowest temperature between LWT, RWT, EV1T, EV2T is below (<) MT22 for more than 1
second
OR
When Heat Pump is used in Water/Water machine (MH01=2,3) and Heating mode is select:
if the lowest temperature between LWT, RWT, OET is below (<) MT22 for more than 1 second
THEN
 Message: " ALARM MASTER FREEZE PROTECTION AL";
 Free Cooling is switched off, if enabled;
 Manual reset through the ESC key;
5.5.1.3 Temperature warning

If the controlled temperature (Tc) > Set_Tc + MT20 for more than MT21 minutes then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER WATER OVERTEMP.";
 Automatic reset 30 seconds after the end of alarm condition.
Notes
1) This alarm is disabled for the first 6 hours after the machine start.
2) The alarm is bypassed when MT21=0 or in SPLIT units with MV01=3,4,5.
3) The value of Set_Tc is assigned with the logic described on par. 5.2.1.1.1.2.
5.5.1.4 High RWT alarm

If the temperature RWT > MT24 for more than 10 seconds, then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER HIGH RWT TEMPERATURE";
 Automatic reset after 30 seconds that RWT < MT24 - 5°F.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Notes
1) To disable the alarm set MT24 to its maximum value (i.e. MT24=212°F).
2) The alarm is bypassed when heating mode is selected (i.e Heat Pump / Heat Recovery not
activated) or the SPLIT units are used (MV01>=3).
5.5.1.5 SIM not ready alarm

If SMS protocol is enabled (MS02=1) and one of following conditions are satisfied (OR logic):
- IMSI-SIM code <> MS08 for at least 5 minute;
- not any response from GSM modem (modem not connected to S10 board) for at least 5
minute
- GSM signal level < MS09 (signal level is between 0 – 31) for at least 30 minutes.
OR
If PEMS-SMS protocol is enabled (MS02=2) and not any PEMS-SMS request for at least 5
minutes,
THEN:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER SIM NOT READY”;
 The machine is halted;
 Pumps (internal or external controlled by inverter), if used, are switched off;
 Automatic reset 30 second after the end of alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when MS11=MS10.
2) PEMS-SMS requests are stopped by the Gateway if one of following conditions are satisfied
(OR logic):
- IMSI-SIM code is not correct;
- not any response from GSM modem (modem not connected to Gateway) for at least 5
minute;
- GSM signal level < GSM signal level alarm (see Gateway settings) for at least 25 minutes.
5.5.1.6 GSM low signal level alarm

If SMS protocol is enabled (MS02=1) and GSM signal level < MS09 (i.e. signal level is between 0 –
31) then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER GSM LOW SIGNAL”;
 Automatic reset.
Notes
1) The alarm not active General alarm Relay and it is not registered on alarm history.
2) The alarm is bypassed when MS11=MS10.
3) GSM signal level value is showed on the fourth row of screen alarm:
o if GSM signal level = -1 then any response from modem (i.e. modem not connected /
without power supply);
o if GSM signal level = -2 then the response from modem is not correct (i.e. modem not
compatible with software or serial errors).
5.5.1.7 Machine Fatal Error alarm

If the setup parameter MM15=YES then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER CALL ASSISTISTANCE”;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

5.5.1.8 Serial communication with Remote Controller

If the Remote Control is enabled (MT01>0) and the serial communication with Remote Controller is
lost (i.e. setup parameter MT02 is not refreshed) for more 120 seconds then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER SERIAL COMM. REM CTR";
 The compressors control logic depends on the value of setup parameter MT01:
o if MT01=1 then compressors are halted without pump down procedure (cooling is put to
0%);
o if MT01=2 then the cooling will be computed by local temperature control.
 Pumps are not switched off;
5.5.1.9 High RWT warning

If the temperature RWT > MT39 for more than MT40 seconds, then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN.";
 Switch on the High Rwt Warning indication (HI_RWT_WARN) digital output.
 Only warning;
 Automatic reset after 30 seconds that RWT < MT39 - 5°F.
Notes
1) The alarm is disabled when MT40=0.
2) The alarm is bypassed when heating mode is selected (i.e Heat Pump / Heat Recovery not
activated) or the SPLIT units are used (MV01>=3).
5.5.1.10 PUMPS alarms
5.5.1.10.1 Pumps magneto-thermal breaker

If the pumps management is enabled (MD012, MC31=0,1,2,4,5,6 and MP01<>0) and Px_CB
(with x=1,2) digital input is OFF then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER PUMPx BREAKER FAULT”;
 If all the pumps enabled are in alarm then:
o The machine is halted;
o Compressors are halted without pump down procedure;
o Pumps (internal or external controlled by inverter), if used, are switched off;
o Free Cooling is switched off, if enabled;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.11 EVAPORATOR alarms

Following alarms are related to evaporators (water side).
5.5.1.11.1 Flow Switch Alarm

If FL digital input is OFF for more than MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER NO WATER CIRCULATION”;
Notes
1) If MV02 > 99 then alarm is bypassed on the first MV02/100 seconds after machine switch on
and the delay time for alarm indication is MV02%100 (%=rest of division) (example: if
MV02=1005 then alarm is bypassed for 10 seconds after machine switch on and the delay time
for alarm indication is 5 seconds).
2) If MP01=4,5,6,8 then the alarm is bypassed when the pumps are switched off.
3) If pumps rotation with new logic is used (MP01=7,8) then the delay time of alarm is twice
respect to normal logic (2*YY seconds with MV02=XXYY) (For more details see also
par.5.2.5.1.1).
5.5.1.11.2 High Evaporators Drop alarm

If the Differential Pressure on the Evaporator#n (n=1,2) water (IWP-OWP) is over MV05 KPa for
more than MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER HIGH EVAP#n DROP” (n=1,2);
Notes
1) If MV02 > 99 (i.e. XXYY) then the alarm is bypassed on the first XX seconds after machine
switch on and the delay time for alarm indication is YY seconds (example: if MV02=1005 then
alarm is bypassed for 10 seconds after machine switch on and the delay time for alarm
indication is 5 seconds).
2) The alarm is bypassed when MV05=0.
3) The alarm related to evaporator#1 is enabled when one or two barrels are used (MV01=0,1,2)
and the Evaporator water pressure monitoring is enabled (MV03=YES).
4) The alarm related to evaporator#2 is enabled when two barrels are used (MV01=1,2) and the
Evaporator water pressure monitoring is enabled (MV03=YES).
5) The evaporator water pressures are read by the channels IWPn and OWPn (x=1,2): if a probe
go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop alarm is automatically activated.
5.5.1.11.3 Low Evaporators Drop alarm

If the Differential Pressure on the Evaporator#n (n=1,2) water (IWP-OWP) is below MV04 KPa for
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER LOW EVAP#n DROP” (n=1,2);

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
2) Lower condition on the differential pressure value is bypassed when MV04=0.
3) The alarm related to evaporator#1 is enabled when one or two barrels are used (MV01=0,1,2)
and the Evaporator water pressure monitoring is enabled (MV03=YES).
4) The alarm related to evaporator#2 is enabled when two barrels are used (MV01=1,2) and the
go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop alarm is automatically activated.
6) If the pumps are switched on together the compressors (i.e. MP01=4,5,6,8) then the alarm is
checked only when the pumps are switched on.
7) If pumps rotation with new logic is used (MP01=7,8) then the delay time of alarm is twice
respect to normal logic (2*YY seconds with MV02=XXYY) (For more details see also
par.5.2.5.1.1).
5.5.1.11.4 High Evaporators Drop warning

If the Differential Pressure on the Evaporator#n (n=1,2) water (IWP-OWP) is over (MV05 * 0.9)
KPa for more than MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER HI EVAP#n DROP WARN” (n=1,2);
 General alarm indication relay is not activated;
 The alarm is not recorded on alarm history;
 Warning only;
Notes
1) If MV02 > 99 (i.e. XXYY) then the warning is bypassed on the first XX seconds after machine
2) The warning is bypassed when MV05=0 or the Warnings indication function is disabled
(MM26=NO).
3) The warning related to evaporator#1 is enabled when one or two barrels are used
(MV01=0,1,2) and the Evaporator water pressure monitoring is enabled (MV03=YES).
4) The warning related to evaporator#2 is enabled when two barrels are used (MV01=1,2) and the
go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop warning is automatically activated.
5.5.1.11.5 Low Evaporators Drop warning

If the Differential Pressure on the Evaporator#n (n=1,2) water (IWP-OWP) is below (MV04 * 1.1)
KPa for more than MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER LOW EVAP#n DROP WARN” (n=1,2);
 Warning only;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Notes
2) The warning is bypassed when MV04=0 or the Warnings indication function is disabled
(MM26=NO).
3) The warning related to evaporator#1 is enabled when one or two barrels are used
(MV01=0,1,2) and the Evaporator water pressure monitoring is enabled (MV03=YES).
4) The warning related to evaporator#2 is enabled when two barrels are used (MV01=1,2) and the
go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop warning is automatically activated.
5.5.1.12 CONDENSER alarms

Following alarms are related to condensers (water side).
5.5.1.12.1 Water Level in Evap. Condenser

If Evaporative Condenser control is enabled (MN01=1) and digital input LWL_EC is OFF for more
10 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER WATER LEVEL ON COND.”;
 Adiabatic Pump is switched off;
 Evap.Condenser Heaters are swithced off;
 Automatic reset 10 minutes after the end of alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is checked only when Adiabatic Pump or Heaters are switched on.
5.5.1.12.2 Adiabatic Pump breaker

If Evaporative Condenser control is enabled (MN01=1) and digital input APU_CB is OFF for more
1 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER”;
 Adiabatic Pump is switched off;
5.5.1.12.3 Evap. Condenser Heaters protection

If Evaporative Condenser control is enabled (MN01=1) and digital input HEA_PROT is OFF for
more 1 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER HEATERS PROTECT.”;
 The system is not halted (warning only);
5.5.1.12.4 High Condenser Drop alarm

If the Differential Pressure on the Condenser water (ICP-OCP) is over MN08 KPa for more than
MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER HIGH COND. DROP”;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
2) The alarm is bypassed in one of folloing condition (OR logic):
- MN08=0;
- the Condenser water pressure monitoring is disabled (MN06=NO).
3) The condenser water pressures are read by the channels ICP and OCP: if a probe go to alarm
condition then Condenser Drop alarm is automatically activated.
5.5.1.12.5 Low Condenser Drop alarm

If the Differential Pressure on the Condenser water (ICP-OCP) is below MN07 KPa for more than
MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER LOW COND DROP” (n=1,2);
Notes
- MN07=0;
- the Condenser water pressure monitoring is disabled (MN06=NO).
5.5.1.12.6 High Condenser Drop warning

If the Differential Pressure on the Condenser water (ICP-OCP) is over (MN08 * 0.9) KPa for more
than MV02 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER HIGH COND DROP WARN”;
 Warning only;
Notes
- MN08=0;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
- the Condenser water pressure monitoring is disabled (MN06=NO);

- the Warnings indication function is disabled (MM26=NO).
3) The condenser water pressures are read by the channels ICP and OCP: if a probe go to alarm
condition then Condenser Drop alarm is automatically activated.
5.5.1.12.7 Low Condenser Drop warning

If the Differential Pressure on the Condenser water (ICP-OCP) is below (MN07 * 1.1) KPa for
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER LOW COND DROP WARN”;
 Warning only;
Notes
- MN07=0;
- the Condenser water pressure monitoring is disabled (MN06=NO);
- the Warnings indication function is disabled (MM26=NO).
5.5.1.13 PLA alarms

Following alarms are controlled only when Power Line Analyzer is enabled (MK01>0).
5.5.1.13.1 Power Line Analyzer Serial communication alarm

If Power Line Analyzer is enabled (MK01>0) and the communication is lost then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER PWR LINE ANALYZ. COM”;
 The system is NOT halted (warning only);
 Following functions are disabled:
o Over voltage alarm;
o Under voltage alarm;
o The alarm is bypassed during machine starting procedure (see par. 5.1.3).
o Phase missing/wrong alarm;
o Unit voltage limitation.
5.5.1.13.2 Over voltage alarm

If Power Line Analyzer is enabled (MK01>0) and a unit concatenate voltages (Vu12, Vu23, Vu31) go
over the value MK15 for more than 10 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM MASTER OVER VOLTAGE”;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Notes
1) The alarm is managed only if machine is switched ON.
2) The alarm is bypassed during machine starting procedure (see par. 5.1.3).
5.5.1.13.3 Under voltage alarm

If Power Line Analyzer communication is enabled (MK01>0) and a unit concatenate voltages
(Vu12, Vu23, Vu31) go under the value MK14 for more than 10 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER UNDER VOLTAGE”;
Notes
1) The alarm is managed only if machine is switched ON.
2) The alarm is bypassed during machine starting procedure (see par. 5.1.3).
5.5.1.13.4 Phase missing/wrong alarm

If Power Line Analyzer is enabled with MK01=1 and line phase sequence <> 123 for more 10
second,
OR
If Power Line Analyzer is enabled with MK01=2 and line phase sequence <> (123 and 111) for
more 10 second, then:
 Message: ” ALARM MASTER PHASE MISSING/WRONG”;
 Manual reset through the ESC key.
Notes
1) The alarm is automatically activated when the communication with Power Line Analyzer is lost.
2) The alarm is bypassed when MK01=0,3.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.14 UNIT CHECK alarms
5.5.1.14.1 Commissioning need #1 warning

If the Unit Check function is enabled (MM29=YES) and it is in “COMMISSIONING NEED#1” phase
(see par. 5.2.16), then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER COMMISSIONING NEED#1";
 Only warning;
 Automatic reset after 30 seconds that the first MM30 checks of UC01..UC20 are set = YES.

 Only warning;

 Only warning;
5.5.1.14.4 Checking need #1 warning

If the Unit Check function is enabled (MM29=YES) and it is in “CHECKING NEED#1” phase (see
par. 5.2.16), then:
 Message: "ALARM MASTER CHECKING NEED#1";
 Only warning;

par. 5.2.16), then:
 Only warning;

par. 5.2.16), then:
 Only warning;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.1.14.7 Maintenance need #1 warning

If the Unit Check function is enabled (MM29=YES) and it is in “MAINTENANCE NEED#1” phase
 Message: "ALARM MASTER MAINTENANCE NEED#1";
 Only warning;

 Only warning;
Automatic reset after 30 seconds that the first MM33 checks of UC41..UC60 are set = YES.

 Only warning;
Automatic reset after 30 seconds that the first MM33 checks of UC41..UC60 are set = YES.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.2 COMPRESSOR alarms

Following alarms are replicated in each compressor.
When an alarm is active then the related compressor is locked (only if the alarm is not a warning).
5.5.2.1 Compressor Magneto-Thermal Breaker

If CBx (x=1,2) digital input is OFF for more than 1 second then:
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# BREAKER FAULT";
 Compressor is halted;
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the CBx (x=1,2) digital inputs are not mapped (DI03,DI04=0).
5.5.2.2 High Pressure alarm

If HPx (x=1,2) digital input is OFF then:
 Message: ”ALARM COMPRESSOR N. X HIGH PRES. SWT FAULT”;
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the HPx (x=1,2) digital inputs are not mapped (DI07,DI08=0).
5.5.2.3 Aux alarm

If AUXn_AL (n=1,2) digital input is OFF for more than MC37 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# AUX ALARM”;
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed in one of following conditions (OR logic):
- MC37=0;
- AUXn_AL (n=1,2) digital inputs are not mapped (DI13,DI14 =0).
2) The description of Aux alarm message is specified by manufacturer setup parameter MC38.
3) On the Alarm History are reported the first 16 chars of manufacturer setup parameter MC38.
4) If MC37 < 0 then the alarm is bypass during Counting Minimum On of compressor and the
delay time used is the module of the value (es. If MC37=-15 then the delay time used is 15
sec).
5.5.2.4 Suction Pressure alarm

If Suction Pressure (SP) < MR04 for more than MR05 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X SUCTION PRES. LOW”;
 Manual reset through the ESC key or automatic reset (see cap. 5.5.4), after the reset of the
alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when MR05=0.
2) The alarm is bypassed until the end of compressor minimum on time and during pump-down.
3) The alarm check is in OR with the alarm condition passed from Turbocor via serial line.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.2.5 Disharge Pressure alarm

If Discharge Pressure (DP) > MR06 then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X DISCHARGE PRES. HIGH”;
alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when MR06=0.
5.5.2.6 High Motor Current alarm

If Motor Current Percentage (Icp/Inom*100) > MK12 for more than MK13 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X HIGH MOTOR CURRENT”;
alarm condition.
Notes
2) The alarm condition above, checked in S10 board, is bypassed when MK12=0 (i.e. only alarm
condition passed from Turbocor is checked).
3) Motor Current percentage is computed respect to the nominal current specified for each
compressor by setup parameters MK02..MK07.
5.5.2.7 Anti-Freeze Evaporator alarm

If the Evaporator Temperature (EVnT, n=1,2) < MT22 for more than 1 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X EVAP.FREEZE PROTECT.”;
Notes
1) The alarm is checked only if Two barrels is enabled (MV01=1,2) and one or two compressors
are used (MC01=1,2).
5.5.2.8 Compressor Pump Down alarm

If the compressor is in the logical state “OFF”, and the number of pump down in the last hour
exceeds MR22 then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# TOO MANY PUMP DOWN ”;
 Manual reset through the ESC key;
5.5.2.9 Compressor Serial Communication alarm

MASTER: If the serial communication with a slave board is broken, the master get out the slave.
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X SERIAL COMMUNICATION”;
 The system works normally (i.e. all the others cp are controlled);
SLAVE: if a slave board doesn’t receive any message for 1 minutes:

 LED_RUN increases lamp frequency.
 Both the compressors of slave board are halted.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.2.10 Turbocor alarms

Following alarms are replicated for each Turbocor compressor.
5.5.2.10.1 Turbocor Serial communication alarm

If the communication with Turbocor compressor is broken then:
 Message: ”ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X TURBOCOR COM”;
5.5.2.10.2 Turbocor Faults

If in Turbocor compressor an alarm (fault) condition occurs (the alarms bitmap is passed via serial
line) then:
 Message:” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X DESCRIPTION ”;
 Manual reset through the ESC key or automatic reset (see cap. 5.5.4), after the end of the
alarm condition.
It follows a table with Turbocor fault conditions and the relative message description.
Bitmap Fault description Message

Position
BIT0 Inverter Temperature (2) INVERTER TEMP.
BIT1 Discharge Temperature DISCHARGE TEMP.
BIT2 Suction Pressure (3) SUCTION PRESS.
BIT3 Discharge Pressure (1) (2) (3) DISCHARGE PRESS.
BIT4 3 Phase Over-Current (1) (2) (3) MOTOR CURRENT
BIT5 Shaft Cavity Temperature (2) SHAFT CAVITY TEMP.
BIT6 Leaving Water LEAVING WATER TEMP.
BIT7 Total Compression Ratio COMPRESSION RATIO
BIT8 Bearing Motor (4) BEARING MOTOR
BIT9 Sensor Fault SENSOR TURBOCOR
BIT10 SCR Temperature (2) SCR TEMP.
BIT11 Lock Out Fault (1)(2) LOCK OUT FAULT
BIT12 Winding Temperature Fault WINDING TEMP.
BIT13 Super Heat Fault SUPERHEAT TURBOCOR
Notes
(1) Compressor power down and restart is required to reset this alarm.
(2) If any (or a combination of) the alarms listed below occurs more than 3 times within 30 minutes, a “Lock
Out Fault” occurs:
o Inverter temperature fault
o Discharge pressure fault
o 3 Phase Over-Current fault
o Shaft Cavity temperature fault
o SCR temperature fault
(For more details see the latest Turbocor documentation)
(3) Alarm managed also in S10 in OR condition with Turbocor flag alarm.
(4) The fault codes related to Bearing or Motor alarm are showed on the fourth row of Alarm History (see
par.5.7.6).
(5) Bearing/Motor alarm have a particular logic. For more details see par.5.5.2.10.5.
(6) If Turbocor Fast Start procedure is enabled (MC53>0) then all the alarms are bypassed on the first 10
seconds after the compressor starting but only the first time after machine power up.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.2.10.3 Turbocor Warnings

If in Turbocor compressor an warning condition occurs (flags passed via serial line) then:
 Message on the status of compressors screen (see table below);
 Compressor is not halted (warning only);
 Automatic reset after the end of the warning condition.
It follows a table with Turbocor warning conditions and the relative message description on the
compressors screens.
Bitmap Warning description Status code

Position
BIT0 Inverter Temperature TUR-INV
BIT1 Discharge Temperature TUR-HDT
BIT2 Suction Pressure TUR-LSP
BIT3 Discharge Pressure TUR-HDP
BIT4 3 Phase Over-Current TUR-CUR
BIT5 Shaft Cavity Temperature TUR-CAV
BIT6 Leaving Water TUR-LWT
BIT7 Total Compression Ratio TUR-TCR
BIT8 SCR Temperature TUR-SCR
BIT13 Super Heat TUR-SUP
5.5.2.10.4 Turbocor Fault Status alarm

If TURx_AL (x=1,2) digital input is OFF for more than 10 second and no Turbocor fault is present
(see par.5.5.2.10.2) then:
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N. x TURBOCOR FAULT STS";
 Manual reset through the ESC key or automatic reset (see cap. 5.5.4), after the end of the
alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the TURx_AL (x=1,2) digital inputs are not mapped (DI01,DI02
=0).
2) If Turbocor Fast Start procedure is enabled (MC53>0) then the alarm is bypassed on the first
10 seconds after the compressor starting but only the first time after machine power up.
3) This alarm is required for right identification of Turbocor fault condition also when a new alarm
passed via serial line is not managed in the controller.
5.5.2.10.5 Turbocor Bearing/Motor alarm

If Bearing/Motor alarm is present in Turbocor compressor (see par.5.5.2.10.2) then:
If MC39=0 or MR02=0
OR
If MC39>0 and Bearing/Motor alarm is occurred more than MC39 times within 90 minutes
OR
If MR02>0 and more than MR02 autoreset of alarms within 90 minutes are occurred (see
par.5.5.4):
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N. X BEARING MOTOR";
 Manual reset through the ESC key (see cap. 5.5.4), after the end of the alarm condition.
If MC39>0 and Bearing/Motor alarm is occurred until MC39 times within 90 minutes:
 Message: "COMPRESSOR N. X AUTORESTART";

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 General alarm indication relay is NOT activated;

 Automatic reset (see cap. 5.5.4), after the end of the alarm condition.
Notes
1) For the right visualization of “AUTORESTART” message is required that MC39>0 and MR02>0
whith MC39<=MR02.
2) When the alarm is showed in “AUTORESTART” mode then it is NOT registered in Alarm
History and NOT notified via SMS protocol and NOT passed via PEMS protocol on COM2.
WARNING
“AUTORESTART” mode (MC39>0) masks Bearing/Motor alarms on the alarm history and on the
SMS notification, so it is mandatory to enable this function for a short time and however under the
supervision and responsability of a authorized technician, to avoid the possibility to damage the
compressor.
If active, it is required to check the parameter (T31..T38) to know the total number of Bearing/Motor
alarms masked as AUTORESTART.
5.5.2.11 Expansion Boards Serial Communication alarm

This alarm is replicated for each I/O expansion board (from 1 to 9).
If an I/O Expansion Board#x (x=1..9) is enabled (E0x01>0) and the communication is lost then:
 Message: ” COMPRESSOR N.X EXP. BOARDx COM.ERR”;
 The action related to this alarm is copied from the ones of alarms specified with the code
on setup parameters E0x10..E0x12 (for more details see par.5.7.12);
5.5.2.12 Probes Alarm (Cp)
5.5.2.12.1 EXT_DEM Probe alarm

If Split with Cp Control by Analog Input is enabled (MV01=3) and EXT_DEMx (x=1,2) probe go in
underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then :
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# EXT_DEM TR. FAULT";
5.5.3 CIRCUIT alarms

Following alarms are replicated in each circuit.
When an alarm is active then all the compressors of the circuit are halted (only if the alarm is not a
warning).
5.5.3.1 Probes Alarm (Circuit)
5.5.3.1.1 ST Probe alarm

If STx (x=1,2) probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then :
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# ST TR. OUT OF RANGE";
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when EEV control is disabled (ME01=0).
2) If Probes redundancy is enebaled (see par.5.2.13) then the compressors related to the

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
circuit#1 are halted only when ST1 and ST2 probes are together in alarm.
5.5.3.1.2 LPI Probe alarm

If LPIx (x=1,2) probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then :
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# LPI TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Compressor is NOT halted (warning only);
 Liquid Pump (LPA) is halted (see par. 5.2.4.3.2);
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is disabled (ML01=NO).
5.5.3.1.3 LPO Probe alarm

If LPOx (x=1,2) probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then :
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# LPO TR. OUT OF RANGE";
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is disabled (ML01=NO).
5.5.3.1.4 ST2 Probe alarm

If ST2 probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) and Probes
redundancy is enebaled (see par.5.2.13) then :
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# ST2 TR. OUT OF RANGE";
 Compressors related to circuit#1 is halted (only when also ST probe is in alarm);
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when EEV control is disabled (ME01=0).
5.5.3.1.5 SLT Probe alarm

If SLTx (x=1,2) probe go in underflow (short circuit) or overflow condition (open circuit) then :
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# SLT TR. OUT OF RANGE";
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when Subcooled Liquid Temperature monitoring is disabled
(MR24=NO).
5.5.3.2 Suction Temperature alarm

If Suction Temperature (ST) < MR07 for more than 5 second then:
 Message: "ALARM COMPRESSOR N.# SUCTION TEMP. LOW";
alarm condition.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed until the end of compressor minimum on time and during pump-down.
2) To disable the alarm set the value of setup parameter MR07 at his minimum value (-40°F=-
40°C).
5.5.3.3 Fan Protection alarm

If the FPx (x=1,2) digital input is OFF for more 1 seconds then:
 Message: ”ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X FAN PROTECTION”;
 Compressor is NOT halted (warning only;
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when the FPx (x=1,2) digital inputs are not mapped (DI09,DO10=0).
5.5.3.4 EEV alarms

Following alarms are related to EEV control.
5.5.3.4.1 EEV Board Serial communication alarm

If the EEV board is connected via serial line (ME01=2) and the communication is broken then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X EEV BOARD ERROR”;
 The compressor is halted
5.5.3.4.2 EEV Winding alarm

If the EEV board used is OB1 with ME03>1 and it is connected to S10 via serial line (ME01=2) and
the EEV windings are open or shorted then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X EEV WINDING”;
 If the board is used as I/O Expansion Board (E1001>0) then the others actions related to
this alarm is copied from the ones of alarms specified with the code on setup parameters
E1010..E1012 (for more details see par.5.7.12);
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed the first 60 sec after machine startup.
2) If in OB1 is installed sw PE_EEV06.00 or later, then the alarm is activated also when:
- It is executed the valve closing reset at board startup;
- It is executed the valve closing with the battery (if present) when power supply is low.
5.5.3.4.3 EEV Board battery level

If the EEV board used is OB1 with battery (ME03=3) and it is connected to S10 board via serial
line (ME01=2) and the battery voltage level is high or low or not present then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X EEV BATTERY LEVEL”;
5.5.3.4.4 EEV Board battery to change

If the EEV board used is OB1 with battery (ME03=3) and it is connected to S10 board via serial
line (ME01=2) and the battery is to change than:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X EEV BATTERY CHANGE”;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.3.4.5 EEV In Oscillation Warning

If ME02=1 or MH23=1 and Superheat (TSUP) go in rough zone (=ME04+ME10) at least 3 times in
5 minutes and Superheat (TSUP) go below =0°F at least 3 times in 5 minutes then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X EEV IN OSCILLATION”;
 The compressor is NOT halted (warning only);
 Automatic reset after 10 sec from the end of the alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed if EEV is disabled (ME01=0).
5.5.3.4.6 High Superheat alarm

If Superheat (TSUP) > ME36 for more ME38 minutes then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X HIGH SUPERHEAT”;
 Manual reset through the ESC key (without to wait that alarm condition is end).
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed during the compressor counting minimum on.
2) The alarm is disabled if ME38=0 or if EEV is disabled (ME01=0).
5.5.3.4.7 Low Superheat alarm

If Superheat (TSUP) < ME37 for more ME38 minutes then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.X LOW SUPERHEAT”;
 Manual reset through the ESC key (without to wait that alarm condition is end).
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed during the compressor counting minimum on.
2) The alarm is disabled if ME38=0 or if EEV is disabled (ME01=0).
5.5.3.5 LPA alarms

Following alarms are related to Liquid Pump (LPA) control.
5.5.3.5.1 Liquid Pump magneto-thermal breaker

If the LPUx_AL (x=1,2) digital input is OFF for more 5 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.x LIQ.PUMP BREAKER FLT”;
 The compressor is not halted (warning only);
 Automatic reset 10 sec after the end of the alarm condition.
Notes
1) The alarm is bypassed when ML01=NO.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.5.3.6 EVAP SYSTEM alarms

Following alarms are related to Evap System control.
5.5.3.6.1 Evap System Pump Fault

If Evap System control is enabled with MA01=1 and digital output ES_SPRx (x=1,2) is ON and
ES_PU_FLTx (x=1,2) digital input is OFF for more 5 seconds then:
 Message: ” ALARM COMPRESSOR N.x ES-PUMP FAULT”;
 The compressor is not halted (warning only);
 Evap System Sprayer is halted (see par. 5.2.7.3);
5.5.4 Auto reset of some alarms

MR02: Number of automatic reset alarms allowed in 90 minutes (0=disabled).
MR03: Delay time before automatic reset of an alarm allowed in 90 minutes.

 This function is enabled only if MR02>0.
 If one or a combination of following alarms:
o Suction Pressure alarm
o Disharge Pressure alarm
o High Motor Current alarm
o Suction Temperature alarm
o Turbocor Faults
o Turbocor Fault Status alarm
occurs MR02 times within 90 minutes, then each alarm is automatically reset after MR03
minutes and so the compressor of this circuit restarts.
 If the above alarms are occurred MR02+1 times within 90 minutes, then the respective
refrigerant circuit will be switched off and locked; only the manual reset of alarm will restart the
compressor of this circuit.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6 DATA DISPLAYED

In the normal operating mode the 20X4 LCD displays the system status, the IN and OUT
temperatures, the set point, run time of the chiller, the alarm history (e.g. list of the last 9 alarms).
In addition, for each compressor:
 suction and discharge pressure
 compressor status
 fan status
 liquid line solenoid status
 run time of compressor
The control temperature (Tc) is continuously displayed on the 3 digit LED display.
The screen showed on LCD displays can be selected with <UP>/<DOWN> keys.
Below is reported the screens description.
5.6.1 STANDARD screens

Following screens are showed only when MM02<>8,9.
5.6.1.1 Data Transfer screen

This screen is showed:
 after system startup;
 every time that a setup parameter is changed;
 every time that the communication with a S10 Slave board is restored.
WAIT
MASTER SLAVE DATA

TRANSFER
5.6.1.2 Startup screen

This screen is showed after system startup.
ALARM
POWER OFF
Sw Ver: ZAM2CHXX.YY Software version
WAIT 180sec TO START If automatic restart is enabled (MM06>0)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.3 Main screen

In this screen are showed some information about the chiller.
GEOGLIMA
wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd: weekday (Su…Sa);
dd/mm/yy: actual date
hh:mm: actual time
LWT 24.5 RWT 31.5 °F LWT= Leaving Water Temp.(1)
SCT: xx.x°F RWT= Returning Water Temp.(1) (6)
SCT= Split Controlled Temp. (7)
SP:40.0°F SYSTEM OFF SP= Set point used for temp. control (1)
SP:40.0°F STARTING STARTING= starting procedure in act (see par.5.1.3)
SP:40.0°F STOPPING STOPPING= stopping procedure in act (see par.5.1.4)
SP:40.0°F COOL:XXX% COOL= cooling demand percentage (2)
SP:40.0°F HEAT:XXX% HEAT= heating demand percentage (2)
REM CTR COOL:XXX% REM CTR= Remote control enabled (see par.5.2.1.1.2.1)
SP:40.0°F EMERG:XXX% Machine working in emergency mode (see par.5.1.7)
LOCK:REMOTE OFF Machine locked by digital input (3) or by remote (4)
OPEN LOOP CRT XXX% Open Loop control enabled (see par.5.2.1.1.3)
OPEN LOOP SET XXX% Open Loop control Demand setting(see par.5.2.1.1.3)
ONLY PUMPS MODE Only Pumps Mode activated (see par.5.1.5)
PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM Forcing Pumps On for Antifreeze Limitation activated (5)
Notes
1) If SPLIT unit is used (MV01>2) then value is substitute with “----“.
2) If heat recovery with cooling priority is enabled, then the cooling value is alternated with “REC “ string
every 2 seconds).
3) The machine is locked by EXEN digital input (see par.5.1.6).
4) The machine is locked by remote controller (see par.5.2.1.1.2.1).
5) This string is alternated with machine status when “Forcing Pump On for Antifreeze Limitation” function
is activated (see par.5.2.5.1.3).
6) RWT value blinks every 1 seconds when “Forcing Cp Off for Low RWT” is activated (see par.5.2.1.3.3).
7) Split Controlled Temp. (SCT) is showed only when Split with Cooling Demand by Split Controlled Temp.
is enabled (see par. 5.2.3.4).
8) This value are not showed when SPLIT unit is used (MV01>2).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.4 Second screen

In this screen are showed others information about the chiller.
CONTROL ON XXX LWT= Leaving Water Temp (if MT01=0 and MT06=0)
(XXX= LWT/RWT/ RWT= Returning Water Temp (if MT01=0 and MT06=1)
OET/REM/ OET= Outlet Evap. Temp (if MT01=0 and heat recovery
AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) is active [MH01=3, see par.5.2.2.4.1]);
REM= Remote Setpoint (if MT01>0)
RT: xxxxxh HGBS:YYY RT= Machine running time
(YYY= NO/ON/OFF) HGBS= status of HGBS digital output
alternated with EPU= External pumps demand
TAE:xx.x°F EPU:xxx% (showed only when MX01>0)
TAE= External Air Temperature
(showed only when MD20>0)
STAGE:xx CP:x LEAD:x STAGE: number of cp stage (0..16);
alternated with CP= number of cp on (0..6);
STAGE:xx CP:x NMAX:x LEAD= index of unloaded cp (0..6);
NMAX= maximum number of cp can be switched on
(1..6) (1)
EV1T:xx.x EV2T:xx.xF EVnT= Evaporators temperatures
Alternated wih (showed only if MV01=1,2)
TA: xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% TA= Ambient Temperature (2)
Or ULIM= Upper Demand Limit by analog input (3)
OET:xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% OET= Outlet Evaporator Temp. (6)
Or
AI_COR: xxx% AI_COR= Analog Input for Setpoint Correction probe (4)
Or
OCT:xx.x ICT:xx.x °F OCT= Outlet Cond. Temp. (5)
ICT= Inlet Cond. Temp. (5)
Notes
1) This information is showed only when “Low RWT Limitation – Cooling Mode” is enabled (see
par.5.2.1.3.7).
2) TA is showed only when MM10=2,5,6.
3) ULIM is showed only when MT04=0 with: MT07<3 and MF01=0 and MF11=0 and MM10<>3,4.
4) AI_COR is showed only when MM10=3.
5) This informations are showed only when MM10=4.
6) OET is showed only when MH01=2,3.
5.6.1.5 Third screen

In this screen are showed others information about the chiller.
LLT: xxx% LLT= Liquid Level Transducer (1)

APT:xx.xPSI APT= Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (2)
Notes
1) This information is showed only when “Liquid Level Transducer” is enabled (MM27=YES).
2) This information is showed only when “Auxiliary Pressure Transducer” is enabled (MM28=YES).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.6 Units Lead Lag screen

If Units Lead Lag function is enabled (MM11=3), then this screen showed the information about the
status of the master-slave units (see par.5.2.10).

MASTER UNIT: XXXXXXX Showed only in master unit (MM14>0)
(XXXXXX=
ON / STANDBY /
ALARM /FATAL)
SLAVE UNIT: XXXXXXX
(XXXXXX=
ON / STANDBY /
ALARM)
H TO NEXT SWT: xxx Showed only in master unit (MM14>0)
5.6.1.7 Stepless Control Staging screen

If stepless control is used (MC03=8), then this screen showed the information about stepless
staging:
DEMAND: 0 0 0 Demand capacity required by Temp. control:

Cp1 Cp2 Cp3
0 0 0 0 0 Cp4 Cp5 Cp6 Cp7 Cp8
ACTUAL: 0 0 0 Actual capacity required by Compressor capacity control:
Cp1 Cp2 Cp3
0 0 0 0 0 Cp4 Cp5 Cp6 Cp7 Cp8
5.6.1.8 Free Cooling screen

If free cooling control is enabled (MF01>0) without dry-cooler management (MF11=0) we show
other information about free cooling control (see par. 5.2.4.1, 5.2.4.3):
FREE COOLING: XXXXX Free Cooling status

(XXXXX = ON / OFF / (Note: F-ON= forced ON (if MF01=1)
F-ON / F-OFF) F-OFF= forced OFF (if MF01=2)
YY-PRIORITY TCRT=ZZZ Free Cooling mode (if ML01=NO)
(YY = CP / FC
ZZZ = RWT / TC)
LPU=XXX BPS=XXX LPU= Liquid Pumps status (if ML01=YES)
(XXX= ON/ OFF/ RDY) BPS= Bypass Solenoid status (if ML01=YES)
(Note: RDY= Ready to be controlled)
TFC: TAE: °F TFC= Free Cooling Temperature (if ML01=NO)
TAE= External Air Temperature
VALVE: % FAN: % VALVE = Free cooling valve opening (if ML01=NO)
or FAN = Fan speed in Free Cooling
COOL: % FAN: % COOL = cooling demand value (if ML01=YES)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
If free cooling control is enabled (MF01>0) with dry-cooler management (MF11<>0) we show other
information about free cooling control with dry-cooler (see par. 5.2.4.2):
FREE COOLING: XXXXX Free Cooling status

(XXXXX = ON / OFF / (Note: F-ON= forced ON (if MF01=1)
F-ON / F-OFF) F-OFF= forced OFF (if MF01=2)
----------- TCRT=ZZZ Free Cooling control mode
(ZZZ = RWT / TC)
ODT: IDT: °F ODT: Outlet Dry-cooler Temperature
IDT: Inlet Dry-cooler Temperature
VALVE: % FAN: % VALVE: Free cooling valve opening;
FAN:
o Fan speed in Free Cooling
o Fan speed in chiller mode when control by Dry-
cooler (MF11=1)
5.6.1.9 Pumps screen

If pumps management is enabled (MP01>0), then this screen showed information about pumps
control (see par. 5.2.5.1):
PUMPS AVAILABLE: N Number of available pumps:

(N=0,1,2) (0= pumps management is enabled but digital outputs
FAN#3 are already used for other function)
PUMP1:XXX PUMP2:XXX
(XXX= ON / OFF / NO)
RT1 RT2 H Run Time of the pumps
CHANGEOVER TIME: H Changeover time (showed only if MP01=3,6,7,8)
alternate with
IPU=xxx% IPU= Internal pumps demand for Inverter control
(showed only if MP07>0)
5.6.1.10 Power Line Analyzer screen

If Power Line Analyzer is enabled (MK01>0) we show other information about unit power line:
POWER LINE ANALYZER

V12:XX.XV Iun:XX.XA V12= Unit concatenate voltage V12
Iun=Unit current
V23:XX.XV V31:XX.XV V23= Unit concatenate voltage V23
V31= Unit concatenate voltage V31
RST:XXX HZ:XX T:XXXC RST= Line sequence
alternate with HZ= Line frequency
FP:XX.XX PWR:XX.XKW T= Locker temperature
FP= Line power factor
PWR= Unit power consumption

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.11 Evaporators screens

If Evaporator Water Pressure reading is enabled (MV03=YES) and one or two barrels are used
(MV01=0,1,2), then this screen showed information about the water pressures on Evaporator (see
par.5.2.6.2).
This screen is replicated for two evaporators (N=1,2).
The screen related to Evaporator#2 is showed only when Two Barrel is used (MV01=1,2).
EVAP. WATER PRESS.#N N= evaporator index

(N=1,2)
IWP:XX.X OWP:XX.XKPa IWP= Intlet Water Pressure,
OWP= Outlet Water Pressure
IWP-OWP: XX.XKPa IWP-OWP= Difference between Inlet Water Press. and
alternate with Outlet Water Press.
FLUX: XX.Xmc/h FLUX= Evaporator Water Flow Rate (see cap.5.2.6.2.2)
LPD:XXX HPD:XXX KPa LPD= value of MV04 for Low Press. Drop alarm;
HPD= value of MV05 for High Press. Drop alarm.
5.6.1.12 Condenser screen

If Condenser Water Pressure reading is enabled (MN06=YES), then this screen showed
information about the water pressures on Condenser (see par.5.2.7.1.2).
COND. WATER PRESS.

ICP:XX.X OCP:XX.XKPa ICP= Intlet Condenser Pressure (water side),
OCP= Outlet Condenser Pressure (water side)
ICP-OCP: XX.XKPa ICP-OCP= Difference between Inlet Condenser Press.
alternate with and Outlet Condenser Press.
FLUX: XX.Xmc/h FLUX= Condenser Water Flow Rate (see par.5.2.7.1.3)
LPD:XXX HPD:XXX KPa LPD= value of MN07 for Low Press. Drop alarm;
HPD= value of MN08 for High Press. Drop alarm.
5.6.1.13 Evaporative Condenser screen

If Evaporative Condenser is enabled (MN01=1), then this screen showed information about the
Adiabatic Pump and Heaters (see par. 5.2.7.2):
EVAP. CONDENSER
SET:XX.XPSI APU:YYY SET= Setpoint for Adiabatic Pump activ.
(YYY=ON/OFF/NO) APU= Stauts of Adiabatic Pump
(“NO” is showed when the setup config. is not right)
SET:XX.X°F HEA:YYY SET= Setpoint for Heaters activ.
(YYY=ON/OFF/NO) HEA= Stauts of Heaters
(“NO” is showed when the setup config. is not right)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.14 Evap System screen

If Evap System is enabled (MA01>0), then this screen showed information about the Evap System
control (see par. 5.2.7.3):
EVAP SYSTEM: XXX Evap System status

(XXX=ON/OFF)
TAE:xx.x°C RH:xx.x% TAE= External Air Temp.
RH= External Air Relative Humidity (2)
ES_MOT:YYY ES_MOT= Evap System Motor status
(YYY=ON/OFF)
ES_SPR:XXXXXX ES_SPR= Evap System Sprayers status (1)
(X=0,1) XXXXXX (0=OFF, 1=ON)
||||||
|||||ES_SPR6 (sprayer related to Circuit#6)
||||ES_SPR5 (sprayer related to Circuit#5)
|||ES_SPR4 (sprayer related to Circuit#4)
||ES_SPR3 (sprayer related to Circuit#3)
|ES_SPR2 (sprayer related to Circuit#2)
ES_SPR1 (sprayer related to Circuit#1)
Notes
1) The status of a Evap System Sprayer is showed only when the related circuit is present.
2) RH value is showed only when RH probe is enabled (i.e. MA09>0).
5.6.1.15 Chiller Performance screen

If Evaporator Water Pressure reading is enabled (MV03=YES), then this screen showed some
information about Chiller performance (see par. 5.2.12).
CHILLER PERFORMANCE
COOL CAPACITY:xx.xkW COOL CAPACITY= Cooling Capacity
POWER CONS*: xx.xkW POWER CONS = Unit Power Consumption
POWER CONS* = Cp+Fans Power Consumption (1)
COP*:XX.X COP = Cooling_Capacity / Unit_Power_Consumption
COP*= Cooling_Capacity / (Cp+Fans)_Power_Cons (1)
Notes
1) This value is showed when Power Line Analyzer is disabled (MK01=0).
5.6.1.16 Noise Performance screen

If Fan speed limitation by noise level sensor is enabled (MV03=YES), then this screen showed
some information about Noise Level performance (see par. 5.2.12).
NOISE PERFORMANCE
NL: xx.x Max: yy.ydB NL = Noise Level
Max = Maximum Noise Level allowed in actual time
period
(“---“ when Noise Level is not now limited)
Avg:mm.m Peak:nn.ndB Avg = average value of Noise Level in the last
observation interval
Peak = peak value of Noise Level in the last observation
interval
MAX FAN SPEED: XXX% Actual value of maximum fan speed

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.17 Fast Alarm History screen

Following screen shows the last nine alarm occurred (Alarm #1 is the more recent alarm).
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 1 dd/mm/yy= date when the alarm occurred;

hh:mm= time when the alarm occurred;
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 2
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 3
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 4
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 5
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 6
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 7
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 8
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 9
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10
ALARM/EVENT DESCR.
To clear the alarm history press together DOWN and ESC key when the controller is in “OFF”
status.
WARNING
When a software update is executed and one or more compressor/circuit alarms are added to the
new version, then it is raccomanded to reset the alarm history otherwise the old alarm descriptions
should be not correct (i.e. software update can corrupt the old alarm descriptions).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.18 First Compressors screens

This screens showed some information about each compressor.
(note: 0 stays for relay off, 1 means relay on)
CPn xxxxxxx EEV:yyy% xxxxxxx= Compressor status

(n=1..6) (for details see par.5.6.1.18.1)
EEV= Out of PI control for EEV control (8) /
“INCR” (EEV increse) (6) /
“MAN” string (9)
DT: 200 DSH: 45.9 °F DT= Discharge Temp.
OR DSH= Discharge Superheat (5)
DT: xx.x°F ELL:xx.x% (DSH = DT – Temp[DP])
alternate with ELL= Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level) (4)
ST:xx.x TSUP:xx.x°F ST= Suction Temp. (8)
TSUP= Superheat (8)
(TSUP = ST – Temp[SP])
SP:12.2 DP:14.5 PSI SP= Suction Pressure (1)
alternate with DP= Discharge Pressue (1)
LPI:xx.x LPO:xx.xPSI LPI= Liquid Pump Inlet Pressure (12)
LPO= Liquid Pump Outlet Pressure (12)
SL:0 XXX% FAN:0000 SL=0 (Liquid Solenoid status) (10)
Or SL=000 (Economizer and Liquid Inject. solenoids) (11)
SL:000 XXX% FAN:0000 | | LIS
alternate with | LIE or LIE+LIS or LI_DT
EH:000 XXX% FAN:0000 ECO
XXX= Actual Cp capacity (%);
FAN= Fans relay status / Fan speed (13)(14)
EH= 000 (Equalization Solenoid and Suction Heater and
| | | Liquid Pumps status) (7)
|||
| | Liquid Pumps status
||
| Suction Heater status (if MC45>0) or
| Bypass Solenoid status (if MC45=0 and ML01=YES)
|
Equalization solenoid status
Notes
1) If the analog inputs S1/2, D1/2 are configured as free contact then the values of SP,DP are substitute
with the string “---“.
2) If MM04=3,4 then the values of DP and SP are showed in pressure and temperature with 2 seconds of
alternation.
3) If compressor screen is showed and <SET> key is pressed then the alternation of the rows is locked for
2 minutes. To restart the alternation of the rows before the 2 minutes re-press <SET> key.
4) Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level (ELL) value is showed when EEV board is connected to S10 via
serial line (ME01=2) and control on evaporator liquid level is enabled (ME02=3) (see par. 5.4.3.3.2) or
control on Condenser liquid level is enabled (ME02=6) (see par. 5.4.3.3.5).
5) Discharge Superhat (DSH) value is showed when EEV board is connected to S10 via serial line
(ME01=2) and flooded evaporator is not used (ME02<>3).
6) EEV opening value is alternated with the string “INCR” every 2 seconds when EEV extra opening
algorithm (see par.5.4.3.7) is activated.
7) This information is showed only when one of following conditions are satisfied (OR logic):
o Equalizzazion solenoids are enabled (MC42>0);
o Suction Heater is enabled (MC45>0);
o Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is enabled (ML01=YES).
8) This information is showed only when EEV control is enabled (ME01=1,2).
9) “MAN” string is showed when the EEV manual control function is activated.
10) Liquid Solenoid status is showed only when ECONOMIZER AND LIQUID INJECTION Control is
disabled (MC31=0).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
11) Economizer and Liquid Injection solenoids status is showed when ECONOMIZER AND LIQUID
INJECTION Control is enabled (MC31>0). Status “-“ is showed when the function is disabled.
12) This information is showed only when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is enabled (ML01=YES).
13) The value of Fan Speed/Status blinks every 1 second in one of following conditions:
- Fan Speed Optimization Mode 1 is activated and the out of PID is upper limited (see par.5.4.2.2.1);
- Fan Speed Optimization Mode 2 is activated (see par.5.4.2.2.2).
14) “MAN” string is alternate with Fans speed/status when the FANS manual control function is activated.
5.6.1.18.1 Compressors status description table
Status Description Chapters

reference
ON Compressor on 5.3.1.4
CM-ON Compressor in Counting Minumum time On 5.3.1.1, 5.3.1.4
CM-OFF Compressor in Counting Minumum time Off 5.3.1.4
OFF Compressor off 5.3.1.4
ALARM Compressor in alarm condition (switched off) 5.5.2, 5.5.3
LOCKED Compressor locked by digin/setup 5.3.1.5
START Compressor during starting procedure 5.3.1.1
PD-OUT Pump Down during compressor stopping 5.3.1.3
PD-MUL Multiple Pump Down activated 5.3.1.3.1
ADPT-C Adaptive Control activated 5.3.2.1
DT-LIM Discharge Temperature Limitation activated 5.3.2.2
LP-LIM Low Pressure Limitation activated 5.3.2.3
MC-LIM Motor Current Limitation activated 5.3.2.4
UV-LIM Unit Voltage Limitation activated 5.3.2.5
PW-LCK Power compressor locked 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2,
5.3.2.3, 5.3.2.4,
5.3.2.5
TUR-INV Inverter Temperature on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-HDT Discharge Temperature on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-LSP Suction Pressure on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-HDP Discharge Pressure on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-CUR 3 Phase Over-Current on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-CAV Shaft Cavity Temperature on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-LWT Leaving Water on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-TCR Total Compression Ratio on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-SCR SCR Temperature on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
TUR-SUP Super Heat on Turbocor 5.5.2.10.3
HW-LIM Compressor limited at minimum capacity for High RWT Temp. 5.2.1.3.6
LW-LIM Limited the maximum number of cp switched on in each circuit 5.2.1.3.7
SG-LIM Surge Speed Limitation activated 5.3.2.7

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.19 Second Compressors screens

This screens showed information about each Turbocor compressor:
CPn xxxxxxx IGV:yyy% xxxxxxx= Compressor status

IGV= IGV opening
Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd= Actual Speed (2)
alternate with Min= Minimum Speed (Surge)
Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Max= Maximum Speed (Choke)
DEM:xx.x ACT:xx.x KW DEM= Demanded power (kW) / capacity (%)
alternate with ACT= Actual power (kW) / capacity (%)
DEM:xx.x ACT:xx.x %
CAV:xx.x SCR=xx.x°F CAV= Cavity Temp.
alternate with SCR= SCR Temp.
CUR:xx.xA IVT=xx.x°F CUR= Actual Current
IVT= Inverter Temp.
Notes
2) The value of Spd blinks every 1 seconds when Surge Speed Limitation is activated (see par.5.3.2.7).
5.6.1.20 Third Compressors screens

This screens showed others information about each compressor.
(note: 0 stays for relay off, 1 means relay on)
CPn xxxxxxx LBV:yyy% xxxxxxx= Compressor status

LBV= Load Balance Valve opening (1)
LBSH:xx.x°F LBI:XXX LBSH= Load Balance Superheat (1)
(XXX=ON/OFF) LBI= Load Balance Injection Solenoid status (1)
SLT: xx.x°F SLT= Subcooled Liquid Temp. (2)
Notes
1) This information is showed only when Load Balance control is activated (MC46>0). For more details see
par. 5.3.6.
2) This information is showed only when Subcooled Liquid Temp. monitoring is enabled (MR24=YES). For
more details see par. 5.4.7.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.1.21 Alarms screens

When an alarm is active, the following page is displayed. When there is more than 1 alarm, the
information is changed every 5 seconds.
ALARM (1)
MASTER If the alarm is related to Machine
Or
COMPRESSOR N.X If the alarm is related to Compressor X (X=1..6)
Description
Press <ESC> to reset Showed only if the alarm gets off and it needs manual
reset
Notes
1) This information is not showed when Bearing/Motor is not occurred more than MC39 times in 90 min
(see par.5.5.2.10.5).
The <ESC> key has the following management logic:

 if any screen of main data display is showed and <ESC> key is pressed, then the first page
is showed;
 if the first page is showed and one or more alarms are active and <ESC> key is pressed,
then an alarm screen is showed;
 if an alarm screen is showed without manual reset request and <ESC> key is pressed, then
the first page is showed;
 if an alarm screen is showed with manual reset request and <ESC> key is pressed, then all
the alarms which have got off are reset and the first page is showed.
If a setup parameter is changed (by user or TelePE) then this event is notified on the alarm history
and the description of alarm/event shows:
MOD XYZZ: value m.u. X= setup parameter main code

(“M” if Manufacturer setup parameter, “I” if I/O setup
parameter)
Y= setup parameter subcode
ZZ= setup parameter number
value= new value of parameter
m.u.= eventual measuring unit of parameter
This is a table of what is displayed in case of alarm or in alarm history display and the related
Alarm Code.
ALARM CODE ALARM DESCRIPTION ALARM HISTORY CODE

MASTER alarm
- POWER OFF POWER OFF
1 WATER OVERTEMP. WATER OVERTEMP
2 LWT TR. OUT OF RANGE LWT TR. FAULT
3 RWT TR. OUT OF RANGE RWT TR. FAULT
4 FREEZE PROTECTION AL FREEZE PROTECTION
5 NO WATER CIRCULATION NO WATER CIRCULAT.
6 PWR LINE ANALYZ. COM PWR LINE ANALYZ. COM
7 ULIM TR.OUT OF RANGE ULIM TR. FAULT
8 EV1T TR.OUT OF RANGE EV1T TR. FLT
9 EV2T TR.OUT OF RANGE EV2T TR. FLT
10 TA TR.OUT OF RANGE TA TR. FAULT
11 REMOTE SP CONNECTION REMOTE SP CONNECT.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

12 PUMP1 BREAKER FAULT PUMP1 BREAKER FAULT
13 PUMP2 BREAKER FAULT PUMP2 BREAKER FAULT
14 TFC TR.OUT OF RANGE TFC TR. FAULT
15 TAE TR.OUT OF RANGE TAE TR. FAULT
16 OVER VOLTAGE OVER VOLTAGE
17 UNDER VOLTAGE UNDER VOLTAGE
18 PHASE MISSING/WRONG PHASE MISSING/WRONG
19 SIM NOT READY SIM NOT READY
20 GSM LOW SIGNAL GSM LOW SIGNAL
21 CALL ASSISTANCE CALL ASSISTANCE
22 HIGH EVAP#1 DROP HIGH EVAP#1 DROP
23 HIGH EVAP#2 DROP HIGH EVAP#2 DROP
24 LOW EVAP#1 DROP LOW EVAP#1 DROP
25 LOW EVAP#2 DROP LOW EVAP#2 DROP
26 SERIAL COMM. REM CTR SERIAL COMM. REM CTR
27 HIGH RWT TEMPERATURE HIGH RWT TEMPERATURE
28 WATER LEVEL ON COND. WATER LEVEL ON COND.
29 ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER
30 HEATERS PROTECT. HEATERS PROTECT.
31 OET TR.OUT OF RANGE OET TR. FAULT
32 TA_COR TR. FAULT TA_COR TR. FAULT
33 AI_COR TR. FAULT AI_COR TR. FAULT
34 OCT TR.OUT OF RANGE OCT TR. FAULT
35 ICT TR.OUT OF RANGE ICT TR. FAULT
36 ODT TR.OUT OF RANGE ODT TR. FAULT
37 IDT TR.OUT OF RANGE IDT TR. FAULT
38 RH TR.OUT OF RANGE RH TR. FAULT
39 EXTC TR.OUT OF RANGE EXTC TR. FAULT
40 SCT TR.OUT OF RANGE SCT TR. FAULT
41 LWT2 TR.OUT OF RANGE LWT2 TR. FAULT
42 RWT2 TR.OUT OF RANGE RWT2 TR. FAULT
43 HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN
44 HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN
45 LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN
46 LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN
47 HIGH COND DROP HIGH COND DROP
48 LOW COND DROP LOW COND DROP
49 HIGH COND DROP WARN HIGH COND DROP WARN
50 LOW COND DROP WARN LOW COND DROP WARN
51 NL TR.OUT OF RANGE NL TR. FAULT
52 LLT TR.OUT OF RANGE LLT TR. FAULT
53 HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN. HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN.
54 APT TR.OUT OF RANGE APT TR.OUT OF RANGE
55 COMMISSIONING NEED#1 COMMISSIONING NEED#1
58 CHECKING NEED#1 CHECKING NEED#1
61 MAINTENANCE NEED#1 MAINTENANCE NEED#1
- NO ALARM NO ALARM RECORDING

CP/CIRCUIT alarm
1000 EVAP.FREEZE PROTECT. CPN EVAP.FREEZE PROT
1001 WINDING TEMP. CPN WINDING TEMP.
1002 BREAKER FAULT CPN BREAKER FAULT
1003 TURBOCOR FAULT STS CPN TURBOCOR FLT STS

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

1004 SENSOR TURBOCOR CPN SENSOR TURBOCOR
1005 LPI TR. OUT OF RANGE CPN LPI TR. FAULT
1006 LPO TR. OUT OF RANGE CPN LPO TR. FAULT
1007 ST TR. OUT OF RANGE CPN ST TR. FAULT
1008 TOO MANY PUMP DOWNS CPN PUMP DOWN
1009 EEV BOARD COM ALARM CPN EEV BOARD ERROR
1010 SUCTION PRES. LOW CPN SUCT PRES. LOW
1011 DISCHARGE PRES. HIGH CPN DISC PRES HIGH
1012 FAN PROTECTION CPN FAN PROTECTION
1013 LOCK OUT FAULT CPN LOCK OUT FAULT
1014 HIGH PRES. SWT FAULT CPN HIGH P SWT FLT
1015 SERIAL COMUNICATION CPN COM ERROR
1016 TURBOCOR COM CPN TURBOCOR COM
1017 HIGH MOTOR CURRENT CPN HIGH MOTOR CURR.
1018 LIQ.PUMP BREAKER FLT CPN LIQ.PUMP BRK FLT
1019 AUX ALARM CPN AUX ALARM
1020 SUCTION TEMP. LOW CPN SUCT. TEMP. LOW
1021 EEV IN OSCILLATION CPN EEV IN OSCILLAT.
1022 DISCHARGE TEMP. HIGH CPN DISCH.TEMP. HIGH
1023 HIGH SUPERHEAT CPN HIGH SUPERHEAT
1024 LOW SUPERHEAT CPN LOW SUPERHEAT
1025 SUPERHEAT TURBOCOR CPN SUPERHEAT TCOR
1026 AUTORESTART CPN AUTORESTART
1027 INVERTER TEMP. CPN INVERTER TEMP.
1028 SHAFT CAVITY TEMP. CPN SHAFT CAV. TEMP.
1029 COMPRESSION RATIO CPN COMPRESS. RATIO
1030 BEARING MOTOR CPN BEARING MOTOR
1031 SCR TEMP. CPN SCR TEMP.
1032 LEAVING WATER TEMP. CPN LEAV.WATER TEMP.
1033 EEV WINDING CPN EEV WINDING
1034 EEV BATTERY LEVEL CPN EEV BATT. LEVEL
1035 EEV BATT. TO CHANGE CPN EEV BATT. CHANGE
1036 ES-PUMP FAULT CPN ES-PUMP FAULT
1037 EXP. BOARD1 COM.ERR CPN EXP. BOARD1 COM.
1038 EXT_DEM TR. FAULT CPN EXT_DEM TR.FAULT
1039 ST2 TR. OUT OF RANGE CPN ST2 TR. FAULT
1040 SLT TR. OUT OF RANGE CPN SLT TR. FAULT

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.2 CUSTOM#1 screens

Following screens are showed only when MM02=8,9.
5.6.2.1 Data Transfer screen – Custom#1

Make reference to par. 5.6.1.1.
5.6.2.2 Startup screen – Custom#1

5.6.2.3 Main screen – Custom#1

In this screen are showed some information about the chiller.
GEOGLIMA
hh:mm: actual time
SP XX.X LWT XX.X °F SP= Set point used for temp. control (1)(6)
alternated with LWT= Leaving Water Temp.(1)
SYSTEM OFF
STARTING STARTING= starting procedure in act (see par.5.1.3)
STOPPING STOPPING= stopping procedure in act (see par.5.1.4)
COOL:XXX% COOL= cooling demand percentage (2)
HEAT:XXX% HEAT= heating demand percentage (2)
EMERG:XXX% Machine working in emergency mode (see par.5.1.7)
LOCK:REMOTE OFF Machine locked by digital input (3) or by remote (4)
OPEN LOOP CRT XXX% Open Loop control enabled (see par.5.2.1.1.3)
OPEN LOOP SET XXX% Open Loop control Demand setting(see par.5.2.1.1.3)
ONLY PUMPS MODE Only Pumps Mode activated (see par.5.1.5)
PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM Forcing Pumps On for Antifreeze Limitation activated (5)
CAP XX.X PWR XX.XkW CAP= Cooling capacity (see par. 5.2.12)
PWR= Unit Power Consumption (see par. 5.2.12)
Notes
1) If SPLIT unit is used (MV01>2) then value is substitute with “----“.
2) If heat recovery with cooling priority is enabled, then the cooling value is alternated with “REC “ string
every 2 seconds).
3) The machine is locked by EXEN digital input (see par.5.1.6).
4) The machine is locked by remote controller (see par.5.2.1.1.2.1).
5) This string is alternated with machine status when “Forcing Pump On for Antifreeze Limitation” function
is activated (see par.5.2.5.1.3).
6) If Remote control is enabled (see par.5.2.1.1.2.1) then the value of setpoint is substitute with “REM-
CTR“.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.2.4 First Compressors screens – Custom #1

This screens showed some information about each Turbocor compressor:
CPn xxxxxxx IGV:yyy% xxxxxxx= Compressor status

IGV= IGV opening
Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd= Actual Speed (2)
alternate with Min= Minimum Speed (Surge)
Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Max= Maximum Speed (Choke)
DEM: XXX ACT: XXXkW DEM= Demanded power (kW)
ACT= Actual power (kW)
CUR:XXX A COOL: XXX% CUR= Actual Current
COOL= Demanded capacity (%)
Notes
2) The value of Spd blinks every 1 seconds when Surge Speed Limitation is activated (see par.5.3.2.7).
5.6.2.5 Second Compressors screens – Custom#1

This screens showed some information about each compressor.
CPn CAV:xxxx°F CAV= Cavity Temp.

(n=1..6)
IVT:xxxx SCR:xxxx°F IVT= Inverter Temp.
SCR= SCR Temp.
ST: xx.x DT: xx.x °F ST= Suction Temp. (1)
DT= Discharge Temp.
SP: xx.x DP: xx.xPSI SP= Suction Pressure (2)
DP= Discharge Pressue (2)
Notes
2) If MM04=3,4 then the values of DP and SP are showed in pressure and temperature with 2 seconds of
alternation.
5.6.2.6 Fast Alarm History screen – Custom#1

5.6.2.7 Running times screen – Custom#1

This screens showed the running times of machine and compressors.

hh:mm: actual time
RT Chiller: xxxxxh Chiller running time
RT Cp1: xxxxxh Cp1 running time
RT Cp2: xxxxxh Cp2 running time

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.2.8 Machine screen – Custom#1

This screens showed some general parameters of machine.
MACHINE PARAMETERS
LBV1:xxx% LBV2:xxx% LBV1= Load Balance Valve 1 opening (1)
alternated with LBV2= Load Balance Valve 2 opening (1)
LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT= Liquid Level Transducer (2)
APT= Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (6)
ELL1:xxx% ELL2:xxx% ELL1= Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level 1 (3)
alternated with ELL2= Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level 2 (3)
SS1:xx.x SS2:xx.x °C SS1= Suction Superheat 1 (4)
(SS1 = ST1 – Temp[SP1])
SS2= Suction Superheat 2 (4)
(SS2 = ST2 – Temp[SP2])
COP:xx.x CTR ON XXXX COP = Cooling_Capacity / Unit_Power_Consumption
(XXX= LWT/RWT/ = Cooling_Capacity / (Cp+Fans)_Power_Cons (5)
OET/REM/ LWT= Leaving Water Temp (if MT01=0 and MT06=0)
AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) RWT= Returning Water Temp (if MT01=0 and MT06=1)
OET= Outlet Evap. Temp (if MT01=0 and heat recovery is
active [MH01=3, see par.5.2.2.4.1]);
REM= Remote Setpoint (if MT01>0)
Notes
1) This information is showed only when Load Balance control is activated (MC46>0). For more details see
par. 5.3.6.
2) This information is showed only when “Liquid Level Transducer is enabled (MM27=YES).
3) Evaporator/Condenser Liquid Level (ELL) value is showed when EEV board is connected to S10 via
serial line (ME01=2) and control on evaporator liquid level is enabled (ME02=3) (see par. 5.4.3.3.2) or
control on Condenser liquid level is enabled (ME02=6) (see par. 5.4.3.3.5).
5) This value is showed when Power Line Analyzer is disabled (MK01=0).
6) This information is showed only when “Auxiliary Pressure Transducer is enabled (MM28=YES).
5.6.2.9 Condenser screen – Custom#1

This screen showed some information about Condenser (water side).
CONDENSER PARAMETERS
ICP:XX.X OCP:XX.XPSI ICP= Intlet Condenser Pressure (water side) (1)
OCP= Outlet Condenser Pressure (water side) (1)
ICT:xx.x OCT:xx.x °F ICT= Inlet Cond. Temp. (2)
OCT= Outlet Cond. Temp. (2)
COND.FLUX: XX.Xmc/h Condenser Water Flow Rate (1) (see par.5.2.7.1.3)
Notes
1) This informations are showed only when Condenser Water Pressure reading is enabled (MN06=YES).
2) This informations are showed only when Condenser Water Temperature reading is enabled (MM10=4).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.6.2.10 Evaporator screen – Custom#1

This screen showed some information about Evaporator (water side).
EVAPORAT. PARAMETERS
IWP:XX.X OWP:XX.XPSI IWP= Intlet Water Pressure on Evap#1 (1)
OWP= Outlet Water Pressure on Evap#1 (1)
RWT:xx.x LWT:xx.x °F RWT= Returning Water Temp. (2)
LWT= Leaving Water Temp. (2)
EVAP.FLUX: XX.Xmc/h Evaporator#1 Water Flow Rate (1) (see cap.5.2.6.2.2)
Notes
1) This informations are showed only when Evaporator Water Pressure reading is enabled (MV03=YES).
2) This informations are not showed if SPLIT unit is used (MV01>2).
5.6.2.11 Alarms screens – Custom#1


Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7 SYSTEM SETUP
All parameters are stored in a menu structure with different level of password access.
WARNING
In multi-boards system, if one or more setup parameters are changed then restart the system for
update parameters change.
5.7.1 Entering the menu

To enter into setup menu the MENU key has to be pressed from any screen.
In the following figure there’s a flow chart which shows how you can move between the menu.
MENU
USER
SETUP
MANUFACTURER
SETUP
I/O
SETUP
ALARM
HISTORY
HW
KEY
TIMER
SETUP
TIME
AND
DATE
INTERFACE
CHECKLIST
On the menu you can move by UP/DOWN ARROW keys.

The menu are:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
 User setup
 Service setup
 Manufacturer setup
 I/O setup
 Alarm history
 Hardware Key
 Timer setup
 Time and date
 Interface
To enter into every single setup menu to change some parameters, you have to press the SET
key. To store a modified parameter, you have to press the SET key, but if you press the ESC key,
you’ll come back to the previous menu with no storing.
5.7.1.1 Example of parameter change

To change a parameter it’s necessary to enter into its menu. To do this, the MENU key has to be
pressed and it will be visualized:
MAIN MENU
Please select the
Menu program
USER SETUP
If the parameter “ Upper demand limit” has to be changed, the desired menu will have to be
selected and then the SET key have to be pressed.
In this case will appear:
USER SETUP
Insert Password
Modify 0
By pressing the UP/DOWN ARROW key a password have to be entered; if the entered password
is correct and the SET key is pressed, then it will be shown:
USER SETUP S 1
SET POINT FOR
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
40 °F
By pressing the UP/DOWN ARROW key it’s possible to scroll the different parameters. If “Upper
demand limit” is the third parameter so it’s sufficient to press twice the UP ARROW key to obtain
the following screen:
USER SETUP S 3
UPPER DEMAND LIMIT
(100=DISABLED)
100 %
To change the value that’s indicated at the bottom line of the screen, the SET key has to be
pressed and the value will start to blink.
To set a different value the UP/DOWN ARROW key have to be pressed. If, for example, a value of

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
98% has to be set, the DOWN ARROW key will have to be pressed twice and the following screen
will appear:
USER SETUP S 3
UPPER DEMAND LIMIT
(100=DISABLED)
Modify 98 %
To store the new value the SET key has to be pressed. If the ESC key is pressed, the new value
isn’t stored and the screen will be the following:
USER SETUP S 3
UPPER DEMAND LIMIT
(100=DISABLED)
100 %
By pressing the ESC key the “USER MENU” will appear again.
MAIN MENU
Please select the
Menu program
USER SETUP
5.7.1.2 Example of string parameter change

To change a string parameter it’s necessary to enter into its menu. To do this, the MENU key has
to be pressed and it will be visualized:
MAIN MENU
Please select the
Menu program
USER SETUP
If the string parameter “CALL NUMBER 1 FOR ALARM NOTIFICATION” has to be changed, the
desired menu will have to be selected (by pressing the UP/DOWN ARROW) and then the SET key
have to be pressed.
In this case will appear:
MANUFACTURER SETUP
Insert Password
Modify 0
By pressing the UP/DOWN ARROW key a password have to be entered; if the entered password
is correct and the SET key is pressed, then it will be shown:
MANUFACTURER M 1
USER PASSWRD
By pressing the UP/DOWN ARROW key it’s possible to scroll the different parameters. In this case
press the UP ARROW key until it is reach the parameters and to obtain the following screen:

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
MANUFACTURER M101
CALL NUMBER 1 FOR
ALARM NOTIFICATION
+3934011223344
To change the string that’s indicated at the bottom line of the screen, the SET key has to be
pressed and the first character of the string will start to blink.
To change first character the UP/DOWN ARROW key have to be pressed. If, for example, the
character “-“ has to be set, the UP ARROW key will have to be pressed twice and the following
screen will appear:
MANUFACTURER M101
CALL NUMBER 1 FOR
ALARM NOTIFICATION
-3934011223344
To store the new value the SET or ON/OFF key has to be pressed. If the ESC key is pressed, the
new value isn’t stored and the screen will be the following:
MANUFACTURER M101
CALL NUMBER 1 FOR
ALARM NOTIFICATION
+3934011223344
If the ON/OFF key is pressed, the second character of the string will start to blink.
To change this character the UP/DOWN ARROW key have to be pressed. To store the new value
the SET or ON/OFF key has to be pressed.
If the ON/OFF key is pressed twice, the fourth character of the string will start to blink.
To change this character the UP/DOWN ARROW key have to be pressed. If, for example, the
character “5“ has to be set, the UP ARROW key will have to be pressed twice and the following
screen will appear:
MANUFACTURER M101
CALL NUMBER 1 FOR
ALARM NOTIFICATION
-3954011223344
To store the new string the SET key has to be pressed.

By pressing the ESC key the “USER MENU” will appear again.
MAIN MENU
Please select the
Menu program
MANUFACTURER SETUP

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.2 User Setup

As the USER SETUP is selected, the user password is requested to get access to this parameters
list.
After typing the correct password, the display will show the following mask:
USER SETUP Mxyy

XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The second and the third line of the display are on the “LCD Display Description” column of the
following list of parameters.
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “USER SETUP” in this case, on the
corner there is the IdCode of the parameter with:
- x = subgroup code
- yy = subgroup index
The furth line shows the current value of the displayed parameter.
Use the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to scroll all the parameters. To go back to the previous menu
you have to press the ESC key.
List of parameters in USER SETUP:
Cod. Description LCD Display Description min max default m.u.
MACHINE PARAMETERS GROUP (MMxx)

MM01 Language: LANGUAGE: 0=EN 1=DE 0 4 0
0=English, 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU
1=Deutsch,
2=Italian,
3=French,
4=Russian.
Notes
Russian language is available only using
user graphic UG2.
MM16 Number of time blocks scheduling NUMBER OF TIME BLOCK 0 3 0
(0=time block scheduling disabled) SCHEDULING(0=NO)
MM17 Time in hours/10 for starting machine in TIME FOR STARTING 0 239 0 Hours
time block#1 MACHINE IN BLOCK#1 /10
(ex. 80=8h and 0m=0x6m)
(used if MM16>=1).
MM18 Time in hours/10 for stopping machine in TIME FOR STOPPING 0 239 1 Hours
(ex. 117=11h and 42m=7x6m)
(used if MM16>=1).
(ex. 145=14h and 30m=5x6m)
(used if MM16>=2).
(ex. 186=18h and 36m=6x6m)
(used if MM16>=2).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(ex. 204=20h and 24m=4x6m)
(used if MM16>=3).
(ex. 238=23h and 48m=8x6m)
(used if MM16>=3).
UNIT-CAPACITY / TEMPERATURE CONTROL GROUP (MTxx)
MT04 Upper demand limit value of unit power UPPER DEMAND LIMIT 0 100 100 %
(100= no upper demand limit) VALUE (100=NO)
Notes
Used only when MT38=1,2.
MT10 Set point for Temperature Control SET POINT FOR 32 90 40 °F
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT11 Second set point for Temperature Control SET POINT II FOR 32 90 40 °F
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
HEATING CONTROL GROUP (MHxx)
MH03 Set point for Temperature Control in Heat SET POINT FOR TEMP 32 140 40 °F
mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH04 Second set point for Temperature Control SET POINT II TEMP 32 140 40 °F
in Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
EXTERNAL PUMPS CONTROL GROUP (MXxx)
MX01 External Pump controlled with inverter: EXT.PUMP WITH INV: 0 2 0
0= disabled; 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT
MX02 External Pump minimum voltage for EXT.PUMP 0 100 0 %
inverter demand = 0%. MINIMUM VOLTAGE
(used if MX01>0)
MX03 External Pump maximum voltage for EXT.PUMP 0 100 100 %
inverter demand = 100%. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE
(used if MX01>0)
MX04 Setpoint used for External Pump SETPOINT FOR -60 90 40 °F
controlled by inverter. EXT.PUMP CONTROL
(used if MX01=2)
MX05 Proportional Band used for External PROP.BAND FOR 0.0 54.0 7.0 °F
Pump controlled by inverter. EXT.PUMP CONTROL
(used if MX01=2)
MX06 Integral Time used for External Pump INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(used if MX01=2)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.3 Manufacturer Setup

As the MANUFACTURER SETUP is selected, the manufacturer password is requested to get
access to this parameters list.
If the setup parameter MW03=0 then the standard manufacturer password is required to get
access and the value of inserted password is not hide.
If the setup parameter MW03<>0 then the password MW03 is required to get access and the value
of the inserted password is hiding with the string “****”; following steps are needed to enter into
menu:
- setting manufacturer password with UP/DOWN keys;
- press MENU key;
- press SET key;
The MANUFACTURER SETUP is not showed on the menu list when MW04<>MW05 with
MW04<>0.
MANUFACTURER Mxyy
XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “MANUFACTURER” in this case, on the
- x = subgroup code
The fourth line shows the current value of the displayed parameter.
Use the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to scroll all the parameters. To go back the previous menu you
have to press the ESC key.
Following table resume all the defined subgroups:
Subgruop Description
Code
MMxx Machine Parameters Group
MTxx Unit-Capacity / Temperature Control Group
MCxx Compressors Control Group
MRxx Refrigerating Circuits Control Group
MDxx Discharge Press. Control Group
MExx Eev Control Group
MFxx Free Cooling Control Group
MLxx Lpa Control Group
MAxx Evap System Control Group
MHxx Heating Control Group
MPxx Pumps Control Group
MXxx External Pumps Control Group
MKxx Power Control Group
MVxx Evaporator Control Group
MNxx Condenser Control Group
MSxx Remote Monitoring Group
MWxx Passwords Group

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
List parameters in MANUFACTURER SETUP (NOTE: °F = °C x 1.8 + 32; PSI = Bar x 14.5):
Cod. Description LCD Display Description min MAX default m.u.

MM01. Language: LANGUAGE: 0=EN 1=DE 0 4 0
(1,2) 0=English, 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU
1=Deutsch,
2=Italian,
3=French,
4=Russian.
Notes
Russian language is available only
using user graphic UG2.
MM02. Brand name to show on LCD BRAND NAME:0=ZA 1=CO 0 9 0
(3) 0 = ZAMIL AIR CONDITIONERS 2=CL 3=GE 4=YI 5=RH
1 = COOLINE AIR CONDITIONERS
2 = CLASSIC AIR CONDITIONERS
3 = GEOCLIMA AIR CONDITIONERS
4 = YORK INTERNATIONAL
5 = RHOSS S.P.A.
6 = PROJECT ENGINEERING
7 = ********************
8 = VNIIKHOLODMASH
9 = ВНИИХОЛОДМАШ
Notes
o For the right visualization of brand
name selected with MM02=9, is
required CO3CIR user o UG2
graphic user.
o When are selected brand names
with MM02=8,9 then on user
CO3/CO4 are showed CUSTOM#1
screens (see par. 5.6.2).
MM03. Temperature Measuring Unit for TEMPERATURE MU SHOW: 0 1 0
(2) visualization: 0=°F 1=°C
0= °F,
1= °C.
MM04. Pressure Measuring Unit for PRESS. MU SHOW: 0=P 0 4 0
(2) visualization: 1=B 2=TEMP 3=PT 4=BT
0=PSI (P),
1=Bar (B);
2=TEMPERATURE (T),
3=PSI/TEMP. (PT),
4=Bar/TEMP. (BT) )
Notes
Pressure/Temperature alternation
(MM04=3,4) is showed in compressors
screen only.
MM05. Insert set up default INSERT NO YES NO
SETUP DEFAULT
MM06. Autorestart wait time. AUTORESTART 1 360 180 sec
WAIT TIME
Notes
During machine autorestart it is not
possible to bypass this wait time by
pressing <ON/OFF> key.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MM07. To override all the alarms: OVERRIDE ALARMS: 0 2 0
0 = disabled; 0=NO 1=YES 2=YES+DBG
1 = enabled;
2 = enabled and Turbocor debug.
Notes
When parameter =2 then it is possible
the debug of software also if the
Turbocors are not connected.
MM08. Enable notification of setup parameters NOTIFICATION SETUP NO YES NO
changes on Alarm History. PARAMETERS CHANGES
MM09. Software filter used on all S10 analog FILTER FOR S10 0 240 0
channels (0= no filter). ANALOG CHANNELS
Notes
This filter is used for all analog inputs of
all S10 boards (Master or Slaves).
MM10. TAE/RH probes manager for auxiliary TAE/RH USE:0=NO 1=RR 0 6 0
functions: 2=AT 3=AI 4=CT 56=TA
0 = not used;
1 = Return Temperature Reset (RR);
2 = Ambient Temperature Set Point
correction (AT);
3 = Analog Input Set Point correction
(AI);
4 = Inlet/Outlet Condenser
Temperatures visualization (CT);
5 = Ambient Temperature (TA);
6 = Ambient Temperature (TA) and
Forcing Pumps On for Antifreeze
Limitation.
MM11. HGBS digital output manager for HGBS MANAGER: 0=NO 0 3 0
auxiliary functions: 1=PHGB 2=CHW 3=ULL
0 = auxiliary functions disabled;
3 = Units Lead Lag (ULL).
Notes
HGBS auxiliary functions are available
when HGBS not used in compressor
control (i.e. MC03=8)
MM12. Switching time of HGBS valve in pulsed SWITCH TIME - HGBS 0 255 10 Sec
mode (used only when MM11=1) VALVE – PULSED MODE
MM13. Set point for Cooler Heater Wrapped SET POINT FOR COOLER -60 90 39 °F
control. HEATER CONTROL
Notes
Cooler Heater Wrapped control is
enabled when MM11=2 and Unit OFF.
MM14. Rotation time for the Units Lead Lag: ROTATION TIME - UNIT 0 240 0 hour
(2) =0 then Slave Unit; LEAD LAG(0=SLAVE)
Notes
Units Lead Lag function is enabled if
MH01=0 and MM11=3.
MM15. Activation of the “Machine Fatal Error” ENABLE MACHINE FATAL NO YES NO
(3) alarm. ERROR ALARM
MM16. Number of time blocks scheduling NUMBER OF TIME BLOCK 0 3 0
(1,2) (0=time blocks scheduling disabled) SCHEDULING(0=NO)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MM17. Time in hours/10 for starting machine in TIME FOR STARTING 0 239 0 Hours
(1,2) time block#1 MACHINE IN BLOCK#1 /10
(ex. 80=8h and 0m=0x6m)
(used if MM16>=1).
MM18. Time in hours/10 for stopping machine TIME FOR STOPPING 0 239 1 Hours
(1,2) in time block#1 MACHINE IN BLOCK#1 /10
(ex. 117=11h and 42m=7x6m)
(used if MM16>=1).
(ex. 145=14h and 30m=5x6m)
(used if MM16>=2).
(ex. 186=18h and 36m=6x6m)
(used if MM16>=2).
(ex. 204=20h and 24m=4x6m)
(used if MM16>=3).
(ex. 238=23h and 48m=8x6m)
(used if MM16>=3).
MM23. Glycol percentage used for COP GLYCOL PERCENTAGE: 0 101 101 %
computation: 0=WATER 101=NO-COP
Notes
For the right computation of COP is
required that Evaporator Water
Pressures tranducers are enabled
(MV03=YES).
MM24. Glycol type: GLYCOL TYPE: 0 1 0
0= Ethylene glycol; 0=ETHYL. 1=PROPYL.
MM25. Enable the probes redundancy: PROBES REDUNDANCY: 0 2 0
0 = disabled; 0=NO 1=YES 2=NO-ST
1 = enabled on proble LWT, RWT, ST;
2 = enabled on proble LWT, RWT.
MM26. Enable the warnings indication by digital WARNINGS INDICATION NO YES NO
output. BY DIGITAL OUTPUT
MM27. Enabled the Liquid Level Transducer. LIQUID LEVEL NO YES NO
TRANSDUCER
MM28. Enable the Auxiliary Pressure AUXILIARY PRESSURE NO YES NO
Transducer. TRANSDUCER
MM29. Unit check enable UNIT CHECK ENABLE NO YES NO
MM30. Number of commissioning checks NUMBER OF 0 20 14

(0 = no checks required in COMMISSIONG CHECKS
commissioning phase)
MM31. Number of checking checks NUMBER OF 0 20 9
(0 = no checks required in checking CHECKING CHECKS
phase)
MM32. Number of days (after commissioning NUMBER OF DAYS FOR 1 2000 90 days
phase) for checking checks CHECKING CHECKS
MM33. Number of maintenance checks NUMBER OF 0 20 14
(0 = no checks required in maintenance MAINTENANCE CHECKS
phase)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MM34. Number of days (after checking phase) NUMBER OF DAYS FOR 1 2000 270 days
for maintenance checks MAINTENANCE CHECKS
MT01. Remote Control: REMOTE CONTROL: 0=NO 0 2 0
(2) 0= NO; 1=YES 2=YES+LOCAL
1= YES;
2= YES with local control when
communication error with Remote
Controller.
MT02. Cooling value when Remote Control COOLING VALUE REMOTE -1.0 100.0 0.0 %
(2,5) enabled (-1=chiller locked). CONTROL(-1=LOCKED)
MT03. Demand percentage in Open Loop OPEN LOOP START 0 100 0 %
(2) Control at startup DEMAND (0=DISABLED)
(0= open loop control disabled).
MT04. Upper demand limit value of unit power UPPER DEMAND LIMIT 0 100 100 %
(1,2) (100= no upper demand limit) VALUE (100=NO)
Notes
MT05. Maximum demand in emergency mode MAX DEMAND EMERGENCY 0 33 101 %
(2) (101= Emergency mode disabled). MODE (101=DISABLED)
MT06. Temperature controlled: TEMP. CONTROLLED: 0 1 0
(2) 0= LWT; 0=LWT 1=RWT
1= RWT.
MT07. Set point manager for Temperature SP SEL: 0=S1 1=S1/S2 0 5 0
(2) Control: 2=S2/S1 3=RM 45=S/RM
1= set point selected by digital input
SETP_SEL:
 First set point (S1) when
SETP_SEL is ON;
 Second set point (S2) when
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL is ON;
SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is ON;
 Remote set point (RM) when
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL is ON.
MT08. Minimum set point for the user changes MIN SETPOINT FOR -60.0 90.0 39.0 °F
(2) of Temperature Control set point TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT09. Maximum set point for Temperature MAX SETPOINT FOR -60.0 90.0 43.0 °F
(2) Control TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT10. Set point for Temperature Control SET POINT FOR -60.0 90.0 40.0 °F
(2) TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT11. Second set point for Temperature SET POINT II FOR -60.0 90.0 42.0 °F

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MT12. Proportional Band for Temperature PROPORTIONAL BAND 0.0 36.0 7.0 °F
MT13. Integral Time for Temperature Control INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(2) (0= integral effect disabled) TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT14. Derivative Time for Temperature Control DERIVATIVE TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(2) (0= derivative effect disabled) TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Notes
This parameter is used in Cooling mode
only (i.e. disabled in heating mode).
MT15. Minimum time for stages increase on MINIMUM TIME FOR 0 600 30 sec
the compressors control. STAGES INCREASE
MT16. Minimum time for stages decrease on MINIMUM TIME FOR 0 240 30 sec
the compressors control. STAGES DECREASE
MT17. Set point for Pull Down control SET POINT FOR PULL 0.0 20.0 0.0 °F
(0= pull down control disabled) DOWN CONTROL (0=NO)
MT18. Differential for Pull Down control DIFFERENTIAL FOR 0.0 2.0 0.5 °F
PULL DOWN CONTROL
MT19. Demand correction for Pull Down control DEMAND CORRECTION 0 100 5 %
FOR PULL DOWN CONTR.
MT20. Differential for High Temperature Alarm DIFFERENT. FOR HIGH 1 60 20 °F
(2) TEMPERATURE ALARM
MT21. Delay before temperature alarm DELAY BEFORE 0 109 5 min
(2) (0= High Temperature Alarm bypassed) TEMPERATURE ALARM
MT22. Temperature value for anti freeze alarm TEMP. VALUE FOR -60 90 39 °F
ANTI FREEZE ALARM
MT23. Differential for forcing compressors DIFF. FOR FORCING CP -50 50.0 0.0 °F
OFF: OFF (0=NO <0=AF-LIM)
>0 = Forcing Cp Off enabled;
<0 = Forcing Cp Off and Antifreeze
limitation enabled;
0=disabled.
MT24. Temperature value for High RWT Alarm. TEMPERATURE VALUE 0 212 90 °F
FOR HIGH RWT ALARM
MT25. Differential temperature used for “High DIFF.TEMP.FOR 0 90 0 °F
RWT Limitation” function HIGH RWT LIMIT(0=NO)
(0=High RWT Limitation disabled).
Notes
This differential is referred respect to the
temperature used for High RWT alarm
(MT24).
MT26. Nominal Delta T of Unit or Chiller CHILLER RANGE 0.0 50.0 9.0 °F
Range.
MT27. Chiller range percentage used in RANGE PERC.– FORCING 0 90 0 %
Forcing Cp Off for Low RWT. CP OFF LOW RWT(0=NO)
(0= Forcing Cp Off for Low RWT
disabled)
MT28. Enable Low RWT Limitation in Cooling ENABLE LOW RWT LIMIT NO YES NO
mode. COOLING MODE
MT29. Reset ratio for Return Temperature RESET RATIO FOR 0 100 0 %
Reset RETURN TEMPER. RESET
Notes
Return Temperature Reset enabled
when MM10=1.
MT30. Reset limit for Return Temperature RESET LIMIT FOR 0 50 5 °F
Reset. RETURN TEMPER. RESET

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MT31. Maximum temperature correction for MAX SETP CORRECTION- 0.0 40 5.0 °F
Ambient Temperature and Analog Input AMBIENT T SETP CORR
Set point correction functions.
MT32. Ambient temperature value for zero AMB. T FOR 0 CORR- 0 125 86 °F
correction in Ambient Temperature Set AMBIENT T SETP CORR
point correction function.
MT33. Ambient temperature value for max AMB. T FOR MAX CORR- 0 125 68 °F
correction in Ambient Temperature Set AMBIENT T SETP CORR
point function.
MT34. Set point for compressors control in Split SET POINT FOR CP 0 145 70 PSI
Unit with control on Suction Pressure. CONTROL – SPLIT UNIT
(used only if MV01=4)
MT35. Prop. Band for compressors control in PROP. BAND FOR CP 0 100 20 PSI
Split Unit with control on Suction CONTROL – SPLIT UNIT
Pressure.
(used only when MV01=4)
MT36. Integral Time for compressors control in INTEG. TIME FOR CP 0 999 0 sec
Split Unit with control on Suction CONTROL – SPLIT UNIT
Pressure.
(used only when MV01=4)
MT37. Minimum demand used for compressors MIN DEMAND FOR CP 0 100 0 %
switch off in Split unit. SWT OFF – SPLIT UNIT
(used only when MV01>3)
MT38. Upper Demand Limit mode: UPPER DEMAND LIMIT: 0 3 1
0= disabled; 0=NO 1=PA 2=DI 3=AI
1= limit by setup parameter only;
2= limit by setup parameter and enable
by digital input.
3= limit by analog input.
MT39. Temperature value for High RWT TEMPERATURE VALUE 0 212 80 °F
Warning. FOR HIGH RWT WARNING
MT40. Delay time for High RWT Warning DELAY TIME FOR HIGH 0 240 0 sec
RWT WARNING (0=NO)
COMPRESSORS CONTROL GROUP (MCxx)
MC01. Number of compressors NUMBER OF 1 6 2
COMPRESSORS

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MC02. Compressor type: CP TYPE / CONTROL 10 20 10
10= Turbocor not in parallel with LOGIC SELECTION
sequential logic;
11= Turbocor with all cp in parallel on 1
circuit and sequential logic;
circuits (the odd on 1st circuit, the
even on 2nd circuit) and sequential
logic;
circuit and parallel logic;
circuits (first half on 1st circuit, second
half on 2nd circuit) and parallel logic;
circuit and true parallel logic;
16= Turbocor with all cp in true parallel
on 2 circuits (the odd on 1st circuit,
the even on 2nd circuit) and true
parallel logic;
17= Turbocor not in parallel with parallel
logic;
18= Turbocor not in parallel with hybrid
logic;
circuit and hybrid logic;
circuits (the odd on 1st circuit, the
even on 2nd circuit) and hybrid logic.
MC03. Turbocor control type: TURBOCOR CONTR.TYPE: 8 8 8
8 = stepless via modbus serial line. 8=MODBUS
MC04. Minimum interval of compressor OFF MINIMUM INTERVAL OF 0 600 180 Sec
COMPRESSOR OFF
MC05. Minimum interval of compressor ON MINIMUM INTERVAL OF 0 255 60 Sec
COMPRESSOR ON
MC06. Minimum interval between two MINIMUM INTERVAL 0 1200 300 Sec
compressor starts. BETWEEN 2 CP STARTS
MC07. Timeout before to switch on a new TIMEOUT BEFORE SWT 0 1200 1 sec
compressor (0=unlimited timeout) ON NEW CP(0=UNLIM.)
MC08. Compressor hours equalization and CP HOURS EQUAL:0=N 0 4 0
selection of cp insertion logic: 1=Y 2=N-2B 34=Y-2B
0=no (-> 1,2,3,4,5,6);
1=yes;
2=no and 2 barrels sequence with first
half of cp in barrel#1 and the second
half of cp in barrel#2:
(NrCp=4 -> 1,3,2,4;
NrCp=6 -> 1,4,2,5,3,6);
3=yes and 2 barrels sequence with first
half cp in barrel#1 and the second
half in barrel#2
4=yes and 2 barrel sequence with odd
cp (1,3,5) in barrel#1 and even cp
(2,4,6) in barrel#2
Notes
Two barrels sequence, selected when
MC08=2,3,4, is not available when the
compressors are controlled in True
Parallel Mode (MC02=15,16).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MC09. Minimum capacity for compressor MIN CAPACITY FOR 1 100 20 %
switch off. CP SWITCH OFF
Notes
This value must be always <= MC12.
This value must be always < MC10.
MC10. Minimum capacity for compressor MIN CAPACITY FOR 1 100 40 %
switch on. CP SWITCH ON
Notes
MC11. Capacity for compressor startup. CAPACITY FOR CP 1 100 50 %
STARTUP
Notes
MC12. Maximum available capacity for each MAX AVAILAB.CAPACITY 1 100 100 %
compressor. FOR EACH CP
MC13. Maximum nominal power of each MAX NOMINAL POWER 86 250 86 KW
compressors. FOR EACH COMPRESSOR
Notes
- for Turbocor TT300 set 86KW;
- for Turbocor TT400 set 120KW.
Not more used for compressors capacity
control purpose, from GEODTU07.00.
MC14. Minimum time ON for stepless control MIN TIME ON FOR 1 255 5 0.1
when power is increased. STEPLESS CTR–PWR INC Sec
MC15. Maximum time ON for stepless control MAX TIME ON FOR 1 255 10 0.1
MC16. Time OFF for stepless control TIME OFF FOR 1 255 10 0.1
MC17. Total time nominally needed to move TIME TO MOVE POWER 0 255 10 Sec
from minimum power to maximum FROM MIN-MAX IN STP
power.
MC18. Minimum time ON for stepless control MIN TIME ON FOR 1 255 5 0.1
when power is decreased. STEPLESS CTR–PWR DEC Sec
MC19. Maximum time ON for stepless control MAX TIME ON FOR 1 255 10 0.1
MC20. Time OFF for stepless control TIME OFF FOR 1 255 10 0.1
MC21. Total time nominally needed to move TIME TO MOVE POWER 0 255 10 Sec
from maximum power to minimum FROM MAX-MIN IN STP
power.
MC22. Lock compressors manager: LOCK CP:0=NO 1=LCK 0 2 0
0 = lock compressors disabled; IF OFF 2=LCK IF ON
1 = lock compressor when Dipswitch
OFF or digital input is OFF or lock
compressor setup parameter
enabled;
2 = lock compressor when Dipswitch
OFF or digital input is ON or lock
compressor setup parameter
enabled.
MC23. Maximum capacity for compressor 1 MAX CAPACITY CP1 0 101 100 %
(2) (0= cp1 locked by setup parameter, only (0=LOCKED 101=REST.)
if MC22<>0;
101= cp1 restart (i.e. relay CP open for
60 seconds) ).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).
if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).
if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).
if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).
if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).
if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).
Note: Not Used in this application.
if MC22<>0;
60 seconds)).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MC31. Economizer and Liquid injection logic ECO AND LIQUID INJ. 0 10 0
manager: LOGIC MANAGER
0= no economizer and liquid injection;
1= economizer (ECO) and liquid
injection on with ECO logic (LIE);
injection with SUCTION LINE logic
(LIS);
injection with SUCTION LINE logic
(LIS) and liquid injection with ECO
logic (LIE);
injection with OR of SUCTION LINE
and ECO logic (LIE+LIS);
5= only economizer (ECO);
6= only economizer (ECO);
7= economizer (ECO) and single
compressor fault (CP_FAULT);
injection with OR of SUCTION LINE
and ECO logic (LIE+LIS);
injection with Discharge Temp. logic
(LID);
10= liquid injection with Discharge
Temp. logic (LID).
Notes
Configuration 6(=5) and 8(=4) are
leaved for compatibility with old sw
version.
MC32. Minimum time on and off for Economizer MIN TIME ON/OFF FOR 0 255 30 Sec
and Liquid Injection ports. ECO-LIQUID INJ PORT
MC33. Compressor capacity (demand) for CP CAPACITY FOR 1 100 100 %
Economizer switch on. ECONOMIZER SWT ON
(used if MC31=1..9)
MC34. Differential compressor capacity DIFF.CP CAPACITY FOR 1 50 10 %
(demand) for Economizer switch off. ECONOMIZER SWT OFF
(used if MC31=1..9)
Notes
This parameter must be set always
<=MC33.
MC35. Value of the Discharge Temperature for VALUE OF DT FOR 0 302 203 °F
liquid injection activation. LIQUID INJECTION
MC36. Differential of the Discharge DIFFERENTIAL OF DT 0 100 9 °F
Temperature for liquid injection FOR LIQUID INJECTION
deactivation.
MC37. Delay time for Auxiliary Alarm DELAY TIME AUXILIARY -300 300 5 sec
(0=no auxiliary alarm) ALARM (0=NO AUX AL)
Notes
If <0 then the alarm is bypass during
Counting Minimum On and the delay
time used is the module of the value.
MC38. String used for description of Auxiliary AUXILIARY ALARM String
Alarm message. STRING 20

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MC39. Numbers of Bearing/Motor allowed in 90 NR OF BEA/MOT ALARM 0 9 0
minutes with “Autorestart” description WITH AUTORESTART
(0=disabled).
Notes
For the right working set always
MC39<=MR02.
MC40. Speed range percentage used for Surge PERC.USED FOR SURGE 0 50 0 %
Speed Limitation function. SPEED LIMIT.(0=NO)
(0=Surge Speed Limitation disabled)
MC41. Power compressor correction used in POWER CP CORRECTION 0 50 10 %
Surge Speed Limitation function. SURGE SPEED LIMIT.
MC42. Equalization Solenoids manager: EQUALIZ.SOL.: 0=NO 0 6 0
0= disabled (NO); 14=CO 25=HE 36=ALW
1= only in Cooling (CO), controlled by
Cp Speed;
2= only in Heating (HE), controlled by
Cp Speed;;
3= always (ALW), controlled by Cp
Speed;
IGV opening;
IGV opening;
6= always (ALW), controlled by IGV
opening.
MC43. Turbocor speed (rpm x 100) used for TCOR SPEED (RPMx100) 0 500 180
Equalization-Solenoid / Load Balance EQUAL-SOL/LBV DEACT.
Valve deactivaction.
(used only when MC42=1,2,3 or
MC46=1,2,3)
MC44. IGV opening used for Equalization- IGV OPENING FOR 1 110 110 %
Solenoid / Load Balance Valve EQUAL-SOL/LBV DEACT.
deactivaction.
(used only when MC42=4,5,6 or
MC46=4,5,6)
MC45. Suction Heater manager: SUCTION HEATER:0=NO 0 3 0
0= disabled (NO); 1=CPON 2=CPOFF 3=ALW
1= ON when Cp ON (CPON);
2= ON when Cp OFF (CPOFF);
3= always ON (ALW).
Notes
Suction heaters are manged only when
MC31<>1..5).
MC46. Load Balance control: LOAD BALANCE: 0=NO 0 6 0
0= disabled (NO); 14=CO 25=HE 36=ALW
Cp Speed at cp startup;
Cp Speed at cp startup;
3= always (ALW), controlled by Cp
Speed at cp startup;
IGV opening at cp startup;
IGV opening at cp startup;
6= always (ALW), controlled by IGV
opening at cp startup.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MC47. Load Balance Valve opening during LOAD BALANCE VALVE % 0 100 100 %
compressor startup. AT CP STARTUP
MC48. Suction Pressure (SP) setpoint used for SP SETPOINT FOR LOAD 0.0 290.0 58.0 PSI
Load Balance Valve control. BALANCE VALVE CTR
MC49. Proportiona Band used for Load PROP.BAND FOR LOAD 1.0 58.0 15.0 PSI
Balance Valve control. BALANCE VALVE CTR
MC50. Cp demand capacity used for Load CP DEMAND - LBV CTR 0 90 90 %
Balance Valve control by Suction Press BY SP(0=NO 90=ALW)
(SP).
(0= LBV not controlled by SP;
90= LBV always controlled by SP)
MC51. Load Balance Superheat value used to SUPERHEAT FOR LOAD 0.0 54.0 36.0 °F
control Load Balance Injection Solenoid BAL.INJ.ACT(0=NO)
(0= Load Balance Injection Solenoid
disabled)
MC52. Delay time used to control Load Balance DELAY TIME FOR LOAD 1 240 5 sec
Injection Solenoid BAL.INJ.CONTROL
MC53. Turbocor “Fast Start” mode manager: TURBOCOR FAST START: 0 2 0
0= disabled (i.e. registers are not write); 0=NO 1=ON 2=OFF
1= Fast Start mode activated
(i.e. registers 48813, 41814 set = 1);
2= Fast Start mode deactivated
(i.e. registers 48813, 41814 set = 0).
Note
When MC53 is set =1,2, then it is
required to restart the machine (cicle of
power)!!
MC54. Speed percentage used for compressor SPEED PERC. FOR CP 1 100 70 %
switch on, in hybrid control. SWT ON - HYBRID CTR
(used only when MC02=18,19,20)
MC55. Speed percentage used for compressor SPEED PERC. FOR CP 1 100 30 %
switch off, in hybrid control. SWT OFF - HYBRID CTR
MC56. Minimum time between the exit of a cp MIN TIME CP CM-ON 0 240 60 sec
from CM-ON status and the switch off of EXIT AND CP SWT OFF
a cp, in hybrid control.
MC57. Switch off all the cp when a new cp is SWT OFF ALL CP FOR NO YES NO
inserted in parallel logic and switch on NEW CP INS.-PAR.CTR
capacity is not reached.
MC58. Maximum time used for compressor MAX TIME FOR CP 1 900 300 sec
switch on when demand at 100%, in SWT ON - HYBRID CTR
hybrid control.
MC59. Delay time for compressors switch on DELAY TIME CP ON 15 300 15 sec
after machine starting. AFTER MACHINE START
MC60. Delay time compressor starting after DELAY TIME CP START 0 240 20 sec
fans starting. AFTER FANS START
Notes
Set this parameter =0 to avoid the pre-
ventilation before the start of first
compressor in a circuit.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MC61. Capacity for compressor startup when CAPACITY FOR CP 0 100 0 %
“High RWT Limitation” is activated. STARTUP–HIGH RWT LIM
(0 = at compressor startup used always
MC11)
Notes
MC62. Minimum value of Pressure Ratio MIN PRESSURE RATIO 1.0 2.0 1.0
(1.0 = disable the dynamic setpoint on (1.0=NO DSET DP CTR)
Discharge Pressure Control, see
par.5.4.2.4)
REFRIGERATING CIRCUITS CONTROL GROUP (MRxx)
MR01. Used gas: GAS:0=407 1=22 2=134 0 5 2
0= R407C, 3=404 4=1270 5=1234
1= R22,
2= R134A,
3= R404A,
4= R1270;
5= HFO 1234 ZE.
MR02. Number of automatic reset alarms MAX NUMBER OF 0 20 0
(2) allowed in 90 minutes (0=disabled). AUTORESET ALARMS
Note
The list of automatic reset alarm is
reported at par.5.5.4.
MR03. Delay time before automatic reset of an DELAY TIME BEFORE 0 255 90 sec
(2) alarm allowed in 90 minutes. AUTORESET ALARM
MR04. Value of suction pressure for low SP VALUE OF SP FOR 0.0 290 55 PSI
(2) alarm managed in S10. LOW SP ALARM
MR05. Delay time for suction pressure alarm DELAY TIME FOR 0 240 0 sec
(2) managed in S10 SP ALARM (0=NO)
(0= SP alarm disabled).
MR06. Value of discharge pressure for high DP VALUE OF DP FOR 0 435 377 PSI
(2) alarm managed in S10. HIGH DP ALARM (0=NO)
(0= High DP alarm disabled).
MR07. Temperature value for low suction TEMP. VALUE FOR LOW -40 140 -40 °F
temperature alarm SUCTION TEMP. ALARM
MR08. Value of the Discharge Temperature for VALUE OF DT FOR 0 302 212 °F
High Discharge Temperature alarm. HIGH DT ALARM
MR09. Delay before indication of High DELAY TIME FOR 0 240 0 sec
Discharge Temperature alarm HIGH DT ALARM
(0 = High DT alarm disabled)
MR10. Power compressor correction when low POWER CP CORRECTION 0 20 0 %
pressure limitation is active FOR LP LIMIT. (0=NO)
(0= Low pressure limitation disabled).
MR11. Differential pressure for low pressure DIFFERENTIAL FOR 0 255 30 PSI
limitation. LP LIMITATION
MR12. Value of DP used for Adaptive Control: if VALUE OF DP FOR 0 580 0 PSI
(2) DP > this parameter then the ADAPT. CONTROL(0=NO)
compressor capacity is decreased until
the lower value MR15 (i.e. capacity will
be >= MR15)
(0= Adaptive Control disabled)
MR13. Differential used for Adaptive Control on DIFFERENTIAL FOR 0 255 30 PSI
DP. THE ADAPTIVE CONTROL
MR14. Minimum time used in adaptive control, MIN TIME FOR ADAPT-C 0 255 60 sec
low pressure limitation, motor current LP-LIM MC-LIM UV-LIM
limitation and unit voltage limitation
functions.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MR15. Min Cp power when the adaptive control MIN CP POWER WHEN 1 100 10 %
mode is active. ADAPTIVE CONTROL ON
Notes
Not set this parameter below the
minimum compressor capacity
(MC09/MC12*100%).
MR16. Power compressor correction when POWER CP CORRECTION 0 20 5 %
adaptive control is active. FOR ADAPT. CONTROL
MR17. Maximum time for Adaptive Control or MAX TIME ADAPT-C LP- 0 250 0 sec
Low Pressure Limitation without cp LIM WITHOUT PWR DEC
capity decreasing: after this time a cp in
the circuit is switched off
(0= function disabled)
Notes
This function is managed only when the
cp are in parallel on 1 or 2 circuits
(MC02>10).
MR18. Value of the Discharge Temperature for VALUE OF DT FOR 0 302 203 °F
Adaptive Control on DT. ADAPT. CTR ON DT
MR19. Differential of the Discharge DIFFERENTIAL OF DT 0 100 0 °F
Temperature for Adaptive Control on FOR ADAPT. CTR ON DT
DT.
(0= Adaptive Control on DT disabled)
MR20. Pump down pressure PUMP DOWN PRESSURE 0.0 145 25 PSI
(2)
MR21. Maximum pump down time MAXIMUM PUMP DOWN 0 240 0 Sec
(2) (0= pump down disabled) TIME(0=NO PUMP DOWN)
Notes
For Turbocor compressors it’s
recommended to disable pump down.
MR22. Number of multiple pump down allowed NR MULTI PUMP DOWN 0 12 0
(2) within 1 hour (0= no multiple pump down IN 1H(0=NO PD-MUL)
allowed).
Notes
recommended to disable multiple pump
down.
MR23. Fluid Solenoid control FLUID SOLENOID NO YES NO
CONTROL
MR24. Enable the subcooled liquid temperature SUBCOOLED LIQUID NO YES NO
monitoring. TEMP. MONITORING
DISCHARGE PRESS. CONTROL GROUP (MDxx)
MD01. Number of fan per circuit NUMBER OF FAN 1 4 1
PER CIRCUIT
MD02. Enable Proportional Fan Speed Control PROPORTIONAL FAN NO YES NO
SPEED CONTROL
MD03. Set point for Discharge Pressure SET POINT FOR 0 365 150 PSI
(2) control. DP CONTROL
Notes
Used when digital input SETP_DP_SEL
is ON.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MD04. Second Set point for Discharge SET POINT II FOR 0 365 150 PSI
(2) Pressure control. DP CONTROL
Notes
is OFF.
MD05. Prop. Band for Discharge Pressure PROP. BAND FOR -290 290 87 PSI
(2) Control. DP CONTROL(<0 LOG-)
Notes
If the value is <0 then the fans are
controlled with negative logic (i.e. fans
speed increase when DP decrease and
vice versa).
MD06. Integral Time for Discharge Pressure INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 Sec
(2) Control DP CONTROL
MD07. Enable Fan hours equalization ENABLE FAN HOURS NO YES NO
EQUALISATION
MD08. Max voltage for 100% fan speed MAX VOLTAGE % FOR 0 100 100 %
(i.e. if fan 100% output will be equal to 100% FAN SPEED
MD08).
Notes
Set this parameter always > MD65.
MD09. Forcing fans at max speed during FORCING FANS TO MAX NO YES NO
compressors CM-ON. SPEED IN CM-ON
MD10. Enable PI control on Discharge ENABLE PI-CONTROL NO YES NO
Pressure only when Evaporator Liquid ON DP WHEN ELL<SETP
Level (ELL) is below the setpoint (ME11
or MH19) used in flooded evaporator
control.
(used only when ME02=3).
MD11. Number of ventilating circuits in the unit. NUMBER OF 1 8 8
VENTILATING CIRCUITS
Notes
Ventilating circuit management is
disabled when MD11>=MC01.
MD12. Ventilating circuits associated to VENTILATING CIRCUITS 1 255 1
compressor#1. ASSOCIATED TO CP1
Notes
Binary format is used:
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
3 = Cp1 on Cv1 and Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8
129 = Cp1 on Cv1 and Cv8
Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8
Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8
Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8
Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8
WARNING: Not Used in this application.

Notes
1 = Cp1 on Cv1;
2 = Cp1 on Cv2;
4 = Cp1 on Cv3;
….
128 = Cp1 on Cv8

MD20. Fan Speed Optimization management: FAN SPEED OPTIMIZ: 0 2 0
0= disabled; 0=NO 1=YES-1 2=YES-2
MD21. Delay Time used for Fan Speed DELAY TIME FOR FAN 0 900 60 sec
Optimization. SPEED OPTIMIZ.
(used only when MD20>0)
MD22. Ambient Temp. value used for the Fan TAE FOR FAN 32.0 95.0 72.0 °F
Speed Optimization activation. SPEED OPTIMIZ. ACT.
MD23. Circuit demand capacity used for the CIRC DEMAND FOR FAN 0 95 60 %
Fan Speed Optimization activation. SPEED OPTIMIZ. ACT.
MD24. Circuit demand capacity used for the CIRC DEMAND FOR MAX 0 95 20 %
max Fan Speed Optimization. FAN SPEED OPTIMIZ.
Notes
Set always MD24<MD23!!
MD25. Max Fan Demand at Start Optimisation. MAX FAN DEMAND AT 1 100 80 %
(used only when MD20=1) START OPTIMISATION
MD26. Max Fan Demand at End Optimisation. MAX FAN DEMAND AT 1 100 40 %
(used only when MD20>0) END OPTIMISATION
Notes
Set always MD26<MD25!!
MD27. Number of fans installed in each circuit. NR OF FANS INSTALLED 1 50 1
IN EACH CIRCUIT
MD28. Fan nominal power, referred to each fan FAN NOMINAL POWER 0.0 30.0 1.0 kW
MD29. Fan type: FAN TYPE: 0 1 0

0= EC (i.e. Fan with Electronic Control); 0=EC 1=AC
1= AC (i.e. Fans with Triac Control).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MD30. Wait time for fan speed optimization WAIT FAN SPEED OPT. 0 60 5 min
(mode 2) activaction after that the last ACT. AFTER CP ON
cp in the circuit was exit from “CM-ON
state.
(used only when MD20=2)
MD31. Fan speed increse/decrease used in fan FAN SPEED INC/DEC 1 30 5 %
speed optimization (mode 2). FAN SPEED OPTIMIZ.
MD32. Fan speed optimization check time FAN SPEED OPTIMIZ. 1 240 60 sec
(used only when MD20=2) CHECK TIME
MD33. Fan speed optimization logic selection: FAN SPEED OPTIMIZ. 0 1 1
0= based on COP; LOGIC: 0=COP 1=CONS
1= based on Circuit Power Consumption
Warning
Fan speed optimization based on COP
(=0) can be used only when only 1
compressor is used or when the
compressors are in parallel in one
circuit.
MD34. Fan speed limitation: FAN SPEED LIMIT:0=NO 0 2 0
0= disabled; 1=TIME 2=TIME+NL
2= enabled by time period and noise
level sensor.
MD35. Number of time periods used for Fan NR TIME PERIODS FOR 1 4 2
speed limitation. FAN SPEED LIMIT.
MD36. Start hour of time period #1 for fan START HOUR PERIOD #1 0 23 0 hours
speed limitation FAN SPEED LIMIT.
MD37. Start minutes of time period #1 for fan START MIN. PERIOD #1 0 59 0 min
MD38. End hour of time period #1 for fan speed END HOUR PERIOD #1 0 23 3 hours
limitation. FAN SPEED LIMIT.
MD39. End minutes of time period #1 for fan END MIN. PERIOD #1 0 59 59 min
MD40. Maximum fan speed in time period #1. MAX FAN SPEED 20 100 100 %
(used only when MD34=1) TIME PERIOD #1
MD41. Maximum noise level in time period #1. MAX NOISE LEVEL 1 130 80 dB
Notes
Set this parameter always < MD60.
Notes
Set this parameter always < MD60

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
Notes
MD60. Maximum allowed noise level to limit the MAX ALLOWED NOISE 1 130 80 dB
fan speed in fan speed limitation by FAN SPEED LIM. BY NL
Noise Level sensor.
MD61. Noise level band for fan speed limitation NOISE LEVEL BAND 0 200 10 dB
by Noise Level sensor. FAN SPEED LIM. BY NL
MD62. Max speed increse/decrease used in fan MAX SPEED INC/DEC 1 50 5 %
speed limitation by Noise Level sensor. FAN SPEED LIM. BY NL
MD63. Check time for fan speed limitation by CHECK TIME FOR 1 240 60 sec
Noise Level sensor. FAN SPEED LIM. BY NL
MD64. Minimum value of max speed used in MIN VAL OF MAX SPEED 1 100 40 %
fan speed limitation by Noise Level FAN SPEED LIM. BY NL
sensor.
MD65. Min voltage for 0% fan speed MIN VOLTAGE % FOR 0 100 0 %
(i.e. if fan 0% output will be equal to 0% FAN SPEED
MD65).
Notes
Set this parameter always < MD08.
MD66. Second max voltage for 100% fan speed SECOND MAX VOLTAGE % 0 101 101 %
(i.e. if fan 100% then output will be equal FOR 100% FAN SPEED
to MD66 when digital input MAX2_FAN
is activated).
(101= second max voltage disabled)
Notes
Set this parameter always > MD65.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MD67. Fans speed in manual control mode. FANS SPEED IN 0 101 101 %
(101 = Fans manual control disabled) MANUAL CTR (101=NO)
EEV CONTROL GROUP (MExx)
ME01. Electronic Expansion Valve EEV CONTROL: 0 2 0
management: 0=NO 1=Eaou 2=Esr
0= no EEV;
1= EEV enabled through Anout;
2= EEV enabled through serial line.
WARNING
All EEV parameters are critical
ME02. EEV mode selection: EEV MODE:0=SH 12=SHN 0 6 3
0= control on superheat with old 3=EL 4=LN 5=DSH 6=CL
algorithm (SH);
1= control on superheat with new
algorithm (SHN);
algorithm without “EEV in oscillation”
warning (SHN);
3= control on evaporator liquid level with
new algorithm (i.e. flooded evaporator
selected) (EL);
4= control based on the linear relation
with compressor capacity (LN)
(WARNING: this control is available
only if parallel compressors are not
used (MC02=10)).
5= new algorithm on discharge
superheat without “EEV in oscillation”
warning;
6= control on condenser liquid level with
new algorithm (CL).
Notes
When evaporator liquid level control is
used (ME02=3) or condenser liquid level
control is used (ME02=6) then it’s
required to select NG5DIS/OB1 board
(ME03>0).
ME03. EEV board selection: EEV BOARD: 0=NG5 0 3 0
0 = NG5 (no battery); 1=NG5DIS 2-3=OB1
1 = NG5DIS (no battery);
2 = OB1 (no battery);
3 = OB1 (battery).
ME04. EEV Super Heat set point value EEV SUPER HEAT 0 40 10 °F
SET POINT VALUE
ME05. EEV Proportional Band EEV PROPORTIONAL 0 999 400 °F
BAND
ME06. EEV Integral Time EEV INTEGRAL TIME 0 999 30 Sec
(0= integral effect disabled)
ME07. EEV Derivative Time EEV DERIVATIVE TIME 0 999 0 Sec
(0= derivative effect disabled)
Notes
This parameter is used only when
ME02=0,1,2,5.
ME08. Max operative suction pressure MAX OPERATIVE 0 999 100 PSI
SUCTION PRESSURE
ME09. Max error for EEV enhanced control MAX ERROR FOR EEV 0 10 3 °F
ENHANCED CONTROL

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

ME10. Min error for EEV rough control MIN ERROR FOR EEV 0 100 8 °F
ROUGH CONTROL
ME11. EEV set point value for liquid level EEV SET POINT FOR 0 100 50 %
(2) control if flooded evaporator is selected LIQUID LEVEL CTR
(i.e. ME02=3).
ME12. EEV Proportional Band used for liquid EEV PROP. BAND FOR 0 999 400 °F
(2) level control if flooded evaporator is LIQUID LEVEL CTR
selected (i.e. ME02=3).
ME13. EEV Integral Time used for liquid level EEV INTEGRAL TIME 0 999 30 Sec
(2) control if flooded evaporator is selected FOR LIQUID LEVEL CTR
(i.e. ME02=3).
ME14. EEV preset value when compressor EEV PRESET VALUE 0 200 30 %
starts. WHEN CP STARTS
Notes
0100= dynamic update starting value,
101200= static EEV starting value.
ME15. EEV preset value when compressor is al EEV PRESET VALUE 0 100 20 %
max power. WHEN CP AT MAX PWR
Notes
Used only when EEV linear control is
selected (ME02=5).
ME16. EEV preset time after compressor EEV PRESET TIME 0 999 15 sec
(2) switch on. AFTER CP SWITCH ON
Notes
ME16 should be set always < MC05.
ME17. Turbocor minimum speed (rpm x 1000) TUR MIN SPEED(x1000) 0 50 15
required for EEV control activation. FOR EEV CTR ACTIV.
(0= EEV control activated without to wait
Turbocor minimum speed)
ME18. EEV minimum opening. EEV MINIMUM 0 100 0 %
OPENING
ME19. EEV maximum opening. EEV MAXIMUM 0 100 100 %
OPENING
ME20. EEV valve type on circuit 1 EEV1: 0-2=SP 3-5=AL 0 16 0
For details on the valve type selection, 6710-12=DA 891314=CA
see table at par.4.4.1.
Notes
This valve type selection is active if
ME01=2 and:
NG5 Dipswitch “SW1”= Off-On-Off-Off
or OB1 Dipswitch “SW1”= On-Off-On-
Off)
Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)
Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)
Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)
Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)
Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

ME27. EEV valve type on circuit 8: EEV8: 0-2=SP 3-5=AL 0 16 0
Notes
ME01=2 and:
Off)

ME28. EEV opening on the circuit 1 in manual EEV#1 OPENING IN 0 101 101 %
control mode. MANUAL CTR (101=NO)
(101= EEV manual control disabled)


ME36. Value of the Super Heat for High VALUE OF SUPHEAT FOR 0 90 36 °F
Superheat alarm. HIGH SUPHEAT ALARM
ME37. Value of the Super Heat for Low VALUE OF SUPHEAT FOR -36 9 0 °F
Superheat alarm. LOW SUPHEAT ALARM
ME38. Delay before the indication of High DELAY TIME FOR 0 90 0 min
Superheat alarm and Low Superheat HI-LOW SUPHEAT ALARM
alarm.
(0= High/Low Superheat alarms
disabled)
ME39. Percentage value used for EEV extra VALUE USED FOR EEV 0 100 0 %
opening EXTRA OPENING(0=NO)
(0= EEV extra opening disabled)
ME40. Setpoint percentage increase/decrease SETP PERC.FOR EEV 0 100 0 %
used for EEV extra closing EXTRA CLOSING(0=NO)
(0= EEV extra opening disabled)
ME41. Maxium setpoint percentage MAX SETP PERC.FOR 0 100 30 %
increase/decrease used for EEV extra EEV EXTRA CLOSING
closing.
ME42. Delay Time used for EEV extra closing DELAY TIME FOR EEV 1 240 20 sec
EXTRA CLOSING

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

ME43. SCR Temp. used for EEV extra closing SCR TEMP.FOR EEV 50 212 140 °F
activaction. EXTRA CLOSING ACTIV.
ME44. Cavity Temp. used for EEV extra CAVITY TEMP.FOR EEV 50 212 158 °F
closing activaction. EXTRA CLOSING ACTIV.
ME45. Inverter Temp. used for EEV extra INVERT.TEMP.FOR EEV 50 212 104 °F
closing activaction. EXTRA CLOSING ACTIV.
ME46. Differential Temp. used for EEV extra DIFF.TEMP.FOR EEV 0 50 18 °F
closing deactivaction. EXTRA CLOSING DEACT.
ME47. EEV minimum opening decrease when EEV MIN OPEN DECR. 0 50 0 %
“EEV extra closing” is activated IN EEV EXTRA CLOSING
(0= EEV min open decrease disabled)
Notes
When “EEV extra closing” is activated
then the effective EEV minimum
opening is computed as:
EEVmin= ME18 – (ME47 / N)
(N= nr. of Cp on in the circuit)
ME48. EEV maximum opening decrease when EEV MAX OPEN DECR. 0 50 0 %
“EEV extra closing” is activated IN EEV EXTRA CLOSING
(0= EEV max open decrease disabled)
Notes
When “EEV extra closing” is activated
then the effective EEV maximum
opening is computed as:
EEVmax= ME19 – (ME48 / N)
(N= nr. of Cp on in the circuit)
ME49. Second Evaporator/Condenser Liquid SECOND ELL PROBE NO YES NO
Level probe in the first circuit. IN CIRCUIT#1
ME50. Enable EEV extra opening when a new EEV EXTRA OPENING NO YES NO
compressor starts. WHEN A NEW CP STARTS
Notes
Used only when MC02=13,19.
FREE COOLING CONTROL GROUP (MFxx)
MF01. Free Cooling control: FREE COOL CTR: 0=NO 0 3 0
(2) 0= disabled; 1=F-ON 2=F-OFF 3=ON
1= forced ON;
2= forced OFF;
MF02. TFC–TAE required for Free Cooling TFC-TAE REQUIRED FOR -100 100 4 °F
(2) control. FREE COOLING CONTROL
MF03. Differential for Free Cooling control DIFFERENTIAL FOR -100 100 3 °F
(2) FREE COOLING CONTROL
MF04. Set point offset for Free Cooling valve. SETP OFFSET FOR -100 100 8 °F
(2) FREE COOLING VALVE
MF05. Differential for Free Cooling valve DIFFERENTIAL FOR -100 100 4 °F
(2) FREE COOLING VALVE
MF06. Set point offset for FAN control when SETP OFFSET FOR FAN -100 100 4 °F
(2) Free Cooling activated CRT IN FREE COOLING
MF07. Differential for FAN control when Free DIFFERENTIAL FOR FAN -100 100 0 °F
(2) Cooling activated CRT IN FREE COOLING
MF08. Fan speed control cause when Free FAN SPEED CRT CAUSE 0 1 0
(2) Cooling on and one or more IN FC: 0=CP 1=FC
compressors switched on:
0=Fan speed control on discharge
pressure of circuit (i.e. CP priority);
1=Fan speed control on regulation water
temperature (i.e. FC priority).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MF09. Temperature used for free cooling valve T CONTROL IN FREE 0 1 0
(2) control and fan control when free COOLING: 0=RWT 1=TC
cooling activated:
0 = RWT;
1 = temperature used for water
temperature control (Tc).
MF10. External Air Temperature value for TAE VALUE TO FORCE -60 90 32 °F
Forcing Cp OFF in Free Cooling. CP OFF IN FREE COOL.
MF11. Dry Cooler manager: DRY COOLER MANAGER: 0 2 0
0 = no dry cooler; 0=NO 1=ODT 2=DP
1 = dry cooler enabled with FAN control
on Outlet Dry Cooler temperature in
chiller mode;
2 = dry cooler enabled with FAN control
on Discharge Pressure in chiller mode.
(used only when MT07=0).

MF12. Set Dry Cooler temperature in chiller SET DRY COOLER -60 130 104 °F
(2) mode (i.e. digital input SETP_SEL is IN COOLING
OFF).
(used when MF11=1).
MF13. Differential Dry Cooler temperature in DIFF. DRY COOLER 0 60 3 °F
(2) chiller mode (i.e. digital input IN COOLING
SETP_SEL is OFF).
(used when MF11=1)
LPA CONTROL GROUP (MLxx)
ML01. Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps enable. FREE COOLING WITH NO YES NO
LIQUID PUMPS ENABLE
ML02. Ambient Temperature (TAE) for Free TAE VALUE FOR F.C. -60.0 90.0 32 °F
Cooling with Liquid Pumps activaction. LIQUID PUMP ACTIV.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML03. TAE differential for Free Cooling with TAE DIFF. FOR F.C. 0.0 54.0 10 °F
Liquid Pumps deactivaction. LIQUID PUMP DEACTIV.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML04. Cooling percentage for Free Cooling COOL % FOR F.C. 1 90 55 %
with Liquid Pumps activaction. LIQUID PUMP ACTIV.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML05. Cooling differential for Free Cooling with COOL DIFF. FOR F.C. 5 90 5 %
Liquid Pumps deactivaction. LIQUID PUMP DEACTIV.
(used if ML01=YES)
Notes
 This parameter must be set
respecting the condition:
ML04+ML05<=100.
 Set ML05=5 to work without LPA
hybrid control (i.e. LPA mode or
COOL mode only).
ML06. Delay time used for Free Cooling with DELAY TIME USED FOR 1 240 20 sec
Liquid Pumps control. F.C. LIQUID PUMP CTR
(used if ML01=YES)
ML07. Cooling percentage for Liquid Pumps COOLING % FOR 1 30 10 %
restart when Free Cooling with Liquid LIQUID PUMP RESTART
Pumps is activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML08. Compressor capacity for Liquid Pumps MIN CP CAPACITY FOR 1 100 20 %
restart when Free Cooling with Liquid LIQUID PUMP START
Pumps is deactivated (i.e. cooling
mode).
(used if ML01=YES)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

ML09. EEV opening when for Free Cooling EEV % WHEN F.C. 0 100 0 %
with Liquid Pumps activated. LIQUID PUMP ACTIVE
(used if ML01=YES)
ML10. Delay time after Bypass Solenoid (BPS) DELAY TIME AFTER 0 240 120 sec
activaction/deactivaction in Free Cooling BYPASS SOL ACT/DEACT
with Liquid Pumps.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML11. EEV increasing opening in LPU starting EEV INCREASE USED IN 0 60 10 %
procedure when Free Cooling with LPU STARTING PROCED.
Liquid Pumps activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML12. Wait time in LPU starting procedure WAIT TIME USED IN 0 240 20 sec
when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps LPU STARTING PROCED.
activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML13. Number of LPU on/off executed in the NR LPU ON/OFF IN 1 50 3
LPU starting cycle when Free Cooling LPU STARTING CICLE
with Liquid Pumps activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML14. LPU On time used in the LPU starting LPU ON TIME IN 1 250 1 sec
cycle when Free Cooling with Liquid LPU STARTING CICLE
Pumps activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML15. LPU Off time used in the LPU starting LPU OFF TIME IN 1 250 10 sec
cycle when Free Cooling with Liquid LPU STARTING CICLE
Pumps activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML16. Maximum number of LPU starting cycle MAX NUMBER OF 1 50 10
when Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps LPU STARTING CICLE
activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML17. Liquid Pump Differential Pressure (LPD) LPD VALUE TO ENTER 0 250 7 PSI
used to enter in LPU fixed ON state. IN LPU FIXED ON
(used if ML01=YES)
ML18. Liquid Pump Differential Pressure (LPD) LPD VALUE TO EXIT 0 250 3 PSI
used to exit from LPU fixed ON state. FROM LPU FIXED ON
(used if ML01=YES)
Notes
This value must be always < ML17.
ML19. EEV start increase opening when LPU EEV START INCREASE 0 60 5 %
is fixed on and Free Cooling with Liquid WHEN LPU FIXED ON
Pumps is activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
ML20. EEV maximum opening when LPU is EEV MAX OPENING 1 100 100 %
fixed on and Free Cooling with Liquid WHEN LPU FIXED ON
Pumps is activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
Notes
This value must be always <= ME19.
ML21. FAN speed when LPU is fixed on and FAN SPEED WHEN LPU 0 100 100 %
Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps is FIXED ON (0=LIN.CTR)
activated (0= FAN control with linear
interpolation).
(used if ML01=YES)
ML22. LPD band used for EEV control when LPD BAND FOR EEV CTR 1 250 29 PSI
LPU is fixed on and Free Cooling with WHEN LPU FIXED ON
Liquid Pumps is activated.
(used if ML01=YES)
EVAP SYSTEM CONTROL GROUP (MAxx)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MA01. Evap System management: EVAP SYSTEM: 0=NO 0 2 0
0= Evap System disabled; 1=PUMP 2=NO_PUMP
1= Evap System with pump;
2= Evap System without pump.
MA02. Ambient Temperature (TAE) value for TAE VALUE FOR -60.0 90.0 86.0 °F
Evap System activaction. EVAP SYSTEM ACTIV.
MA03. TAE differential for Evap System TAE DIFF. FOR 0.0 54.0 10.0 °F
deactivaction. EVAP SYSTEM DEACT.
MA04. Delay time for Evap System DELAY TIME FOR EVAP 1 250 10 sec
activaction/deactivaction SYSTEM ACT/DEACT.
MA05. Discharge Press (DP) value for Evap DP VALUE FOR 0.0 290.0 123.0 PSI
System Sprayer activaction. ES SPRAYER ACTIV.
MA06. DP differential for Evap System Sprayer DP DIFF. FOR 0.0 145.0 29.0 PSI
deactivaction. ES SPREAYER DEACT.
MA07. Evap System Sprayer ON time. EVAP SYSTEM SPRAYER 10 250 120 sec
ON TIME
Notes
The value of minimum is required for the
right management of alarm Evap
System Pump Fault.
MA08. Evap System Sprayer OFF time EVAP SYSTEM SPRAYER 0 250 30 sec
(0= Sprayer always ON). OFF TIME (0=ALW.ON)
MA09. Relative Humidity (RH) value for Evap RH VALUE FOR EVAP 0 99 70 %
System activaction. SYSTEM ACT.(0=NO RH)
(0= RH sensor disabled)
MA10. RH differential for Evap System RH DIFF. FOR EVAP 1 30 5 %
deactivaction. SYSTEM DEACT.
MH01. Heating mode management: HEATING:0=NO 1=HP-AW 0 4 0
0= no heating mode; 2=HP-WW 3=HR 4=HC
1= Heat Pump - Air/Water (AW);
2= Heat Pump - Water/Water (WW);
3= Heat Recovery-Water/Water (HR);
4= Heat Recovery-Cooling Priority(HC).
MH02. Delay time for cp restarting after Cooling DELAY FOR CP RESTART 0 250 30 sec
or Heating selection. AFTER COOL/HEAT SEL.
MH03. Set point for Temperature Control in SET POINT FOR TEMP 32 140 40 °F
(2) Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH04. Second set point for Temperature SET POINT II TEMP 32 140 40 °F
(2) Control in Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH05. Proportional Band for Temperature PROP. BAND FOR TEMP 0 36 7 °F
Control in Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH06. Integral Time for Temperature Control in INTEG. TIME FOR TEMP 0 999 0 sec
Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
(0=integral effect disabled)
MH07. Set point for FAN control in Heat mode. SET POINT FOR FAN 0 365 150 PSI
CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH08. Prop. Band for FAN control in Heat PROP. BAND FOR FAN 0 290 87 PSI
MH09. Integral Time for FAN control in Heat INTEG. TIME FOR FAN 0 999 0 sec
MH10. Suction Pressure value for to start SP VALUE FOR START 0 290 40 PSI
defrosting in Heat mode. DEFROST – HEAT MODE
Notes
Defrosting is managed only when
MH01=1.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MH11. Discharge Pressure value for to stop DP VALUE FOR STOP 0 435 200 PSI
defrosting in Heat mode. DEFROST – HEAT MODE
Notes
Defrosting is managed only when
MH01=1.
MH12. Delay time before start defrosting. DELAY TIME BEFORE 0 240 20 sec
START DEFROSTING
MH13. Timeout for stop defrosting. TIMEOUT FOR STOP 0 105 10 min
DEFROSTING
MH14. Minimum time between 2 defrosting. MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 0 105 30 min
2 DEFROSTING
MH15. Minimum capacity for compressor MIN CAPACITY FOR CP 1 100 20 %
switch off (i.e Minimum nominal power), SWITCH OFF-HEAT REC.
used in heat recovery mode.
Notes
Used only in heating recovery mode
(MH01=3,4).
MH16. Minimum capacity for compressor MIN CAPACITY FOR CP 1 100 40 %
switch on, used in heat recovery mode. SWITCH ON-HEAT REC.
Notes
(MH01=3,4).
MH17. Capacity for compressor startup, used CAPACITY FOR CP 1 100 50 %
in heat recovery mode. STARTUP - HEAT REC.
Notes
(MH01=3,4).
MH18. Maximum available capacity for each MAX AVAILAB.CAPACITY 1 100 100 %
compressor, used in heat recovery FOR EACH CP-HEAT REC.
mode.
Notes
(MH01=3,4).
MH19. EEV set point value for liquid level EEV SET POINT-LIQUID 0 100 50 %
(2) control if flooded evaporator is selected LEVEL CTR-HEAT REC.
(i.e. ME02=3) and heat recovery mode
is activated (MH01=3,4).
MH20. Enable an ST probe for each cp when ENABLE ST PROBE FOR NO YES NO
machine in heating mode and cp in EACH CP IN HEAT MODE
parallel on 1 or 2 circuits.
(used if MC02>10)
MH21. Second EEV valve in heat pump mode. SECOND EEV VALVE NO YES NO
IN HEAT PUMP MODE
Notes
This option is available only when heat
pump is enabled (MH01=1,2) and the cp
are in parallel on 1 circuit
(MC02=11,13,15)
MH22. Temperature used for “Low RWT TEMP. FOR LOW RWT 0 212 90 °F
Limitation” function in Heating mode. LIMIT – HEATING MODE
MH23. Differential temperature used for “Low DIFF. FOR LOW RWT 0 90 0 °F
RWT Limitation” function in Heating LIMIT-HEATING(0=NO)
mode.
(0=Low RWT Limitation in Heating mode
disabled).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MH24. EEV mode selection in heating mode: EEV MODE HEAT:-1=CO -1 6 -1
-1= same control used in cooling mode 0-2=SH 3=LL 4=LN..
(CO);
0= control on superheat with old
algorithm (SH);
algorithm (SHN);
algorithm without “EEV in oscillation”
warning (SHN);
3= control on evaporator liquid level with
new algorithm (i.e. flooded evaporator
selected) (LL);
4= control based on the linear relation
with compressor capacity (LN)
(WARNING: this control is available
only if parallel compressors are not
used (MC02=10)).
5= new algorithm on discharge
superheat without “EEV in oscillation”
warning.
6= control on condenser liquid level with
new algorithm (CL).
Notes
When evaporator liquid level control is
used (MH24=3) or condenser liquid level
control is used (MH24=6) then it’s
required to select NG5DIS/OB1 board
(ME03>0).
MH25. Nominal Flow Rate of Evaporators in NOMINAL FLOW RATE 1 600 100 mc/h
heating mode. OF EVAP.IN HEAT MODE
(in cubic meter for hours).
MH26. Nominal Flow Rate of Condenser in NOMINAL FLOW RATE 1 600 100 mc/h
heating mode. OF COND.IN HEAT MODE
(in cubic meter for hours).
PUMPS CONTROL GROUP (MPxx)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MP01. Pumps management: PUMPS: 0=NO 14=P1 0 8 0
0= no pump; 25=P12 36-78=ROT.
1= pump#1 only;
2= pump#1 + pump#2;
3= pump#1 + pump#2 with rotation;
4= pump#1 OFF if all Cp Off;
5= pump#1 + pump#2 OFF if all Cp Off;
6= pump#1 + pump#2 OFF with rotation
if all Cp Off;
7= pump#1 + pump#2 with rotation –
new logic (same logic used when
MP01=3 but with one try rotation
before The evaporator water
pressures are read by the
channels IWPn and OWPn
(x=1,2): if a probe go to alarm
condition then Evaporators Drop
alarm is automatically activated.
Low Evaporators Drop or Flow
Switch Alarm);
8= pump#1 + pump#2 OFF if all Cp Off
with rotation – new logic (same logic
used when MP01=6 but with one try
rotation before The evaporator water
pressures are read by the
channels IWPn and OWPn
(x=1,2): if a probe go to alarm
condition then Evaporators Drop
alarm is automatically activated.
Low Evaporators Drop or Flow
Switch Alarm).
MP02. Only Pumps mode activaction ONLY PUMPS MODE NO YES NO
(2) (i.e. pumps manual control mode ).
MP03. Rotation time of the pumps in hours ROTATION TIME OF THE 1 240 8 hour
(2) (used only when MP01=3,6,7,8). PUMPS
MP04. Switch off time of the pumps after the TIME FOR THE PUMPS 0 255 60 sec
machine is switched off and all the SWITCH OFF
compressors are switched off.
MP05. TAE value for Anti-freeze limitation TAE VALUE FOR -60 90 39 °F
activation. ANTIFREEZE LIMIT.
(used when MM10=6)
MP06. Differential temp. for Anti-freeze DIFF. VALUE FOR 0 36 2 °F
limitation deactivation. ANTIFREEZE LIMIT.
(used when MM10=6)

MP07. Internal Pump controlled with inverter: INT.PUMP WITH INV: 0 2 0
0= disabled; 0=NO 1=FLOW 2=RWT
1= enabled with control on Evap. Flow;
MP08. Internal Pump minimum voltage for INVERTER PUMP 0 100 0 %
(used if MP07>0)
MP09. Internal Pump maximum voltage for INVERTER PUMP 0 100 100 %
(used if MP07>0)
MP10. Setpoint used for Inverter Pump control SETPOINT FOR 1 600 100.0 mc/h
by Evap. Flow Rate. INV.PUMP CTR BY FLOW
(used if MP07=1)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MP11. Proportional Band used Inverter Pump PROP.BAND FOR 1 900 10.0 mc/h
control by Evap. Flow Rate. INV.PUMP CTR BY FLOW
(used if MP07=1)
MP12. Integral Time used for Inverter Pump INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
control by Evap. Flow Rate. INV.PUMP CTR BY FLOW
(used if MP07=1)
MP13. Setpoint used for Inverter Pump control SETPOINT FOR -60 90 40 °F
by RWT. INV.PUMP CTR BY RWT
(used if MP07=2)
MP14. Proportional Band used Inverter Pump PROP.BAND FOR 0.0 54.0 7.0 °F
control by RWT. INV.PUMP CTR BY RWT
(used if MP07=2)
MP15. Integral Time used for Inverter Pump INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
control by RWT. INV.PUMP CTR BY RWT
(used if MP07=2)
MX01. External Pump controlled with inverter: EXT.PUMP WITH INV: 0 2 0
(1,2) 0= disabled; 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT
MX02. External Pump minimum voltage for EXT.PUMP 0 100 0 %
(1,2) inverter demand = 0%. MINIMUM VOLTAGE
(used if MX01>0)
MX03. External Pump maximum voltage for EXT.PUMP 0 100 100 %
(1,2) inverter demand = 100%. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE
(used if MX01>0)
MX04. Setpoint used for External Pump SETPOINT FOR -60 90 40 °F
(1,2) controlled by inverter. EXT.PUMP CONTROL
(used if MX01=2)
MX05. Proportional Band used for External PROP.BAND FOR 0.0 54.0 7.0 °F
(1,2) Pump controlled by inverter. EXT.PUMP CONTROL
(used if MX01=2)
MX06. Integral Time used for External Pump INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(1,2) controlled by inverter. EXT.PUMP CONTROL
(used if MX01=2)
POWER CONTROL GROUP (MKxx)
MK01. Power Line Analyzer manager: POWER LINE ANALYZER 0 3 0
0= disabled; MANAGER(3=NO PHS AL)
1= enabled with phase missing/wrong
alarm;
2= enabled with phase missing alarm;
3= enabled without phase
missing/wrong alarm.
MK02. Compressor #1 nominal current. COMPRESSOR 1 1 250 100 A
NOMINAL CURRENT
NOMINAL CURRENT
NOMINAL CURRENT
NOMINAL CURRENT
NOMINAL CURRENT
NOMINAL CURRENT
NOMINAL CURRENT

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

NOMINAL CURRENT
MK10. Threshold for Motor current limitation THRESHOLD - MOTOR 101 200 101 %
CURRENT LIMIT.
MK11. Power compressor correction when POWER CP CORRECTION 0 20 0 %
motor current limitation is active FOR MC LIMIT. (0=NO)
(0= motor current limitation disabled).
MK12. Threshold current for High motor current THRESHOLD-HIGH MOTOR 0 200 105 %
alarm. CURRENT ALARM (0=NO)
(0= high motor current alarm disabled in
S10 board (i.e. only Turbocor alarm
condition is checked))
MK13. Delay time for High motor current alarm. DELAY TIME FOR HIGH 0 240 5 sec
MOTOR CURRENT ALARM
MK14. Threshold for Under voltage alarm THRESHOLD-UNDER 0 500 350 Volt
(0=under voltage alarm disabled) VOLTAGE ALARM (0=NO)
Notes
Under voltage alarm managed only if
MK01>0.
MK15. Threshold for Over voltage alarm THRESHOLD-OVER 0 500 410 Volt
(0=over voltage alarm disabled) VOLTAGE ALARM (0=NO)
Notes
Over voltage alarm managed only if
MK01>0.
MK16. Differential Voltage for Unit Voltage DIFF.VOLTAGE FOR 0 100 20 Volt
limitation function UNIT VOLT.LIM.(0=NO)
(0 = unit voltage limitation disabled)
Notes
Unit voltage limitation function is
managed only if MK01>0.
MK17. Power compressor correction when Unit POWER CP CORRECTION 0 20 5 %
Voltage limitation is active. FOR UNIT VOLT.LIM.
EVAPORATOR CONTROL GROUP (MVxx)
MV01. Barrel type: BARRELS:0=1 1=2-PAR 0 6 0
0= one barrel; 2=2-SER 3-6=SPLIT
2= two barrels in series;
3= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cp control
by Analog Input;
4= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cp control
by Suction Pressure (SP);
5= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cooling
demand by Analog Input;
6= no barrel (SLIT UNIT) – Cooling
demand by Split Controlled
Temperature (SCT).
MV02. Delay time before indication of Flow DELAY TIME ALARMS: 0 9099 10 Sec
Switch alarm or Hi/Lo Evaporator Water FLOW SWT/PRESS.DROP
drop or Hi/Lo Condenser Water drop.
Notes
If > 99 then °3 and 4° decimal digits are
the bypass time of alarm after machine
switch on. (i.e. MV02=YYXX with XX:
delay time before indication, YY=bypass
time)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MV03. Evaporator Water Pressure option EVAPORATOR WATER NO YES NO
enabled. PRESSURE ENABLE
MV04. Lower differential pressure for LOW DIFF.PRESSURE 0 250 30 KPa
Evaporators Drop alarm. FOR EVAP.DROP (0=NO)
(0= lower condition disabled)
MV05. Higher differential pressure for HIGH DIFF.PRESSURE 0 250 50 KPa
Evaporators Drop alarm. FOR EVAP.DROP (0=NO)
(0= higher condition disabled)
MV06. Nominal Pressure Drop of Evaporators. NOMINAL PRESS.DROP 1 250 60 KPA
OF EVAPORATORS
MV07. Nominal Flow Rate of Evaporators NOMINAL FLOW RATE 1 600 100 mc/h
(in cubic meter for hours). OF EVAPORATORS
CONDENSER CONTROL GROUP (MNxx)
MN01. Evaporative Condenser control: EVAP.CONDENSER: 0 1 0
0=disabled; 0=NO 1=YES
1=enabled.
MN02. Offset pressure for Adiabatic Pump OFFSET FOR ADIABATIC 0 145 15 PSI
activaction. PUMP ACTIV.
Notes
This value is relative to Discharge
Pressure setpoint (MD03 or MD04).
MN03. Differential pressure for Adiabatic Pump DIFF. FOR ADIABATIC 0 145 29 PSI
deactivaction. PUMP DEACTIV.
Notes
This value is relative to Discharge
Pressure setpoint (MD03 or MD04).
MN04. Setpoint for Evap.Condenser Heaters SETP FOR EVAP.COND. -60.0 90.0 32.0 °F
activaction. HEATERS ACTIV.
MN05. Differential for Evap.Condenser Heaters DIFF. FOR EVAP.COND. 0.0 36.0 7.0 °F
deactivaction. HEATERS DEACTIV.
MN06. Condenser Water Pressure option CONDENSER WATER NO YES NO
enabled. PRESSURE ENABLE
MN07. Lower differential pressure for LOW DIFF.PRESSURE 0 250 30 KPa
Condenser Drop alarm. FOR COND.DROP (0=NO)
(0= lower condition disabled)
MN08. Higher differential pressure for HIGH DIFF.PRESSURE 0 250 50 KPa
Condenser Drop alarm. FOR COND.DROP (0=NO)
(0= higher condition disabled)
MN09. Nominal Pressure Drop of Condenser. NOMINAL PRESS.DROP 1 250 60 KPA
OF CONDENSER
MN10. Nominal Flow Rate of Condenser NOMINAL FLOW RATE 1 600 100 mc/h
(in cubic meter for hours). OF CONDENSER
REMOTE MONITORING GROUP (MSxx)
MS01. Remote assistance address REMOTE ASSISTANCE 1 240 1
(2) ADDRESS
MS02. Host protocol selection: HOST PROTOCOL: 0 2 0
0 = PEMS protocol; 0=PE 1=SMS 2=PE-SMS
1 = SMS protocol (S10 -> Modem);
2 = PEMS with SMS protocol
(S10 –> Gateway –> Modem).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MS03. Number of the SMS notifications when NR SMS NOTIFICATIONS 0 6 0
(3) alarm/event happen and number of -NR AUTHORIZED(0=NO)
authorized telephone numbers in SMS
protocol:
0 = notification disabled, all authorized;
1 = notification to call number #1 and
sender number #1 authorized in
SMS protocol;
2 = notification to call numbers #1,#2
and sender numbers #1,#2
authorized in SMS protocol;
3 = notification to call numbers #1,#2,#3
and sender numbers #1,#2,#3
4 = notification to call number #1 and
sender numbers #1,#2 authorized in
SMS protocol;
5 = notification to call numbers #1 and
sender numbers #1,#2,#3
6 = notification to call numbers #1,#2
and sender numbers #1,#2,#3
authorized in SMS protocol.
MS04. Call number #1 for alarm/event CALL NUMBER 1 FOR String
(3) notification by SMS and sender number ALARM NOTIFICATION 20
#1 authorized in SMS protocol.
(Call number formats:
“003934022334455” or
“+3934022334455”)
“003934022334455” or
“+3934022334455”)
“003934022334455” or
“+3934022334455”)
MS07. Plant code string used in alarm/event PLANT CODE String
notification by SMS. STRING 20
MS08. SIM serial number used for “SIM NOT SIM SERIAL NUMBER String
(3) READY” alarm (used when MS02=1). FOR SIM NOT READY AL 20
Notes
To extract the serial number of inserted
SIM and store it, press <SET> key and
then <MENU> key.
MS09. GSM signal level for low signal alarm. GSM SIGNAL LEVEL FOR 0 31 10
LOW SIGNAL ALARM
MS10. Manufacturer password to disable SIM MANUFACTURER PASSW. 0 999 56
(3,4) NOT READY alarm. SIM NOT READY ALARM
MS11. Service password to disable SIM NOT SERVICE PASSWORD 0 999 56
(2,4) READY alarm. SIM NOT READY ALARM
(if =MS10 then SIM NOT READY alarm
is bypassed)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MS12. Access identifier for PEMS connection BOARD NN999
over Ethernet connection. . It must have ACCESS ID 9
2 letters indicating the customer and 4
numbers
PASSWORDS GROUP (MWxx)
MW01. User password USER PASSWORD 0 999 123
(2,4)
MW02. Service password. SERVICE PASSWORD 0 999 27
(2,4)
MW03. Manufacturer password. MANUFACTURER 0 999 0
(3,4) (if =0 then standard manufacturer PASSWORD
password should be used to get
access).
MW04. Manufacturer password to hide the MANUFACTURER PASSW. 0 999 0
(4) visualization of MANUFACTURER TO HIDE MANUF. MENU
SETUP and I/O SETUP.
(0= all the menu are showed;
if =MW05 then all the menu are
showed)
MW05. Service password for maintenance. SERVICE PASSWORD FOR 0 999 56
(2,4) MAINTANANCE
Notes
1) Parameter showed also in USER SETUP
2) Parameter showed also in SERVICE SETUP
3) If the notification of setup parameters changes is enabled (MM08=YES) then the parameter change is not
notified on ALARM HISTORY and no notification SMS send by SMS protocol.
4) If the notification of setup parameters changes is enabled (MM08=YES) then the new value is not showed on
ALARM HISTORY and on the notification SMS send by SMS protocol.
5) Parameter not saved in EEPROM and not notified on Alarm History (if MM08=YES) when changed.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.4 Service Setup

As the SERVICE SETUP is selected, the service password is requested to get access to this
parameters list.
SERVICE SETUP Mxyy

XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The second and the third line of the display are on the “LCD Display Description” column of the list
of parameters.
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “SERVICE SETUP” in this case, on the
- x = subgroup code
Use the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to scroll all the parameters. To go back the previous menu you
have to press the ESC key.
List parameters in MANUFACTURER SETUP (NOTE: °F = °C x 1.8 + 32; PSI = Bar x 14.5):

MM01 Language: LANGUAGE: 0=EN 1=DE 0 4 0
0=English, 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU
1=Deutsch,
2=Italian,
3=French,
4=Russian.
Notes
Russian language is available only
using user graphic UG2.
MM03 Temperature Measuring Unit for TEMPERATURE MU SHOW: 0 1 0
visualization: 0=°F 1=°C
0= °F,
1= °C.
MM04 Pressure Measuring Unit for PRESS. MU SHOW: 0=P 0 4 0
visualization: 1=B 2=TEMP 3=PT 4=BT
0=PSI (P),
1=Bar (B);
2=TEMPERATURE (T),
3=PSI/TEMP. (PT),
4=Bar/TEMP. (BT) )
Notes
Pressure/Temperature alternation
(MM04=3,4) is showed in compressors
screen only.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MM14 Rotation time for the Units Lead Lag: ROTATION TIME - UNIT 0 240 hour
=0 then Slave Unit; LEAD LAG(0=SLAVE)
Notes
Units Lead Lag function is enabled if
MH01=0 and MM11=3.
MM16 Number of time blocks scheduling NUMBER OF TIME BLOCK 0 3 0
(0=time block scheduling disabled) SCHEDULING(0=NO)
(ex. 80=8h and 0m=0x6m)
(used if MM16>=1).
MM18 Time in hours/10 for stopping machine TIME FOR STOPPING 0 239 1 Hours
in time block#1 MACHINE IN BLOCK#1 /10
(ex. 117=11h and 42m=7x6m)
(used if MM16>=1).
(ex. 145=14h and 30m=5x6m)
(used if MM16>=2).
(ex. 186=18h and 36m=6x6m)
(used if MM16>=2).
(ex. 204=20h and 24m=4x6m)
(used if MM16>=3).
(ex. 238=23h and 48m=8x6m)
(used if MM16>=3).
MT01 Remote Control: REMOTE CONTROL: 0=NO 0 2 0
0=NO; 1=YES 2=YES+LOCAL
1=YES;
2=YES with local control when
communication error with Remote
Controller.
MT02 Cooling value when Remote Control COOLING VALUE REMOTE -1.0 100.0 0.0 %
(5) enabled (-1=chiller locked). CONTROL(-1=LOCKED)
MT03 Demand percentage in Open Loop OPEN LOOP START 0 100 0 %
Control at startup DEMAND (0=DISABLED)
(0= open loop control disabled).
MT04 Upper demand limit value of unit power UPPER DEMAND LIMIT 0 100 100 %
(100= no upper demand limit) VALUE (100=NO)
Notes
MT05 Maximum demand in emergency mode MAX DEMAND EMERGENCY 0 33 101 %
(101= Emergency mode disabled). MODE (101=DISABLED)
MT06 Temperature controlled: TEMP. CONTROLLED: 0 1 0
0= LWT; 0=LWT 1=RWT
1= RWT.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MT07 Set point manager for Temperature SP SEL: 0=S1 1=S1/S2 0 5 0
Control: 2=S2/S1 3=RM 45=S/RM
SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is ON;
SETP_SEL is OFF;
2= set point selected in base to the
status of digital input SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL is ON;
SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is ON;
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL:
SETP_SEL is OFF;
SETP_SEL is ON.
MT08 Minimum set point for the user changes MIN SETPOINT FOR -60.0 90.0 39.0 °F
of Temperature Control set point TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT09 Maximum set point for Temperature MAX SETPOINT FOR -60.0 90.0 43.0 °F
Control TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT10 Set point for Temperature Control SET POINT FOR -60 90 40 °F
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT11 Second set point for Temperature SET POINT II FOR -60 90 42 °F
MT12 Proportional Band for Temperature PROPORTIONAL BAND 0 36 7 °F
MT13 Integral Time for Temperature Control INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(0= integral effect disabled) TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MT14 Derivative Time for Temperature Control DERIVATIVE TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(0= derivative effect disabled) TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Notes
This parameter is used in Cooling mode
only (i.e. disabled in heating mode).
MT20 Differential for High Temperature Alarm DIFFERENT. FOR HIGH 1 60 20 °F
TEMPERATURE ALARM
MT21 Delay before temperature alarm DELAY BEFORE 0 109 5 min
(0= High Temperature Alarm bypassed) TEMPERATURE ALARM
COMPRESSORS CONTROL GROUP (MCxx)
MC23 Maximum capacity for compressor 1 MAX CAPACITY CP1 0 101 100 %
(0= cp1 locked by setup parameter, only (0=LOCKED
if MC22<>0; 101=RESTART)
60 seconds) ).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

60 seconds)).
60 seconds)).
60 seconds)).
60 seconds)).
60 seconds)).
60 seconds)).
60 seconds)).
REFRIGERATING CIRCUITS CONTROL GROUP (MRxx)
MR02 Number of automatic reset alarms MAX NUMBER OF 0 20 0
allowed in 90 minutes (0=disabled). AUTORESET ALARMS
Note
The list of automatic reset alarm is
reported at par.5.5.4.
MR03 Delay time before automatic reset of an DELAY TIME BEFORE 0 255 90 sec
alarm allowed in 90 minutes. AUTORESET ALARM
MR04 Value of suction pressure for low SP VALUE OF SP FOR 0.0 290 55 PSI
alarm managed in S10. LOW SP ALARM
MR05 Delay time for suction pressure alarm DELAY TIME FOR 0 240 0 sec
managed in S10. SP ALARM (0=NO)
(0= SP alarm disabled).
MR06 Value of discharge pressure for high DP VALUE OF DP FOR 0 435 377 PSI
alarm managed in S10. HIGH DP ALARM (0=NO)
(0= High DP alarm disabled).
MR12 Value of DP used for Adaptive Control: if VALUE OF DP FOR 0 580 0 PSI
DP > this parameter then the ADAPT. CONTROL(0=NO)
compressor capacity is decreased until
the lower value MR15 (i.e. capacity will
be >= MR15)
(0= Adaptive Control disabled)
MR20 Pump down pressure PUMP DOWN PRESSURE 0.0 145 25 PSI

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MR21 Maximum pump down time MAXIMUM PUMP DOWN 0 240 0 Sec
(0= pump down disabled) TIME(0=NO PUMP DOWN)
Notes
recommended to disable pump down.
MR22 Number of multiple pump down allowed NR MULTI PUMP DOWN 0 12 0
within 1 hour (0= no multiple pump down IN 1H(0=NO PD-MUL)
allowed).
Notes
recommended to disable multiple pump
down.
DISCHARGE PRESS. CONTROL GROUP (MDxx)
MD03 Set point for Discharge Pressure SET POINT FOR 0 365 150 PSI
control. DP CONTROL
Notes
is ON.
MD04 Second Set point for Discharge SET POINT II FOR 0 365 150 PSI
Pressure control. DP CONTROL
Notes
is OFF.
MD05 Prop. Band for Discharge Pressure PROP. BAND FOR -290 290 87 PSI
Control. DP CONTROL(<0 LOG-)
Notes
If the value is <0 then the fans are
controlled with negative logic (i.e. fans
speed increase when DP decrease and
vice versa).
MD06 Integral Time for Discharge Pressure INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 Sec
Control DP CONTROL
EEV CONTROL GROUP (MExx)
ME11 EEV set point value for liquid level EEV SET POINT FOR 0 100 50 %
control if flooded evaporator is selected LIQUID LEVEL CTR
(i.e. ME02=3).
ME12 EEV Proportional Band used for liquid EEV PROP. BAND FOR 0 999 400 °F
level control if flooded evaporator is LIQUID LEVEL CTR
selected (i.e. ME02=3).
ME13 EEV Integral Time used for liquid level EEV INTEGRAL TIME 0 999 30 Sec
control if flooded evaporator is selected FOR LIQUID LEVEL CTR
(i.e. ME02=3).
ME16 EEV preset time after compressor EEV PRESET TIME 0 999 15 sec
switch on. AFTER CP SWITCH ON
Notes
ME16 should be set always < MC05.
FREE COOLING CONTROL GROUP (MFxx)
MF01 Free Cooling control: FREE COOL CTR: 0=NO 0 3 0
0= disabled; 1=F-ON 2=F-OFF 3=ON
1= forced ON;
2= forced OFF;
MF02 TFC–TAE required for Free Cooling TFC-TAE REQUIRED FOR -100 100 4 °F
control. FREE COOLING CONTROL

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MF03 Differential for Free Cooling control DIFFERENTIAL FOR -100 100 3 °F
FREE COOLING CONTROL
MF04 Set point offset for Free Cooling valve. SETP OFFSET FOR -100 100 8 °F
FREE COOLING VALVE
MF05 Differential for Free Cooling valve DIFFERENTIAL FOR -100 100 4 °F
FREE COOLING VALVE
MF06 Set point offset for FAN control when SETP OFFSET FOR FAN -100 100 4 °F
Free Cooling activated CRT IN FREE COOLING
MF07 Differential for FAN control when Free DIFFERENTIAL FOR FAN -100 100 0 °F
Cooling activated CRT IN FREE COOLING
MF08 Fan speed control cause when Free FAN SPEED CRT CAUSE 0 1 0
Cooling on and one or more IN FC: 0=CP 1=FC
compressors switched on:
0=Fan speed control on discharge
pressure of circuit (i.e. CP priority);
1=Fan speed control on regulation water
temperature (i.e. FC priority).
MF09 Temperature used for free cooling valve T CONTROL IN FREE 0 1 0
control and fan control when free COOLING: 0=RWT 1=TC
cooling activated:
0 = RWT;
1 = temperature used for water
temperature control (Tc).
MF12 Set Dry Cooler temperature in chiller SET DRY COOLER -60 130 104 °F
mode (i.e. digital input SETP_SEL is IN COOLING
OFF).
(used when MF11=1).
MF13 Differential Dry Cooler temperature in DIFF. DRY COOLER 0 60 3 °F
chiller mode (i.e. digital input IN COOLING
SETP_SEL is OFF).
(used when MF11=1)
MH03 Set point for Temperature Control in SET POINT FOR TEMP 32 140 40 °F
Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH04 Second set point for Temperature SET POINT II TEMP 32 140 40 °F
Control in Heat mode. CONTROL – HEAT MODE
MH19 EEV set point value for liquid level EEV SET POINT-LIQUID 0 100 50 %
control if flooded evaporator is selected LEVEL CTR-HEAT REC.
(i.e. ME02=3) and heat recovery mode
is activated (MH01=3,4).
PUMPS CONTROL GROUP (MPxx)
MP02 Only Pumps mode activaction ONLY PUMPS MODE NO YES NO
(i.e. pumps manual control mode).
MP03 Rotation time of the pumps in hours ROTATION TIME OF THE 1 240 8 hour
(used only when MP01=3,6,7,8). PUMPS
MX01 External Pump controlled with inverter: EXT.PUMP WITH INV: 0 2 0
0= disabled; 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT
MX02 External Pump minimum voltage for EXT.PUMP 0 100 0 %
(used if MX01>0)
MX03 External Pump maximum voltage for EXT.PUMP 0 100 100 %
(used if MX01>0)
MX04 Setpoint used for External Pump SETPOINT FOR -60 90 40 °F
(used if MX01=2)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

MX05 Proportional Band used for External PROP.BAND FOR 0.0 54.0 7.0 °F
Pump controlled by inverter. EXT.PUMP CONTROL
(used if MX01=2)
MX06 Integral Time used for External Pump INTEGRAL TIME FOR 0 999 0 sec
(used if MX01=2)
REMOTE MONITORING GROUP (MSxx)
MS01 Remote assistance address REMOTE ASSISTANCE 1 48 1
ADDRESS
MS11 Service password to disable SIM NOT SERVICE PASSWORD 0 999 56
(4) READY alarm. SIM NOT READY ALARM
(if =MS10 then SIM NOT READY alarm
is bypassed)
PASSWORDS GROUP (MWxx)
MW01 User password USER PASSWORD 0 999 123
(4)
MW02 Service password. SERVICE PASSWORD 0 999 37
(4)
MW05 Service password for maintenance. SERVICE PASSWORD FOR 0 999 56
(4) MAINTANANCE
Notes
1) If the notification of setup parameters changes is enabled (MM08=YES) then the new value is not showed on
ALARM HISTORY and on the notification SMS send by SMS protocol.
2) Parameter not saved in EEPROM and not notified on Alarm History (if MM08=YES) when changed.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.5 I/O Setup

As the I/O SETUP is selected, the manufacturer password is requested to get access to this
parameter list.
If the setup parameter MW03=0 then the standard manufacturer password is required to get
access and the value of inserted password is not hide.
If the setup parameter MW03<>0 then the password MW03 is required to get access and the value
of the inserted password is hidden with the string “****”; following steps are needed to enter into
menu:
- setting manufacturer password with UP/DOWN keys;
- press MENU key;
- press SET key;
The I/O SETUP is not showed on the menu list when MW04<>MW05 with MW04<>0.
After typing the correct password, the display will show the following mask
I/O SETUP Ixyy

XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “I/O SETUP” in this case, on the corner
there is the IdCode of the parameter.
Use the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to scroll all the parameters.
Following table resume all the defined subgroups:
Subgruop Description
Code
IMxx I/O Parameters – Machine Group
I1xx I/O Parameters – Cp/Circuit#1 Group
B1xx I/O Parameters – S10 Board#1 Group (Master Board)
B2xx I/O Parameters – S10 Board#2 Group (Slave#1 Board)
B3xx I/O Parameters – S10 Board#3 Group (Slave#2 Board)
List of parameters in I/O SETUP:
Cod. Description LCD Display Description min MAX Default m.u.
I/O PARAMETERS – MACHINE GROUP (IMxx)

IM01. Leaving Water Temp. (LWT) channel, LWT CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
compensation offset. COMPENSATION OFFSET
IM02. Returning Water Temp. (RWT) channel, RWT CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

IM03. External Air Temp. (TAE) channel, TAE CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM04. Free Cooling Temp. (TFC) channel, TFC CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM05. Inlet Dry Cooler Temp. (IDT) channel, IDT CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM06. Outlet Dry Cooler Temp. (ODT) channel, ODT CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM07. Inlet Condenser Temp. (ICT) channel, ICT CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM08. Outlet Condenser Temp. (OCT) channel, OCT CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM09. Outlet Evaporator Temp. (OET) channel, OET CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM10. Ambient Temp. (TA) channel, TA CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM11. Ambient Temp. for Set Point Correction TA_COR CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
(TA_COR) channel, compensation offset. COMPENSATION OFFSET
IM12. Analog Input for Set Point Correction AI_COR CHANNEL -100 100 0 %
(AI_COR) channel, compensation offset. COMPENSATION OFFSET
IM13. Analog Input for Set Point Correction AI_COR CHANNEL 0 100 0 %
(AI_COR) channel, min. value. MIN VALUE
IM14. Analog Input for Set Point Correction AI_COR CHANNEL 0 100 100 %
(AI_COR) channel, max. value. MAX VALUE
IM15. Remote Set Point (REM_SP) channel, REM_SP CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM16. Remote Set Point (REM_SP) channel, REM_SP CHANNEL -50 250 -22 °F
min. value. MIN VALUE
IM17. Remote Set Point (REM_SP) channel, REM_SP CHANNEL -50 250 194 °F
max. value. MAX VALUE
IM18. Upper Demad Limit (ULIM) channel, ULIM CHANNEL -100 100 0 %
IM19. Upper Demad Limit (ULIM) channel, min. ULIM CHANNEL 0 100 0 %
value. MIN VALUE
IM20. Upper Demad Limit (ULIM) channel, max. ULIM CHANNEL 0 100 100 %
value. MAX VALUE
IM21. Inlet Water Press. Evap#1 (IWP1) IWP1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
channel, compensation offset. COMPENSATION OFFSET
IM22. Inlet Water Press. Evap#1 (IWP1) IWP1 CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
channel, min. value. MIN VALUE
channel, max. value. MAX VALUE
IM24. Outlet Water Press. Evap#1 (OWP1) OWP1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
IM25. Outlet Water Press. Evap#1 (OWP1) OWP1 CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
IM27. Evap#1 Outlet Temp. (EV1T) channel, EV1T CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
(used only when two barrels system enabled
(MV01=1,2) and two compressors (MC01=2))
IM28. Evap#1 Outlet Temp. (EV1T) channel, EV1T CHANNEL -50 250 -22 °F
NOT USED (now the channel is always

dimensional (i.e. PTC/PT100..)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13


IM31. Inlet Water Press. Evap#2 (IWP2) IWP2 CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
IM34. Outlet Water Press. Evap#2 (OWP2) OWP2 CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
IM37. Evap#2 Outlet Temp. (EV2T) channel, EV2T CHANNEL -50 250 -22 °F
(used only when two barrels system enabled
(MV01=1,2) and two compressors (MC01=2))

IM39. Relative Humidity (RH) channel, RH CHANNEL -100 100 0 %
(used when EvapSystem control is enabled
[MA01>0] and RH probe is enabled [MA09>0])
IM40. Relative Humidity (RH) channel, RH CHANNEL 0 100 0 %
IM41. Relative Humidity (RH) channel, RH CHANNEL 0 100 100 %
IM42. Leaving Water Temp. 2 (LWT2) channel, LWT2 CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM43. Returning Water Temp. 2 (RWT2) RWT2 CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
IM44. Inlet Condenser Press. (ICP) channel, ICP CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
IM45. Inlet Condenser Press. (ICP) channel, ICP CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
IM46. Inlet Condenser Press. (ICP) channel, ICP CHANNEL -20 1305 145 PSI
IM47. Outlet Condenser Press. (OCP) channel, OCP CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
IM48. Outlet Condenser Press. (OCP) channel, OCP CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
IM49. Outlet Condenser Press. (OCP) channel, OCP CHANNEL -20 1305 145 PSI
IM50. Noise Level (NL) channel, compensation NL CHANNEL -100 100 0 dB
offset. COMPENSATION OFFSET
(used when Fans speed is limited by Time
Periods ans Noise Level sensor [MD34=2])

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

IM51. Noise Level (NL) channel, RH CHANNEL 0 200 0 dB
IM52. Noise Level (NL) channel, RH CHANNEL 0 200 130 dB
IM53. Liquid Level Transducer (LLT) channel, LLT CHANNEL -100 100 0 %
(used when Liquid Level Transducer is
enabled [MM27=YES])
IM54. Liquid Level Transducer (LLT) channel, LLT CHANNEL 0 100 0 %
enabled [MM27=YES])
IM55. Liquid Level Transducer (LLT) channel, LLT CHANNEL 0 100 100 %
enabled [MM27=YES])
IM56. Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (APT) APT CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
IM57. Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (APT) APT CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
IM58. Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (APT) APT CHANNEL -20 1305 145 PSI
I/O PARAMETERS – CP/CIRCUIT#1 GROUP (I1xx)
I101. Suction Temp. #1 (ST1) ST1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
I102. Evaporator Liquid Level #1 (ELL1) ELL1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 %
I103. Liquid Pump Outlet Press. #1 (LPO1) LPO1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
I104. Liquid Pump Outlet Press. #1 (LPO1) LPO1 CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
I106. Liquid Pump Inlet Press. #1 (LPI1) LPI1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 PSI
I107. Liquid Pump Inlet Press. #1 (LPI1) LPI1 CHANNEL -20 750 -7 PSI
I109. Subcooled Liquid Temp. #1 (SLT1) SLT1 CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

I501. Suction Temp.#5 (ST5) ST5 CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

I601. Suction Temp.#6 (ST6) ST6 CHANNEL -100 100 0 °F
I/O PARAMETERS – S10 BOARD#1 GROUP (MASTER BOARD) (B1xx)
B101. Board 1, configuration for probe S1 BOARD 1 - PROBE S1 0 1 0
(0=4÷20mA, 1=Free Contact) CONF: 0=4÷20mA 1=FC
B102. Board 1, configuration for probe D1 BOARD 1 - PROBE D1 0 1 0
B103. Board 1, configuration for probe O1 BOARD 1 - PROBE O1 0 1 0
B104. Board 1, configuration for probe ST1 BOARD 1 - PROBE ST1 0 1 0
(0=PTC, 1=0÷24VDC) CONF: 0=PTC 1=0÷24V
(0=PTC, 1=0÷24VDC) CONF: 0=PTC 1=0÷24V
B109. Board 1, configuration for probe RH BOARD 1 - PROBE RH 0 1 0
(0=PTC, 1=4÷20mA) CONF: 0=PTC 1=4÷20mA
I/O PARAMETERS – S10 BOARD#2 GROUP (SLAVE#1 BOARD) (B2xx)
(0=PTC, 1=0÷24VDC) CONF: 0=PTC 1=0÷24V
(0=PTC, 1=0÷24VDC) CONF: 0=PTC 1=0÷24V
(0=PTC, 1=4÷20mA) CONF: 0=PTC 1=4÷20mA
I/O PARAMETERS – S10 BOARD#3 GROUP (SLAVE#2 BOARD) (B3xx)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(0=PTC, 1=0÷24VDC) CONF: 0=PTC 1=0÷24V
(0=PTC, 1=0÷24VDC) CONF: 0=PTC 1=0÷24V
(0=PTC, 1=4÷20mA) CONF: 0=PTC 1=4÷20mA

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.6 Alarm History

By pressing the SET key from “ALARM HISTORY” you can enter the “ALARM HISTORY” menu:
there are all the information about the last 80 alarms occurred.
The last 80 alarms are stored and displayed in this menu accessible by the user.
In the following figure there is the screen of the menu in the case of ALARM presence:
ALARM HISTORY Axx

dd/mm/yy hh:mm
DESCRIPTION OF ALARM
LWT XXX RWT YYY °U
Alternated with
BEA:x0000 MOT:x0000
In the screen the following information is indicated:

 Axx: IdCode in chronologic order where “xx” is a number in progress
 dd/mm/yy: date when the alarm occurred
 hh:mm: time when the alarm occurred
 DESCRIPTION OF ALARM: type of alarm or event as described in the Alarm List chapter 5.6.
 XXX: value of LWT registered when alarm or event is happen.
 YYY: value of RWT registered when alarm or event is happen.
 U: measuring unit used for temperature visualization (“F” if Farenait, “C” if Celsius).
 BEA: fault code related to Bearing alarm in hexnumber format (see table below). For the
General alarms (i.e. not compressor/circuit alarms) the showed value is always x0000.
 MOT: fault code related to Motor alarm in hexnumber format (see table below). For the General
alarms (i.e. not compressor/circuit alarms) the showed value is always x0000.
Code Bearing Fault description (BEA) Motor Fault description (MOT)

x0001 - Motor Single Phase over current detect
x0002 - DC bus high voltage detect
x0004 - Motor high current warning
x0008 - Motor high current warning
x0010 Calibration failed IGBT inverter error signal active
x0020 Startup check failed High current during start up.
->Rotor might be blocked
x0040 Axial Displacement Bearing error active
x0080 Axial Static Load Bearing warning active.
x0100 Front Radial Displacement X Output voltage on the motor generate no
current.
->IGBT inverter command signals
disconnected or drive coil error.
x0200 Front Radial Displacement Y AVC data missing.
->Download software again
x0400 Front Radial Static Load X Motor Single Phase over current detect
x0800 Front Radial Static Load Y -
x1000 Back Radial Displacement X Motor back EMF is low.
->Shaft might be demagnetized.
x2000 Back Radial Displacement Y EEPROM checksum error.
->Download EEPROM configuration file.
x4000 Back Radial Static Load X Compressor is running in generator
mode.
x8000 Back Radial Static Load Y SCR phase loss.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
In the following figure there is the screen of the menu in the case of Setup Parameter change
notification:
ALARM HISTORY Axx
dd/mm/yy hh:mm
MOD YXXX: value U
BY:Id-Code

 Axx: IdCode in chronologic order where “xx” is a number in progress
 dd/mm/yy: date when the alarm occurred
 hh:mm: time when the alarm occurred
 DESCRIPTION OF ALARM: type of alarm or event as described in the Alarm List chapter 5.6.
 Y = type of setup parameter (“U” if User setup parameter, “M” if Manufacturer setup
parameter, “I” if I/O setup parameter)
 XXX = number of setup parameter
 value = new value of parameter
 U = eventual measuring unit of parameter
 Id-Code: identification code of the subject that have executed the change:
- LOCAL-USER: when the change is made in local at User Menu level
- LOCAL-SERV: when the change is made in local at Service Menu level
- LOCAL-MANUF: when the change is made in local at Manufacturer Menu level
- REMOTE-SMS: when the change is made in remote by SMS
- REMOTE-PEMS: when the change is made in remote by PEMS serial port.
By pressing the UP/DOWN ARROW keys you can screen one at a time the occurred alarms and
their description. To go back to the previous menu you have to press the ESC key.
5.7.7 Hw Key menu

By pressing the SET key from “HW KEY PROGRAMMING” you can enter in the menu from which
is possible to program the board through the Hardware Key (HKEY) external module.
As the “HW KEY PROGRAMMING” is selected, the manufacturer or service passwords are
requested to get access to this menu.
Warning
HW KEY menu is available only when ETH board is not connected to S10 board (see par. 6.1.1.1).
For details about the use of the HW KEY see chapter 7.1.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.8 Timer Setup

By pressing the SET key from “TIMER SETUP” you can enter the “TIMER SETUP” menu: there
are all the information about the timers internally used by the controller; the manufacturer or
service password are requested to get access to this menu.
After typing the correct password, the display will show the following mask
TIMER SETUP Tyy

XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “TIMER SETUP” in this case, on the
corner there is the IdCode of the parameter.
To reset the timer value:
- press SET key;
- press MENU key;
- press SET key.
WARNING
To avoid data lost is raccomanded that following procedure must be executed before a machine
power-down:
o Switch ON the machine by ON/OFF key (only if machine is OFF);
o Switch OFF the machine by ON/OFF key;
o Wait until “SYSTEM OFF” status is showed on the main screen;
o Execute machine power-down.
This procedure allows to save in permanent storage (eeprom) all the timers and counters.
List of parameters in TIMER SETUP:
T1. Chiller timer counter CHILLER TIMER min

COUNTER
T2. CP1 timer counter CP1 TIMER COUNTER min

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

T10. CP1 switch on counter CP1 SWITCH ON

COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
T18. PUMP1 timer counter PUMP1 min
TIMER COUNTER
T19. PUMP2 timer counter PUMP2 min
TIMER COUNTER
T20. Machine energy consumption counter MACHINE ENERGY CONS. KWh
COUNTER
NOTES
1)If MK01>0 then:
- the value is read on Power Line
Analyzer;
- when T20 is set to 0 then is sent a
command on Power Line Analyzer to
reset all energy counters.
2)If MK01=0 then the value is computed
using the actual power of each
compressor.
T21. Chiller timer counter in days CHILLER TIMER days
(=T1 / [24*60]) COUNTER
T22. CP1 timer counter in days CP1 TIMER COUNTER days
(=T2 / [24*60])
(=T3 / [24*60])
(=T4 / [24*60])
(=T5 / [24*60])
(=T6 / [24*60])
(=T7 / [24*60])
(=T8 / [24*60])
(=T9 / [24*60])
T30. Machine energy consumption counter in MACHINE ENERGY CONS. MWh
MWh (=T20 / 1000) COUNTER
T31. CP1 internal counter CP1 INTERNAL
COUNTER
COUNTER

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
T39. PUMP1 timer counter in days PUMP1 days
(= T18 / [24*60]) TIMER COUNTER
T40. PUMP2 timer counter in days PUMP2 days
(= T19 / [24*60]) TIMER COUNTER

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.9 Time and Date menu

By pressing the SET key from “TIME AND DATE” you can enter the menu which allows the setting
of the system clock parameters.
As the TIME AND DATE is selected, the manufacturer or service password is requested to get
access to this menu.
After typing the correct password, the display will show (for example) the following mask:
TIME AND DATE Dn

xx dd/mm/yy hh:mm
Setting PARAMETER
PARAMETER VALUE
 Dx : IdCode of parameter where “n” is a number in progress

 xx: current week day
 dd/mm/yy: current date
 hh:mm : current time
 PARAMETER: clock parameter to set
 PARAMETER VALUE: current value of the clock parameter
Use the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to scroll all the parameters.

To go back to the previous menu you have to press the ESC key.
List of parameters in TIME AND DATE menu:
Cod. Description
D1. Setting Hours

D2. Setting Minute
D3. Setting Year
D4. Setting Month
D5. Setting Day
D6. Setting Weekday

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.10 Interface menu

As the INTERFACE menu is selected, the user password is requested to get access to this
parameters list.
INTERFACE Ryy
XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “INTERFACE” in this case, on the corner
there is the IdCode of the parameter.
List of parameters in INTERFACE:
R1 Display contrast of user interface UG3/4 DISPLAY CONTRAST 0 20 10

with display LCD (UG3LCD and
UG4PRD)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.11 Unit Check menu

As the CHECKLIST menu is selected, the service password is requested to get access to this
parameters list.
CHECKLIST Ryy
XXXX
XXXX
CURRENT VALUE
The first line of the display shows the type of setup menu, “UNIT CHECK” in this case, on the
corner there is the IdCode of the parameter.
List of parameters in UNIT CHECK:
UC01 Unit check #01 UNIT CHECK #01 NO YES NO

(commissioning phase)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(checking phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
(maintenance phase)
Notes
1) The actions associated to each unit check are defined by the manufacturer.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.12 I/O Channels Mapping setup

I/O CHANNELS MAPPING setup is accessible only from PC by OnBoard (only factory settings).
This setup parameters group allows to map some I/O logic channels in the physical channels
available in I/O Expansion Boards.
The parameters are referred to S10-Master and are replicated in each S10-Slave boards.
 Following table resume all the defined subgroups.
Subgroup Description
Code
E01xx Expansion Board#1 Configuration
E10xx Expansion Board#10 (OB1) Configuration
DIxx Digital Inputs Mapping
DOxx Digital Outputs Mapping
AIxx Analog Inputs Mapping
AOxx Analog Outputs Mapping
 The value (XXYY) of parameters used for I/O mapping (DIxx, DOxx, AIxx, AOxx) is codified
o XX = Board Index
0: S10
1..9: I/O Expansion Boards #1..9
10: OB1
o YY = Channel Index in the board (see “Channel Index” in the tables of par. 3.3.2)
Examples:
 DI07=109 => digital input mapped on digital-input#9 of I/O Expansion#1 board
 DO03=15 => digital output mapped on digital-output#15 of S10 board
 AI04=1003 => analog input mapped on analog-input#3 of OB1 board
 AO04=302 => analog output mapped on analog-output#2 of I/O Expansion#3 board
 When a parameter used for I/O mapping (DIxx, DOxx, AIxx, AOxx) is set =0 then none
“physical” channel is assigned to the “logical” channel related to the parameter:
o To Digital Input “logic” channel is assigned the status “ON”;
o To Analog Input “logic” channel is assigned the value 999999.
 For the parameters used to specify the actions to do when the communication with a board is
lost (E0x10..E0x12, x=1..9) set the following value:
o 0 to specify that no action must be executed;
o >0 to specify the code of alarm where to copy the actions to do; see the value reported
in “ALARM CODE” column in the table of par. 5.6.1.21.
WARNING
It is recommended to restart the machine (cicle of power) after that at least one of following
parameter is changed. When the I/O mapping is changed, infact, the status of some physical

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
analog/digital outputs can to remain at the previous state if they are not mapped to a logical I/O.
List of parameters in I/O RESOURCES MAPPING SETUP:
EXPANSION BOARD#1 CONFIGURATION (E01xx)

E0101. I/O Expansion Board#1, presence: 0 2 0
0= not present;
1= connected to Master board only;
2= connected to Master and Slaves
boards.
E0102. I/O Expansion Board#1, port type: 1 1 1
1= UART.
E0103. /O Expansion Board#1, port number: 2 2 2
2= “EEV” serial port.
E0104. I/O Expansion Board#1, protocol: 0 0 0
0= PEMS.
E0105. I/O Expansion Board#1, address. 3 11 3
E0106. I/O Expansion Board#1, max number of 0 32 18

Digital Inputs (0= no DIGIN).
E0107. I/O Expansion Board#1 max number of 0 32 16
Digital Outputs (0= no DIGOUT).
Analog Inputs (0= no ANIN).
Analog Output (0= no ANOUT).
E0110. I/O Expansion Board#1, action#1 to do 0 1999 0
when the communication is lost:
0: no action;
>0: set the alarm code where to copy the
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.


Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.


Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

0= PEMS.

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.

0: no action;
actions.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.

0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
(NOTE: Expansion Board#10 is OB1)
0= not present;
boards.
1= UART.
0= PEMS.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13


E1007. I/O Expansion Board#10 max number of 0 0 0
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
0: no action;
actions.
DIGITAL INPUTS MAPPING (DIxx)
DI01. TUR1_AL - Turbocor Fault Status alarm 0 1099 1
(CP1), mapping.
DI02. TUR2_AL - Turbocor Fault Status alarm 0 1099 6
(CP2), mapping.
DI03. CB1 - MT Circuit Breaker (CP1), 0 1099 2
mapping.
DI04. CB2 - MT Circuit Breaker (CP2), 0 1099 7
mapping.
DI05. LPU1_AL - Liquid Pump Circuit breaker 0 1099 2
(CIRC1), mapping.
DI06. LPU1_AL - Liquid Pump Circuit breaker 0 1099 7
(CIRC2), mapping.
DI07. HP1 - High Pressure Switch (CP1), 0 1099 4
mapping.
DI08. HP2 - High Pressure Switch (CP2), 0 1099 9
mapping.
DI09. FP1 - Fan Protection Warning (CIRC1), 0 1099 5
mapping.
DI10. FP2 - Fan Protection Warning (CIRC2), 0 1099 10
mapping.
DI11. CP1_LOCK - External Lock CP1, 0 1099 14
mapping.
DI12. CP2_LOCK - External Lock CP2, 0 1099 15
mapping.
DI13. AUX1_AL - Auxiliary alarm by digital input 0 1099 19
(CP1), mapping.
DI14. AUX2_AL - Auxiliary alarm by digital input 0 1099 20
(CP2), mapping.
DI15. PUMP1_CB - Pump 1 Circuit breaker, 0 1099 17
mapping.
DI16. PUMP2_CB - Pump 2 Circuit breaker, 0 1099 18
mapping.
DI17. FL - Flow Switch, mapping. 0 1099 11

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

DI18. EXTEN - External Enable, mapping. 0 1099 12
DI19. EMERGENCY - Emergency Mode 0 1099 13
Enable, mapping.
DI20. HC_SEL - Mode Selection in Heat Pump 0 1099 13
Management, mapping.
DI21. SLAVE_UNIT_STS - Slave unit alarm 0 1099 13
status, mapping.
DI22. DP_SETP_SEL – DP Setpoint selction 0 1099 3
mapping.
DI23. SETP_SEL - Setpoint selection for temp. 0 1099 16
control, mapping
DI24. FC_SEL - Selection Chiller/Free Cooling 0 1099 16
mode in Dry Cooler, mapping.
DI25. LWL_EC - Low Water Level on 0 1099 8
Evap.Condenser, mapping.
DI26. APU_CB - Adiabatic Pump Circuit 0 1099 19
breaker, mapping.
DI27. HEA_PROT - Heaters protection on 0 1099 20
Evap. Condenser, mapping.
DI28. ES_PU_FLT1 - Evap. System Pump Fault 0 1099 101
(CIRC1), mapping.
DI29. ES_PU_FLT2 - Evap. System Pump Fault 0 1099 102
(CIRC2), mapping.
DI30. ULIM_EN - Upper Demand Limit Enable, 0 1099 13
mapping.
DI31. MAX2_FAN - Second max fan speed 0 1099 0
enable, mapping
DIGITAL OUTPUTS MAPPING (DOxx)
DO01. CP1 - Power Supply Contactor (CP1), 0 1099 1
mapping.
DO02. CP2 - Power Supply Contactor (CP2), 0 1099 4
mapping.
DO03. SOL1 - Refrigerating fluid solenoid valve 0 1099 2
(CIRC1), mapping.
DO04. SOL2 - Refrigerating fluid solenoid valve 0 1099 5
(CIRC1), mapping.
DO05. SUCT_HEA1 - Suction Heater (CP1), 0 1099 2
mapping.
DO06. SUCT_HEA2 - Suction Heater (CP2), 0 1099 5
mapping.
DO07. BPS1 - Bypass Solenoid for Free Cooling 0 1099 2
(CIRC1), mapping.
DO08. BPS2 - Bypass Solenoid for Free Cooling 0 1099 5
(CIRC2), mapping.
DO09. APU_EC - Adiabatic Pump on Evap. 0 1099 3
Condenser, mapping.
DO10. HEA_EC - Heaters on Evap. Condenser, 0 1099 6
mapping.
DO11. EQ_SOL1 - Equalization Solenoid (CP1), 0 1099 3
mapping.
DO12. EQ_SOL2 - Equalization Solenoid (CP2), 0 1099 6
mapping.
DO13. HGBS - Pulsed Hot Gas Bypass 0 1099 7
Solenoid, mapping.
DO14. CHW - Cooler Heater Wrapped, mapping. 0 1099 7
DO15. SLAVEUNIT_EN - Slave Unit enable, 0 1099 7
mapping.
DO16. SLAVEUNIT_AL - Slave Unit in alarm, 0 1099 7
mapping.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

DO17. HP_REV - Reversing solenoid for Heat 0 1099 7
Pump management, mapping.
DO18. ALL - General Alarm Remote indication, 0 1099 8
mapping.
DO19. FAN1_1 - Fan # 1 (CIRC1), mapping. 0 1099 9
DO27. LPU1 - Liquid Pump for Free Cooling 0 1099 10
(CIRC1), mapping.
DO28. LPU2 - Liquid Pump for Free Cooling 0 1099 14
(CIRC2), mapping.
DO29. ECO1 - Economizer port (CP1), mapping. 0 1099 12
DO30. ECO2 - Economizer port (CP1), mapping. 0 1099 16
DO31. LIE1 - Liquid injection ECO port (CP1), 0 1099 12
mapping.
DO32. LIE2 - Liquid injection ECO port (CP2), 0 1099 16
mapping.
DO33. LIS1 - Liquid injection SUCTION port 0 1099 12
(CP1), mapping.
DO34. LIS2 - Liquid injection SUCTION port 0 1099 16
(CP2), mapping.
DO35. CP1_FAULT - Compressor Fault 0 1099 11
indication (CP1), mapping.
DO36. CP2_FAULT - Compressor Fault 0 1099 15
indication (CP2), mapping.
DO37. PUMP1 - First pump port, mapping. 0 1099 11
DO38. PUMP2 - Second pump port, mapping. 0 1099 15
DO39. CP1_ALARM - Compressor alarm and 0 1099 17
warning indication (CP1), mapping.
DO40. CP2_ALARM - Compressor alarm and 0 1099 18
warning indication (CP2), mapping.
DO41. ES_SPR1 - Evap. System Sprayer 0 1099 101
(CIRC1), mapping.
DO42. ES_SPR2 - Evap. System Sprayer 0 1099 102
(CIRC2), mapping.
DO43. ES_MOT - Evap. System Motor for 0 1099 103
cardboard batteries insertion, mapping
DO44. LBI1 - Load Balance Injection Solenoid 0 1099 3
(CP1), mapping
DO45. LBI2 - Load Balance Injection Solenoid 0 1099 6
(CP2), mapping
DO46. FC_STS – Free Cooling status, mapping 0 1099 0
DO47. WARN – Warnings indication, mapping 0 1099 0
DO48. HI_RWT_WARN - High RWT warning 0 1099 0
indication, mapping
ANALOG INPUTS MAPPING (AIxx)
AI01. RWT - Returning Water Temp, mapping 0 1099 7
AI02. LWT - Leaving Water Temp, 0 1099 8
mapping
AI03. ST1 - Suction Temp. (CIRC1), mapping. 0 1099 10
AI04. ST2 - Suction Temp. (CIRC2), mapping. 0 1099 11
AI05. IWP1 - Inlet Water Press. in 0 1099 1
Evaporator#1, mapping.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

AI06. IWP2 - Inlet Water Press. in 0 1099 1003
Evaporator#2, mapping.
AI07. OWP1 - Outlet Water Press. in 0 1099 2
Evaporator 1, mapping.
AI08. OWP2 - Outlet Water Press. in 0 1099 1004
Evaporator 2, mapping.
AI09. EV1T - Evaporator 1 Outlet Temp, 0 1099 1001
mapping.
AI10. EV2T - Evaporator 1 Outlet Temp, 0 1099 1002
mapping.
AI11. LPO1 - Liquid Pump Outlet Press. 0 1099 3
(CIRC1), mapping.
AI12. LPO2 - Liquid Pump Outlet Press. 0 1099 4
(CIRC2), mapping.
AI13. LPI1 - Liquid Pump Inlet Press. (CIRC1), 0 1099 5
mapping.
AI14. LPI2 - Liquid Pump Inlet Press. (CIRC2), 0 1099 6
mapping.
AI15. TAE - External Air Temp, mapping. 0 1099 9
AI16. TFC - Free Cooling Temp, mapping. 0 1099 12
AI17. IDT - Inlet Dry Cooler Temp, mapping. 0 1099 9
AI18. ODT - Outlet Dry Cooler Temp, mapping. 0 1099 12
AI19. OET - Outlet Evaporator Temp, mapping. 0 1099 9
AI20. TA_COR - Ambient Temp. for set point 0 1099 9
correction function, mapping.
AI21. OCT - Outlet Condenser Temp, mapping. 0 1099 9
AI22. ICT - Inlet Condenser Temp, mapping. 0 1099 12
AI23. TA - Ambient Temperature, mapping. 0 1099 9
AI24. REM_SP - Remote set point, mapping. 0 1099 12
AI25. AI_COR - Analog Input for set point 0 1099 12
correction, mapping.
AI26. ULIM - Upper demand limit value, 0 1099 12
mapping.
AI27. RH - Relative Humidity, mapping. 0 1099 107
AI28. CP_DEM1 - Cp Demand Capacity (CP1), 0 1099 3
mapping.
AI29. CP_DEM2 - Cp Demand Capacity (CP2), 0 1099 4
mapping.
AI30. EXTC – External Cooling Demand, 0 1099 3
mapping.
AI31. SCT - Split Controlled Temp, mapping. 0 1099 8
AI32. RWT2 - Returning Water Temp 0 1099 12
Redundancy, mapping
AI33. LWT2 - Leaving Water Temp 0 1099 9
Redundancy, mapping
AI34. ICP - Inlet Condenser Press, mapping. 0 1099 1003
AI35. OCP - Outlet Condenser Press, mapping. 0 1099 1004
AI36. NL – Noise Level, mapping 0 1099 0
AI37. LLT – Liquid Level Transducer, mapping 0 1099 0
AI38. SLT1 - Subcooled Liquid Temp. (CIRC1), 0 1099 0
mapping
AI39. SLT2 - Subcooled Liquid Temp. (CIRC2), 0 1099 0
mapping
AI40. APT – Auxiliary Pressure Transducer, 0 1099 0
mapping
ANALOG OUTPUTS MAPPING (AOxx)
AO01. EXPV1 - EEV control (CIRC1), mapping. 0 1099 1001
AO02. EXPV2 - EEV control (CIRC2), mapping. 0 1099 1002

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

AO03. FSC1 - Fan Speed Control (CIRC1), 0 1099 3
mapping.
AO04. FSC2 - Fan Speed Control (CIRC2), 0 1099 4
mapping.
AO05. FCV - Free Cooling Valve driver, 0 1099 1
mapping.
AO06. EPU - External Pump controlled by 0 1099 2
Inverter, mapping.
AO07. LBV1 - Load Balance Valve (CP1), 0 1099 101
mapping.
AO08. LBV2 - Load Balance Valve (CP2), 0 1099 102
mapping.
AO09. IPU - Internal Pump controlled by 0 1099 2
Inverter, mapping.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.7.13 Advanced functions on the system setup
5.7.13.1 Hide not used setup parameters

This function allows hiding the setup parameters not used when a function is disabled.
The function is disabled (i.e. all parameters are always showed) when PROJECT ENGINEERING
brand name is used (MM02=6).
Following table resume the logic to hide the setup parameters not used.
Conditions for hiding Setup parameters hiding

Cooler Heater Wrapped not used (MM11<>2) MM13
Unit Lead Lag not used (MM11<>3) MM14
Time block scheduling not used (MM16=0) MM17…MM22
Remote Control not used (MT01=0) MT02
Pull Down control disabled (MT17=0) MT18, MT19
Return Temperature Reset not used (MM10<>1) MT29, MT30
Ambient Temperature set point correction and Analog MT31
Input set point correction not used (MM10<>2, 3)
Ambient Temperature set point correction not used MT32, MT33
(MM10<>2)
Split with Cp Control by Suction Press. disabled MT34…MT36
(MV01<>4)
Split Unit disabled (MV01<3) MT37
Compressors not used MC23…MC30,
(the parameters are hide in base to the value of MC01) MD12…MD19,
ME20…ME27,
ME28…ME35,
MK02…MK09.
Load Balance control not used (MC46=0) MC47…MC52
Hybrid control not used (MC02<>18,19,20) MC54…MC56
Ventilating circuits shared from more compressors not MD12…MD19
used (MD11>=MC01)
Fan Speed Optimization not used (MD20=0) MD21…MD26
Fan Speed Limitation not used (MD34=0) MD35…MD64
EEV not used (ME01<>1, 2) ME02…ME48
Flooded Evaporator not used (ME02<>3 and MH24<>3) ME11…ME13
Flooded Evaporator used (ME02=3 or MH24=3) ME04…ME07
Free Cooling not used (ME01=0) MF02…MF10
Dry Cooler with FAN control on Outlet Dry Cooler Temp. MF12, MF13
not used (MF11<>1)
Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps disabled (ML01=NO) ML02...ML22
Evap System disabled (MA01=0) MA02…MA10
Heat Pump/Recovery not used (MH01=0) MH02...MH26
Pumps not used (MP01=0) MP02...MP07
Internal Pumps controlled by Inverter not used (MP07=0) MP08...MP15
Internal Pumps controlled by Inverter on Evap. Flow not MP10…MP12
used (MP07<>1)
Internal Pumps controlled by Inverter on RWT not used MP13…MP15
(MP07<>2)
External Pump controlled by Inverter not used (MX01=0) MX02…MX06
Pumps with rotation not used (MP01<>3,6,7,8) MP03
Power Line Analyzer not used (MK01=0) MK14…MK17
Unit Voltage Limitation not used (MK16=0) MK17

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Evaporator Water Pressure monitoring not used MV04…MV07

(MV03=NO).
Evap. Condenser not used (MN01=0) MN02…MN05
Condenser Water Pressure monitoring not used MN07…MN10
(MN06=NO).
SMS protocol not used (MS02=0) MS03…MS11

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.8 MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY

5.8.1 USER INTERFACE
5.8.1.1 STANDARD screens

ENGLISH GERMAN ITALIAN FRENCH RUSSIAN
WAIT WARTEN ATTESA ATTENDRE ЖДИТЕ
MASTER SLAVE DATA MASTER-SLAVE TRASFERIMENTO MAITRE-ESCLAVE ПЕРЕДАЧА ДАННЫХ

TRANSFER DATENUEBERTRAGUNG MASTER-SLAVE TRANSFERT
ALARM ALARM ALLARME ALARME АВАРИЙНЫЙ СИГНАЛ
POWER OFF SPANNUNGSAUSFALL ALIMENTAZ. MANCANTE COUPURE ALIMENTATION НЕТ ПИТАНИЯ
Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY
WAIT 180sec TO START WART 180s BIS START ATT. 180s PER INIZ. ATT. 180s POUR DEMAR ЖДИТЕ 180 с ДО ПУСКА
PRESS <ON> TO START DRUECKE ON ZUM START <ON> PER INIZIARE <ON> POUR DEMAR НАЖАТЬ ВКЛ.ДЛЯ ПУСКА
GEOCLIMA GEOCLIMA GEOCLIMA GEOCLIMA ВНИИХОЛОДМАШ
wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm дн дд/мм/гг чч:мм
LWT 24.5 RWT 31.5 °F KWA 24.5 KWE 31.5 °F LWT 24.5 RWT 31.5 °F TSE 24.5 TEE 24.5 °F Ts2 24.5 Ts1 31.5 °F
SCT 24.5°F SCT 24.5°F SCT SCT 24.5°F SCT 24.5°F SCT 24.5°F
SP:40.0°F SYSTEM OFF SW:40.0°F SYSTEM AUS SP:40.0°F SIST. OFF CO:40.0°F SYST. OFF Ts:40.0°F СИСТ.ВЫКЛ
SP:40.0°F STARTING SW:40.0°F BEGINNEN SP:40.0°F PARTENZA CO:40.0°F COMMENCER Ts:40.0°F ПУСК
SP:40.0°F STOPPING SW:40.0°F STOPPEN SP:40.0°F ARRESTO CO:40.0°F ARRET Ts:40.0°F ОСТАНОВ
SP:40.0°F COOL:100% SW:40.0°F KUEHL:100% SP:40.0°F COOL:100% CO:40.0°F PUIS:100% Ts:40.0°F ОХЛ.:100%
SP:40.0°F HEAT:100% SW:40.0°F HEIZU:100% SP:40.0°F HEAT:100% CO:40.0°F CHAUF:100% Ts:40.0°F ОБОГР:100%
SP:40.0°F EMERG:100% SW:40.0°F NOTFA:100% SP:40.0°F EMERG:100% CO:40.0°F M.FOR:100% Ts:40.0°F АВАР.:100%
LOCK: REMOTE OFF SICH.: FERNBED. AUS BLOCCATO DA REMOTO VERR.:CDE À DIST OFF БЛОК.: ДИСТ. ВЫКЛ.
STANDBY: REMOTE OFF EINSAT: FERNBED. AUS STANDBY DA REMOTO RESER:CDE A DIST OFF ОЖИД.: ДИСТ. ВЫКЛ.
OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% КОНТ.ОТК.ЦИКЛА: 100%
OPEN LOOP SET: 100% OPEN LOOP SET: 100% OPEN LOOP SET: 100% OPEN LOOP SET: 100% НАСТ.ОТК.ЦИКЛА: 100%
ONLY PUMPS MODE NUR PUMPE MODE MODALITA’ SOLO POMPE POMPES SEUL MODE НАСОС ТОЛЬКО РЕЖИМ
PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM PUMPE AUS AF-LIM POMPE ON PER AF-LIM PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM PUMPE AUS AF-LIM
CONTROL ON XXXX KONTROLLE DER XXXX CONTROLLO SU XXXX CONTR. ACTIF: XXXX УПРАВЛЕНИЕ ПО XXXX
(XXXX=LWT/RWT/ (XXXX=WVT/WRT/ (XXXX=LWT/RWT/ (XXXX=TEE/TSE/ (XXXX= Ts2/Ts1/
OET/REM/ OET/REM/ OET/REM/ OET/REM/ OET/REM/
AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/Рв/EXT/SCT)
RT: xxxxxh HGBS:xxx RT: xxxxxh HGBS:xxx RT: xxxxxh HGBS:xxx RT: xxxxxh HGBS:xxx НА: xxxxxч HGBS:xxx
TAE:xx.x°C EPU:xxx% TAE:xx.x°C EPU:xxx% TAE:xx.x°C EPU:xxx% TAE:xx.x°C EPU:xxx% TAE:xx.x°C ТПН:xxx%
STAGE:xx CP:x LEAD:x STUFE:xx CP:x LEAD:x STAGE:xx CP:x LEAD:x ETAGE:xx CP:x LEAD:x СТУПЕ:xx КМ:x LEAD:x
EV1T:xx.x EV2T:xx.xF EV1T:xx.x EV2T:xx.xF EV1T:xx.x EV2T:xx.xF EV1T:xx.x EV2T:xx.xF EV1T:xx.x EV2T:xx.xF
TA: xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% TA: xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% TA: xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% TA: xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% TA: xx.x°F ULIM:xxx%
OET:xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% OET:xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% OET:xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% OET:xx.x°F ULIM:xxx% OET:xx.x°F ULIM:xxx%
AI_COR: xxx% AI_COR: xxx% AI_COR: xxx% AI_COR: xxx% AI_COR: xxx%
OCT:xx.x ICT:xx.x °F OCT:xx.x ICT:xx.x °F OCT:xx.x ICT:xx.x °F OCT:xx.x ICT:xx.x °F Tw2:xx.x Tw1:xx.x °F
LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI
UNIT LEAD LAG STATUS HEINHEIT SCHALTUNG STATO ROTAZ. UNITA UNITE PERMUTATION ПЕРЕКЛЮЧЕНИЕ БЛОКА
MASTER UNIT:XXXXXXX MASTER HEINH: XXXXXX UNITA MASTER: XXXXXX MAITRE UNITE: XXXXXX ЗАД. БЛОК: XXXXXXX
(XXXXXXX=ON/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=EIN/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=ON/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=ON/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=ВКЛ./РЕЗЕРВ/
ALARM/OFF) ALARM/AUS) ALLARME/OFF) ALARME/OFF) АВ.СИГ./ВЫКЛ.)
SLAVE UNIT: SLAVE HEINH: UNITA SLAVE: ESCLAV UNITE: XXXXXX ИСП. МОДУЛЬ: XXXXXXX
(XXXXXXX=ON/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=EIN/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=ON/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=ON/STANDBY/ (XXXXXX=ВКЛ./РЕЗЕРВ/
ALARM/FATAL) ALARM/FATAL) ALLARME/FATALE) ALARME/ FATAL) АВ.СИГ./FATAL)
H TO NEXT SWT: 8H UMSCHALTZEIT: 8H TEMPO ROTAZIONE: 8H HEURE DE PERMUT: 8H ВРЕМЯ ПЕРЕКЛЮЧ.: 8Ч
DEMAND: 0 0 0 SOLLW: 0 0 0 DEMAND: 0 0 0 DEMAND: 0 0 0 ТРЕБ.: 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ACTUAL: 0 0 0 ISTW: 0 0 0 ACTUAL: 0 0 0 ACTIF: 0 0 0 ФАКТ: 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FREE COOLING: XXXXX F. KUEHLUNG: XXXXX FREE COOLING: XXXXX FREE COOLING: XXXXX ОТКР. ОХЛАЖД.:XXXXX
(XXXXX = ON/OFF/ (XXXXX = EIN/AUS/ (XXXXX = ON/OFF/ (XXXXX = ON/OFF/ (XXXXX = ВКЛ/ВЫК/
F-ON/F-OFF) G-EIN/G-AUS) F-ON/F-OFF) F-ON/F-OFF) H-ВКЛ/H-ВЫК)
YY-PRIORITY TCRT=ZZZ YY-BETRIEB TCRT=ZZZ YY-PRIORIT. TCRT=ZZZ YY-PRIORITE TCRT=ZZZ YY-ПРИОРИТ. TCRT=ZZZ
(YY= CP/FC (YY= VD/FK (YY= CP/FC (YY= CP/FC (YY= KM/FK
ZZZ= RWT/TC) ZZZ= WRT/TC) ZZZ= RWT/TC) ZZZ= TSE/TC) ZZZ= Ts1/TC)
LPU=XXX BPS=XXX LPU=XXX BPS=XXX LPU=XXX BPS=XXX LPU=XXX BPS=XXX LPU=XXX BPS=XXX
(XXX= ON/ OFF/ RDY) (XXX= EIN/ AUS/ RDY) (XXX= ON/ OFF/ RDY) (XXX= ON/ OFF/ RDY) (XXX= ВКЛ/ ВЫК/ RDY)
TFC TAE °F TFC TAE °F TFC TAE °F TFC TAE °F TFC TAE °F
ODT IDT °F ODT IDT °F ODT IDT °F ODT IDT °F ODT IDT °F

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
VALVE: % FAN: % VENT.: % LUEF: % VALVE: % FAN: % VANNE: % VEN: % КЛАПА: % ВЕН: %
COOL: % FAN: % COOL: % LUEF: % COOL: % FAN: % COOL: % VEN: % ОХЛ: % ВЕН: %
PUMPS AVAILABLE: N PUMPE VORHANDEN: N POMPE DISPONIB.: N POMPES DISPON.: N НАСОС ДОСУТПЕН: N
(N = 0/1/2) (N = 0/1/2) (N = 0/1/2) (N = 0/1/2) (N = 0/1/2)
PUMP1:XXX PUMP2:XXX PUMP1:XXX PUMP2:XXX POMP1:XXX POMP2:XXX POMP1:XXX POMP2:XXX НАС.1:XXX НАС.2:XXX
(XXX= ON/OFF/NO) (XXX= AUS/EIN/NEIN) (XXX= ON/OFF/NO) (XXX= ON/OFF/NON) (XXX= ВЫК./ВК./НЕТ)
RT1 XXXXX RT2 XXXXXH RT1 XXXXX RT2 XXXXXH RT1 XXXXX RT2 XXXXXH RT1 XXXXX RT2 XXXXXH НА1 XXXXX НА2 XXXXXЧ
CHANGEOVER TIME:xxxH UMSCHALTZEIT: xxxH TEMPO ROTAZIONE:xxxH HEURE DE PERMUT.: H ВРЕМЯ ПЕРЕКЛЮЧ.:xxxЧ
IPU=xxx% IPU=xxx% IPU=xxx% IPU=xxx% IPU=xxx%
EVAP. WATER PRESS.#n VERDAMPFERWASSERDR#n PRESS. ACQUA EVAP.#n PRESS. EAU EVAPOR.#n ПАРАМЕТРЫ ХН #n
IWP:xx.x OWP:xx.xKPa IWP:xx.x OWP:xx.xKPa IWP:xx.x OWP:xx.xKPa IWP:xx.x OWP:xx.xKPa Ps1:xx.x Ps2:xx.xкПa
IWP-OWP: xx.xKPa IWP-OWP: xx.xKPa IWP-OWP: xx.xKPa IWP-OWP: xx.xKPa Ps1-Ps2: xxx.x кПа
FLUX: XX.Xmc/h FLUB: XX.Xmc/h PORTATA: XX.Xmc/h FLUX: XX.Xmc/h РАСХОД: XXX.X м3/ч
LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa НПД:XXX ВПД:XXX кПа
COND. WATER PRESS. COND. WATER PRESS. PRESS. ACQUA COND. PRESS. EAU CONDENS. ПАРАМЕТРЫ ОХЛ.В.
ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xKPa ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xKPa ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xKPa ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xKPa Pw1:xx.x Pw2:xx.xкПа
ICP-OCP: xx.xKPa ICP-OCP: xx.xKPa ICP-OCP: xx.xKPa ICP-OCP: xx.xKPa Pw1-Pw2: xxx.x кПа
FLUX: XX.Xmc/h FLUB: XX.Xmc/h PORTATA: XX.Xmc/h FLUX: XX.Xmc/h РАСХОД: XXX.x м3/ч
LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa LPD:xxx HPD:xxx KPa НПД:XXX ВПД:XXX кПа
EVAP. CONDENSER CONDENSATOR VERDAMP. CONDENSATORE EVAP. CONDENSATEUR EVAP. КОНДЕНСАТОР ИСПАРИТ
SET:xx.xPSI APU:XXX SET:xx.xPSI APU:XXX SET:xx.xPSI APU:XXX SET: xx.xPSI APU:XXX SET:xx.xPSI APU:XXX
(XXX = ON/OFF/NO) (XXX = AUS/EIN/NEI) (XXX = ON/OFF/NO) (XXX=ON/OFF/NON) (XXX=ВЫК./ВК./НЕТ)
SET:xx.x°F HEA:XXX SET:xx.x°F HEA:XXX SET:xx.x°F HEA:XXX SET: xx.x°F HEA:XXX SET:xx.x°F HEA:XXX
(XXX = ON/OFF/NO) (XXX = AUS/EIN/NEI) (XXX = ON/OFF/NO) (XXX=ON/OFF/NON) (XXX=ВЫК./ВК./НЕТ)
EVAP SYSTEM: XXX EVAP SYSTEM: XXX EVAP SYSTEM: XXX EVAP SYSTEM: XXX ИСПАРИТ СИСТ: ХХХ
(XXX= ON/OFF) (XXX= AUS/EIN) (XXX= ON/OFF) (XXX= ON/OFF) (XXX= ВЫК./ВК.)
TAE:xx.x°C RH:xx.x% TAE:xx.x°C RH:xx.x% TAE:xx.x°C RH:xx.x% TAE:xx.x°C RH:xx.x% TAE:xx.x°C RH:xx.x%
ES_MOT:YYY ES_MOT:YYY ES_MOT:YYY ES_MOT:YYY ES_MOT:YYY
(YYY= ON/OFF) (YYY= AUS/EIN) (YYY= ON/OFF) (YYY= ON/OFF) (YYY= ВЫК./ВК.)
ES_SPR:XXXXXX ES_SPR:XXXXXX ES_SPR:XXXXXX ES_SPR:XXXXXX ES_SPR:XXXXXX
(X=0,1) (X=0,1) (X=0,1) (X=0,1) (X=0,1)
CHILLER PERFORMANCE CHILLER PERFORMANCE PRESTAZIONI CHILLER CHILLER PERFORMANCE ОСНОВНЫЕ ПАРАМЕТРЫ
COOL CAPACITY:xx.xkW COOL CAPACITY:xx.xkW POTENZA FRIGO:xx.xkW COOL CAPACITY:xx.xkW Qx: xxxкВт
POWER CONS*: xx.xkW POWER CONS*: xx.xkW POTENZA CONS*:xx.xkW POWER CONS*: xx.xkW Nэл*: xx.xкВт
COP*:xx.x COP*:xx.x COP*:xx.x COP*:xx.x КПД*:xx.x
NOISE PERFORMANCE NOISE PERFORMANCE PRESTAZ. ACUSTICHE NOISE PERFORMANCE NOISE PERFORMANCE
NL: xx.x SET: yy.ydB NL: xx.x SET: yy.ydB NL: xx.x SET: yy.ydB NL: xx.x SET: yy.ydB NL: xx.x SET: yy.ydB
AVG:mm.m PEAK:nn.ndB AVG:mm.m PEAK:nn.ndB AVG:mm.m PEAK:nn.ndB AVG:mm.m PEAK:nn.ndB AVG:mm.m PEAK:nn.ndB
MAX FAN SPEED: XXX% MAX FAN SPEED: XXX% VELOC.VENT MAX: XXX% MAX FAN SPEED: XXX% MAX FAN SPEED: XXX%
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 1 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 1 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 1 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A 1 дд/мм/гг чч:мм A 1
DESCRIPTION OF ALARM ALARMBESCHREIBUNG DESCRIZINE ALLARME ALARME DESCRIPTION ОПИСАНИЕ АВАРИЙНОГО
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 дд/мм/гг чч:мм A10
СИГНАЛА

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
CPn XXXXXXX EEV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX EEV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX EEV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX EEV:xxx% КМn XXXXXXX ЭРВ:xxx%
(XXXXXXX= (XXXXXXX= (XXXXXXX= (XXXXXXX= (XXXXXXX=
ON/ CM-ON/ EIN/ MZ-EIN/ ON/ CM-ON/ ON/ SQ-DEM/ ВКЛ/ КМ-ВКЛ/
CM-OFF / OFF/ MZ-AUS/ AUF/ CM-OFF/ OFF/ SQ-ARR/ OFF/ КМ-ВЫКЛ/ ВЫКЛ/
ALARM/ LOCKED/ ALARM/ LOCKED/ ALLARME/ LOCKED/ ALARME/ BLOCC./ ТРЕВОГА/ БЛОК./
STANDBY/ FATAL/ STANDBY/ FATAL/ STANDBY/ FATAL/ STANDBY/ FATAL/ ОЖИД./ АВАРИЯ/
PD-OUT/ PD-MUL/ PD-OUT/ PD-MUL/ PD-OUT/ PD-MUL/ PD-OUT/ PD-MUL/ ОТКАЧКА /МН.ОТК./
ADPT-C/ START/ ADPT-C/ START/ ADPT-C/ AVVIO/ ADPT-C/ START/ АДАПТ-К/ СТАРТ/
LP-LIM/ MC-LIM/ SD-LIM/ BS-LIM/ LP-LIM/ MC-LIM/ BP-LIM/ MC-LIM/ Pв-LIM/ ТОК-LIM/
DT-LIM/ PW-LCK/ DT-LIM/ PW-LCK DT-LIM/ PW-LCK / DT-LIM/ PW-LCK/ Tн-LIM/ ПИТ-LCK/
HDP-TCR/ LSP-CAV/ HDP-TCR/ LSP-CAV/ HDP-TCR/ LSP-CAV/ HDP-TCR/ LSP-CAV/ TUR-вPн/ нPв-Тпл/
CUR-SCR/ HDT-INV/ CUR-SCR/ HDT-INV/ CUR-SCR/ HDT-INV/ CUR-SCR/ HDT-INV/ CUR-вып/ HDT-инв/
HW-LIM/ LW-LIM) HW-LIM/ LW-LIM) HW-LIM/ LW-LIM) HW-LIM/ LW-LIM) Ts1-LIM/ LW-LIM)
DT:xx.x DSH:xx.x °F DT:xx.x DSH:xx.x °F DT:xx.x DSH:xx.x °F DT:xx.x DSH:xx.x °F DT:xx.x DSH:xx.x °F
DT: xx.x°F ELL:xx.x% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xx.x% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xx.x% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xx.x% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xx.x%
ST:xx.x TSUP:xx.x °F ST:xx.x TSUP:xx.x °F ST:xx.x TSUP:xx.x °F TA:xx.x SURC:xx.x °F ST:xx.x TSUP xx.x °F
SP:xx.x DP:xx.x PSI SP:xx.x DP:xx.x PSI SP:xx.x DP:xx.x PSI AS:xx.x RE:xx.x PSI SP:xx.x DP:xx.x PSI
DT: xx.x°F ELL:xxx% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xxx% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xxx% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xxx% DT: xx.x°F ELL:xxx%
DT: xx.x DSH: xx.x°F DT: xx.x DSH: xx.x°F DT: xx.x DSH: xx.x°F DT: xx.x DSH: xx.x°F DT: xx.x DSH: xx.x°F
SL:000 xxx% FAN:0000 SL:000 xxx% VEN:0000 SL:000 xxx% VEN:0000 SL:000 xxx% VEN:0000 SL:000 xxx% ВЕН:0000
EH:00 xxx% FAN:0000 EH:00 xxx% FAN:0000 EH:00 xxx% FAN:0000 EH:00 xxx% FAN:0000 EH:00 xxx% ВЕН:0000
XXXA = XXX% OF NOM. XXXA = XXX% VON NEN. XXXA = XXX% DEL NOM. XXXA = XXX% DU NOM. XXXA = XXX% ОТ НОМ.
CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% КМn XXXXXXX НЛА xxx%
Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx ОБ. xxxxx МИН xxxxx
Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx ОБ. xxxxx МАКС xxxxx
DEM:xx.x ACT:yy.y kW SOL:xx.x IST:yy.y kW RIC:xx.x ATT:yy.y KW DEM:xx.x ACT:yy.y kW ЗАП:xx.x РЕА:yy.yкВт
CAV:xx.x SCR=xx.x°F CAV:xx.x SCR=xx.x°F CAV:xx.x SCR=xx.x°F CAV:xx.x SCR=xx.x°F CAV:xx.x SCR=xx.x°F
CUR:xx.xA IVT=xx.x°F CUR:xx.xA IVT=xx.x°F CUR:xx.xA IVT=xx.x°F CUR:xx.xA IVT=xx.x°F CUR:xx.xA IVT=xx.x°F
CPn XXXXXXX LBV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX LBV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX LBV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX LBV:xxx% КМn XXXXXXX LBV:xxx%
LBSH:xx.x°F LBI:XXX LBSH:xx.x°F LBI:XXX LBSH:xx.x°F LBI:XXX LBSH:xx.x°F LBI:XXX LBSH:xx.x°F LBI:XXX
(XXX = ON/OFF) (XXX = AUS/EIN) (XXX = ON/OFF) (XXX=ON/OFF) (XXX=ВЫК./ВК.)
SLT: xx.x°F SLT: xx.x°F SLT: xx.x°F SLT: xx.x°F SLT: xx.x°F
5.8.1.2 CUSTOM#1 screens

WAIT WARTEN ATTESA ATTENDRE ЖДИТЕ
MASTER SLAVE DATA MASTER-SLAVE TRASFERIMENTO MAITRE-ESCLAVE ПЕРЕДАЧА ДАННЫХ

TRANSFER DATENUEBERTRAGUNG MASTER-SLAVE TRANSFERT
POWER OFF SPANNUNGSAUSFALL ALIMENTAZ. MANCANTE COUPURE ALIMENTATION НЕТ ПИТАНИЯ
Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY Sw Ver: GEODTUXX.YY
WAIT 180sec TO START WART 180s BIS START ATT. 180s PER INIZ. ATT. 180s POUR DEMAR ЖДИТЕ 180 с ДО ПУСКА
PRESS <ON> TO START DRUECKE ON ZUM START <ON> PER INIZIARE <ON> POUR DEMAR НАЖАТЬ ВКЛ.ДЛЯ ПУСКА
GEOCLIMA GEOCLIMA GEOCLIMA GEOCLIMA ВНИИХОЛОДМАШ
wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm дн дд/мм/гг чч:мм
SP 40.0 LWT 31.5 °F SW 40.0 KWA 31.5 °F SP 40.0 LWT 31.5 °F CO 40.0 TSE 31.5 °F Ts 40.0 Ts2 31.5 °F
SYSTEM OFF SYSTEM AUS SIST. OFF SYST. OFF СИСТ.ВЫКЛ
STARTING BEGINNEN PARTENZA COMMENCER ПУСК
STOPPING STOPPEN ARRESTO ARRET ОСТАНОВ
COOL:100% KUEHL:100% COOL:100% PUIS:100% ОХЛ.:100%
HEAT:100% HEIZU:100% HEAT:100% CHAUF:100% ОБОГР:100%
EMERG:100% NOTFA:100% EMERG:100% M.FOR:100% АВАР.:100%
LOCK: REMOTE OFF SICH.: FERNBED. AUS BLOCCATO DA REMOTO VERR.:CDE À DIST OFF БЛОК.: ДИСТ. ВЫКЛ.
STANDBY: REMOTE OFF EINSAT: FERNBED. AUS STANDBY DA REMOTO RESER:CDE A DIST OFF ОЖИД.: ДИСТ. ВЫКЛ.
OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% OPEN LOOP CRT: 100% КОНТ.ОТК.ЦИКЛА: 100%
OPEN LOOP SET: 100% OPEN LOOP SET: 100% OPEN LOOP SET: 100% OPEN LOOP SET: 100% НАСТ.ОТК.ЦИКЛА: 100%
ONLY PUMPS MODE NUR PUMPE MODE MODALITA’ SOLO POMPE POMPES SEUL MODE НАСОС ТОЛЬКО РЕЖИМ
PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM PUMPE AUS AF-LIM POMPE ON PER AF-LIM PUMPS ON FOR AF-LIM PUMPE AUS AF-LIM
CAP XX.X PWR XX.XkW CAP XX.X PWR XX.XkW CAP XX.X PWR XX.XkW CAP XX.X PWR XX.XkW Qx XX.X Nэл XX.XкВт
CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% CPn XXXXXXX IGV:xxx% КМn XXXXXXX НЛА xxx%
Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Min:xxxxx ОБ. xxxxx МИН xxxxx
Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx Spd:xxxxx Max:xxxxx ОБ. xxxxx МАКС xxxxx
DEM: xxx ACT: xxxkW SOL: xxx IST: xxxkW RIC: xxx ATT: xxxkW DEM: xxx ACT: xxxkW ТРЕБ xxx ПОТР xxxкВт
CUR:XXX A COOL: XXX% CUR:XXX A COOL: XXX% CUR:XXX A COOL: XXX% CUR:XXX A COOL: XXX% ТОК XXX A ОХЛ. XXX%
CPn CAV:xx.x°F CPn CAV:xx.x°F CPn CAV:xx.x°F CPn CAV:xx.x°F КМn Тпол xx.x°F
IVT:xxxx SCR:xxxx°F IVT:xxxx SCR:xxxx°F IVT:xxxx SCR:xxxx°F IVT:xxxx SCR:xxxx°F Тинв xxx Tвыпр xxx°F
ST: xx.x DT: xx.x °F ST: xx.x DT: xx.x °F ST: xx.x DT: xx.x °F ST: xx.x DT: xx.x °F Тв xx.x Тн xx.x °F
SP: xx.x DP: xx.xPSI SP: xx.x DP: xx.xPSI SP: xx.x DP: xx.xPSI SP: xx.x DP: xx.xPSI Рв xx.x Рн xx.xPSI

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
СИГНАЛА
dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 dd/mm/yy hh:mm A10 дд/мм/гг чч:мм A10
СИГНАЛА
wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm wd dd/mm/yy hh:mm
RT Chiller: xxxxxh RT Chiller: xxxxxh RT Chiller: xxxxxh RT Chiller: xxxxxh НАРАБОТКА ХМ: xxxxxч
RT Cp1: xxxxxh RT Cp1: xxxxxh RT Cp1: xxxxxh RT Cp1: xxxxxh НАРАБОТКА КМ1:xxxxxч
RT Cp2: xxxxxh RT Cp2: xxxxxh RT Cp2: xxxxxh RT Cp2: xxxxxh НАРАБОТКА КМ2:xxxxxч
MACHINE PARAMETERS MACHINE PARAMETERS PARAMETRI MACCHINA MACHINE PARAMETERS ОБЩИЕ ПАРАМЕТРЫ ХМ
LBV1:xxx% LBV2:xxx% LBV1:xxx% LBV2:xxx% LBV1:xxx% LBV2:xxx% LBV1:xxx% LBV2:xxx% ПЕР1:xxx% ПЕР2:xxx%
LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI LLT:xxx% APT:xx.xPSI
ELL1:xxx% ELL2:xxx% ELL1:xxx% ELL2:xxx% ELL1:xxx% ELL2:xxx% ELL1:xxx% ELL2:xxx% УЖ1 xxx% УЖ2 xxx%
SS1:xx.x SS2:xx.x °C SS1:xx.x SS2:xx.x °C SS1:xx.x SS2:xx.x °C SS1:xx.x SS2:xx.x °C Тп1:xx.x Тп2:xx.x °C
COP:xx.x CTR ON XXXX COP:xx.x CTR ON XXXX COP:xx.x CTR ON XXXX COP:xx.x CTR SU XXXX КПД:xx.x УПР ПО XXXX
(XXX= LWT/RWT/ (XXX=WVT/WRT/ (XXX=LWT/RWT/ (XXX=TEE/TSE/ (XXXX= Ts2/Ts1/
OET/REM/ OET/REM/ OET/REM/ OET/REM/ OET/REM/
AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/SP/EXT/SCT) AIN/Рв/EXT/SCT)
CONDENSER PARAMETERS CONDENSER PARAMETERS PARAM. CONDENSATORE CONDENSER PARAMETERS ОХЛАЖДАЮЩАЯ ВОДА
ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xPSI ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xPSI ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xPSI ICP:xx.x OCP:xx.xPSI Pw1 xx.x Pw2 xx.xPSI
ICT:xx.x OCT:xx.x °F ICT:xx.x OCT:xx.x °F ICT:xx.x OCT:xx.x °F ICT:xx.x OCT:xx.x °F Tw1 xx.x Tw2 xx.x °F
COND.FLUX: xx.xmc/h COND.FLUX: xx.xmc/h PORTATA: xx.xmc/h COND.FLUX: xx.xmc/h РАСХОД Qw xx.x м3/ч
EVAPORAT. PARAMETERS EVAPORAT. PARAMETERS PARAM. EVAPORATORE EVAPORAT. PARAMETERS ХЛАДОНОСИТЕЛЬ
IWP:XX.X OWP:XX.XPSI IWP:XX.X OWP:XX.XPSI IWP:XX.X OWP:XX.XPSI IWP:XX.X OWP:XX.XPSI Ps1 xx.x Ps2 xx.xPSI
RWT:xx.x LWT:xx.x °F RWT:xx.x LWT:xx.x °F RWT:xx.x LWT:xx.x °F RWT:xx.x LWT:xx.x °F Ts1 xx.x Ts2 xx.x °F
EVAP.FLUX: XX.Xmc/h EVAP.FLUX: XX.Xmc/h PORTATA: xx.xmc/h EVAP.FLUX: XX.Xmc/h РАСХОД Qs xx.x м3/ч
5.8.2 MENU DESCRIPTION

MAIN MENU HAUPTMENU MENU PRINCIPALE MENU PRINCIPAL ГЛАВНОЕ МЕНЮ
Please select the Bitte waehlen Sie Selezionare il Menu Selectionnez le ПОЖАЛУЙСТА, ВЫБЕРИТЕ
Menu program das Menuprogramm desiderato Menu desire МЕНЮ
USER SETUP BENUTZER MENU SETUP UTENTE UTILIS. CONFIG МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ.
SERVICE SETUP SERVICE MENU SETUP SERVIZIO SERVICE CONFIG СЕРВИС-МЕНЮ
MANUFACTURER SETUP HERSTELLER MENU SETUP COSTRUTTORE CONSTRUCTEUR CONFIG МЕНЮ ИЗГОТОВИТЕЛЯ
I/O SETUP I/O MENU SETUP I/O I/O CONFIG КОНФ. ВВОДА/ВЫВОДА
ALARM HISTORY ALARMAUFZEICHNU. STORICO ALLARMI ALARMES HISTORIQUE ЖУРНАЛ АВАРИЙ
HW KEY PROGRAMMING HW KEY PROGRAMM. PROGRAMM. CON HW KEY HW KEY PROGRAMM. ПРОГР. С ВНЕШ УСТ.
TIMER SETUP ZEITSCHALTUHR SETUP TIMER PROGRAMMATEUR CONFIG УСТАНОВКА ТАЙМЕРА
TIME AND DATE DATUM UND UHRZEIT ORA E DATA HEURE ET DATE ДАТА И ВРЕМЯ
INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACCIA INTERFACE ИНТЕРФЕЙС
UNIT CHECKS UNIT CHECKS UNIT CHECKS UNIT CHECKS UNIT CHECKS
MENU EXIT MENU BEENDEN ESCI DAL MENU MENU SORTIE ВЫЙТИ ИЗ МЕНЮ
USER SETUP BENUTZER MENU SETUP UTENTE UTILISATEUR CONFIG МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ
Insert Password Eingabe Passwort Inserire Password Entrer mot de passe ВВОД ПАРОЛЯ

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Modify Ändern Cambia Modifier ИЗМЕНИТЬ

NO NEIN NO NON НЕТ
YES JA SI OUI ДА
OFF EIN OFF OFF ВЫКЛ
ON AUS ON ON ВКЛ

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.8.3 ALARMS

Compressor N. VERDICHTER N. COMPRESSORE N COMPRESSEUR N. КОМПРЕССОР N.
or oder o ou или
MASTER MASTER MASTER MAITRE ЗАДАЮЩИЙ МОДУЛЬ
Description Beschreibung Descrizione Description Описание

COMPRESSOR N VERDICHTER N COMPRESSORE N COMPRESSEUR N КОМПРЕССОР N
or oder o ou или
MASTER MASTER MASTER MAITRE ЗАДАЮЩИЙ МОДУЛЬ
Description Beschreibung Description Description Описание
PRESS <ESC> TO RESET <ESC> FUER QUITTIER. <ESC> PER RESETTARE <ESC> POUR REARMER. <ESC> ДЛЯ СБРОСА
5.8.3.1 Alarm description

MACHINE ALARMS
POWER OFF SPANNUNGSAUSFALL TENSIONE MANCANTE REMOTE SP CONNECTION НЕТ. ПИТАНИЯ
WATER OVERTEMP. WASSERUEBERTEMPERAT. SURRISC. ACQUA EXCES TEMP. EAU ПЕРЕГРЕВ ВОДЫ
LWT TR. OUT OF RANGE WVT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LWT TSE HORS PLAGE ДТЧК Ts2 ВНЕ ДИАП.
RWT TR. OUT OF RANGE WRT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RWT TEE HORS PLAGE ДТЧК Ts1 ВНЕ ДИАП.
FREEZE PROTECTION AL FROSTSCHUTZ PROTEZIONE ANTIGELO COUPURE ANTIGEL АНТИФРИЗ
NO WATER CIRCULATION KEINE WASSERZIRKULA. NO WATER CIRCULATION PAS DE CIRCUL. EAU. НЕТ ЦИРКУЛЯЦ ВОДЫ
PWR LINE ANALYZ. COM FEHLER SER WATTMETER COMUNICAZ. WATTMETRO COMM. ALIM ELECTR. ОШИБКА ВАТТМЕТРА
ULIM TR.OUT OF RANGE ULIM FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ULIM CAPTEUR ULIM HS ULIM НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
EV1T TR.OUT OF RANGE EV1T FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EV1T CAPTEUR EV1T HS ЭРВ ИСПАР НЕИСПР.
EV2T TR.OUT OF RANGE EV2T FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EV2T CAPTEUR EV2T HS ЭРВ ПЕРЕПУСК НЕИСПР.
TA TR.OUT OF RANGE TA FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TA CAPTEUR TA HS TA НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
REMOTE SP CONNECTION REM SW FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE REM SP CDE DISTANCE FAUTE ОТДАЛ ДАТЧ СП
PUMP1 BREAKER FAULT PUMPE1 FEHLER THERM. MAGNETO TERM. POMPA1 POMPE 1 DISJONCTION НАСОС1 ОШИБК ТЕРМ
PUMP2 BREAKER FAULT PUMPE2 FEHLER THERM. MAGNETO TERM. POMPA2 POMPE 2 DISJONCTION НАСОС2 ОШИБК ТЕРМ
TFC TR.OUT OF RANGE TFC FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TFC CAPTEUR TFC HS НЕИСПР ДАТЧК ОВЛ
TAE TR.OUT OF RANGE TAE FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TAE CAPTEUR TAE HS НЕИСПР ДАТЧК Tос
OVER VOLTAGE UEBERSPANNUNG TENSIONE ELEVATA SURTENSION U ВЫШЕ НОРМ
UNDER VOLTAGE UNTERSPANNUNG TENSIONE BASSA SOUTENSION U НИЖЕ НОРМ
PHASE MISSING/WRONG PHASENFEHLER SEQUENZA FASI ERRATA ERREUR PHASE ОТКЛОН/НЕТ ФАЗЫ
SIM NOT READY SIMFEHLER SIM NON PRONTA ERREUR SIM SIM НЕ ГОТОВ
GSM LOW SIGNAL GSM SIGNAL NIEDRIG SEGNALE GSM BASSO GSM SIGNAL BAS GSM НИЗК СИГНАЛ
CALL ASSISTANCE ANWESENHEIT BENENNEN CHIAMARE ASSISTENZA APPELER ASSISTANCE ВЫЗВАТЬ СЕРВИС
HIGH EVAP#1 DROP HO VERD#1 TROPFEN ALTA PERDITA EVAP#1 HAUT BAISSE EVAPOR#1 ВЫС ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#1
HIGH EVAP#2 DROP HO VERD#2 TROPFEN ALTA PERDITA EVAP#2 HAUT BAISSE EVAPOR#2 ВЫС ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#2
LOW EVAP#1 DROP NI VERD#1 TROPFEN BASSA PERDITA EVAP#1 BAS BAISSE EVAPOR#1 НИЗ ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#1
LOW EVAP#2 DROP NI VERD#2 TROPFEN BASSA PERDITA EVAP#2 BAS BAISSE EVAPOR#2 НИЗ ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#2
SERIAL COMM. REM CTR SER.SCHNITT ENT KONT COMUNIC.CONTR.REMOTO COMM.SERIEL.TELECOMM ПОСЛ.СВЯЗЬ ДИСТ.КОНТ
HIGH RWT TEMPERATURE HOHOS WRT TEMPERAT. TEMPERAT. RWT ALTA TEMP. TEE HAUTE ВЫСОКАЯ Ts1
WATER LEVEL ON COND. WATER LEVEL ON COND. LIVELLO ACQUA COND. WATER LEVEL ON COND. УРОВ ВОДЫ В КОНД
ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER MAGN.TERM.POMPA ADIA ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER АД НАСОС ЗАЩ ТЕРМ
HEATERS PROTECT. HEATERS PROTECT. PROTEZ. RESISTENZE HEATERS PROTECT. ОБОГРЕВАТЕЛИ ЗАЩИТ
OET TR.OUT OF RANGE OET FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE OET CAPTEUR OET HS OET НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
TA_COR TR. FAULT TA_COR FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TA_COR CAPTEUR TA_COR HS TA_COR НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
AI_COR TR. FAULT AI_COR FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE AI_COR CAPTEUR AI_COR HS AI_COR НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
OCT TR.OUT OF RANGE OCT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE OCT CAPTEUR OCT HS ДТЧК Tw2 ВНЕ ДИАП.
ICT TR.OUT OF RANGE ICT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ICT CAPTEUR ICT HS ДТЧК Tw1 ВНЕ ДИАП.
ODT TR.OUT OF RANGE ODT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ODT CAPTEUR ODT HS ODT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
IDT TR.OUT OF RANGE IDT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE IDT CAPTEUR IDT HS IDT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
RH TR.OUT OF RANGE RH FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RH CAPTEUR RH HS RH НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
EXTC TR.OUT OF RANGE EXTC FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EXTC CAPTEUR EXTC HS EXTC НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
SCT TR.OUT OF RANGE SCT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE SCT CAPTEUR SCT HS SCT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
LWT2 TR.OUT OF RANGE WVT2 FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LWT2 TSE2 HORS PLAGE 2 ДТЧК Ts2 ВНЕ ДИАП.
RWT2 TR.OUT OF RANGE WRT2 FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RWT2 TEE2 HORS PLAGE 2 ДТЧК Ts1 ВНЕ ДИАП.
HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN WAR.ALTA PERD.EVAP1 HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN ТРЕВ ВЫС. dp ИСП.
HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN WAR.ALTA PERD.EVAP2 HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN
LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN WAR.BASSA PERD.EVAP1 LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN ТРЕВ НИЗК. dp ИСП.
LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN WAR.BASSA PERD.EVAP2 LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

HIGH COND DROP HIGH COND DROP ALTA PERDITA COND HIGH COND DROP ВЫС. dp КОНД.
LOW COND DROP LOW COND DROP BASSA PERDITA COND LOW COND DROP НИЗК. dp КОНД.
HIGH COND DROP WARN HIGH COND DROP WARN WARN.ALTA PERD.COND HIGH COND DROP WARN ВЫС. dp КОНД. ТРЕВ.
LOW COND DROP WARN LOW COND DROP WARN WARN BASSA PERD.COND LOW COND DROP WARN НИЗК. dp КОНД. ТРЕВ.
NL TR.OUT OF RANGE NL FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE NL CAPTEUR NL HS NL НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
LLT TR.OUT OF RANGE LLT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LLT CAPTEUR LLT HS LLT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN WARN. TEMP. RWT ALTA HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN ВЫСОКАЯ Ts1 ТРЕВ.
APT TR.OUT OF RANGE APT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE APT CAPTEUR APT HS APT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
COMMISSIONING NEED#1 COMMISSIONING NEED#1 COMMISSIONING NEED#1 COMMISSIONING NEED#1 COMMISSIONING NEED#1
CHECKING NEED#1 CHECKING NEED#1 CHECKING NEED#1 CHECKING NEED#1 CHECKING NEED#1
MAINTENANCE NEED#1 MAINTENANCE NEED#1 MAINTENANCE NEED#1 MAINTENANCE NEED#1 MAINTENANCE NEED#1
NO ALARM KEIN ALARM NESSUN ALLARME PAS D’ALARME НЕТ АВАРИЙ

CP/CIRCUIT ALARMS
EVAP.FREEZE PROTECT. VERDAMP FROSTSCHUTZ PROT. ANTIGELO EVAP. COUPURE ANTIGEL VAP. ЗАЩ РАЗМРЗК ИСПАР
WINDING TEMP. WINDING TEMP. TEMP. AVVOLGIMENTI WINDING TEMP. ТЕМП ОБМОТКИ
BREAKER FAULT FEHLER THERMISCH MAGNETO TERMICO DEFAUT BREAKER ОШИБКА ПУСКАТЕЛЯ
TURBOCOR FAULT STS TURBOCOR FEHLER STS TURBOCOR IN ALLARME TURBOCOR FAULT STS АВАРИЯ ТУРБОКОР
SENSOR TURBOCOR SENSOR TURBOCOR SENSORE TURBOCOR SENSOR TURBOCOR СЕНСОР ТУРБОКОР
LPI TR. OUT OF RANGE LPI FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LPI CAPTEUR LPI HS НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ LPI
LPO TR. OUT OF RANGE LPO FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LPO CAPTEUR LPO HS НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ LPO
ST TR. OUT OF RANGE ST FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ST CAPT. TEMP ASPI HS ДТЧК TВС ВНЕ ДИАП.
TOO MANY PUMP DOWNS ZU VIELE PUMP DOWN NR ELEVATO PUMP DOWN TROP DE PUMP DOWN МН РАЗ ВАКУУМ НАСОС
EEV BOARD COM ALARM EEV PLATINENFEHLER EEV COMUNIC. SERIALE ALARME CARTE EEV ОШИБКА ПЛАТЫ ЭРВ
SUCTION PRES. LOW NIEDERDRUCK BASSA PRESSIONE PRESS. ASP. BASSE НИЗКОЕ Рв
DISCHARGE PRES. HIGH HOCHDRUCK ALTA PRESSIONE PRESS. REF. HAUTE ВЫСОКОЕ Рн
FAN PROTECTION VENTILATORSCHUTZ PROTEZIONE VENTILAT. PROTECTION VENTIL ЗАЩИТА ВЕНТИЛ
LOCK OUT FAULT LOCK OUT FAULT LOCK OUT FAULT LOCK OUT FAULT АВАР. БЛОКИРОВКА
HIGH PRES. SWT FAULT FEHLER HOCHDRUCK PROTEZ. DI ALTA PRES COUPURE PRESSOST. HP ВЫС ДАВЛ ОТКЛ
SERIAL COMUNICATION SERIELE SCHNITT COMUNICAZ. SERIALE COMMUNICATION SERIE СЕРИЙНАЯ СВЯЗЬ
TURBOCOR COM FEHLER SER TURBOCOR COMUNICAZ. TURBOCOR COMM. TURBOCOR СБОЙ ИНТ. ПЛАТЫ
HIGH MOTOR CURRENT HOHER MOTORSTROM ALTA CORRENTE MOTORE SURINTENSITE ВЫСОК ТОК ДВИГ.
LIQ.PUMP BREAKER FLT LIQ.PUMPE FEHL.THER. MAGN.TERM.POMPA LIQ. LIQ.POMPE DISJONCT. АВАРИЯ ЖИДК.НАСОСА
AUX ALARM HILFSALARM ALLARME AUSILIARIO AUXILLIAIRE ALARME ВСП.АВАР.СИГНАЛ
SUCTION TEMP. LOW NIEDRIGE SAUGTEMP. TEMP. ASPIR. BASSA TEMP. ASP. BASSE НИЗКАЯ Тв
EEV IN OSCILLATION EEV IN PENDELBEWEG. EEV IN OSCILLAZIONE EEV DANS L'OSCILLAT. КОЛЕБАНИЕ ЭРВ
DISCHARGE TEMP. HIGH ENTLADUNGSTEMP HOCH TEMP. SCARICO ALTA TEMP. DECHARGE HAUTE ВЫСОК Тн
HIGH SUPERHEAT HOHES UBERHITZEN SURRISCALD. ALTO SURCHAUFFE HAUTE ВЫСОКИЙ Tп
LOW SUPERHEAT NIEDRIGES UBERHITZEN SURRISCALD. BASSO SURCHAUFFE BASSE НИЗКИЙ Tп
SUPERHEAT TURBOCOR SUPERHEAT TURBOCOR SURRISCALD. TURBOCOR SUPERHEAT TURBOCOR ПЕРЕГРЕВ ТУРБОКОРА
AUTORESTART AUTORESTART AUTORESTART AUTORESTART АВТ.ПЕРЕЗАГРУЗ
INVERTER TEMP. INVERTER TEMP. INVERTER TEMP. INVERTER TEMP. Тинв
SHAFT CAVITY TEMP. SHAFT CAVITY TEMP. SHAFT CAVITY TEMP. SHAFT CAVITY TEMP. Тпл
COMPRESSION RATIO COMPRESSION RATIO COMPRESSION RATIO COMPRESSION RATIO КОЭФ.СЖАТИЯ
BEARING MOTOR BEARING MOTOR BEARING MOTOR BEARING MOTOR ДВИГ/ПОДШИП
SCR TEMP. SCR TEMP. SCR TEMP. SCR TEMP. Твыпр.
LEAVING WATER TEMP. LEAVING WATER TEMP. LEAVING WATER TEMP. LEAVING WATER TEMP. Ts2
EEV WINDING EEV KRONKELEND AVVOLGIMENTI EEV ENROULEMENT EEV ОБРЫВ ЭРВ
EEV BATTERY LEVEL EEV BATTERIE NIVEAU LIVELLO BATTERIA EEV NIVEAU BATTERIE EEV ЗАРЯД БАТАРЕИ ЭРВ
EEV BATT. TO CHANGE EEV BATT.ZUM AENDERN SOSTITUIRE BATT. EEV CHANGER BATT. EEV ЗАМЕНИТЬ БАТАРЕИ ЭРВ
ES-PUMP FAULT ES-PUMPE FEHLER ANOMALIA POMPA-ES ES-POMPE DISJONCTION ES-НАСОС ОШИБК
EXP. BOARD1 COM.ERR EXP1.PLATINENFEHLER COM.SERIALE ESP1.I/O ALARME CARTE1 EXP. ОШИБКА ПЛАТЫ EXP1.
EXT_DEM TR. FAULT EXT_DEM FUEH. BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EXT_DEM CAPTEUR EXT_DEM HS EXT_DEM НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
ST2 TR. OUT OF RANGE ST2 FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ST2 CAPT. TEMP ASPI 2 HS НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ TВС 2
SLT TR. OUT OF RANGE SLT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE SLT CAPTEUR SLT HS НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ SLT

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
5.8.3.2 Alarm history code

MACHINE ALARMS
POWER OFF SPANNUNGSAUSFALL TENSIONE MANCANTE MANQUE TENSION НЕТ ПИТАНИЯ
WATER OVERTEMP WASSERUEBERTEMPERAT. SURRISC. ACQUA TEMP. EAU EXCESSIVE ПЕРЕГР ВОДЫ
LWT TR. FAULT WVT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LWT TSE TR DEFAUT ДТЧК Ts2 НЕИСПР
RWT TR. FAULT WRT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RWT TEE TR DEFAUT ДТЧК Ts1.НЕИСПР
FREEZE PROTECTION FROSTSCHUTZ PROTEZIONE ANTIGELO ANTI GEL АНТИФРИЗ
NO WATER CIRCULAT. KEINE WASSERZIRKULA. NO WATER CIRCULATION PAS DE CIRCUL. EAU НЕТ ЦИРКУЛЯЦ ВОДЫ
PWR LINE ANALYZ. COM FEHLER SER WATTMETER COMUNICAZ. WATTMETRO COMM. ALIM ELECTR. ОШИБКА ВАТТМЕТРА
ULIM TR. FAULT ULIM FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ULIM CAPTEUR ULIM DEFAUT ULIM НЕИСПР ДТЧК
EV1T TR. FAULT EV1T FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EV1T CAPTEUR EV1T DEFAUT НЕИСПР ДТЧК Ts осн.
EV2T TR. FAULT EV2T FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EV2T CAPTEUR EV2T DEFAUT НЕИСПР ДТЧК Ts рез.
TA TR. FAULT TA FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TA CAPTEUR TA DEFAUT TA НЕИСПР ДТЧК
REMOTE SP CONNECT. REM SW FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE REM SP CDE DISTANCE FAUTE ОШИБКА ДИСТ ДТЧК
PUMP1 BREAKER FAULT PUMPE1 FEHLER THERM. MAGNETO TERM. POMPA1 POMP1 DEFAUT DISJON НАСОС1 ОШИБКА ТЕРМ.
PUMP2 BREAKER FAULT PUMPE2 FEHLER THERM. MAGNETO TERM. POMPA2 POMP2 DEFAUT DISJON НАСОС2 ОШИБКА ТЕРМ.
RH TR. FAULT RH FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RH CAPTEUR RH DEFAUT НЕИС ДАТЧК ОВЛ
TAE TR. FAULT TAE FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TAE CAPTEUR TAE DEFAUT НЕИС ДАТЧК ОКРВОЗД
OVER VOLTAGE UEBERSPANNUNG TENSIONE ELEVATA SURTENSION ПОВЫШ. U
UNDER VOLTAGE UNTERSPANNUNG TENSIONE BASSA SOUSTENSION ПОНИЖ. U
PHASE MISSING/WRONG PHASENFEHLER SEQUENZA FASI ERRATA PHASE DEFECTUEUSE НЕТ ФАЗЫ
SIM NOT READY SIMFEHLER SIM NON PRONTA ERREUR SIM ОШИБКА SIM
GSM LOW SIGNAL GSM SIGNAL NIEDRIG SEGNALE GSM BASSO GSM SIGNAL BAS СИГНЛ SIM НИЗК
CALL ASSISTANCE ANWESENHEIT BENENNEN CHIAMARE ASSISTENZA APPELER ASSISTANCE ВЫЗВАТЬ СЕРВИС
HI EVAP#1 DROP HO VERD#1 TROPFEN ALTA PERDITA EVAP#1 HAUT BAISSE EVAPOR#1 ВЫС. ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#1
HI EVAP#2 DROP HO VERD#2 TROPFEN ALTA PERDITA EVAP#2 HAUT BAISSE EVAPOR#2 ВЫС. ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#2
LO EVAP#1 DROP NI VERD#1 TROPFEN BASSA PERDITA EVAP#1 BAS BAISSE EVAPOR#1 НИЗ. ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#1
LO EVAP#2 DROP NI VERD#2 TROPFEN BASSA PERDITA EVAP#2 BAS BAISSE EVAPOR#2 НИЗ. ПЕРЕПАД ИСП#2
SERIAL COMM. REM CTR SER.SCHNITT ENT KONT COMUNIC.CONTR.REMOTO COMM.SERIEL.TELECOMM СВЯЗЬ ДИСТ.КОНТ
HIGH RWT TEMPERATURE HOHOS WRT TEMPERAT. TEMPERAT. RWT ALTA TEMP. TEE HAUTE ВЫСОКАЯ Ts1
WATER LEVEL ON COND. WATER LEVEL ON COND. LIVELLO ACQUA COND. WATER LEVEL ON COND. УРОВ ВОДЫ В КОНД
ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER MAGN.TERM.POMPA ADIA ADIAB. PUMP BREAKER АД НАСОС ЗАЩ ТЕРМ
HEATERS PROTECT. HEATERS PROTECT. PROTEZ. RESISTENZE HEATERS PROTECT. ОБОГРЕВАТЕЛИ
OET TR. FAULT OET FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE OET CAPTEUR OET DEFAUT OET НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
TA_COR TR. FAULT TA_COR FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE TA_COR CAPTEUR TA_COR DEF. TA_COR НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
AI_COR TR. FAULT AI_COR FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE AI_COR CAPTEUR AI_COR DEF. AI_COR НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
OCT TR. FAULT OCT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE OCT CAPTEUR OCT DEFAUT ДТЧК Tw2 НЕИСПР
ICT TR. FAULT ICT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ICT CAPTEUR ICT DEFAUT ДТЧК Tw1 НЕИСПР
ODT TR. FAULT ODT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE ODT CAPTEUR ODT DEFAUT ODT НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
IDT TR. FAULT IDT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE IDT CAPTEUR IDT DEFAUT IDT НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
RH TR. FAULT RH FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RH CAPTEUR RH DEFAUT RH НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
EXTC TR.OUT OF RANGE EXTC FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE EXTC CAPTEUR EXTC DEFAUT EXTC НЕИСПР. ДАТЧК
SCT TR.OUT OF RANGE SCT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE SCT CAPTEUR SCT DEFAUT SCT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
LWT2 TR. FAULT WVT2 FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LWT2 TSE2 TR DEFAUT 2 ДТЧК Ts2 НЕИСПР
RWT2 TR. FAULT WRT2 FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE RWT2 TEE2 TR DEFAUT 2 ДТЧК Ts1 НЕИСПР
HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN WAR.ALTA PERD.EVAP1 HI EVAP#1 DROP WARN ВЫС. dp ИСП. ТРЕВ.
HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN WAR.ALTA PERD.EVAP2 HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN HI EVAP#2 DROP WARN
LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN WAR.BASSA PERD.EVAP1 LOW EVAP#1 DROP WARN НИЗК. dp ИСП. ТРЕВ.
LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN WAR.BASSA PERD.EVAP2 LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN LOW EVAP#2 DROP WARN
HIGH COND DROP HIGH COND DROP ALTA PERDITA COND HIGH COND DROP ВЫС. dp ИСП.
LOW COND DROP LOW COND DROP BASSA PERDITA COND LOW COND DROP НИЗК dp КОНД.
HIGH COND DROP WARN HIGH COND DROP WARN WARN.ALTA PERD.COND HIGH COND DROP WARN ВЫС. dp КОНД. ТРЕВ.
LOW COND DROP WARN LOW COND DROP WARN WARN BASSA PERD.COND LOW COND DROP WARN НИЗК dp КОНД. ТРЕВ.
NL TR. FAULT NL FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE NL CAPTEUR NL DEFAUT NL НЕИСПР ДАТЧК
LLT TR. FAULT LLT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE LLT CAPTEUR LLT DEFAUT LLT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN WARN. TEMP. RWT ALTA HIGH RWT TEMP. WARN ВЫСОКАЯ Ts1 ТРЕВ.
APT TR. FAULT APT FUEHLER BRUCH TRASDUTTORE APT CAPTEUR APT DEFAUT APT НЕИСПР. ДАТЧ
NO ALARM RECORDING KEINE ALARMAUFZEICH. NESSUN ALLARME PAS D’ALARME RACCOR. НЕТ АВАРИЙ В ПАМЯТИ
CP/CIRCUIT ALARMS

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

CPN EVAP.FREEZE PROT CPN VERDAMP FROSTSCH CPN ANTIGELO EVAP. CPN ANTIGEL VAP. КМN АНТИФРИЗ
CPN WINDING TEMP. CPN WINDING TEMP. CPN TEMP. AVVOLGIM. CPN WINDING TEMP. КМN Tобм
CPN BREAKER FAULT CPN FEHLER THERMISCH CPN MAGNETO TERMICO CPN BREAKER DISJONC. КМN ОШИБКА ПУСКАТ.
CPN TURBOCOR FLT STS CPN TURBOCOR FEH.STS CPN TURBOCOR IN ALL. CPN TURBOCOR FLT STS КМN ОШИБКА СТАТУСА
CPN SENSOR TURBOCOR CPN SENSOR TURBOCOR CPN SENSORE TURBOCOR CPN SENSOR TURBOCOR КМN НЕИСПР. ДТЧК
CPN LPI TR. FAULT CPN LPI FUEH. BRUCH CPN TRASDUTTORE LPI CPN LPI CAPTEUR КМN LPI ДАТЧИК
CPN LPO TR. FAULT CPN LPO FUEH. BRUCH CPN TRASDUTTORE LPO CPN LPI CAPTEUR КМN LPO ДАТЧИК
CPN ST TR. FAULT CPN ST FUEHLER BRUCH CPN TRASDUTTORE ST CPN SP CAPTEUR КМN Tв НЕИСП ДТЧК
CPN PUMP DOWN CPN PUMP DOWN CPN PUMP DOWN CPN PUMP DOWN КМN ОТКАЧКА
CPN EEV BOARD ERROR CPN EEV PLATINENFEH. CPN EEV COM. SERIALE CPN EEV PLATINE ERR. КМN ОШИБКА ПЛ ЭРВ
CPN SUCT PRES. LOW CPN NIEDERDRUCK CPN BASSA PRESSIONE CPN PRES. ASP BASSE КМN НИЗКАЯ Pв
CPN DISC PRES HIGH CPN HOCHDRUCK CPN ALTA PRESSIONE CPN PRES. REF HAUTE КМN ВЫСОКОЕ Pн
CPN FAN PROTECTION CPN VENTILATORSCHUTZ CPN PROTEZIONE VENT. CPN VENTIL PROTECT. КМN ЗАЩИТА ВЕНТ.
CPN LOCK OUT FAULT CPN LOCK OUT FAULT CPN LOCK OUT FAULT CPN LOCK OUT FAULT КМN АВАР. БЛОКИРОВКА
CPN HIGH P SWT FLT CPN FEHLER HOCHDRUCK CPN PROT. ALTA PRES. CPN PRESS HP DEFAUT КМN ВЫС ДАВЛ ВКЛ
CPN COM ERROR CPN SERIELE SCHNITT CPN COMUNIC. SERIALE CPN COMM SERIE КМN ОШИБКА ИНТ ПЛАТЫ
CPN TURBOCOR COM CPN FEHLER TURBOCOR CPN COMUN. TURBOCOR CPN TURBOCOR COM КМN ОШИБКА СВЯЗИ
CPN HIGH MOTOR CURR. CPN HOHER MOTORSTROM CPN CORRENTE MOTORE CPN EXCES CT MOTEUR КМN ВЫС. ТОК ДВИГ.
CPN LIQ.PUMP BRK FLT CPN LIQ.PUMPE FEHLER CPN MT POMPA LIQ. CPN LIQ.POMPE DISJ. КМN ОШИБКА ВОД.НАСОС
CPN AUX ALARM CPN HILFSALARM CPN ALL. AUSILIARIO CPN ALARME AUXIL. КМN ВСП.АВАР.СИГНАЛ
CPN SUCT. TEMP. LOW CPN NIEDR. SAUGTEMP. CPN TEMP. ASP. BASSA CPN TEMP. ASP. BASS КМN НИЗКАЯ Tв
CPN EEV IN OSCILLAT. CPN EEV IN PENDELBE. CPN EEV IN OSCILLAZ. CPN EEV OSCILLATIONS КМN КОЛЕБАНИЕ ЭРВ
CPN DISCH.TEMP. HIGH CPN ENTLADUNGST HOCH CPN TEMP.SCARIC.ALTA CPN TEMP.DECH. HAUTE КМN ВЫСОКАЯ Tн
CPN HIGH SUPERHEAT CPN HOHES UBERHITZEN CPN SURRISCALD. ALTO CPN SURCHAUFFE HAUTE КМN ВЫСОКИЙ Тп
CPN LOW SUPERHEAT CPN NIEDR.UBERHITZEN CPN SURRISC. BASSO CPN SURCHAUFFE BASSE КМN НИЗКИЙ Тп
CPN SUPERHEAT TCOR CPN SUPERHEAT TCOR CPN SURRISCALD. TCOR CPN SUPERHEAT TCOR КМN ПЕРЕГРЕВ ТУРБ.
CPN AUTORESTART CPN AUTORESTART CPN AUTORESTART CPN AUTORESTART КМN АВТ.ПЕРЕЗАГРУЗ
CPN INVERTER TEMP. CPN INVERTER TEMP. CPN INVERTER TEMP. CPN INVERTER TEMP. КМN Tинв
CPN SHAFT CAV. TEMP. CPN SHAFT CAV. TEMP. CPN SHAFT CAV. TEMP. CPN SHAFT CAV. TEMP. КМN Tпол
CPN COMPRESS. RATIO CPN COMPRESS. RATIO CPN COMPRESS. RATIO CPN COMPRESS. RATIO КМN КОЭФ.СЖАТИЯ
CPN BEARING MOTOR CPN BEARING MOT/CURR CPN BEARING MOT/CURR CPN BEARING MOT/CURR КМN МОТОР/ПОДШИПНИКИ
CPN SCR TEMP. CPN SCR TEMP. CPN SCR TEMP. CPN SCR TEMP. КМN Tвып
CPN LEAV.WATER TEMP. CPN LEAV.WATER TEMP. CPN LEAV.WATER TEMP. CPN LEAV.WATER TEMP. КМN Ts2
CPN EEV WINDING CPN EEV KRONKELEND CPN AVVOLGIMENTI EEV CPN ENROULEMENT EEV КМN ОБРЫВ ЭРВ
CPN EEV BATT. LEVEL CPN EEV BATT. NIVEAU CPN LIVELLO BATT.EEV CPN NIVEAU BATT.EEV КМN УРОВ. БАТ. ЭРВ
CPN EEV BATT. CHANGE CPN EEV BATT.AENDERN CPN SOSTIT. BATT.EEV CPN CHANGER BATT.EEV КМN ЗАМЕНА БАТ. ЭРВ
CPN ES-PUMP FAULT CPN ES-PUMPE FEHLER CPN ANOM. POMPA-ES CPN ES-POMPE DISJON. КМN ES-НАСОС ОШИБК
CPN EXP. BOARD1 COM. CPN EXP1.PLATINENFE. CPN COM. ESP1.I/O CPN CARTE1 EXP. ERR КМN ОШИБКА ПЛ EXP1
CPN EXT_DEM TR.FAULT CPN EXT_DEM FU.BRUCH CPN TRASDUTT.EXT_DEM CPN EXT_DEM CAPTEUR КМN EXT_DEM ДАТЧИК
CPN ST2 TR. FAULT CPN ST2 FUEHL.BRUCH CPN TRASDUTTORE ST2 CPN SP2 CAPTEUR КМN ST2 НЕИСП ДАТЧК
CPN SLT TR. FAULT CPN SLT FUEH. BRUCH CPN TRASDUTTORE SLT CPN SLT CAPTEUR КМN SLT ДАТЧИК
5.8.4 USER SETUP

USER SETUP MM01 BENUTZER MENU MM01 USER SETUP MM01 UTILIS. CONFIG MM01 МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ MM01
LANGUAGE: 0=EN 1=DE SPRACHE: 0=EN 1=DE LINGUA: 0=IN 1=TE LANGUE: 0=EN 1=DE ЯЗЫК: 0=EN 1=DE
2=IT 3=FR 4=RU 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU 2=IT 3=FR 4=RU
0 0 0 0 0
NUMBER OF TIME BLOCK ZAHL DER ZEITCBLOCK NUMERO BLOCCHI ORARI NOMBRE DU BLOC DE КОЛ-ВО ТАЙМ. БЛОКОВ
SCHEDULING(0=NO) TERMINPLANUNG (0=NO) PROGRAMMABILI(0=NO) TEMPS PROGRAM.(0=NO) ПЛАНИРОВАНИЕ (0=НЕТ)
0 0 0 0 0
TIME FOR STARTING ZEIT FUR DAS ANSTEL. ORARIO PER ACCENS. HEURE POUR METTRE EN ВРЕМЯ ВКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
MACHINE IN BLOCK#1 MASCHINE,BLOCK #1 MACCHINA, BLOCCO#1 MARCHE, BLOC#1 МАШИНА, БЛОК#1
14h 36m 4h 36m 14h 36m 14h 36m 14ч 36м
TIME FOR STOPPING ZEIT FUR DAS STOPPEN ORARIO PER SPEGNIM. HEURE POUR ARRETER ВРЕМЯ ОСТАНОВКИ
MACHINE IN BLOCK#1 DER MASCHINE,BLOCK#1 MACCHINA, BLOCCO#1 LA MACHINE, BLOC#1 МАШИНА, БЛОК#1

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
14h 36m 4h 36m 14h 36m 14h 36m 14ч 36м

14h 36m 4h 36m 14h 36m 14h 36m 14ч 36м
14h 36m 4h 36m 14h 36m 14h 36m 14ч 36м
14h 36m 4h 36m 14h 36m 14h 36m 14ч 36м
14h 36m 4h 36m 14h 36m 14h 36m 14ч 36м
USER SETUP MT04 BENUTZER MENU MT04 USER SETUP MT04 UTILIS. CONFIG MT04 МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ MT04
UPPER DEMAND LIMIT OBERE NACHFRAGEGREN. VALORE PER LIMITAZ. LIMITE SUP. DEMANDE ВЕРХ.ПРЕДЕЛ ЗАПРОСА
VALUE (100=NO) (100=NO) DEMAND (100=NO) (100=NO) (100=NO)
UPPER DEMAND LIMIT OBERE NACHFRAGEGREN. UPPER DEMAND LIMIT LIMITE SUP. DEMANDE ВЕРХ.ПРЕДЕЛ ЗАПРОСА
(0=AI-ULIM 100=NO) (0=AI-ULIM 100=NO) (0=AI-ULIM 100=NO) (0=AI-ULIM 100=NO) (0=AI-ULIM 100=NO)
100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
SET POINT FOR SOLLWERT FUER SET POINT PER CONSIGNE POUR ПАРАМЕТР ДЛЯ
TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATURKONTROLLE CONTROLLO TEMPERAT. CONTROLE TEMP. КОНТРОЛЬ ТЕМПЕРАТУРЫ
40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F
SET POINT II FOR SOLLWERT II FUER SET POINT II PER CONSIGNE II POUR ЗАД.ПАРАМЕТР II ДЛЯ
TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATURKONTROLLE CONTROLLO TEMPERAT. CONTROLE TEMP. КОНТРОЛЬ ТЕМПЕРАТУРЫ
40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F
USER SETUP MH03 BENUTZER MENU MH03 USER SETUP MH03 UTILIS. CONFIG MH03 МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ MH03
SET POINT FOR TEMP. SOLLWERT FUER TEMP. SET POINT PER CONTR. CONSIGNE POUR CONTR. ЗАД. ПАРАМЕТР ТЕМП.
CONTROL – HEAT MODE KONTROLLE-HEIZ MODE TEMP. IN HEATING TEMP. – CHAUFF. MODE КОНТ.РЕЖИМА НАГРЕВА
40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F
USER SETUP MH04 BENUTZER MENU MH04 USER SETUP MH04 UTILIS. CONFIG MH04 МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ MH04
SET POINT II TEMP. SOLLWERT II TEMP. SET POINT II CONTR. CONSIGNE II CONTR. ЗАД.ПАРАМЕТР II ТЕМ.
CONTROL – HEAT MODE KONTROLLE-HEIZ MODE TEMP. IN HEATING TEMP. – CHAUFF. MODE КОНТ.РЕЖИМА НАГРЕВА
40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F 40°F
USER SETUP MX01 BENUTZER MENU MX01 USER SETUP MX01 UTILIS. CONFIG MX01 МЕНЮ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ MX01
EXT.PUMP WITH INV: EXT.PUMP WITH INV: EXT.PUMP WITH INV: EXT.PUMP WITH INV: ВНЕШ.НАС. С ИНВЕНТ.
0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT 0=NO 1=COOL 2=RWT
0 0 0 0 0
EXT.PUMP EXT.PUMP EXT.PUMP EXT.PUMP ВНЕШ.НАСОС
MINIMUM VOLTAGE MINIMUM VOLTAGE MINIMUM VOLTAGE MINIMUM VOLTAGE МИНИМ.НАПРЯЖЕНИЕ
0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
EXT.PUMP EXT.PUMP EXT.PUMP EXT.PUMP ВНЕШ.НАСОС
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE МАКСИМ.НАПРЯЖЕНИЕ
100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
SETPOINT FOR SETPOINT FOR SETPOINT FOR SETPOINT FOR НАСТРОЙКИ ДЛЯ
EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL КОНТРЛ ВНЕШ НАСОС
50°F 50°F 50°F 50°F 50°F
PROP.BAND FOR PROP.BAND FOR PROP.BAND FOR PROP.BAND FOR ПРОП.ДИАП. FOR
EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL КОНТРОЛЯ ВН.НАСОСА
10°F 10°F 10°F 10°F 10°F
INTEGRAL TIME FOR INTEGRAL TIME FOR INTEGRAL TIME FOR INTEGRAL TIME FOR ИНТЕГРАЛ.ВРЕМЯ ДЛЯ
EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL EXT.PUMP CONTROL КОНТРОЛЯ ВН.НАСОСА
0sec 0sec 0sec 0sec 0sec

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6. MONITORING SYSTEMS
6.1 LOCAL MONITORING

6.1.1 PEMS COMMUNICATION
This monitoring mode is enabled when MS02=0.
The monitoring is based on OnBoard software installed on PC and connected to S10 Master board
via serial line by PEMS protocol (Project Engineering proprietary protocol).
The PEMS address of S10 board is specified by setup parameter MS01.
Chiller unit
Chiller RS
controller IS232 PC
232
SB6 with
RS232
OnBoard
cable
6.1.1.1 ETH board connections

By the ETH board it is possibile:
 doing a PEMS connection over Ethernet cable
 adding a serial port for PEMS communication
 connecting a panel PC based on PEMS communication which is explained in the document
SP874GEO
For the possible architectures with this solution, refer to the document SP877GEO.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.1.2 MODBUS COMMUNICATION

The communication with modbus protocol is possible by the Modbus gateway connected via serial
line to the master board (S10).
Modbus is implemented with followings characteristics:
Protocol: MODBUS-RTU
Baud Rate: 9600 bps
Data Bits: 8
Parity: N
Stop Bits: 1
Flow control none
6.1.2.1 ModBus functions

In the following paragraphs are shown the relationship between the ModBus functions and the
parameters of the software GEODTUxx. The descriptions for every function are in
ModbusApplicationProtocol_v1_1.pdf.
Following modbus functions are implemented:

- Read coil status (0x01)
- Read input status (0x02)
- Read holding registers (0x03)
- Read input registers (0x04)
- Force single coil (0x05)
- Write single register (0x06)
For more details on modbus datapoints make reference to TB001GEO_rev1.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.1.2.2 ModBus error messages

If the gateway receives a request which it can’t answer to, it will answer by an error message.
Some causes of error are:
 noise on serial line;
 data requested no existing;
 request for device no connected
 function requested no allowable
 bad checksum calculating
6.1.2.2.1 Address field error message

In the error message the address is the same of the request.
6.1.2.2.2 Function field error message

The function code is carry out setting to 1 the most significant bit of the request function code.
An example:
Request function code : 0x01 (read coil status)
Error message function code: 0x81
6.1.2.2.3 Data field error message

In the data field (1 byte) it is indicated a code which describes the error occured.
CODE NAME DESCRIPTION

01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code received is not allowable
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received is not allowable
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value contained in the request is not allowable
04 SLAVE DEVICE FAILURE The slave doesn’t answer. Typically, because the
value in address field is wrong.
6.1.2.2.4 Checksum field error message

The checksum field is 2 bytes: first byte is the LSB and the second one is the MSB.
The method to calculate the checksum is CRC16 (Cyclical Redundancy Checking).

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.1.2.3 Installing procedure
CHILLER#1 Modbus GW
(Master Board) COM4 COM1
Modbus
COM2 IS485 (485) (232/485) Supervision
System
COM2
(232)
CHILLER#N PC
(Master Board) with
COM2 IS485 OnBoard
software
Following steps are required for installing procedure:

1) Insert IS485 adapters on COM2/PRG of S10 Master Board.
2) Connect the IS485 adapter of S10 board with the serial port COM4 (RS485) of Modbus
Gateway. The jumpers configuration on IS485 adapter will be:
o IS485 inserted on the last chiller : X5,X6=closed and X4=open;
o IS485 inserted on the others chillers: X5,X6,X4=closed.
3) Connect the COM1 port (RS232/RS485) of Modbus Gateway to the Modbus supervision
system.
4) Connect the connector COM2/PRG of the first board to the connector COM2/PRG of the
second board.
5) It is possible to use OnBoard software (Project Engineering supervision system) connecting the
PC to COM2 port (RS232) of Modbus Gateway.
Notes
For details on Modbus Gateway configuration see the Sp673pe.doc Project Engineering technical
specific.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.1.2.4 ModBus-Lon interfacing

Modbus gateway can be interfaced with a LON gateway using a device template PRIO_42_10.
The LON-Type variables defined as OUTPUT are only read, while the variables defined as INPUT
are only write.
With one LON-Gateway it is possible to manage:
- 2 different units with 6 cp using a gateway WAGO
- 3 different units with 6 cp using a gateway PROTONODE-LER
For more details on datapoints make reference to TB001GEO document.
6.1.2.5 ModBus-Profibus interfacing

Modbus gateway can be interfaced with a PROFIBUS-gateway using:
- PEW_BASE = 400;
- PAW_BASE = 400;
- PAW488 = word for writing enable.
With one PROFIBUS-Gateway it is possible to manage 2 different units with 4 compressors

everyone.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.2 REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM

The Mother board can be equipped with an additional serial interface board and a special firmware
release which allows to connect it, via an appropriate Gateway (supplied by us), to a local
supervising PC or, through a Modem, to a remote PC.
The information exchanged are:
 Status of the Controller (every digital outputs of each compressor);
 Alarms occurred, with description;
 Controller SETUP (remotely modifiable) dump;
 Real time temperatures and pressures values.
 Real time analog outputs values.
 For compressor #1 and #2 (master board): Suction temperature, Superheat and integral
part of EEV control values.
 For compressor #1 and #2 (master board): digital input and output configuration.
 Start, Stop, Load Setup and Alarm Reset command.
From the PC side an appropriate software allow to easily view in tabular, or graphic format these
data as well as to interact with the boards setup.
The possibility to remotely connect via modem the System to a centralized maintenance center
helps to ensure a prompt and money/time saving reply to the most common operating failures,
avoiding in most of the cases the on-site intervention.
Solutions for unit remote monitoring.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.2.1 More Chillers Remote Monitoring through gateway

This configuration is used when MS02=0,2.
Site
GSM and
Chiller unit #1 Telephone net
Chiller Modem
controller IS485  Alarm history
SB2  Trends recording
Modem  Real Time RS232
GSM Controllers
PC
configuration
RS232 Remote
Chiller unit #2  Real time graphs monitoring
GATEWAY software
Chiller
controller IS485
SB2
RS485
cable
Chiller unit #8
Chiller
controller IS485
SB2
6.2.2 Chiller direct error messages

Setup parameter MS03 is the maximum of telephone numbers where the SMS are sent.
Setup parameters MS04..MS06 are the telephone numbers where the SMS are sent.
GSM and
Chiller unit Telephone net
maintenance
Chiller
controller IS232 Modem Alarm
SB6 GSM messages
Mobile
RS232
cable

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.2.3 More Chillers Error Messages through gateway

Setup parameter MS03 is the maximum of telephone numbers where the SMS are sent.
Setup parameters MS04..MS06 are the telephone numbers where the SMS are sent.
Site
GSM and
Chiller unit #1 Telephone net
maintenance
Chiller
controller IS485 Alarm
SB2 messages
Mobile
Modem
GSM
RS232
Chiller unit #2
GATEWAY
Chiller
controller IS485 Alarm
SB2 messages
RS485
cable
Chiller unit #8
Chiller
controller IS485
SB2

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
6.2.4 SMS protocol details

SMS protocol is used to interface the plant and a web server using SMS.

 SMS protocol is enabled when MS02=1,2:
o If MS02=1 then the communication is made through a modem connected directly to S10
board (see par. 6.2.2);
o If MS02=2 then the communication is made through the gateway connected to S10
board (see par. 6.2.3).
 SMS protocol allows to exchange following information:
o Alarms notification;
o Setup parameters change notification;
o Setup parameters reading/writing;
o Status of Machine and Compressors/Circuit.
 Following information are present in the SMS messages with the main parameters of
machine:
Machine Cn (n=1..8)
Sw version Compressor index
Global Machine status Detailed Compr. status
[OFF / ON / ALARM / LOCKED] (see par.5.6.1.18.1)
String#1 Chiller Setpoint Actual Capacity
[°F / °C] [%]
String#2 LWT Demand Capacity
[°F / °C] [%]
String#3 RWT SP
[°F / °C] [PSI / BAR]
String#4 Cooling DP
[%] [PSI / BAR]
String#5 Free Cooling status Evaporator Liquid Level
[OFF / F-OFF / ON / F-ON / NA] (if ME02=3,6 or MH24=3,6)
[%]
DT (if ME02<>3,6 and MH24<>3,6)
[°F / °C]
String#6 Free Cooling Valve opening Superheat
[% / NA] [°F / °C]
String#7 Free Cooling Fan Speed EEV opening
[% / NA] [%]
String#8 Number of Pumps On Fan Speed
[0 / 1 / 2] [%]
Other information about SMS protocol are on the following Project Engineering document:
Sp608zam.doc

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
7. PROGRAMMING AND SOFTWARE UPDATE
7.1 PROGRAMMING BY HARDWARE KEY

7.1.1 Programming Master Board By Hkey
The hardware key (HKEY) is an external device which can store BOARD program and setup in
order to transfer program and setup from a BOARD to another one; this operation is possible in
two ways:
 storing in the HKEY the program and all the setup parameters from the BOARD;
 programming the BOARD from a HKEY;
The hardware key may be used to update software and to program several boards in a short time.
In order to do that, it is necessary to store the new software version on the hardware key and then
to program the controllers.
To enter the HW KEY menu, the procedure below has to be followed:
1. Insert the HKEY in the connector called SPI (between the PRG and SLAVE connectors);
2. Press the MENU key;
3. Scroll the menus by the UP/DOWN keys until “HW KEY PROGRAMMING” is displayed and
then press SET key;
4. Enter the required password which is the same of the MANUFACTURER SETUP menu;
5. The next screen will be displayed:
HW KEY PROGRAMMING
Please select the
Board number
1
Select the Board number 1 (master board) by the UP/DOWN keys and then press SET key;
HW KEY PROGRAMMING#1
Sw BOARD=GEODTUxx.xx
Sw HKEY =GEODTUyy.yy
This screen gives information about the software versions stored into the devices:
 The second line displays the software version currently installed on the BOARD;
 The third line displays the software version stored into the HKEY.
If an error occurs during HKEY programming (program code), on the third line will be displayed
the string “ERROR PRG”.
Sw HKEY =ERROR PRG

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
If the HKEY has no software stored in it, the next screen will be displayed and only the next
four pages will be accessible.
HKEY is NEW
If no HKEY is connected, the next screen will be displayed and it will be impossible to enter in
the next pages.
No Comm with HKEY
If the HKEY is not compatible, the next screen will be displayed and only the next four pages
will be accessible.
HKEY data not comp.
7. Press the UP ARROW key and the next screen will be displayed.
Setup HK=GEODTUxx.xx
Chk Setup HK= nnnn
Chk Setup MC= mmmm
This screen gives information about the checksum of setup:

 The second line displays the software version correlated to setup parameters stored in
HKEY.
 The third line displays the checksum of setup parameters Manufacturer and Setup I/O
stored in HKEY.
 The fourth line displays the checksum of setup parameters Manufacturer and Setup I/O
stored in BOARD.
If an error occurs during HKEY programming (setup parameter), on the second line will be
displayed the string “ERROR PRG”.
Setup HK=ERROR PRG
Chk Setup HK= nnnn
Chk Setup MC= mmmm

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
If the HKEY has no software stored in it, the next screen will be displayed and only the next
three pages will be accessible.
HKEY is NEW
Chk Setup MC= mmmm
If the HKEY is not compatible, the next screen will be displayed and only the next three pages
will be accessible.
HKEY data not comp.
Chk Setup MC= mmmm
From BOARD to HKEY
Only Setup Parameter
NO
To store all the setup parameters into the HKEY it is necessary to set “YES”.
When the fourth line shows “NO” again, it will mean the data transfer is finished. The data
transfer can take up to 15 seconds.
From BOARD to HKEY
Only Program Code
NO
To store only the code of the program into the HKEY it is necessary to set “YES”.
When the fourth line is again “NO”, it will mean that the data transfer is finished. The data
From BOARD to HKEY
Setup + Program Code
NO
To store all the setup parameters and the program into the HKEY it is necessary to set “YES”.
When the fourth line is again “NO”, it will mean that the data transfer is finished. The data

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
From HKEY to BOARD!!
Only Setup Parameter
NO
To store only the setup parameters into the BOARD by the HKEY it is necessary to set “YES”.
The data transfer can take up to 15 seconds.
Only Program Code
NO
To store only the code of the program into the BOARD by the HKEY it is necessary to set
“YES”. At the end of the data transfer the microcontroller will reset itself automatically. The data
Setup + Program Code
NO
To store all the setup parameters and the program code into the BOARD by the HKEY it is
necessary to set “YES”. At the end of the data transfer the microcontroller will reset itself
automatically. The data transfer can take up to 45 seconds.
REMARK
During the data transfer the HKEY must be inserted and the board must be powered (a loss of
power supply during programming of BOARD may need standard programming from PC).
If during the data transfer from board to HKEY (setup parameter / program code) or from HKEY to
board (only setup parameter) an error occurs, on the screen will be displayed automatically the first
page.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
7.1.2 Programming Slave Boards By Hkey

It is possible to update the software in slave boards by HKEY, working on the HW KEY menu of
master board. Following procedure is required.
1. Insert the HKEY in the connector called SPI of the slave board to programming;
2. Press the MENU key;
3. Scroll the menus by the UP/DOWN keys until “HW KEY PROGRAMMING” is displayed and
then press SET key;
4. Enter the required password which is the same of the MANUFACTURER SETUP menu;
HW KEY PROGRAMMING
Please select the
Board number
1
Select the number of slave Board to programming (i.e. 2,3,4) by the UP/DOWN keys and then
press SET key;
6. The next screen will be displayed.
HW KEY PROGRAMMING#n
Sw HKEY =GEODTUyy.yy
This screen gives information about the software versions stored into selected slave board:
 On the first line #n is number of the selected board;
 The second line displays the software version currently installed on the slave board;
 The third line displays the software version stored into the HKEY installed on the slave
board.
If an error occurs during HKEY programming (program code), on the third line will be displayed
the string “ERROR PRG”.
Sw HKEY =ERROR PRG
If the HKEY has no software stored in it, the next screen will be displayed and it will be
impossible to enter in the next page.
HKEY is NEW

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
If no HKEY is connected, the next screen will be displayed and it will be impossible to enter in
the next page.
No Comm with HKEY
If the HKEY is not compatible, the next screen will be displayed and it will be impossible to enter
in the next page.
HKEY data not comp.
Only Program Code
NO
To store only the code of the program into the BOARD by the HKEY it is necessary to set
“YES”. At the end of the data transfer the microcontroller will reset itself automatically. The data
8. Repeat the step 1…7 for all the Slave boards used.
9. When all the Slave boards are programmed is raccomanded to restart the machine.
NOTES
A) To update the sw using this modality, following conditions should be satisfied:
- to select board number #2 (slave#1) on the first HKEY screen, the numbers of compressors
selected must be more than 2 (MC01>2);
- slave board to programming, should be connected via serial line to master board;
- the HKEY already programmed with desired sw, must be insterted on the board that you
want programming (i.e. if you want updating the sw on board#3, then first insert the HKEY
on the board#3 and then, on the HKEY menu, select board number #3);
- after selecting the board number on HKEY menu and confirm with <SET> key, on the next
screen, you can see the vers. sw on BOARD and HKEY (if correctly inserted).
B) It’s raccomanded first update the sw on the slave boards (if present) and finally update the sw
on the master board.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
7.2 PROGRAMMING BY PC
Refer to the document SHS10 for details about programming by PC.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
8. TESTING FEATURES
Some testing features are embedded in the software in order to allow a manual control of the
board hardware.
To access the test mode and to change the kind of test it is used the dip switches (Ref. S1) on the
NG3 board.
8.1 HARDWARE TEST MODE

To enter hardware test mode:
 switch board off
 set dip switch address to 7 (dip switch 1..3 ON; dip switch 4 OFF)
 switch board on
The board will act as a master with address #1, and the user interface is active to switch from one
test mode to the other.
There are 4 different hardware tests mode, and it is possible choose the test mode with <ON OFF>
key:
1) RELAY ROTATION
 all relay will switch on and off with 1 second delay one after the other;
 analog output will swing from 0 to 10 V one after the other;
2) ALL RELAY ON
 all digital output relay are energized;
 analog output are at 10 V
3) INPUT -> OUTPUT
 digital input are copied on relay output (e.g. if A1 input is energized then Relay 1
contact O1C1 will be closed and so on);
4) ANALOG INPUT
 The screen shows the values of Analog Input channels;
 The values are shown in the following order:
o second row: S1, D1, O1, ST1
o third row: S2, D2, O2, ST2
o fourth row: TAE, RH, TOUT, TIN
5) RTC TEST
 The screen shows the actual parameters of Real Time Clock (RTC)
6) HW KEY TEST
 The screen displays the information about the communication with HKEY external
module
7) USER TEST
 All led are switched on, display shows “8.8.8.” and every pixel of LCD display is black;
8) USER SPECIAL CHARACTERS VISUALIZATION – FIRST PAGE
 The special characters are shown in the following order:
o second row: codes 0xA0 … 0xAF
o third row: codes 0xB0 … 0xBF
o fourth row: codes 0xC0 … 0xCF
9) USER SPECIAL CHARACTERS VISUALIZATION – SECOND PAGE
 The special characters are shown in the following order:
o second row: codes 0xD0 … 0xDF
o third row: codes 0xE0 … 0xEF
o fourth row: codes 0xF0 … 0xFF
10) MODEM GSM TEST
 The screen displays some information about the communication Modem GSM:
o The communication with modem GSM is enabled if MS02=1;

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
o Index is the number of SIM location where read/delete a message;

o Increase/decrease Index by <UP>/<DOWN> keys.
o To send the SMS test message at the first Call Number setup parameter, press
<SET> key;
o To read the SMS at the Index position of SIM, press <MENU> key;
o To delete the SMS at the Index position of SIM, press <ESC> key;
o Return is the code returned by the functions send_sms, read_sms, delete_sms.
o On the fourth row of the display are showed the first 20 characters of the modem
GSM response.
To exit the test mode:

 Switch board off;
 reset dip switch address according to chapter 0
 switch board on
8.2 SOFTWARE TEST MODE

To enter software test mode:

 set dip switch address to 15 (all dip switch ON) or to 0 (all dip switch OFF)
 switch board on
the board will act as a master with address #1, and the user interface is active, but the unit can not
be switched on.
During software test mode all Eeprom parameter can be changed. The analog input values are
shown with no final calibration, so temperatures are measured in ohm (like output of PTC probe)
and pressures are measured in 0-100% from the 4÷20mA of the input range.
To exit the test mode:

 reset dip switch address according to chapter 4.1.
 switch board on

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
9. DEBUGGING FEATURES
9.1 SMS protocol

If SMS protocol is enabled (MS02=1) then it is possible to activate a debug screen trying to access
in “USER SETUP” by password 213; the insertion of this password does not allow any access in
USER SETUP but adds a new screen on the main screens.
Following informations are showed:
AAA BBB CCC

DDD EEE FFF
GGG HHH III
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YY
AAA: Number of alarm notifications requests;

BBB: Number of requests from SMS protocol;
CCC: Number of alarm notifications theoretically sends;
DDD: Number of responses to SMS protocol theoretically sends;
EEE: Number of errors after that telephone number send to modem;
FFF: Number of responses not received after that telephone number send to modem;
GGG: Number of SMS correctly sends;
HHH: Number of SMS not correctly sends;
III: Not used
XXX: IMSI code (15 characters string) read on the SIM;
Note1: if xxxxxxxxxxxxxx string is showed then any response from the modem or SIM not
insert on the modem)
YY: Gsm signal level
Note2: if GSM signal level = -1 then any response from modem (i.e. modem not connected
/ without power supply
Note3: if GSM signal level = -2 then the response from modem is not correct (i.e. modem
not compatible with software or serial errors).
The numbers AAA….III are stored in RAM and then they values are lose when machine shut-down
is made.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
10. REVISION HISTORY

 First issue 23.02.10 MB
 Rev. 0 of 22.09.10 MB – GEODTU00.00
First version related to sw prototype GEODTU00.00.
NOTE: all the parts grey highlighted are the changes respect to sw GEOTUR32.00 on old SB2
platform.
 Rev. 1 of 29.10.10 MB – GEODTU01.xx
Update description of SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE: added the management of until nine I/O
Expansion boards.
Added the management of dynamically mapping of some I/O channels:
- Update description of I/O CHANNELS;
- Added description of BOARDS SUMMARY;
- Added description of I/O Channels Mapping setup.
Update description of I/O Setup: added a table that resume all the defined subgroups.
Changed the conditions to enable the following functions:
- Emergency Mode;
- UNITS LEAD LAG;
- Free Cooling standard;
- Free Cooling with Dry Cooler;
- Free Cooling with Liquid Pumps (LPA);
- EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER management;
- EVAP SYSTEM control;
- Forcing Pumps On for Anti-freeze Limitation;
- External Pump Controlled By Inverter;
- Ambient Temperature Set Point Correction;
- Analog Input Set Point Correction;
- Upper demand limit on temperature control;
- SUCTION HEATER control;
- EQUALIZATION SOLENOIDS control;
- PULSED HOT GAS BYPASS SOLENOIDS;
- ECONOMIZER AND LIQUID INJECTION Control;
- TWO BARRELS management;
- Evaporator Water Pressure;
- FLUID SOLENOID control.
- PUMPS control.
Added setup parameter: MR23.
Update description of EVAP SYSTEM control and Evap System Sprayer control: erased the
condition for control deactivated related to I/O Expansion Boards communication error (now
this actions must be configured with the related parameters E0x10..E0x12 (x=1..10) I/O
Expansions Board .
Update description of Expansion Boards Serial Communication alarm: now the alarm is
replicated for nine I/O Expansion Boards.
Update description of EEV Board Serial communication alarm: added some notes when the
board is configured as I/O Expansion Board.
Update description of Alarms screens: added the alarm codes.
Update description of MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY: added the description of some
alarms.
Added description of Hide not used setup parameters.
 Rev. 2 of 26.11.10 MB – GEODTU01.xx
Update description of Data Transfer screen: added a new condition when this screen is
showed.
Update description of UNITS LEAD LAG: revised the control logic description.
Update description of Heat Pump Mode: now some functions are available also when Heat

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Pump is enebled.
Update description of Heat Recovery – Heating Priority and Heat Recovery – Cooling
Priority: now some functions are available also when Heat Recovery is enebled.
Update description of MODBUS COMMUNICATION: update description of datapoint with
pems-address 71 in Read coil status (0x01).
 Rev. 3 of 28.01.11 MB – GEODTU02
Update description of setup parameter MR01: added the management of R1234ze gas.
Update description of Liquid Injection logic: added the descriptions related to R1234ze gas.
 Rev. 4 of 05.04.11 MB – GEODTU03
Update description of ANALOG INPUT: added new channels used in SPLIT Units.
Update description of ANALOG OUTPUT: added new channels for Load Balance control and
Internal Pumps controlled by Inverter.
Update description of DIGITAL OUTPUT: added new channels for Load Balance control.
Update description of Turbocor connection:
- added new channel STtcor ;
- added new parameter for Turbocor “Fast Start” mode activaction.
Update description of Machine starting: changed wait time from 85 to 15 seconds.
Update description of COP evaluation: function available only when SPLIT Units are disabled.
Added description of SPLIT UNIT.
Added description of Internal Pump Controlled By Inverter.
Added description of LOAD BALANCE control.
Added description of TURBOCOR FAST START mode.
Added description of Fan Speed Optimization.
Added description of EXTC Probe alarm.
Added description of SCT Probe alarm.
Update description of TAE Probe alarm.
Added description of EXT_DEM Probe alarm.
Added setup parameters: MT34..MT37, MC46..MC53, MD20..MD26, MP07..MP15.
Added I/O mapping parameters: AI28..AI31, AO07..AO09, DO44, DO45.
Changed minimum value of MM06 (autorestart time) from 180 to 1 seconds.
Changed maximum value of MS01 (host address) from 48 to 240.
Changed description and logic related to setup parameters: ME01, MF01.
Update description of Main screen.
Update description of Second screen.
Update description of Pumps screen.
Update description of First Compressors screens: added a new note when Fan speed/status
start to blink.
Added description of Third Compressors screens.
Update description of Hide not used setup parameters.
Update description of MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY:
- added new screens description;
- update some description in Russian language.
Update description of HARDWARE TEST MODE: added new pages with the visualization of
special characters showed in cirillic user interface.
 Rev. 5 of 07.04.11 MB – GEODTU03.01 (or later subversion)
Update description of TURBOCOR FAST START mode.
Update description of Turbocor Faults and Turbocor Fault Status alarm: added a new
bypass condition when Turbocor Fast Start mode is enabled.
Update description of setup parameter MC53.
 Rev. 6 of 12.12.11 MB – GEODTU04
Update description of ANALOG INPUT.
Update description of DIGITAL OUTPUT: added new digital output (FC_STS) to replicate the
free cooling status.
Update description of FREE COOLING control: added management of new digital output
(FC_STS) to replicate the free cooling status.
Added description of EEV Algorithm selection in Heating mode.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Update description of EEV Algorithm selection: added new option that allows to select a
different algorithm when Heating mode is activated.
Update description of FLOODED EVAPORATOR management.
Update description of EEV In Oscillation Warning.
Update description of SMS protocol details.
Added setup parameters: MH24, DO46.
 Rev. 7 of 26.01.12 MB – GEODTU05
Update description of Evaporators Water Flow Rate, Heat Pump Mode and Heat Recovery
Mode: when the machine working in heating mode then the nominal flow rate of evaporatos is
specified by setup parameter MH25.
Added setup parameter MH25.
Update description of High Evaporators Drop alarm and Low Evaporators Drop : now the
alarms are checked also when less then 3 compreesors are used (i.e. MC01=1,2).
 Rev. 8 of 01.02.12 MB – GEODTU06
Update description of DIGITAL INPUT: added ULIM_EN channel.
Update description of Upper demand limit on temperature control: added new option that
allows to enable the demand limit only when a digital input is activated.
Added setup parameters: MT38, DI30.
Changed description of setup parameter: MT04.
Update description of MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY: changed description of setup
parameter MT04.
 Rev. 9 of 08.05.12 MB – GEODTU07
Changed figure in SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE.
Added references in RELATED DOCUMENTS.
Update description of ANALOG INPUT.
Update description of Turbocor connection: now the actual capacity (%) is read in Turbocor
via modbus and not more computed using the actual power (kW).
Update description of Standard Actuator: aligned with sw the description of control logic used
to decrease the capacity.
Update description of Parallel Actuator: this control logic can be used also when the cp are
not in parallel.
Added description of Hybrid Actuator.
Update description of Standard Actuator, Parallel Actuator, True Parallel Actuator: revised
the description considering that setup parameters related to compressors capacity
(MC09..MC12, MH15..MH18) are now in% instead of kW.
Update description of EEV “Like PID” based on Linear Control: changed some description
considering that now the parameters related to compressors capacity are in % instead of kW.
Added description of Fan Speed Optimization – Mode 2.
Update description of COP evaluation:
- the computation of Cooling Capacity is moved in new paragraph COOLING CAPACITY
evaluation;
- the computation of Unit Power Consumption is moved in new paragraph UNIT POWER
CONSUMPTION evaluation.
Added description of PROBES REDUNDANCY management.
Update description of LWT Probe alarm, RWT Probe alarm, ST Probe alarm: added a note
that explain when the compressors are halted if PROBES REDUNDANCY management is
enebaled.
Added description of LWT2 Probe alarm.
Added description of RWT2 Probe alarm.
Added description of ST2 Probe alarm.
Added description of WARNINGS INDICATION BY DIGITAL OUTPUT.
Added description of High Evaporators Drop warning.
Added description of Low Evaporators Drop warning.
Added description of Condenser Water Pressures.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Added description of Condenser Water Flow Rate.

Added description of High Condenser Drop alarm.
Added description of Low Condenser Drop alarm.
Added description of High Condenser Drop warning.
Added description of Low Condenser Drop warning.
Added description of Second ELL probe in first circuit.
Added description of EEV “Like PID” based on Condenser Liquid Level.
Update description of EEV “Like PID” based on Evaporator Liquid Level.
Update description of EEV Algorithm selection in Heating mode.
Update description of Turbocor Faults: added some notes in “Lock Out Fault”.
Added description of Condenser screen.
Update description of Second Compressors screens: added visualization of max compressor
speed.
Update description of First Compressors screens: added a new note when Fan speed/status
start to blink.
Update description of Alarms screens: added description of some new alarms.
- added description of some new alarms;
- added description of a new screen.
Added paragraph ETH board connections.
Update description of Hw Key menu: added a note when this menu is not available.
Update description of setup parameters related to compressors capacity (MC09..MC12,
MH15..MH18): now the parameters are in % instead of kW.
Added setup parameters: MM25, MM26, MC54..MC58, MD27..MD33, ME49, MN06..MN10,
MH26, MS12, DO47, AI32..AI35, IM42..IM49, T39, T40.
Changed description of setup parameters: MC02, ME02, MH24, MV02.
Upadate description of setup parameter MR01: changed description of gas “R1234ze” in “HFO
1234 ZE”.
Update description of MODBUS COMMUNICATION:
- on the Read Input Registers (0x04) added Inlet Condenser Temp (ICT) and Outlet
Condenser Temp (OCT);
- on the Read holding registers (0x03) and Write single register (0x06) added PUMP1 and
PUMP2 timer counters in days.
 Rev. 10 of 02.07.12 MB – GEODTU08
Update description of setup parameter MM02: added new brand names.
 Rev. 11 of 31.07.12 MB – GEODTU09
Update description of PUMPS control: added new option that allows to try the pumps rotation
when some alarme are activated.
Added description of Fan speed limitation by time periods.
Update description of Flow Switch Alarm: added new note when MP01=7,8.
Update description of The evaporator water pressures are read by the channels IWPn and
OWPn (x=1,2): if a probe go to alarm condition then Evaporators Drop alarm is automatically
activated.
Low Evaporators Drop : added new note when MP01=7,8.
Changed description of WARNINGS INDICATION BY DIGITAL OUTPUT: now the function is
activated when it is active Forcing Compressors Off function instead of Antifreeze Limitation
function.
Revised all the parts of document related to MP01.
Update description of setup parameters: MP01.
Added setup parameters: MD34..MD59.
 Rev. 12 of 09.08.12 MB – GEODTU10
Update description of MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY: revised some description in
Russian language.
 Rev. 13 of 05.10.12 MB – GEODTU11

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13
Update description of ANALOG INPUT: added Noise Level channel.

Added description of Fan speed limitation by time periods and noise level sensor.
Added description of NL Probe alarm.
Added description of Noise Performance screen.
Update description of Machine starting: added setup parameter MC59 to specify the delay
time for compressors switch on after machine starting.
Update description of Compressor Switch on procedure and DISCHARGE PRESSURE
control: added setup parameter MC60 to specify the delay time for compressor starting after
fans starting.
Update description of setup parameter ME07: now the derivative contribute is effectively
implemented on the Eev controls activated with ME02=0,1,2,5.
Update description of setup parameters: MD34,MD41,MD47,MD53,MD59.
Added setup parameters: MC59, MC60, MD60..MD60, IM50..IM52, AI36.
 Rev. 14 of 04.02.13 MB – GEODTU12
Update description of ANALOG INPUT:
- added Liquid Level Transducer channel (LLT);
- added Subcooled Liquid Temp. channels (SLT1, SLT2).
Update description of DIGITAL OUTPUT:
- added High RWT Warning indication (HI_RWT_WARN).
Update description of High RWT Limitation and ACTUATOR details: added new setup
parameter MC61 to specify the comporessor startup capacity when “High RWT Limitation”
function is activated.
Revised all the parts of document where MC11 is present.
Update description of PROBES REDUNDANCY management: added new option to enable
the redundancy only on probe LWT and RWT (not on ST).
Update description of DISCHARGE PRESSURE control:
- added a note on the value of used setpoint;
- added new parameter MD65 to specify the min voltage % for 0% fan speed.
Added description of Dynamic setpoint on DP control.
Added description of Liquid Level Transducer.
Added description of SUBCOOLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE monitoring.
Added description of LLT Probe alarm.
Added description of High RWT warning.
Added description of SLT Probe alarm.
Added description of Third screen.
Update descfripotion of First Compressors screens: revised some notes.
Update description of Third Compressors screens: added visualization of Subcooled Liquid
Temp.
Added descriotion of CUSTOM#1 screens.
Added setup parameters: MM27, MT39, MT40, MC61, MC62, MR24, MD65, IM53..IM55, I109,
I209, I309, I409, I509, I609, DO48, AI37..AI39.
Update description of setup parameter: MM02, MM25.
Changed maximum value of setup parameters: IM46, IM49.
Update description of MODBUS COMMUNICATION:
- modbus datapoints description moved in external document TB001GEO;
- update description of ModBus-Lon interfacing;
- update description of With one LON-Gateway it is possible to manage:
- 2 different units with 6 cp using a gateway WAGO
- 3 different units with 6 cp using a gateway PROTONODE-LER
- ModBus-Profibus interfacing.

Ref: SP820GEO
(GEODTU16_00)
Rev. 19 of 18.10.13

 Rev. 15 of 07.03.13 MB – GEODTU13
Added management of “Auxiliary Pressure Transducer (APT)”:
- update description of ANALOG INPUT;
- added description of Auxiliary Pressure Transducer;
- added description of APT Probe alarm;
- update description of Third screen;
- update description of CUSTOM#1 screens;
- added setup parameters: MM28, IM56..IM58, AI40.
Added management of “Second max voltage for 100% fan speed”:
- update description of DIGITAL INPUT: added digital input MAX2_FAN;
- update description of DISCHARGE PRESSURE control;
- added setup parameters: MD66, DI31.
- update description of some screens.
 Rev. 16 of 10.04.13 MB – GEODTU13.01 (or later)
Update description of Dynamic setpoint on DP control: corrected the formula for the
computation of dymanic setpoint.
 Rev. 17 of 18.06.13 MB – GEODTU14
Added new option to control the fans in manual mode:
- added description of FANS manual control;
- update description of First Compressors screens: added new note on the value of fan
speed;
- added setup parameter MD67.
 Rev. 18 of 01.08.13 MB – GEODTU15
Added management of Unit check:
- added description of UNIT CHECK;
- added description of Unit Check menu;
- added description of UNIT CHECK alarms;
- added setup parameters: MM29..MM34, UC01..UC60.
Update description of Alarms screens: added description of new alarms.
Update description of MULTI LANGUAGE DATA DISPLAY: added description of new alarms.
 Rev. 19 of 18.10.13 MB – GEODTU16
Update description of Hybrid Actuator:
- revised the procedure to start a new compressor;
- revised the procedure to stop a compressor.
Update description of EEV extra opening:
- corrected description when ME02=3;
- the function is enabled also in Hybrid control with MC02=19;
- if ME50=YES then the function is activated also during the startup of the new compressor.
- added setup parameters: ME50.


Microsmart GEODTU Eng 7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Microsmart GEODTU Eng 7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEOCLIMA

CHILLER CONTROL WITH TURBOCOR COMPRESSORS

2. RELATED DOCUMENTS 10

3. HARDWARE 11

3.3.2.3.1 OB1KEN - DIGITAL INPUT 33

4. INSTALLING SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 37

5. SOFTWARE 44

All information contained in this document is property of Project

5.2.2.3.2 EEV control in Heat Pump mode 77

All information contained in this document is property of Project

5.2.12.2 COOLING CAPACITY evaluation 126

All information contained in this document is property of Project

5.4.3.7 EEV extra opening 172

All information contained in this document is property of Project

5.5.1.12.6 High Condenser Drop warning 188

All information contained in this document is property of Project

5.5.4 AUTO RESET OF SOME ALARMS 201

All information contained in this document is property of Project

5.8.1.2 CUSTOM#1 screens 302

6. MONITORING SYSTEMS 310

7. PROGRAMMING AND SOFTWARE UPDATE 319

8. TESTING FEATURES 326

9. DEBUGGING FEATURES 328

10. REVISION HISTORY 329

All information contained in this document is property of Project

Following chiller configurations are managed:

Yellow highlighted To be defined /confirmed.

All information contained in this document is property of Project

1.1 CHANGES FROM MICROSMART II

All information contained in this document is property of Project

The hardware will have the following characteristic:

3.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

All information contained in this document is property of Project

Remote BACnet Project

Power Line Analyzer

All information contained in this document is property of Project

3.2 BOARD DESCRIPTION

All information contained in this document is property of Project

All information contained in this document is property of Project

3.2.2 User Interface Boards

All information contained in this document is property of Project

All information contained in this document is property of Project

3.3.1.1 DIGITAL INPUT

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

3.3.1.2 DIGITAL OUTPUT

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

3.3.1.3 ANALOG INPUT

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL

All information contained in this document is property of Project

LOGIC CHANNEL PHISICAL CHANNEL